HomeMy WebLinkAbout4.401 Original Contract
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
\
H_~ ~ <I. </0 J
ORIGINAL
#1
BID AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIU1"l')
For tbe Reviti{izatiol1 of
THE PORT ANGELES CARNEGIE-LffiRARY
MAY 2.002.
prepareo ~
OLYMPIC DESIGN WORKS} INC. PS
STUART J. BONNEY, AlA
9S HEATIll!R PARK R.OAD} POR.T ANGELES} W A 9836.2 phone: 1360)417-.2m fax: 1360)417-.2888
ESCROW AGREEMENT for RETAINED PERCENTAGE
Carnegie Library Revitalization, Project No. 97-08
Escrow No. /5:'3 Sq I r;, 595/ if-
City of Port Angeles Contract No. # C;?~n~
Com pletion Date
TO Hoch Construcllon, Inc
4201 Tumwater Truck Route
Port Angeles, WA 98363
THIS ESCROW AGREEMENT IS for the Investment of the retained
percentage of the above contract, in accordance with chapter 60 28
of the Revised Code of Washington It IS limited to FDIC Insured
Washington State Chartered Banks who are covered by the State of
Washington Public Deposit Protection Act
The undersigned, HOCH CONSTRUCTION, INC , (as "Contractor"),
has directed the CITY OF PORT ANGELES (as "Clty"), to deliver to
you ItS warrants which shall be payable to you and/or the contractor
The warrants are to be held and disposed of by you In accordance
With the follOWing instruction
INSTRUCTIONS
Upon delivery the warrants shall be endorsed by you and
forwarded to the City for collecllon You shall use the monies
to purchase Investments selected by the Contractor and
approved by the City You may follow the last wntten dlrecllon
received by you from the Contractor, for each purchase,
provided the dlrecllon otherwise conforms With this agreement.
Acceptable Investments are
A Bills, certificates, notes or bonds of the United States,
B Other obligations of the United States or ItS agenCies,
C Obligations of any corpora lion wholly owned by the
Government of the Umted States,
D. Indebtedness of the Federal National Mortgage
Association,
E Time deposits in commercial banks,
F Other Investments, except stocks, selected by the
Contractor, subject to express prior wntten consent of the
City
2
The investments shall be In a form which allows you alone to
reconvert them Into money If you are required to do so by the
City
3
The Investments must mature on or prior to the date set for
the completion of the contract, including extension there of or
thirty (30) days follOWing the final acceptance of the work
4.
When Interest on the Investments accrues and IS paid, you
shall collect the Interest and forward It to the Contractor unless
otherwise directed by the Contractor
5
You are not authonzed to deliver to the Contractor all or any
part of the Investments held by you pursuant to thiS agreement
(or any moneys denved from the sale of such Investments, or
the negotIation of the City'S warrants) except In accordance
With the wntten instructions from the City Compliance With
such instructions shall relieve you of any further liability related
thereto
6 In the event the City orders you, In wntlng, to reconvert the
Investments and return all monies, you shall do so Within thirty
(30) days of receipt of the order
7. The Contractor agrees to compensate you for your servIces In
accordance With your current published schedule of applicable
escrow fees. Payment of all fees shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor and shall not be deducted from
any monies placed With you pursuant to thiS agreement until
and unless the City directs the release to the Contractor of the
Investments and momes held hereunder, whereupon you shall
be enlltled to reimburse yourself from such monies for the
entire amount of your fee
N \PROJECTS\97-080L\Escrow_agreement.wpd
You shall be entitled to reasonable compensation for
extraordinary services from the Contractor and reimbursement
from the Contractor for all costs and expenses, including
attorney fees In the event you are made a party to any
IItlgallon With respect to the monies held by you hereunder; the
conditions of thiS Escrow are not promptly fulfilled, you are
required to render any service not provided for In these
instructions, or there IS any assignment of the Interest of thiS
Escrow or any modifications hereof
8
ThiS agreement shall not be binding unlll signed by both
parties and accepted by you
9
ThiS document contains the entire agreement between you,
the Contractor, and the City, With respect to thiS Escrow, and
you are not a party to, nor bound by any Instrument or
agreement other than thiS You shall not be required to take
notice of any default or any other matter, nor be bound by nor
required to give notice or demand, nor required to take any
acllon whatever except as herein expressly proVided You
shall not be liable for any loss or damage not caused by your
own negligence or Willful misconduct
CONTRACTOR 1 {.
::'ffil ~; 9~~:/)0f15(7oJJf '/I'- 'i &f/-
Title ~ 1~ C-r, .pc/rJ
Address Y,;QO / 1/;.11./' ~ If..}
P(')r-l to-x.$-l 01/) (1 'r'" 9A--r3~3
DATE n8-!O-:'5(eJ ~
CITY OF PORT ANGEL2:ES
By ~'-. J- ~
\ -
Title Co ~"'1 c:;r.......&-,\",)~
DATE
tfIl"d/ "j O~
, I
THE ABOVE ESCROW AGREEMENT RECEIVED AND
ACCEPTED on the day of
20_
BANK
{" 2~ S0J lr ~ C,
Title 8 r'\ClfJ (', I {3o 1
By
~fJ11or
,
Address'
/JLj
e.
"1M3
7~ r:Sl!
'2
DISTRIBUTION
City Clerk /Flnanclallnslltullo /Contractor/Flle Copy
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
NOTICE OF AWARD
August 1, 2002
TO: Mr. Rick Hoch
Hoch Construction, Inc.
4201 Tumwater Truck Route
Port Angeles, W A 98363
PROJECT Description: Carnegie Library Revitalization, Project No. 97-08
The Owner has considered the bid submitted by you for the above described work In response to its
Advertisement for Bids dated July 2ND, 2002
You are hereby notified that your bid has been accepted for Items in the amount of $1,105,953.32.
The Initial notice to proceed Will be for the base bid only. Bid alternates 1 through 7 will be delayed until
sufficient funding has been secured for each
You are required, as stated In the Information for Bidders, to execute the contract and furnish the required
Contractor's Performance and Payment Bond and certificates of Insurance within ten (10) calendar days from the
date of this notice to you.
If you fall to execute said contract and to furnish said bonds within ten (10) days from the date of this
Notice, said Owner Will be entitled to consider all you rights arising out of the Owner's acceptance of your bid as
abandoned and as a forfeiture of your bid bond. The Owner Will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted
bylaw.
You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this Notice of Award to the Owner
Dated thiS 1 ST day of August, 2002.
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
By ./J '"' L..... ~ ~
\
Title ~ ~""\-' Ei"-'--'~~~
ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE
v'T'-
Receipt of the above NotIce of Award is hereby aCknowled~ 7Y~-L 20-'12
SIGNATURE '"
Print Na~e ~j(~'{--iI9~"
Tltle.~;;:: =-~~Pjj~i4~: ~
-~
Please return original to the City of Port Angeles Public Works & Utilities Department.
cC' City Clerk
N \PROJECTS\97-080L\Award wpd
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~~~:w.....'-1~.ilJ>..z~ll':Il.i:~~J"~~~~t.Ez1a~wZ'.;$.~.l~t;'
... , ~
~ .'1;-> ; t.. ~ . \
r~~t~~~~t\~~~a'llHJ-<...:~~1"t;: t~ ~,,~' ~..
~~;:;:'}i I,'
~;.,o.. ~..
Project Manual for
Revitilization of The Port
Angeles Carnegie Library
Project No. 97-08
Part I
Part II
Part III
A
A
A.
Part IV
A
Bidding Requirements
Contract Forms
Geneml Condmons and
Division 01 Specifications
Division 02-16 Specifications
The above mentioned Project Manual has been reviewed and
approved for adv rtis ment. Such review includes all plans,
specifications, a p r . s associated with the projec~
Prepared by: , ' Y Checked by: ~ ~
Approved bY:~ ... 1-. ~~.... Approved bY'-C '/J /~
\ City Attbrney
MAY 2002
Prepared by:
Olympic Design Works, Inc. PS
For:
City of Port Angeles
Department of Public Works
321 E. Fifth & P.O. Box 1150
Port Angeles, WA 98362
p/ .'. .
." ~, .'0
:~ ~{ ::
I It . ~
[~~ :~1:::::': ~..
~ ~~~~1~ J .
j I ,~ '
r. . fl~ "
,',;\-- . .
t~ .:.. ~~
~:",~... . >
't~~;~)~
-- -
~~1..L~1: ~.. ~:
1...1""
--;.j)'?
tli~~~~ ,i,
;;-...f
_~'~~fjJ
g"~"R"
4l~t~
<cf..t.c.~.t
~:.
~~}.ffi:. ~.:;'i
!ii
~fi~
~ r.,t"
~~""ll~~
~~:n'j
t ~ ..
f~~~2:fJ::~. ~
i=':7 '-!rl
I -,
'"
,. ,'-It
~~"'l'> I,H.
~~f;;'Y
~~:i~<,
(~ 1",
f1. .r,:;
~l d1lli:":t.;"~:1
~~ ~~
fl >?:~
~~ ~~1 ,
~:~,k~:' i.~
/.-......:;......
,ff,'~.
t~r ~.l
t"'! I'"
~, ,-;,j
'''4j;'' " j
~ '":."'IT.~~':';""
r"'~:J~
f\
.~.~
--..~.; ~
'J'~'-""
> ,'"
,,~-i~
~~~;..
";0<
,,;
~~1\...il; ~:'.:~
r'-'"
2t:
\0'",<,-_'",. "
tr__~""...........
"~ ~'^
~ ~,:
t.v '.-,
1'~ ,,'~
f~ )"'~l
f.>:- /'~i
~~...-
.~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
p
PART I
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
, j
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REVITALIZATION OF THE PORT ANGELES CARNEGIE LIBRARY
PROJECT NO. 01001.CAR
PART I BIDDING REQUIREMENTS: Paqe No(s).
Table of Contents ....... .... ....................................................... ........... .......................... ......... 1-1
Advertisements for Bids.................................. ........... .................. ....................... ................. 1-2
Information for Bidders ..... ..... .......... ............................................ .................. .... ............. ..... 1-3
Bidder's Checklist................................................................................................................ 1-4
Non-Collusion Affidavit ........................................................................................................ 1-5
Bidder's Construction Experience.. ...... ... ................................ ......... .............. .... '" ....... ........ 1-6
List of Proposed Subcontractors... ....... .... ..... ..... ................. ....... ........ .... .... .......................... 1-7
Bid Form (3 pages)............................................................................................. ................ 1-8
Bid Bond............................................ ..................... ............... ............................. ................. 1-9
PART II CONTRACT FORMS SUBMITTED FOllOWING AWARD OF CONTRACT
Contract.......................................................................... ...................................... .............. 11-1
Performance and Payment Bond....................................................................... ................. 11-2
Certificate of Insurance [Sample only, Certified document supplied by Contractor]
P ART III
GENERAL CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 01 SPECIFICATION
A.
General Conditions for Construction
(32 pages)
B. Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Clallam County
C.
Division 01 Specification
(26 pages)
P ART IV
DIVISION 02 - DIVISION 16 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
1-1
P\N -407 -05[9/00]
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
The Revitalization of the Port Angeles Carnegie Library
97-08
City of Port Angeles
Sealed bids will be received by the Director of Public Works and Utilities at 321 East Fifth Street, P. O. Box 1150,
Port Angeles, Washington 98362, until 4:00 pm PDT, July 2nd, 2002 and not later, and will then and there be
opened and publicly read at that time in the City Hall Public Works Conference Room for the construction of the
Improvements.
A General Contract for the Revitalization of the Port Angeles Carnegie Library
The estimate for this project IS $850,000.00 to $950,000.00 (excluding bid alternates). The time of completion
(performance period) for this contract is 365 calendar days. To view Detailed Drawings and Specifications (Project
Manual), go to www bxwa com on the Internet, or contact the Builders Exchange of Washington at 425-258-1303.
Detailed Drawings and Specifications (Project Manual) may be obtained from the office of the City Engineer, City of
Port Angeles, upon payment of a non-refundable fee of $100.00. Informational copies of drawings and specifi-
cations are also on file for Inspection in the office of the City Engineer [Phone 360-417-4700]. Bidders shall be
qualified for the type of work proposed. A Bidder's Construction Experience form is included in the project manual.
Questions regarding the project should be directed to the office of the Architect, Olympic Design Works, Inc. PS,
360-417-2777. It is highly recommended that bidders attend a pre-bid walk-through at 10:00 am PDT, June 21st, at
the project site at Second and Lincoln Street (Highway 101) in Port Angeles, Washington.
All bids shall be submitted on the prescribed bid forms and in the manner as stated in this advertisement and In the
project manual and said bids shall be accompanied by a bid deposit in the form of cashier's check, postal money
order, or a surety bond to the City of Port Angeles in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid
If a surety bond IS used, said bond shall be issued by a surety authorized and registered to issue said bonds in the
State of Washington. The bond shall specify the surety's name, address, contact and phone number, and shall
Include a power of attorney appointing the signatory of the bond as the person authorized to execute It. Should the
successful bidder fall to enter Into such Contract and furnish satisfactory performance bond within the time stated In
the specifications, the bid deposit shall be forfeited to the City of Port Angeles. Faxed bids and/or surety bonds
will not be accepted.
MinOrity and women owned businesses shall be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this
inVitation, shall not be discriminated against on the grounds of gender, race, color, age, national origin or handicap
In consideration of an award of any contract or subcontract, and shall be actively solicited for participation In thiS
project by direct mailing of the invitation to bid to such businesses as have contacted the City for such notification.
Further, all bidders are directed to solicit and consider minority and women owned businesses as potential
subcontractors and material suppliers for this project.
The bid will be awarded to the lowest responsible bidder based upon bid amounts falling within available funds at
the tIme of bid opening. The basis for determining the lowest responsible bid shall be the base bid plus the sum of
those alternates whlcr, In numerical order, are within the city's available funds. Available funds will be announced
at the bid opening The City of Port Angeles reserves the right to accept bids and award the contract to responsible
bidders which are in the best interest of the City, to postpone the acceptance of bids and the award of the contract
for a period not to exceed sixty (60) days, or to reject any and all bids received and further advertise for bids. When
awarded a contract, the successful bidder shall promptly execute the contract and shall furnish a bond of faithful
performance of the contract in the full amount of the contract price.
Bids must be submitted In a sealed envelope with the outside clearly marked with the bid opening date and time,
the Project name as it appears in this advertisement and the name and address of the bidder. Bids shall be
addressed to the Director of Public Works and Utilities, City of Port Angeles, 321 East Fifth Street, P. O. Box 1150,
Port Angeles, Washington 98362.
Glenn A. Cutler, P.E.
Director of Public Works & Utilities
Publish: Peninsula Dally News [dates: 06-09-02 & 06-10-02], Daily Journal of Commerce [date: 06-10-02]
PW-407 _ 06 [9/00]
1-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
Sealed bids will be received by the City of Port Angeles (herein called "Owner"), at 321 East Fifth Street, Port Angeles,
Washington 98362, until the time and date as stated In the ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS or as amended through
addendum, and then at said office publicly opened and read aloud.
Each bid shall be received by the Owner in the manner set forth in the ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS. Each bid must be
submitted In a sealed envelope, so marked as to indicate Its contents without being opened, and addressed in
conformance with the instructions of the ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS.
Each bid shall be submitted on the required bid form contained in the project manual and shall be submitted attached to
the project manual with which it was originally bound. All blank spaces for bid prices must be filled in, in ink or
typewritten, and the bid form must be fully completed and executed when submitted. Only one copy of the bid form IS
required. BIDS MAY NOT BE READ if detached from the project manual with which they were originally bound, nor
shall any of the accompanying papers be detached therefrom, but the entire package (project manual wIthout the plans),
Including addendums, must be unbroken, in good order, and enclosed in a sealed envelope, endorsed with the name of
the work. Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid deposit in the form of a cashier's check, postal money order, or
surety bond to the City of Port Angeles for a sum of not less than 5% of the amount of the bid, and no bid Will be
considered unless accompanied by such bid deposit.
The Owner may waive any informalities or minor defects or reject any and all bids. Any bid may be withdrawn prior to
the scheduled time for the opening of bids or authorized postponement thereof. Any bid received after the time and date
specified shall not be considered. No bidder will be permitted to withdraw its bid between the clOSing time for receipt of
bids and the execution of contract, unless the award is delayed for a period exceeding sixty (60) calendar days. A
conditional or qualified bid will not be accepted. The bid award will be made to the lowest responsible bidder.
The work will begin within ten (10) calendar days after notice to proceed from the Director of Public Works & Utilities and
shall be completed within the time as stated in the Advertisement for bids.
The Owner may make such investigations as it deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the
work, and the bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request.
The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid, if the evidence submitted by, or Investigation of, such bidder fails to
satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the
work contemplated therein.
The party to whom the contract is awarded will be required to execute the contract and obtain the performance and
payment bond within ten (10) calendar days from the date the notice of award is delivered to the bidder. Such bond(s)
shall be on the form provided by the Owner, specify the name, contact phone, and address of the surety, and shall
include a power of attorney appointing the signatory of the bond(s) as the person authorized to execute it (them).
The notice of award Will be accompanied by the necessary contract and bond forms. In case of failure of the bidder to
execute the contract, the Owner may, at its option, consider the bidder in default, In which case the bid bond
accompanying the bid shall become the property of the Owner.
The Owner, within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of acceptable performance bond, payment bond, and contract
Signed by the party to whom the contract was awarded, will sign the contract and return to such party an executed
duplicate of the contract. Should the Owner not execute the contract within such period, the bidder may, by written
notice, withdraw its signed contract. Such notice of withdrawal will effective upon receipt of the notice by the Owner.
The notice to proceed Will be issued within ten (10) calendar days of the execution of the contract by the Owner. Should
there be reasons why the notice to proceed cannot be issued within such period, the time may be extended by mutual
agreement between the Owner and contractor. If the notice to proceed has not been issued within the ten (10) calendar
day period or within the period mutually agreed upon, the contractor may terminate the contract without further liability
on the part of either party. All applicable laws, ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having
jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the contract throughout.
PW-407-07A[01/01]
1-3
I
I
BIDDER'S CHECKLIST
I
1
Has a bid deposit In the form of a surety bond In the proper form, postal money order, or cashier's
check been enclosed with your bid?
I
I
2.
Is the amount of the bid deposit at least five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid?
3
Have the bid forms been properly signed?
4
Do the wntten amounts of the bid forms agree with the amounts shown in figures?
I
5.
Have you bid on all items?
6. Has the non-collusion affidavit been properly executed?
I
I
I
7. Have you shown your contractor's state license number on the bid form?
8. Have you listed all Subcontractors that you will use for the project?
9. Have you filled out the bidder's construction expenence form?
The following forms are to be executed after the Contract is awarded:
A. Contract - To be executed by the successful bidder and the City.
I
B
Performance bond - To be executed on the form provided by Owner, by the successful
bidder and its surety company. To include name, contact and phone number, and
address of surety and power of attorney of siQnatorv.
I
C.
Insurance certificate(s).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PW-407-07B(9/00]
1-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF WASHINGTON
COUNTY OF r;/a/ /u /JI(
)
)
)
The undersigned, being first duly sworn on oath, says that the bid herewith submitted is
a genuine and not a sham or collusive bid, or made in the interest or on behalf of any
person not therein named; and (s)he further says that the said bidder has not directly or
indirectly induced or solicited any bidder on the above work or supplies to put in a sham
bid, or any other person or corporation to refrain from bidding, and that said bidder has
not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to him/her self an advantage over any
other bidder or bidders.
UJ;:</~
Signature of Bidder/Contractor
Subscribed and sworn to before me this~~ day of l", 0-'-1
o -cJ
~ ---,~
ary R blic in a~~he
State 0 Washingto~
Residing at Pod N~
My Comm. Exp.: Odj/9/03
,20~
DO NOT REMOVE THIS PAGE FROM PROJECT MANUAL
1-5
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,s.
~ '
l"
."",-
1. Name 01 bIdder:
BIDDER'S CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE
Answer all questions and provide clear and comprehensive information.
2.
l/oc-7 eo/) s-l. hu-
RegIstration No. IIOc.i-t c.~ /~OI'J r / 0CO S3'ir.s-'? "ir / q/-/dS-?/POS-
Permanent main office address: $1'.90/ rrl/.A-k 1bI-,
"oO/" r- .4?u:)~/~ So b<.JCA- '7&'3<03
3 When organized: / 9~;)...
4. Where incorporated: /9 f>1
5 How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm name?
(;)0 Y-La.rS
6 * Contracts on hand. (Schedule these, showing gross amount of each contract and the approximate
anticipated dates of completion), contact name and phone number.
Ilf/cu:j-~_cL
7. * General character of work performed by your company:
8. * Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? ,<...J()
If so, where and why?
9. * Have you ever defaulted on a contract? ,LI 0
10. * List the more Important projects recently completed by your company, stating approximate cost for
each, the month and year completed, contact name and phone number.
IN-ICLLI..-uL
11 * List your major equipment available for this contract:
f) fI o...LLuL.
12 * Expenence of bidder in construction similar to this project in work and importance:
il II CLL0.... L
13. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that
may be required by the City? (1 S
* Add separate sheets If necessary.
The undersigned hereby authonzes and requests any person, firm or corporation to furnish any information
requested by the City of Port Angeles.
Date:
1/oa/o:J
Bidder's Signature -h2/ ~~
R I c.k l-lc:c.'"
Pr-~Sl ~,~/-
DO NOT REMOVE THIS PAGE FROM PROJECT MANUAL
Print Name:
Title'
PW-407-09 [9/00]
1-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-wi
City of Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Attachment:
Contracts on hand -
Residential remodel- $29,228.92
George Titterness - 452-9381
08/23/02 completion date
Queen of Angels - Seismic upgrade - $186,495.00
Mary Ellen Winborn - Architect - 452-7895
08/30/02 completion date
Entrance addition & remodel for Olympic Medical Center
$600,149.00
Jim Paapke - 417-8627
07/15/02 completion date (99% complete)
General character of work -
Commercial remodeling with some new construction in commercial and
residential. We perform demolition, framing and all finish work.
Completed projects-
Akalat Cabins - $350,000.00
Quileute Tribe - 360-374-6163
07/01 completion
Launch Building & Restaurant - $292,000.00
Quileute Tribe - 360-374-6163
03/02
12 Unit Rental Housing - $942,518.00
Lower Elwha Housing Authority - 457-5116
09/01
Major Equipment -
Flat bed dump trucks
Man lift
Experience -
It would be difficult to call any of our past projects "similar" to the remodel of the
Carnegie Library, however we do specialize in commercial remodeling and have
completed many projects for City, County, School and medical agencies. We have
performed work for Peninsula College, Olympic Medical Center, Forks Community
Hospital and Forks City Hall, Clallam County, DNR, County and Tribal Housing
'~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f '.
J
Authorities and many local Churches. We are now performing seismic upgrade for the
Queen of Angels Church and have earlier completed structural upgrades for K-ply mill.
We have worked on projects that involve elevator installation and most other components
that make of the scope of work for the Carnegie Library.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LISTING OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS
~ 1$ Bidder shall list all Subcontractors proposed to be used on the Project. FAILURE TO ALL
~ ~ LIST SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL BE CONSIDERED TO BE A NON-RESPONSIVE BID.
'\I6{tI<~Oi\O If there are no Subcontractors, write "NO SUBCONTRACTORS WILL BE USED"
, t'; < ~;L (.,' > 0, ~ v" ~<~ "* A7> ~ ~,
NAME, AaORESS ~Ne GONTRAC'fOR'S '~eESCRiptTION OF WORK
REGISTRATIO~ ~,tiMBE;R ;; " , . , ."
J...t:i.J<.t..Stl...L ~~.... -fb,.fr-J-~ LI'H<.~ ,;J q.:n 'Ev.;7~.... ':'~;)."^1 _ .
~b-ye.u.A.hu,t.... -;:.?CA-I~ - L lJSC.cPO))~W t..~.,. J-.rrt5c.-'f-..-
fJ1c.ercr,..t~ Ccu..pc:/ ~-PcA.4-~ 1Y} .z::t /;)10'3 g./oortPLc,
fl)or-rISOI/ ex<!.GL-cJ~) - fbtJ ~ IYI tUl.I.<i,O'7cJPi.J ~c..CJ.-i..)~~
ftlJ..u-..c,rCJU<. C(J)U)'..J, - mf~ - fl O~e.:;; OIdC-Co C!..OI'JV~
fY)0 ciuut- I. LVCt..JLfL - -I ~ _ O{)~08-S l...$ - D r'iU..Jed(
fuu..e.r-s 'II~ - PClli I~ ~ t+Lt<i-fl.H-FO/3CS- /.J-~
IYJCuJjaAUJ ~ - I>C/UI ~ - /tJ (hlt/IL/C).S-/J t+ - t1 CLI.)~
LI rJ eO/it-- Wd..~ - PclVI <J - c- O.:t:' C- 077/<S - 51 -2-e-L I
5c.1 nu.lfs ,2.0cy/LA-1. - Pc.JUI ~ ~C/-lIYJ;J;f2-r.IIOJf.. _ 12.00-?; "j
L~CLf C~. - /)01--1 ~ - L~nc.yc..Z;Of) 101- - f2.avt~
$("~~ ~~~CJJ -j){)l..1J VJ-S<!.-Hm-rS-I'Y/IOd/<"I. _ S~
'-'" I q.. (!. ('.t-()
c+- 'F ~c.-ft.CM- (JUl.-of- ~.- Fx:ns:;t?o1P~Ow-
JIVV\. 6r..LL~ PO-I r') k - PeJ).{ ~-~IM6,R P~044 PQ _
1"\-)'1 sse"- k~ ~o..>k.n-- -kl('~1 ' - rHy SS'i.-c.qqool
h s u-/ &-4-t v......
PCA-ln+ ,~
- 'E.ku~
l
W C. 'l==t"'()%{. C~ - ~ luo- - wc.1== l2...O<:..c.ooo~ - Auq~ PI'-e..S
D\ \.1 M-pt.L.. ~<L:~- ~or+ A~-L{~ ~ O( yl/Vlp €.c..9 ~1D I _ €,~
r-t":t;f2::l:=lc5- ~-t-~tE..f'- PUl..-~ r-n~ -'1+3JR!T:tI:{)O(tNlJG,' 1: - /ltLc.4-ct..n fCC.-....R
SIGNATURE and TITLE
~J~~
-
_a.R~~.
ADD ADDITIONAL PAGES AS NECESSARY
DO NOT REMOVE THIS PAGE FROM PROJECT MANUAL
PW-407-14[9/00]
1-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BID FORM
Honorable Mayor and City Council
Port Angeles City Hall
321 East Fifth Street
Port Angeles, W A 98362
BIDDER: k~ COtJsl-. ::CJ.lL-
DATE: 0'1/08-/0d-...
The underSigned, hereinafter called the bidder, declares that the only person(s) interested in this bid
are those named herein; that the bid is in all respects fair and without fraud; and that it is made without
any connection or collusion with any other person making a bid on this project.
REGISTRATION NO. r.lOe.,fIC!..~/t-,('Y)T
The bidder further declares that it has carefully examined the plan, specifications, and contract
documents, hereinafter referred to as the project manual, for the construction of the proposed project
improvement(s); that it has personally inspected the site(s); that it has satisfied itself as to the types
and quantities of materials, the types of equipment, the conditions of the work involved, including the
fact that the description of and the quantities of work and materials, the types of equipment, the
conditions of and the work Involved as included herein, are brief and are intended only to indicate the
general nature of the work and to identify the said quantities with the corresponding requirements of
the project manual; and that this bid is made in accordance with the provisions and the terms of the
contract included in the project manual.
The bidder further agrees that it has exercised its own judgment regarding the interpretation of surface
information and has utilized all data which it believes is pertinent from the City Engineer, hereinafter
also referred to as the City or Owner, and such other source of information as it determined necessary
in arriving at its conclusion.
The bidder further certifies that the subcontracting firms or businesses submitted on the LISTING OF
PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS will be awarded subcontracts for the described portions of the
work:
If the bidder is awarded a construction contract on this bid, the name and address of the surety who
will provide the performance bond is:
~5(.1I'CUu..f CO. oj'liP tJ..P- s f-
Sur ty
Po Sf:?;: 1/ :JtJr', UflLJJ1I( I'A. tvrA 91ry//
Surety ad ress I'
of./fJ. ~ elL I/J /1-11 853 -l7j-9-d-doU
Surety C ntact and Phone Number
Agent 8rCJ.-:1ra.-cL litlcl.dl.e ~ ~.
1'0 6o-p //;JcJS---
Agent Address ~14 {/Utt. c; W II
Agent Contact and Phone Number
8 ra.A-ff'o6 .el'""l-B
61.5'-:3 - /fs7 -;l:kJd
PW-407 _10 (9/00)
DO NOT REMOVE BID FORMS FROM PROJECT MANUAL
1-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BID FORM
Base Bid: Spec Division 00 - Division 16
All Work required by Documents not noted as Bid Alternate
· Architects estimated range: $850,000.00 - $950,000.00
Bidder proposes to provide Base Bid Work for the Lump sum of:
b 7' :I ~Ia <VII ,0. ~'~' ~ tl;rll< "" "'- Q 'ie 'K....
~ - ~UUL.i......., ~tOO
Bid Alternate 1: Spec 09-550 Wood Flooring Finishes
Repair and Refinish Upper Floor Wood Flooring
· Architects estimate: $18,500.00
der proposes to provide Alternate#1 Work for the Lump sum of:
. G
cO
$ AAl/.; 7Ci3 nii WSST
$ b,Rf../~ 02. nil WSST
Bid Alternate 2: Spec 04-210 Brick Masonry Veneer
Furnish Masonry-veneer Chimneys above roof
· Architects estimate: $13,300.00
der proposes to provide Alternate#2 Work for the Lump sum of:
. o.
cJO
$ ~.;::J./'1 - nil WSST
Bid Alternate 3: Spec 05-540 Castings
Cast Iron Front Porch Candelabrum
· Architects estimate: $11,200.00
er proposes to provide Alternate#3 Work for the Lump sum of:
) oq-
CJcJ
$ ~3 (-'()C) -nil WSST
.
Bid Alternate 4:
Spec 05-730 Ornamental Sheet Metal
Furnish Pediment and Pilaster Scrolled-caps with Cresting Leaves
· Architects estimate: $49,100.00
s to provide Alternate#4 Work for the Lump sum of
oU
$~.s; 39S' - nil WSST
Bid Alternate 5: Spec 05-725 Ornamental Metal Castings
Furnish Bronze Marquee Cresting
· Architects estimate: $31,400.00
AND
Spec 05-730 Ornamental Sheet Metal
Furnish Copper Marquee Cladding
· Architects estimate: $5,500.00
er proposes to prov'de Alternate#5 Work for the Lump sum of
~ '.
00
$3~ 8A5 -nil WSST
./
Bid Alternate 6 Spec 05-730 Ornamental Sheet Metal
Replicate Conductor Heads, Caps and Downspout Brackets
· Architects estimate: $4,300.00
BI r proposes to provide Alternate#6 Work for the Lump sum of 00
. , I u- $ 57 Q / - nil WSST
,
Bid Alternate 7 Spec 06-200 & 09-550 Finish Carpentry and Wood Flooring
Install salvaged wood flooring in downstairs Meeting Room
· Architects estimate: $6,500.00
r propos~s to provide Alternate#7 YVork for the L~mp sum of au
. " 't Ocr- $~;J 8g - nil WSST
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BID FORM
LIQUIDATED DAMA3ES
The undersigned agrees to pay the Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $ 250.00 for each consecutive
calendar day that IS Ir1 default after the Contract Time Liquidated damages shall be deducted from the Contract
by Change Order
ADDENDA ACKNOWLEDGMENT -7' n
The bidder hereby acknowledges that it has received Addenda Nos. -?- +- nl to this
Project Manual
The name of the bidder submitting thiS bid and its business phone number and address, to which address all
communications concerned with this bid and with the contract shall be sent IS listed below
Bidder's firm name #6CIt ('J{)/J sl-rIA. cl/CJ 11 ~
Complete address ?I~iress;?ru .I .it -fbl. fJj '~~liks. IA Ju.-
Tele No. ~6-3X(
Signed by ~ ~ Title Prut S t~..e "'---+-
Printed Name. R I ~ l.\oc...."-
9d-'303
(LIp)
Notes' (1) If the bidder IS a partnership, so state, giVing firm name under which business is transacted
(2) If the bidder is a corporation, thiS bid must be executed by its duly authorized officials.
J?; <, -I. eMS S()/J 5. -/JJdd/61}u!;;") I r.LCj.. - n./ L " . 90 qJ!.. f1' I A
WI..'/--L CLltt/LIC. C1/ C}-' % O-r/~u1 '-/0') ., (I). > fJ
..- 'S ~ Vl~19~ rI~ j (.tr l- '< ~ / ~.r.),
-
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
~
,
,
,
~.
..
(i-4'iPn:r~~,~
C' "
~ if
\,:,,~&g
~""o~
BID BOND FORM
Herewith find deposit In the form of a cashier's check, postal money order or bid bond In the amount of $
which amount IS not less than five (5%) percent of the total bid
SIGN HERE
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
HOCH INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE
That we, CONSTRUCTION, INC. as Principal and WEST as Surety, are held and firmly
bound unto the CITY OF PORT ANGELES as Obligee, in the penal sum of 5% OF AMOUNT BID** Dollars, for the
payment of which the Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors
and assigns, Jointly and severally, by these presents.
The condition of this obligation is such that if the Obligee shall make any award to the Principal for:
Revitalization of the Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Project No. 97-08
according to the terms of the bid made by the Principal, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract
with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of said bid and award and shall give bond for the faithful performance
thereof, with Surety or Sureties approved by the Obligee; or if the Principal shall, in,case of failure so to do, pay and
forfeit to the Obligee the penal amount of the deposit specified in the advertisement for bids, then this obligation shall
be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfeit
to the Obligee, as penalty and liquidated damages, the amount of this bond.
SIGNED, SEALED AND DATED THIS 2ND day of
CO STRUCTION, NC.
JULY
, ,.[) 2
,2lr .
Agent
BRATRUD MIDDLETON INSURANCE BROKES, INC.
Agent Address
P.O. BOX 11205, TACOMA, WA 98411
STACY CUTBIRTH (253)759-2200
S..lfety Contact and Phone Number
Agent Contact and Phone Number
BRAD ROBERTS
(253)759-2200
Dated:
Received return of deposit in the sum of $
PW-407 _11 19/00}
DO NOT REMOVE THIS PAGE FROM PROJECT MANUAL
1-9
-
I
No. 0004271
I
ICW GROUP
Power of Attorney
Insurance Company of the West
The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company
I
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS That Insurance Company of the West, a Corporal1on duly orgaruzed under the laws of the State of Cahforrua, The
Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporal1on duly orgaruzed under the laws of the State of Anzona, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, a Corporation
duly orgamzed under the laws of the State of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Comparues"), do herebyappomt
KAREN SWANSON, STEPHEN FELTUS, ROBERT E. HEILESEN, RANDOLPH J. CARR, JACK P. SUTTON, MICHELLE R. POST,
STACY CUTBIRTH, BRAD ROBERTS, ERIC ZIMMERMAN, JOANNE REINKENSMEYER, HOLLI LAGERQUIST
I
their true and lawful Attomey(s)-m-Fact With authonty to date, execute, Sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidehty and surety bonds, undertakings,
and other surular contracts of suretyshIp, and any related documents
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Comparues have caused these presents to be executed by ItS duly authonzed officers thIs 16th day of January, 2001
I
INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
THE EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY
INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY
I
I
John H. Craig, Assistant Secretmy
John L Hannum, Executive ViCe President
I
State of Califorrua
County of San Diego
} 58
I
On January 16,2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Public, personally appeared John L Hannum and John H Craig, personally known to me to be
the persons whose names are subscnbed to the Wlthm mstrument, and acknowledged to me that they executed the same m their authonzed capaCIties, and that by
their signatures on the mstrument, the entity upon behalf of whIch the persons acted, executed the mstrument
Witness my hand and official seal
I
I
NORMA PORTER f
COMM #1257540 *
NOTARY PUBLlC.CALlFORNIA
SAN DIEGO COUNTY
My COmllH',SlOn Expires "',
MARCH f9, 2004 .
1~ IMw
I
o .
l3 ~
I
Norma Porter, Notmy Public
RESOLUTIONS
I
T1us Power of Attorney IS granted and IS Signed, sealed and notanzed With facsurule signatures and seals under authonty of the followmg resolutIOns adopted by
the respective Boards of Directors of each of the Comparues
I
"RESOLVED That the PreSident, an Executive or Seruor Vice President of the Company, together With the Secretary or any AsSistant
Secretary, are hereby authonzed to execute Powers of Attorney appomtmg the person(s) named as Attorney(s)-m-Fact to date, execute, Sign,
seal, and dehver on behalf of the Company, fidehty and surety bonds, undertakmgs, and other sumlar contracts of suretyshIp, and any related
documents
RESOL VED FURTHER That the signatures of the officers makmg the appomtment, and the signature of any officer certlfymg the vahchty
and current status of the appomtrnent, may be facsurule representations of those Signatures, and the signature and seal of any notary, and the
seal of the Company, may be facsumle representations of those signatures and seals, and such facsurule representations shall have the same
force and effect as If manually affixed The facsmule representations referred to herem may be afftxed by stamping, pnnbng, typing, or
photocopymg "
I
I
CERTIFICATE
I, the understgned, AsSistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, do
hereby certify that the foregomg Power of Attorney IS m full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolul1ons were duly adopted by the
respective Boards of Directors of the Compames, and are now In full force
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand thIs 2ND day of JULY 2002
I
~
I
John H Craig, ASSistant Secretmy
I
To venfy the authenticity of thIs Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-877 -1111 arid ask for the Surety DlVlslOn Please refer to the Power of Attorney Number,
the above named mdlVldual(s) and details of the bond to which the power IS attached For mforrnal1on or filmg clatrns, please contact Surety Claims, ICW Group,
11455 EI Camino Real, San DIego, CA 92130-2045 or call (858) 350-2400
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART II
CONTRACT FORMS SUBMITTED FOLLOWING
AWARD OF CONTRACT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PUBLIC WORKS
CONTRACT
This Contract is made and entered into in duplicate this 2nd day of August , 2002
by and between the City of Port Angeles, a non-charter code city of the State of Washington,
hereinafter referred to as "the City", and Hoch Construction Incorporated, hereinafter referred to
as "the Contractor".
WITNESSETH:
Whereas, the City desires to have certain public work performed as hereinafter set forth,
requiring specialized skills and other supportive capabilities; and
Whereas, the Contractor represents that it is qualified and possesses sufficient skills and
the necessary capabilities to perform the services set forth in this Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the terms, conditions, and agreements
contained herein, the parties hereto agree as follows:
1. Scope of Work.
The Contractor shall do all work and furnish all tools, materials, and equipment in order
to accomplish the following project:
Revitalization of the Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Project #97-08
in, accordance with and as described in this Contract and the project manual, which include the
attached plans, specifications, special conditions, addenda, bid, and performance bond, as may be
specifically modified in the attached specifications and/or special conditions, hereinafter referred
to as "the Specifications", and shall perform any alterations in or additions to the work provided
under this Contract and every part thereof. The Contractor shall provide and bear the expense of
all equipment, work, and labor of any sort whatsoever that may be required for the transfer of
materials and for constructing and completing the work provided for in this Contract, except as
may otherwise be provided in the project manual.
E. The Contractor shall submit payment requests with a completed Application for
Payment form, an example of which is included in the Attachments to this
Contract. This form includes a lien waiver certification, and shall be notarized
before submission. Applications for payment not signed or notarized shall be
considered incomplete and ineligible for payment consideration under the
Contract provisions. The City shall initiate authorization for payment after receipt
of a satisfactorily completed payment request form and shall make payment to the
Contractor within approximately thirty (30) days thereafter.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Time for Performance and Liquidated Damages.
A. Time is of the essence in the performance of this Contract and in adhering to the
time frames specified herein. The Contractor shall commence work within ten
(10) calendar days after notice to proceed from the City, and said work shall be
physically completed within 365 calendar days after said notice to proceed, unless
a different time frame is expressly provided in writing by the City.
B. If said work is not completed within the time for physical completion, the
Contractor may be required at the City's sole discretion to pay to the City
liquidated damages as set forth in the bid documents, for each and every calendar
day said work remains uncompleted after the expiration of the specified time.
3. Compensation and Method ofPavrnent.
A. The City shall pay the Contractor for work performed under this Contract as
detailed in the bid, as incorporated in the project manual.
B. Payments for work provided hereunder shall be made following the performance
of such work, unless otherwise permitted by law and approved in writing by the
City. No payment shall be made for any work rendered by the Contractor except
as identified and set forth in this Contract.
C. Progress payments shall be based on the timely submittal by the Contractor of the
City's standard payment request form.
D. Payments for any alterations in or additions to the work provided under this
Contract shall be in accordance with the request for information (RFI) and/or
change order process as set forth in the project manual. Following approval of the
change order, the Contractor shall submit the standard payment request formes).
PublIc Works Contract - Page 2 of7
N \PROJECTS\97-080L\00Pubhc Works Contract doc [rev 2/15/01]
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Independent Contractor Relationship.
The relationship created by this Contract is that of independent contracting entities. No
agent, employee, servant, or representative of the Contractor shall be deemed to be an employee,
agent, servant, or representative of the City, and the employees of the contractor are not entitled
to any of the benefits the City provides for its employees. The Contractor shall be solely and
entirely responsible for its acts and the acts of its agents, employees, servants, subcontractors, or
representatives during the performance of this Contract. The Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for payment of all wages and salaries and all federal, state, and local taxes or
contributions imposed or required, including, but not limited to, unemployment insurance,
workers compensation insurance, social security, and income tax withholding.
5. Prevailing Wage Requirements.
The Contractor shall comply with applicable prevailing wage requirements of the
Washington State Department of Labor & Industries, as set forth in Chapter 39.12 RCW and
Chapter 296-127 WAC. The Contractor shall document compliance with said requirements and
shall file with the City appropriate affidavits, certificates, and/or statements of compliance with
the State prevailing wage requirements. The Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates For
Public Works Contracts, Clallam County, incorporated in this Contract have been established by
the Department of Labor & Industries and are included as an Attachment to this Contract. The
Contractor shall also ensure that any subcontractors or agents of the Contractor shall comply
with the prevailing wage and documentation requirements as set forth herein.
6. Indemnification and Hold Harmless.
A. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the City, its officers,
officials, employees, and volunteers against and from any and all claims, injuries,
damages, losses, or lawsuits, including attorney fees, arising out of or in
connection with the performance of this Contract, except for injunes and damages
caused by the sole negligence of the City. It is further provided that no liability
shall attach to the City by reason of entering into this Contract, except as
expressly provided herein.
B. Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this Contract is subject to
RCW 4.24.115, then, in the event of liability for damages arising out of bodily
injury to persons or damages to property caused by or resulting from the
concurrent negligence of the Contractor and the City, its officers, officials,
employees, and volunteers, the Contractor's liability hereunder shall be only to
the extent of the Contractors negligence. It is further specifically and expressly
understood that the indemnification provided herein constitutes the Contractor's
waiver of immunity under Industrial Insurance, Title 51 RCW, solely for the
purposes of this indemnification. This waiver has been mutually negotiated by
the parties. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or
Public Works Contract - Page 3 of 7
N \PROJECTS\97-080L\00Pubhc Works Contract doc [rev 2/15/01]
111.
Workers' Compensation coverage as required by the Industrial Insurance
laws of the State of Washington.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
termination of this Contract.
7. Insurance.
The Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Contract, insurance
against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in
connection with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, their agents,
representatives, employees or subcontractors. Failure by the Contractor to maintain the
insurance as required shall constitute a material breach of contract upon which the City may,
after giving five working days notice to the Contractor to correct the breach, immediately
terminate the Contract or at its discretion, procure or renew such insurance and pay any and all
premiums in connection therewith, with any sums so expended to be repaid to the City on
demand, or at the sole discretion of the City, off set against funds due the Contractor from the
City.
A. Minimum Scope of Insurance
The Contractor shall obtain insurance of the types described below:
1.
Automobile Liabilitv insurance covering all owned, non-owned, hired and
leased vehicles. Coverage shall be written on Insurance Services Office
(ISO) form CA 00 01 or a substitute form providing equivalent liability
coverage. If necessary, the policy shall be endorsed to provide contractual
liability coverage.
11.
Commercial General Liability insurance shall be written on ISO
occurrence form CG 00 01 and shall cover liability arising from premises,
operations, independent contractors, products-completed operations,
personal injury and advertising injury, and liabIlity assumed under an
insured Contract. The Commercial General Liability insurance shall be
endorsed to provide the Aggregate Per Project Endorsement ISO form CG
25 03 11 85. There shall be no endorsement or modification of the
Commercial General Liability insurance for liability arising from
explosion, collapse or underground property damage. The City shall be
named as an insured under the Contractor's Commercial General Liability
insurance policy with respect to the work performed for the City using
ISO additional insured endorsement CG 20 10 11 85 or a substitute
endorsement providing equivalent coverage.
B.
Minimum Amounts of Insurance
The Contractor shall maintain the following insurance limits:
Pubhc Works Contract - Page 4 of 7
N \PROJECTS\97-080L\00Pubhc Works Contract doc [rev. 2/15/01]
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Automobile Liability insurance with a minimum combined single limit for
bodily injury and property damage of$l,OOO,OOO per accident.
11.
Commercial General Liability insurance shall be written with limits no
less than $1,000,000 each occurrence, $2,000,000 general aggregate and a
$2,000,000 products-completed operations aggregate limit.
c.
Other Insurance Provisions
The insurance policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions
for Automobile Liability and Commercial General Liability insurance.
1.
The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respect
the City. Any Insurance, self-insurance, or insurance pool coverage
maintained by the City shall be excess of the Contractor's insurance and
shall not contribute with it.
11.
The Contractor's insurance shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall
not be cancelled by either party, except after thirty (30) days prior written
notice by certified mail, return receipt requested, has been given to the
City.
D.
Acceptability of Insurers
Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a current A.M. Best rating of not less than
A:Vll.
E. Verification of Coverage
The Contractor shall furnish the City with original certificates and a copy of the
amendatory endorsements, including but not necessarily limited to the additional insured
endorsement, evidencing the insurance requirements of the Contractor before
commencement of the work.
F. Subcontractors
The Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies or shall
furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for
subcontractors shall be subject to all of the same insurance requirements as stated herein
for the Contractor.
PublIc Works Contract - Page 5 of 7
N \PROJECTS\97-080L\00Pubhc Works Contract doc [rev. 2/15/01]
A. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws,
including regulations for licensing, certification, and operation of facilities and
programs, and accreditation and licensing of individuals, and any other standards
or criteria as set forth in the project manual.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8. Compliance with Laws.
B. The Contractor shall pay any applicable business and permit fees and taxes which
may be required for the performance of the work.
C. The Contractor shall comply with all legal and permitting requirements as set
forth in the project manual.
9. Non-discrimination. The parties shall conduct their business in a manner which assures
fair, equal and nondiscriminatory treatment of all persons, without respect to race, creed, color,
sex, Vietnam era veteran status, disabled veteran condition, physical or mental handicap, or
national origin, and, in particular:
A. The parties will maintain open hiring and employment practices and will welcome
applications for employment in all positions from qualified individuals who are
members of the above-stated minorities.
B. The parties will comply strictly with all requirements of applicable federal, state
or local laws or regulatIOns issued pursuant thereto, relating to the establishment
of nondiscriminatory requirements in hiring and employment practices and
assuring the service of all patrons and customers without discrimination with
respect to the above-stated minority status.
10. Assignment.
A. The Contractor shall not assign this Contract or any interest herein, nor any
money due to or to become due hereunder, without first obtaining the written
consent of the City, nor shall the Contractor subcontract any part of the services to
be performed hereunder without first obtaining the consent of the City.
B. The Contractor hereby assigns to the City any and all claims for overcharges
resulting from antitrust violations as to goods and materials purchased in
connection with this Contract, except as to overcharges resulting from antitrust
violations commencing after the date of the bid or other event establishing the
price of this Contract. In addition, the Contractor warrants and represents that
each of its suppliers and subcontractors shall assign any and all such claims for
overcharges to the City in accordance with the terms of this provision. The
Contractor further agrees to give the City immediate notice of the existence of any
such claim.
Public Works Contract - Page 6 of 7
N.\PROJECTS\97-080L\00Pubhc Works Contract doc [rev 2/15/01]
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II. Contract Administration.
This Contract shall be administered by Rick Hoch on behalf of the
Contractor and by on behalf of the City. Any written notices
required by the terms of this Contract shall be served or mailed to the following addresses:
Contractor: City:
Hoch Construction, Inc.
4201 Tumwater Truck Rt.
Port~~geles WA 98363
City of Port Angeles
P.O. Box 1150
321 East Fifth Street
Port Angeles, W A 98362-0217
12. Interpretation and Venue.
This Contract shall be interpreted and construed in accordance with the laws of the State
of Washington. The venue of any litigation between the parties regarding this Contract shall be
Clallam County, Washington.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Contract to be executed
the day and year first set forth above.
CONTRACTOR:
CITY OF PORT ANGELES:
Hoch Construction, Inc.
Name of Contractor
BY:~~
Rick Hoch
By:
,
Mayor
Title: President
Approved as to Form:
L<1~
City Attorney
Attest:
PublIc Works Contract - Page 7 of 7
N \PROJECTS\97-080L\00Pubhc Works Contract doc [rev 2/15/01]
I
ACORD", CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MMIDDIYY)
08/12/2002
PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
'Bratrud Middleton Insurance ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
Brokers Inc. - Tacoma Div ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
P. O. Box 11205 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
Tacoma, WA 98411-0205 "E,V CCQpANY
Ohio Casualty Ins. Co. -
tjl~ 4 ... .... A
INSURED " , J tUU, COMPANY
Hoch Construction Inc. B West American Insurance Co.
4201 Tumwater Truck Route COMPANY
Port Angeles, W A 98362 C
COMPANY
I SKL D
CQViRAQES
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS
CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS
LTR DATE (MMIDDIYY) DATE (MMIDDIYY)
A GENERAL LIABILITY BK052926942 04/12/02 04/12/03 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000
-
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000.000
I CLAIMS MADE IX] OCCUR PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1 000 000
- OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000
X W A Stop Gap FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone fire) $ 100.000
MED EXP (Anyone person) $ 5000
B ~TOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 1,000,000
X ANY AUTO BA W52926942 04/12/02 04/12/03
-
ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
- $
SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person)
-
X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
- $
~ NON-OWNED AUTOS (Per accident)
- PROPERTY DAMAGE $
~RAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $
ANY AUTO OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY
-
- EACH ACCIDENT $
AGGREGATE $
A EXCESS LIABILITY BX052926942 04/12/02 04/12/03 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000
Xl UMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE $ 1,000,000
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM $
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND i WC STAT~I- I IOTH-
TORY LIMITS ER
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
EL EACH ACCIDENT $
THE PROPRIETOR! R INCL EL DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $
PARTNER~EXECUTNE
OFFICERS ARE EXCL EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $
A OTHER
Equipment Floater BM05292694202 04/12/02 04/12/03 See below for description
& limits, if applicable
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLESISPECIAL ITEMS
RE: Revitalization of the Port Angeles Carnegie Library, Project #97-08.
Certificate Holder is added as Additional Insured; this insurance is
Primary and Non-Contributory per the attached endorsement.
CERTlFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
City of Port Angeles EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ~:!IJ) MAIL
P.O. Box 1150 ~ DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,
321 East Fifth Street
Port Angeles, W A 98362 lIn~::uA'lIXSIlli:~:I1IIXlIIIIlISDImIXlIIII:D1IBIlm'JI:
JlJ[l{JDIIXBNIIXXJ{l.OINXl'HfXxmIIIIWIl'i'(XXBnlDllUBLXlll~~
I ,",~'"{\OOO;:Q 029324
ACORC 25-5 (1lD5) .~. - CoRPORATiON 1985
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
- (Continuations) -
029324 SKL
INSURED: Hoch Construction Inc.
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATIONSNEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS - (Continued):
Blanket Additional Insured if required by Contract, Agreement or Permit.
This cancels and replaces Certificate of Insurance dated 08/07/02.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
1. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSUh..U {Owners, Contractors or Lessors}
WHO IS AN INSURED {Section III is amended to include as an insured any person or organization whom you
, are required to name as an additional insured on this policy under a written contract or agreement.
The written contract or agreement must be:
(a) currently in effect or becoming effective during the term of this policy; and
(b) executed prior to the "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury."
The insurance provided the additional insured is limited as follows:
1. That the person or organization is only an additional insured with respect to liability arising out of:
a. Real property you own, rent, lease, or occupy; or
b. "your work" for that additional Insured for or by you.
2. The limits of insurance applicable to the additional insured are those specified in the written contract or
agreement or the limits available under this policy whichever are less. These limits are inclusive of and not
in addition to the limits of insurance available under this policy.
3. The insurance provided the additional insured does not apply to liability arising out of the sole negligence
of the additional insured
4. The insurance provided the additional insured does not apply to:
a. "bodily injury",
b. "property damage",
c. "personal and advertising injury" or
d. defense coverage under the Supplementary Payments section of the policy
arising out of an architect's, engineer's or surveyor's rendering of or failure to render any profes-
sional services including:
(1) The preparing, approving. or failing to prepare or approve maps, shop drawings, opinions, re-
ports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; and
(2) Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities.
Any coverage provided hereunder shall be excess over any other valid and collectible insurance available to the
additional insured whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis unless a contract specifically
requires that this insurance be primary or you request that it apply on a primary basis.
2. FIRE, LIGHTNING. "EXPLOSION" AND SPRINKLER LEAKAGE DAMAGE TO PREMISES YOU RENT
If Damage To Premises Rented To You under Coverage A is not otherwise excluded from this policy,
the following applies:
A. The last paragraph of SECTION I - COVERAGE A2. Exclusions is replaced by the following.
Exclusions c. through n. do not apply to damage by fire, lightning, "explosion" or sprinkler
leakage to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of
the owner. A separate limit of insurance applies to this coverage as described in - LIMITS OF
INSURANCE (SECTION III).
B. Paragraph 6 of SECTION \1\ - LIMITS OF INSURANCE is replaced by the fo\lowing:
6. Subject to 5. above, the higher of $300,000 or the Damage To Premises Rented To You
Limit is the most we will pay under Coverage A for damages because of "property
damage" to premises rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with the permission
of the owner arising out of anyone fire, lightning, "explosion" or sprinkler leakage In-
Cident.
C. Paragraph 4.b(1)(b) of Other Insurance, SECTION IV - CONDITIONS is replaced by the follow-
ing:
(1) That is Fire, Lightning, "Explosion" or Sprinkler Leakage insurance for premises rented to
you or temporarily occupied by you with the permission of the owner;
D. Paragraph S.a. of the definition of INSURED CONTRACT under SECTION V- DEFINITIONS is
replaced by the following:
a. A contract for the lease of premises. However, that portion of the contract for a lease of
premises that indemnifies any person or organization for damages by fire, Iightnmg,
"explosion" or sprinkler leakage to premtses while rented to you or temporarily occupied
by you with the permission of the owner is not an "insured contract";
CG 84 16 07 99
Page 2 of 6
Includes eccyrighted matanal 01 Insurance Services O-tflce, Inc., With Its permission
1'__""._1000.... I.,ClH..OlI".... c:C1"......',..QCl (1-14''''0 In,. 1qq~
,,' . ~- ' , .
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PERFORMANCE and PAYMENT BOND
Bond to the City of Port Angeles
Bond # 1885148
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, the undersigned, Hoch Construotion. Inc. as Principal, and INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
a corporation, organized and existing under the laws of the State of~, as
a surety corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become s8'f~1ytJp~~N~bnds
of contractors with municipal corporations as surety, are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the
City of Port Angeles in the penal sum of $ 884.793 for the payment of which sum on demand we bind
ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or personal representatives, as the case may be.
This obligation is entered into pursuant to the statutes of the State of Washington and the ordinances of the
City of Port Angeles.
Dated at
TACOMA
, Washington, this 2ND day of AUGUST
,20~.
The conditions of the above obligation are such that:
WHEREAS, the City of Port Angeles has let or is about to let to the said Hoch Construction. Inc., the above
bounded Principal, a certain contract, the said contract being numbered 97-08 , and providing for _
Revitalization of the Carneaie Librarv (which contract is referred to herein
and is made a part hereof as though attached hereto), and
WHEREAS, the said Principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the said contract, and undertake to
perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth; now, therefore,
If the said Principal, , shall faithfully perform all
of the provisions of said contract in the manner and Within the time therein set forth, or within such
extensions of time as may be granted under said contract, and shall pay all laborers, mechanics,
subcontractors and materialmen, and all persons who shall supply said Principal or subcontractors with
provisions and supplies for the carrying on of said work, and shall indemnify and hold the City of Port
Angeles harmless from any damage or expense by reason of failure of performance as specified in said
contract or from defects appearing or developing in the material or workmanship provided or performed
under said contract Within a period of one year after its acceptance thereof by the City of Port Angeles, then
and in that event, this obligation shall be void; but otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect.
Signed this 7TH day of AUGUST
,20~.
INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
Surety
B~ Jl[}t~Si&i~,vVbt~J
A~TORNEY-IN-FACT
Title
11820 NORTHUP WY #E-130
BELLEVUE, WA 98005
Surety Address
ED BENNETT
(425)803-9800
Surety Contact and Phone Number
HOCH CONSTRUCTION, INC.
nrincipal
~y yo A>"l ~J( Y-
S12~..-^ 0 .J.-C' "'-"-
Title (
BRATRUD MIDDLETON INSURANCE BROKERS, INC.
P~O. BOX 11205, TACOMA, WA 98411
Agent Address
BRAD ROBERTS
(7'11) 7'iq-??OO
Agent Contact and Phone Number
N \PROJECTS\97-080L\perfonn-payment wpd]
I
No. 0004271
I
ICW GROUP
Power of Attorney
Insurance Company of the West
The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company
I
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS That Insurance Company of the West, a Corporation duly orgamzed under the laws of the State of Cahforrua, The
Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly orgaruzed under the laws of the State of Anzona, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, a Corporation
duly organIZed under the laws of the State of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Comparues"), do herebyappomt
KAREN SWANSON, STEPHEN FELTUS, ROBERT E. HEILESEN, RANDOLPH J. CARR, JACK P. SUTI'ON, MICHELLE R. POST,
STACY CUTBIRTH, BRAD ROBERTS, ERIC ZIMMERMAN, JOANNE REINKENSMEYER, HOLL! LAGERQUIST
I
their true and lawful Attorney(s)-m-Fact With authonty to date, execute, Sign, seal, and dehver on behalf of the Comparues, fidehty and surety bonds, undertakmgs,
and other smlllar contracts of suretyslup, and any related documents
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Comparues have caused these presents to be executed by ItS duly authorIZed officers thiS 16th day of January, 2001
I
@J
INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
THE EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY
INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY
I
I
John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary
John 1. Hannum, Executive Vice PreSident
I
State ofCahfornla
County of San Diego
} ss.
I
On January 16, 2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Pubhc, personally appeared John L Hannum and John H Craig, personally known to me to be
the persons whose names are subscnbed to the wltlun mstrument, and acknowledged to me that they executed the same m their authonzed capaCIties, and that by
their signatures on the mstrument, the entity upon behalf of wluch the persons acted, executed the mstrument
Witness my hand and official seal
I
I r I f
@ NORMA PORTER
.... ..... COMM #1257540
~ Mtb NOTARY PUBLlC.CALlfORNIA f.l
SAN DIEGO COUNTY 0
I' My Comnllsslon Expires i
. MARCH 19, 2004
__ .'l."'_~
1~ IMw
I
Norma Porter, Notary Public
RESOLUTIONS
I
Tlus Power of Attorney IS granted and IS Signed, sealed and notarIZed \Vlth facsrrrule signatures and seals under authonty of the followmg resolutions adopted by
the respective Boards of Directors of each of the Comparues
I
"RESOLVED That the PreSident, an Executive or Semor Vice PreSident of the Company, together With the Secretary or any Assistant
Secretary, are hereby authorIZed to execute Powers of Attorney appomtmg the person(s) named as Attorney(s)-m-Fact to date, execute, Sign,
seal, and dehver on behalf of the Company, fidehty and surety bonds, undertakmgs, and other slrmlar contracts of suretyship, and any related
documents
RESOLVED FURTHER That the signatures of the officers makmg the appomtrnent, and the signature of any officer certuymg the vahillty
and current status of the appomtrnent, may be facsrrrule representatIOns of those signatures. and the slgnatUle and seal of any notary and the
seal of the Company, may be faCSimile representatIOns of those signatures and seals, and such facsrrrule representations shall have the same
force and effect as If manually affixed The facsrrrule representatIOns referred to herem may be affixed by stampmg, pnntmg, typmg. or
photocopymg "
I
I
CERTIFICATE
I, the undefSlgned, AsSistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, do
hereby certify that the foregomg Power of Attorney IS m full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolut!ons were duly adopted by the
respective Boards of Directors of the Compames, and are now m full force
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand this 7TH day of AUGUST 2002
I
~
I
John H. Craig, ASSistant Secretary
I
To venfy the authentiCity of thiS Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-877-1 J 11 and ask for the Surety DIVISIOn Please refer to the Power of Attorney Number,
the above named mdIVldual(s) and details of the bond to which the power IS attached For mformatlon or filmg clamIS, please contact Surety Claims, ICW Group,
11455 El Carmno Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 or call (858) 350-2400
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
AND
DIVISION 01 SPECIFICATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Part Page Part Page
PART I GENERAL PROVISIONS 5.14 Availability and Use of UtIlity
1.01 DefimtlOns 2 Services 14
1.02 Order of Precedence 3 5.15 Tests and Inspection 14
1.03 ExecutIon and Intent 3 5.16 Correction ofNonconformmg Work 14
5.17 Clean Up 15
PART 2 INSURANCE AND BONDS 5.18 Access to Work 15
See Part II 5.19 Other Contracts 15
520 Subcontractors and Suppliers 16
PART 3 TIME AND SCHEDULE 5.21 Warranty of ConstructIOn 16
301 Progress and CompletIOn 4 5.22 Indemnification 16
3.02 ConstructIOn Schedule 4
303 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work for PART 6 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
Convemence 5 6.01 Contract Sum 17
304 Owner's Right to Stop the Work for Cause 5 6.02 Schedule of Values 17
3.05 Delay 5 6.03 Application for Payment 17
306 Notice to Owner of Labor Disputes 6 6.04 Progress Payments 18
3.07 Damages fOJ Failure to Achieve TImely 6.05 Payments Withheld 18
CompletIon 6 6.06 Retainage and Bond Claim Rlghts 18
6.07 SubstantIal CompletIOn 18
PART 4 SPECIFICA TIONS, DRAWINGS, AND 6.08 Pnor Occupancy 19
OTHER DOCUMENTS 6.09 Final Completion, Acceptance,
4.01 DiscrepancIes and Contract Document and Payment 19
Review 6
4.02 Project Record 7 PART 7 CHANGES
4.03 Shop Draw1l1gs 7 7.01 Changes in the Work 19
4.04 Organization of SpecificatIons 8 7.02 Change m the Contract Sum 20
4.05 Ownership and Use of Drawings, 7.03 Change in the Contract Time 25
SpeCificatIons, and Other Documents 8
PART 8 CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION
PART 5 PERFORMANCE 8.01 Claims Procedure 27
5.01 Contractor Control and Supervision 9 8.02 Arbitration 28
5.02 Pernnts, Fees and NotIces 9 8.03 Claims Audits 28
5.03 Patents and RoyaltIes 9
5.04 PrevaIling Wages 9 PART 9 TERMINATION OF THE WORK
5.05 Hours of Labor 10 9.01 Terrnmation by Owner for Cause 29
5.06 Nondiscrimination 10 9.02 Termination by Owner for
5.07 Safety Precautions 11 Convenience 30
5.08 Operations, .\1atenal Handling, and Storage
Areas 12 PART 10 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
5.09 Prior Notice of Excavation 12 10.01 Governing Law 30
5.10 Unforeseen Physical ConditIons I3 10.02 Successors and Assigns 30
5. 11 Protection 0 f Existing Structures, EqUIpment, 10.03 Rights and Remedies 31
Vegetation, Utilities, and Improvements I3 10.04 Contractor RegistratIon 31
5.12 Layout of Work I3 10.05 Time ComputatIons 31
5.13 Matenal and EqUIpment I3 10.06 Records RetentIOn 31
10.07 Third-Party Agreements 31
10.08 Antitrust Assignment 31
00700 - page 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS J. "Drawings" are the graphic and Pictorial portiOns
of the Contract Documents showing the deSign,
1 01 DEFINITIONS location, and dimenSiOns of the Work, and may
mclude plans, elevatiOns, sections, details,
A. "ApplicatiOn ti)r Payment" means a wntten schedules, and diagrams.
request subnutted by Contractor to A/E for
payment of Work completed m accordance with K. "Final Acceptance" means the written acceptance
the Contract Documents and approved Schedule issued to Contractor by Owner after Contractor
of Values, supported by such substantIatmg data has completed the reqUirements of the Contract
as Owner or AlE may reqUire Documents.
B "Architect," "Engmeer," or "A/E" means a L. "Fmal CompletiOn" means that the Work is fully
person or entity lawfully entitled to practice and finally completed in accordance With the
architecture or engineermg, representmg Owner. Contract Documents.
C. "Change Order" means a written instrument M. "Force Majeure" means those acts entitlmg
signed by Owner and Contractor stating their Contractor to request an eqUitable adjustment m
agreement upon all of the following: (1) a the Contract Time, as more fully set forth m
change m the Work; (2) the amount of the paragraph 3.05A.
adjustment m the Contract Sum, if any, and (3)
the extent of the adjustment in the Contract N. "Notice" means a written notice which has been
Time, if any. delivered in person to the mdivldual or a member
of the finn or entity or to an officer of the
D. "ClaIm" means Contractor's exclusive remedy for corporatiOn for which it was mtended or, If
resolving disputes with Owner regarding the delivered or sent by regIstered or certified mall,
tenns of a Change Order or a request for to the last busmess address known to the party
equitable adjustment, as more fully set forth in giVing notice.
part 8
O. "Notice to Proceed" means a notice from Owner
E. "Contract A ward Amount" is the sum of the Base to Contractor that defines the date on whIch the
Bid and any accepted Alternates Contract Time begms to run.
F "Contract Documents" means the Advertisement P. "Owner" means the state agency, institution, or
for BIds, Instructions for Bidders, completed its authonzed representative With the authonty to
Form of Proposal, General Conditions, enter into, admmister, and/or tenninate the Work
Modifications to the General Conditions, m accordance With the Contract Documents and
Supplemental Conditions, Public Works make related detenninatIons and fmdmgs.
Contract, otheI Special Fonns, Drawings and
Specifications, and all addenda and Q. "Person" means a corporation, partnersmp,
modifications thereof. business association of any kmd, trust, company,
or individual.
G "Contract Sum" is the total amount payable by
Owner to Contractor for perfonnance of the R. "Pnor Occupancy" means Owner's use of all or
Work in accordance with the Contract parts of the Project before Substantial
Documents. Completion.
H. "Contract Time" IS the number of calendar days S. "Progress Schedule" means a schedule of the
allotted m the Contract Documents for achieving Work, in a form satisfactory to Owner, as further
Substantial CompletiOn of the Work. set forth m section 3.02.
"Contractor" means the person or entity who has T. "Project" means the total construction of which the
agreed WIth Owner to perform the Work m Work performed in accordance With the Contract
accordance with the Contract Documents. Documents may be the whole or a part and which
00700 - page 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
I
may mclude construction by Owner or by separate
contractors.
u
"Project Manual" means the volume usually
assembled for the Work which may include the
blddmg requirements, sample forms, and other
Contract Documents.
I
I
v
"Project Record" means the separate set of
DraWings and SpecIficatIons as further set forth in
paragraph 4.02A
I
W
"Schedule of Values" means a WrItten breakdown
allocating the total Contract Sum to each prInciple
category of Work, m such detail as requested by
Owner.
I
I
x.
"SpecificatIons" are that portion of the Contract
Documents consisting of the wntten requirements
for materials, equipment, construction systems,
standards and workmanship for the Work, and
performance of rdated services.
I
I
Y. "Subcontract" means a contract entered mto by
Subcontractor for the purpose of obtamirIg
supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any
kind for or m cormection with the Work.
I
Z. "Subcontractor" means any person, other than
Contractor, who agrees to furnish or furnishes any
supplies, materIals, equipment, or services of any
kind m connection With the Work.
I
I
AA. "SubstantIal Completion" means that stage m the
progress of the Work where Owner has full and
unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities for the
purposes mtended, as more fully set forth in section
6.07.
I
AB. "Work" means the construction and services
requrred by the Contract Documents, and includes,
but is not lrrnited to, labor, materials, supplies,
equipment, services, permits, and the manufacture
and fabricatIon of components, performed,
furmshed, or provided in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
I
I
I
1.02 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE
Any conflict or mconslstency m the Contract Documents
shall be resolved by glvmg the documents precedence III
the followmg order
I
1. Signed Public Works Contract, including any
Change Orders, and any Special Forms.
I
00700 - page 3
2.
Supplemental ConditIOns.
3.
Modifications to the General ConditIOns.
4.
General Conditions.
5
Specifications--provislOns in DiviSion I shall take
precedence over proviSIOns of any other DlvlSlon
6.
Drawings--in case of conflict Within the
Drawings, large scale drawings shall take
precedence over small scale drawings.
7.
Signed and Completed Form ofProposaI.
8.
Instructions to Bidders.
9. Advertisement for Bids.
1.03 EXECUTION AND INTENT
Contractor makes the followmg representations to Owner
1.
The Contract Sum is reasonable compensatIon for
the Work and the Contract Time is adequate for the
performance of the Work, as represented by the
Contract Documents;
2.
Contractor has carefully reviewed the Contract
Documents, VISited and exammed the Project Site,
become familiar with the local conditions m which
the Work is to be performed, and satisfied itself as
to the nature, location, character, quality and
quantity of the Work, the labor, materIals,
equipment, goods, supplies, work, services and
other items to be furnished and all other
requirements of the Contract Documents, as well as
the surface and subsurface conditions and other
matters that may be encountered at the Project site
or affect performance of the Work or the cost or
difficulty thereof;
3.
Contractor IS financially solvent, able to pay ItS
debts as they mature, and possesses sufficient
working capital to complete the Work and perform
Contractor's obligations reqUired by the Contract
Documents; and
4
Contractor IS able to furnish the plant, tools,
materials, supplies, eqUipment and labor required
to complete the Work and perform the obligations
required by the Contract Documents and has
sufficient experience and competence to do so.
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
PART 2 - INSURANCE AND BONDS
As set forth III Part II - Contract Forms Submitted
followmg Award of Contract - Public Works Contract
PART 3 - TIME AND SCHEDULE
3.01 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
Contractor shall dIlIgently prosecute tlte Work, with
adequate forces, aclueve SubstantIal CompletIon wlthm
the Contract TIme, and achIeve Fmal CompletIOn wlthm a
reasonable penod thereafter.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A Unless otherwIse provIded m DIvision 1, the
Contractor shall ;Jrepare and submit to the Owner, a
Cntlcal Path ~elhod (CPM) schedule, includmg
both hard copy a1.d electronic subrmttal. The CPM
schedule shall melude proposed procurement,
constructIOn, testmg and inspectIOn actiVIties
covenng the time from the contract award to the
contract complet on date and shall incorporate cost
mformatlOn as it relates to the contract bid Items.
B. The Contractor shall develop the CPM schedule
USl11g the most CLm'ent version of Sure Trak
~oftware by Pnmavera Sy~tems. Inc
C The Contractor ~hall ~ubmit, withm 14 calendar
days after Kotlce to Proceed, a complete CPM
tIme-scaled logic diagram on 24" x 36" sheets with
accompanying schedule reports and one dIskette.
The schedule diagrams shall show activity
numbers, descnptions, early start dates, float and
all relationship~, resources and costs. The
diagrams shall also show the sequence, order and
mterdependence of actIvities in whIch tlte work IS
to be accomplished. The Contractor shall also
proVIde a tabular schedule repOlt sorted by
predcces~or and ,uccessor and a graphIcal schedule
repOlt sorted by Total Float and Early Start.
D The Contractor shall proVIde bi-weekly updates to
the CP\1 schcdule The Contractor shall also
provldc a written narratIve report dcscrib1l1g
current statu~ and Identlfymg potentlal delays Tins
rep0l1 shall. a~ a 1111111111Um, state whether the
contract IS on <,chcdulc. note any 1111lestones that
will not be met a 1d comment on the project's
cunent cntlcal path as it relates to the preVIOusly
~ubmJtted cntlca path.
00700 - page 4
I
E.
The CPM dehverables shall be incidental to the
Contract and the Owner will provide no addItIOnal
payment other than tltat identIfied in tlte bid fom1.
I
F.
Receipt by Owner of Contractor's schedule does
not constitute an approval or acceptance of
Contractor's constructIon means, methods, or
sequencmg, or Its ability to complete tlte Work
WIthin tlte Contract Time. Contractor shall revise
and resubmit its schedule, as necessary. Owner
may withhold a portion of progress payments untt!
a CPM Schedule has been subrmtted WhICh meets
the requirements of tltIS section.
I
I
I
G.
Contractor shall utIhze and comply witlt tlte CPyI
Schedule. On a biweekly, or as otltefWlse directed
by Owner, Contractor shall submit an updated
CPM Schedule at Its own expense to Owner
indIcating actual progress. If, in the opmion of
Owner, Contractor is not m conformance witlt the
CPM Schedule for reasons other tltan acts of Force
Majeure as Identified m SectIOn 3.05, Contractor
shall take such steps as are necessary to brmg tlte
actual completion dates of Its work actiVIties into
conformance WIth the CPM Schedule, or reVIse the
CPM Schedule to reconcile witlt the actual progress
of the Work.
I
I
I
I
H.
Contractor shall promptly notify Owner m wntmg
of any actual or anticipated event wluch IS delaymg
or could delay achIevement of any milestone or
performance of any critical patlt activity of tlte
Work. Contractor shall indIcate the expected
duration oftlte delay, tlte anticipated effect oftlte
delay on tlte CPM Schedule, and tlte action bemg
or to be taken to correct tlte problem. Provision of
such notIce does not reheve Contractor of its
obligation to complete tlte Work witltin tlte
Contract Trme.
I
I
I
I
I .
Pnor to commencmg work, tlte Owncr. ArchItect
and Contractor shall meet at a tIme and place ~ct by
the Owner to discuss the Project schedule, storage
of matenals and any otlter ~pccial reqUIrements that
concem tlte Project. The final ProJcct Schedule
shaH be submitted withm thIrty (30) calcndar days
following the conference. CondItIOns mutually
agreed upon at this conference may be mcorporated
mto the Contract.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
303 OWNER'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK 3.05 DELAY
FOR CONVENIENCE A Any delay m or faIlure of performance by Owner or
Contractor, other than the payment of money, shall
A. Owner may, at Its sole discretion, order Contractor, not constitute a default hereunder If and to the
in writmg, to suspend all or any part of the Work extent the cause for such delay or faIlure of
for up to 90 days, or for such longer penod as performance was unforeseeable and beyond the
mutually agreed control of the party ("Force Majeure") Acts of
Force Majeure mclude, but are not lInuted to'
B Upon receIpt of a written notIce suspendmg the
Work, Contractor shall Immediately comply wIth 1. Acts of God or the publIc enemy;
Its terms and take all reasonable steps to mmlnuze
the mcurrence of cost of performance dIrectly 2. Acts or omiSSIOns of any government entIty;
attrIbutable to such suspenSIOn. WIthin a penod up
to 90 days after the notIce IS delIvered to 3. FIre or other casualty for wruch Contractor IS
Contractor, or wlthm any extenSIOn of that period not responSIble,
to whIch the partIes shall have agreed, Owner shall 4. Quarantme or epIdemic;
eIther:
5. Strike or defensive lockout;
1. Cancel the wntten notIce suspendmg the
Work; or 6. Unusually severe weather condItIons whIch
could not have been reasonably antICIpated,
2. Terrnmate the Work covered by the notIce as and
proVIded m the terrnmatIOn provisions of Part
9: Termination of Work. 7. Unusual delay m receipt of supplIes or
products wruch were ordered and expedIted
C. If a wntten notIce suspendmg the Work is and for wruch no substItute reasonably
cancelled or the period of the notice or any acceptable to Owner was avaIlable.
extensIOn thereof exprres, Contractor shall resume
Work. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an eqUItable
adjustment in the Contract Trrne for changes m the
D. Contractor shall be entItled to an equitable time of performance directly attributable to an
adjustment in the Contract TIme, or Contract Sum, act of Force Majeure, provided it makes a request
or both, for mcreases in the time or cost of for equitable adjustment according to Section 7.03.
performance dIrectly attributable to such Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment m
suspension, prOVIded Contractor complies with all the Contract Sum resulting from an act of Force
requirements set forth in Part 7: Changes. Majeure.
3.04 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK FOR C. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable
CAUSE adjustment in Contract Time, and may be entItled
to an equitable adjustment m Contract Sum, if the
A. If Contractor falls or refuses to perform its cost or time of Contractor's performance IS changed
obligatIons in accordance with the Contract due to the fault or neglIgence of Owner, prOVIded
Documents, Owner may order Contractor, m the Contractor makes a request accordmg to
writmg, to stop tlIe Work, or any portion thereof, Sections 7.02 and 7.03.
until satisfactory corrective action has been taken.
D. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment III
B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an equitable Contract TIme or m the Contract Sum for any delay
adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum or failure of performance to the extent such delay
for any mcreased cost or tIme of performance or faIlure was caused by Contractor or anyone for
attrIbutable to Contractor's faIlure or refusal to whose acts Contractor is responsible.
perform or from any reasonable remedial actIOn
taken by Owner based upon such failure. E. To the extent any delay or failure of performance
was concurrently caused by the Owner and
Contractor, Contractor shall be entitled to an
00700 - page 5
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
adjustment m the Contract TIme for that portion of
the delay or faIlure of performance that was
concurrently caused, provIded the Contractor
makes a request for eqUitable adjustment accordmg
to SectIOn 7.03, hut shall not be entItled to an
adjustment in Contract Sum.
F Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to
prevent and mItigate the effects of any delay,
whether occasIOned by an act of Force Majeure or
otherwise.
3 06 NOTICE TO OWNER OF LABOR DISPUTES
A.
If Contractor has knowledge that any actual or
potential labor dIspute IS delaymg or threatens to
delay tImely performance in accordance With the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall immedIately
gIve notIce, mcludmg all relevant mformatIon, to
Owner.
B.
Contractor agrees to msert a provlSlon in its
Subcontracts and to requrre insertIOn m all sub-
subcontracts, that in the event timely performance
of any such contract is delayed or threatened by
delay by any actual or potentIal labor dispute, the
Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor shall
immedIately notIfy the next hIgher tier
Subcontractor or Contractor, as the case may be, of
all relevant mfonnatIOn concernmg the dIspute.
3.07 DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ACHIEVE
TIMELY COMPLETION
A. Liquidated Damages
1. Timely performance and completIon of the
Work is essential to Owner and trme limits
stated in the Contract Documents are of the
essence. Owner will incur serious and
substantial damages if Substantial Completion
of the Work does not occur within the Contract
Time. However, it would be difficult ifnot
impossIble to determine the exact amount of
such damages. Consequently, provisions for
lIqUidated damages are included in the
Contract Documents.
2. The lIquidated damage amounts set forth m the
Contract Documents WIll be assessed not as a
penalty, but as lIqUidated damages for breach
of the Contract Documents. This amount IS
fixed and agreed upon by and between the
Contractor and Owner because of the
00700 - page 6
I
rrnpracticabIhty and extreme dIfficulty of
fixing and ascertaming the actual damages the
Owner would m such event sustain ThIs
amount shall be construed as the actual amount
of damages sustamed by the Owner, and may
be retamed by the Owner and deducted from
pen OdIC payments to the Contractor.
I
I
B
3. Assessment ofhqUldated damages shall not
release Contractor from any further obhgatIOns
or habIhtIes pursuant to the Contract
Documents.
Actual Damages
I
I
Actual damages will be assessed for failure to
achieve Final CompletIon within the tIme prOVIded.
Actual damages Will be calculated on the baSIS of
drrect architectural, administratIve, and other
related costs attributable to the Project from the
date when Final CompletIOn should have been
achIeved, based on the date SubstantIal CompletIOn
is actually achieved, to the date Fmal CompletIOn IS
actually achieved. Owner may offset these costs
against any payment due Contractor
I
I
I
PART 4 - SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND
OTHER DOCUMENTS
I
4.01 DISCREPANCIES AND CONTRACT
DOCUMENT REVIEW
I
A.
The intent of the SpeCIfications and DraWIngs is to
describe a complete Project to be constructed m
accordance with the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
equipment, tools, transportation, perrrnts, and
supplIes, and perform the Work reqUired m
accordance with the DraWIngs, SpecificatIOns, and
other prOVIsions of the Contract Documents.
I
I
I
B.
The Contract Documents are complementary.
What is required by one part of the Contract
Documents shall be bmdmg as if required by all.
Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not
shown on the Drawmgs, or shown on the Drawmgs
and not mentIOned m the SpecificatIOns, shall be of
hke effect as If shown or mentIOned m both
I
I
c.
I
Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents with each other and WIth
informatIon furnished by Owner. If, during the
performance of the Work, Contractor finds a
conflict, error, inconsistency, or OmIssion m the
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
I
Contract Documents, it shall promptly and before
proceedmg with the Work affected thereby, report
such conflict, error, mconsIstency, or omissIOn to
NE in wrIting.
I
D Contractor shall do no Work without apphcable
Drawmgs, SpecIlications, or wrItten modIficatIons,
or Shop Drawings where required, unless
mstructed to do so m wrIting by Owner. If
Contractor perfonllS any construction actIVIty, and
it knows or reasonably should have known that any
of the Contract Documents contam a COnflIct, error,
mconsIstency, or ormSSIOn, Contractor shall be
responsIble for the performance and shall bear the
cost for ItS correctIOn.
I
I
I
I
E. Contractor shall prOVIde any work or materials the
prOVISIOn of which IS clearly Imphed and IS WIthin
the scope of the Contract Documents even if the
Contract Documents do not mention them
specifically.
I
F. QuestIOns regardmg mterpretatIOn of the
requirements of the Contract Documents shall be
referred to the A/E.
I
4 02 PROJECT RECORD
I
A. Contractor shall legIbly mark in mk on a separate
set of the Drawings and Specifications all actual
construction, mcludmg depths of foundatIons,
honzontal and vertIcal locations of mternal and
underground utIhtIes and appurtenances referenced
to permanent vIslble and accessible surface
rrnprovements, field changes of dimensions and
details, actual suppliers, manufacturers and trade
names, models of installed equipment, and Change
Order proposals. Tills separate set of Drawings and
Specifications shall be the "PROJECT RECORD"
I
I
I
I
B. The Project Record shall be maintained on the
Project Site throughout the construction and shall
be clearly labeled "PROJECT RECORD". The
Project Record shall be updated at least weekly
noting all changes and shall be available to Owner
at all times.
I
I
C Contractor shall submit the completed and finahzed
Project Record to NE pnor to Final Acceptance.
I
I
00700 - page 7
4.03 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. "Shop Drawmgs" means documents and other
informatIon reqUIred to be subrmtted to NE by
Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents,
showmg in detaIl: the proposed fabrication and
assembly of structural elements; and the installatIOn
(i.e. fonn, fit, and attachment details) of materials
and equipment. Shop Drawings mclude, but are
not hmited to, drawings, diagrams, layouts,
schematIcs, descriptIve hterature, IllustratIons,
schedules, performance and test data, samples, and
similar materials furnished by Contractor to explam
in detaIl speCIfic portions of the Work reqUIred by
the Contract Documents. For matenals and
equipment to be incorporated into the Work,
Contractor submittal shall include the name of the
manufacturer, the model number, and other
information concerning the performance, capacity,
nature, and rating of the Item. When directed,
Contractor shall submit all samples at its own
expense. Owner may duplicate, use, and disclose
Shop Drawings proVIded m accordance WIth the
Contract Documents.
B. Contractor shall coordinate all Shop Drawings, and
review them for accuracy, completeness, and
compliance with the Contract Documents and shall
indicate its approval thereon as evidence of such
coordination and review. Where reqUIred by law,
Shop Drawings shall be stamped by an appropnate
professional licensed by the state of Washington.
Shop Drawings submitted to NE without evidence
of Contractor's approval shall be returned for
resubmission. Contractor shall review, approve,
and submit Shop Drawings with reasonable
promptness and in such sequence as to cause no
delay in the Work or in the activities of Owner or
separate contractors. Contractor's submittal
schedule shaIl allow a reasonable tIme for NE
review. NE wiIl review, approve, or take other
appropriate action on the Shop Drawings.
Contractor shaIl perform no portIon of the Work
requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings
until the respective submittal has been reviewed
and the NE has approved or taken other
appropnate actIOn. Owner and NE shall respond
to Shop Drawing submittals WIth reasonable
promptness. Any Work by Contractor shall be m
accordance with reVIewed Shop Drawings.
Subrmttals made by Contractor which are not
required by the Contract Documents may be
returned without action.
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
C. Approval, or other appropriate actIon WIth regard
to Shop Drawmgs, by Owner or AlE shall not
relIeve Contractor of responsibilIty for any errors
or onnSSIOns in such Shop Drawings, nor from
responsIbIlIty for compliance WIth the reqUirements
of the Contract Documents. Unless speCIfied m the
Contract Documents, reVIew by Owner or AlE shall
not constItute an approval of the safety precautIOns
employed by Contractor dunng constructIon, or
constitute an approval of Contractor's means or
methods of construction. If Contractor fails to
obtam approval hefore mstallation, and the item or
work IS subsequently rejected, Contractor shall be
responsIble for all costs of correction.
D If Shop Drawmg., show vanations from the
reqUirements of the Contract Documents,
Contractor shall describe such vanatIOns m wnting,
separate from the Shop Drawings, at the time it
subnnts the Shop Drawings contaimng such
vanatIOns. If AlE approves any such variatIOn, an
appropnate Change Order will be issued. If the
variatIon IS minor and does not mvolve an
adjustment in the Contract SUlTl or Contract Time, a
Change Order need not be issued; however, the
modIficatIOn shall be recorded upon the Project
Record.
E. Unless otherwise provided in DiviSIOn I, Contractor
shall subnnt to AlE for approval 5 copies of all
Shop Drawmgs Unless otherwise indicated, 3 sets
of all Shop Drawmgs shall be retamed by AlE and
2 sets shall be relUmed to Contractor.
4.04 ORGANIZATION OF SPECIFICATIONS
SpeCIficatIOns are prepared m sections which conform
generally with CSI Master Format for Construction
SpeCIfications. These sectIOns are for Owner and
Contractor convemence and shall not control Contractor
in dlvldmg the Work among the Subcontractors or in
establishing the extent of the Work to be performed by
any trade.
4.05 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS,
SPECIFICA TIO:\J"S, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS
A The Drawmgs, Specifications, and other docUlTlents
prepared by AlE are mstruments of AlE's servIce
through which the Work to be executed by
Contractor IS descnbed. NeIther Contractor nor any
Subcontractor shall own or claim a copyrIght m the
Drawings, Speci1ications, and other docUlTlents
prepared by AlE. and AlE shall be deemed the
author of them and WIll, along WIth any nghts of
00700 - page 8
I
Owner, retain all common law, statutory, and other
reserved nghts, in addition to the copyrIght. All
copies of these docUlTlents, except Contractor's set,
shall be returned or SUitably accounted for to AlE,
on request, upon completion of the Work.
I
I
B
The Drawings, SpeCIfications, and other documents
prepared by the AlE, and copies thereof furmshed
to Contractor, are for use solely With respect to thIS
Project. They are not to be used by Contractor or
any Subcontractor on other projects or for addItIOns
to this Project outSIde the scope of the Work
WIthout the speCIfic wntten consent of Owner and
AlE. Contractor and Subcontractors are granted a
lirmted license to use and reproduce applIcable
portions of the Drawings, SpeCIfications, and other
docUlTlents prepared by AlE appropriate to and for
use in the execution of theIr Work.
I
I
I
c.
I
Contractor and all Subcontractors grant a non-
exclusive license to Owner, without addItional cost
or royalty, to use for its own purposes (mcludmg
reproduction) all Shop Drawings, together WIth the
mformatIon and diagrams contamed therem,
prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor. In
providing Shop Drawmgs, Contractor and all
Subcontractors warrant that they have authority to
grant to Owner a lIcense to use the Shop Drawmgs,
and that such license is not in violatIon of any
copyright or other intellectual property nght.
Contractor agrees to defend and indemnify Owner
pursuant to the indemruty provisions in SectIOn
5.23 from any violations of copyright or other
intellectual property rights arising out of Owner's
use of the Shop Drawings hereunder, or to secure
for Owner, at Contractor's own cost, lIcenses in
conformity with this section.
I
I
I
I
I
D.
The Shop Drawings and other subrmttals prepared
by Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, or theIr
equipment or material suppliers, and copIes thereof
furmshed to Contractor, are for use solely With
respect to this Project They are not to be used by
Contractor or any Subcontractor of any tier, or
material or equipment supplier, on other projects or
for additions to this Project outSIde the scope of the
Work without the specific written consent of
Owner. The Contractor, Subcontractors of any tIer,
and matenal or eqUipment supplIers are granted a
lIrmted license to use and reproduce applIcable
portIOns of the Shop Drawings and other submittals
appropriate to and for use in the executIon of theIr
Work under the Contract DocUlTlents.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
I
PART 5 - PERFORMANCE
5.01 CONTRACTOR CONTROL AND
SUPERVISION
I
A. Contractor shall supervIse and dIrect the Work,
usmg Its best skill and attention, and shall perform
the Work in a slallful manner. Contractor shall be
solely responsIble for and have control over
constructIon means, methods, technIques,
sequences, and procedures and for coordmatmg all
portIons of the VI' ork, unless the Contract
Documents gIve other specIfic mstructIOns
concernmg these matters. Contractor shall dIsclose
its means and methods of constructIon when
requested by Owner.
I
I
I
I
B.
Performance of the Work shall be dIrectly
supervised by a full-tune competent superintendent
who is satisfactOlY to Owner and has authonty to
act for Contractor. The superintendent shall not be
changed WIthout the pnor wntten consent of
Owner.
I
I
c.
Contractor shall be responsible to Owner for acts
and omissions of Contractor, Subcontractors, and
their employees and agents.
I
D.
Contractor shall enforce StrIct discipline and good
order among Contractor's employees and other
persons performmg the Work. Contractor shall not
permit employment of persons not skilled in tasks
assIgned to them Contractor's employees shall at
all tunes conduct bus mess in a manner which
assures fair, equal, and nondiscriminatory treatment
of all persons. Owner may, by written notice,
request Contractor to remove from the Work or
Project site any employee Owner reasonably deems
incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable.
I
I
I
E.
Contractor shall keep on the Project site a copy of
the Drawings, SpecIfications, addenda, reviewed
Shop Drawings, and permits and permit drawings.
I
I
F.
Contractor shall ensure that its owner(s) and
employees, and those of its Subcontractors, comply
WIth the Ethics in Public Service Act RCW 42.52,
which, among other things, prohibIts state
employees from havmg an econonuc mterest in any
pubhc works contract that was made by, or
supervIsed by, that employee. Contractor shall
remove, at ItS sole cost and expense, any of its, or
its Subcontractors', employees, if they are in
vIOlatIOn of this act.
I
I
I
00700 - page 9
5.02 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES
A. Unless otherwIse provIded m the Contract
Documents, Contractor shall pay for and obtam all
permits, hcenses, and inspectIons necessary for
proper executIon and completIOn of the Work.
Pnor to Fmal Acceptance, the approved, sIgned
permits shall be delivered to Owner.
B. If allowances for permits or utIlIty fees are called
for in the Contract Documents and set forth in
Contractor's bId, and the acmal costs of those
permits or fees dIffer from the allowances m the
Contract Documents, the difference shall be
adjusted by Change Order.
C. Contractor shall comply with and give notices
required by all federal, state, and local laws,
ordmances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of
publIc authorities applicable to performance of the
Work.
5.03 PATENTS AND ROYALTIES
Contractor is responsIble for, and shall pay, all royaltIes
and lIcense fees. Contractor shall defend, indemnIfy, and
hold Owner harmless from any costs, expenses, and
liabilities arising out of the mfringement by Contractor of
any patent, copyright, or other intellecmal property nght
used in the Work; however, provIded that Contractor
gives prompt notice, Contractor shall not be responsIble
for such defense or indemnity when a partIcular deSIgn,
process, or product of a particular manufacturer or
manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. If
Contractor has reason to belIeve that use of the required
design, process, or product constimtes an infringement of
a patent or copyright, it shall promptly notify Owner of
such potentIal infringement.
5.04 PREVAILING WAGES
A.
Contractor shall pay the prevailmg rate of wages to
all workers, laborers, or mechanics employed m the
performance of any part of the Work m accordance
with RCW 39.12 and the rules and regulatIOns of
the Department of Labor and Industries. The
schedule of prevailing wage rates for the locahty or
localities of the Work, IS deternuned by the
IndustrIal StatIstIcIan of the Department of Labor
and Industries. It is the Contractor's responsibility
to verify the applIcable prevaIlmg wage rate.
B.
Before commencmg the Work, Contractor shall file
a statement under oath WIth Owner and with the
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
Director of Labor and Industries certifymg the rate
of hourly wage paId and to be paid each
classIficatIOn of laborers, workers, or mechamcs
employed upon the Work by Contractor and
Subcontractors. Such rates of hourly wage shall
not be less than the prevaIlmg wage rate.
C DIsputes regardlllg prevailmg wage rates shall be
referred for arbItratIOn to the DIrector of the
Department of Labor and IndustrIes. The
arbItration decIsIOn shall be final and conclusive
and bmdmg on all partIes involved in the dispute as
provided for by RCW 39.12.060.
D. Each ApplIcatIOn for Payment submitted by
Contractor shall state that prevaIling wages have
been paId in accordance with the prefiled
statement(s) of intent, as approved. Copies of the
approved mtent statement(s) shall be posted on the
job site with the address and telephone number of
the IndustrIal StatIstIcIan of the Department of
Labor and Industnes where a complaint or inquiry
concerning prevaIling wages may be made.
E. In complIance wlth chapter 296-127 WAC,
Contractor shall pay to the Department of Labor
and IndustrIes the currently establIshed fee(s) for
each statement ofmtent and/or affidavIt of wages
paid subnutted to the Department of Labor and
Industnes for certification.
5.05 HOURS OF LABOR
A. Contractor shall comply with all applicable
provIsions ofRCW 49.28 and they are incorporated
herein by reference. Pursuant to that statute, no
laborer, worker, or mechanic employed by
Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any other person
performing or contracting to do the whole or any
part of the Work. shall be perrmtted or required to
work more than eight hours in anyone calendar
day, provided, that in cases of extraordmary
emergency, such as danger to life or property, the
hours of work may be extended, but in such cases
the rate of pay for tIme employed in excess of eIght
hours of each calendar day shall be not less than
one and one-half times the rate allowed for this
same amount of time during eIght hours' servIce.
B. Notwlthstandmg the precedmg paragraph, RCW
49.28 perrmts a contractor or subcontractor in any
publIc works contract subject to those provIsions,
to enter into an agreement with Its employees in
which the employees work up to ten hours m a
calendar day. No such agreement may provide that
I
the employees work ten-hour days for more than
four calendar days a week. Any such agreement IS
subject to approval by the employees. The overtIme
proVISIOns ofRCW 49.28 shall not apply to the
hours, up to forty hours per week, worked pursuant
to any such agreement.
I
I
5.06 NONDISCRIMINATION
I
A. DlscnminatIon in all phases of employment IS
prohIbited by, among other laws and regulations,
Title VII of the CIvil Rights Act of 1964, the
Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Act of 1974,
sectIOns 503 and 504 of the VocatIonal
Rehabilitation Act of 1973, the Equal Employment
Act of 1972, the Age DiscrinunatIon Act of 1967,
the Americans WIth DisabIlIties Act of 1990, the
CiVIl Rights Act of 1991, Presidential Executive
Order 11246, ExecutIve Order 11375, the
Washington State Law Against DiscnminatIon,
RCW 49.60, and Gubernatonal ExecutIve Order
85-09. These laws and regulatIOns establIsh
nummum reqUIrements for affirmatIve actIOn and
fau employment practIces WhICh Contractor must
meet.
I
I
I
I
I
B. Durmg performance of the Work:
1. Contractor shall not discriminate agamst any
employee or applicant for employment because
of race, creed, color, natIonal ongm, sex, age,
marital status, or the presence of any phYSIcal,
sensory, or mental dIsability, VIetnam era
veteran status, or dIsabled veteran status, nor
COmmIt any other unfarr practices as defmed m
RCW 49.60.
I
I
I
2. Contractor shall, in all solICItations or
advertisements for employees placed by or for
It, state that all qualIfied applicants WIll be
conSIdered for employment, without regard to
race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age,
marital status, or the presence of any phYSIcal,
sensory, or mental disabIlity.
I
I
3. Contractor shall send to each labor umon,
employment agency, or representatIve of
workers WIth whIch It has a collectIve
bargammg agreement or other contract or
understanding, a notIce advismg the labor
union, employment agency, or workers'
representatIve of Contractor's obhgatIons
I
I
I
00700 - page 10
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
I
accordmg to the Contract Documents and
RCW 49.60
I
4. Contractor shall permit access to Its books,
records, and accounts, and to its prermses by
Owner, and by the Washmgton State Human
Rights Conumssion, for the purpose of
mvestlgation to ascertain compliance with thiS
sectIOn of the Contract Documents.
5. Contractor shall mclude the provisions of thIS
sectIOn m every Subcontract.
I
I
5.07 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
I
A. Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,
mamtaining, and supervismg all safety precautions
and programs m connectIOn with the performance
of the Work
I
B. In carrymg out its responsibilities accordmg to the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall protect the
lives and health of employees perfonnmg the Work
and other persons who may be affected by the
Work; prevent damage to matenals, supplies, and
eqUIpment whether on site or stored off-SIte; and
prevent damage to other property at the Site or
adjacent thereto. Contractor shall comply with all
applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and
orders of any public body having jurisdIction for
the safety of persons or property or to protect them
from damage, injury, or loss; shall erect and
maintam all necessary safeguards for such safety
and protection; and shall notify owners of adjacent
property and utihties when prosecutIOn of the Work
may affect them.
I
I
I
I
I
C. Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of
exposure data on all incidents relating to the Work
resulting in death, traumatic injury, occupational
disease, or damage to property, materials, supplies,
or equipment. Contractor shall irmnedIately report
any such mcident to Owner. Owner shall, at all
times, have a nght of access to all records of
exposure.
I
I
I
D. Contractor shall provide all persons working on the
Project Site with informatIOn and traming on
hazardous chermcals m theIr work at the time of
theIr mltlal assignment, and whenever a new hazard
IS introduced mto their work area.
I
I
1. Information. At a mimmum, Contractor shall
inform persons working on the Project Site of:
I
00700 - page II
a. The reqUIrements of chapter 296-62
WAC, General Occupational Health
Standards;
b. Any operations m their work area where
hazardous chermcals are present, and
c. The location and avaIlability of wntten
hazard communication programs,
includmg the reqUIred list(s) of hazardous
chemicals and matenal safety data sheets
reqUIred by chapter 296-62 WAC.
2. Training. At a mimmum, Contractor shall
provide training for persons workmg on the
Project Site, which includes:
a. Methods and observatIOns that may be
used to detect the presence or release of a
hazardous chermcal in the work area (such
as momtoring conducted by the employer,
contmuous momtormg devices, visual
appearance or odor of hazardous
chermcals when bemg released, etc.);
b. The physical and health hazards of the
chemicals m the Work area;
c. The measures such persons can take to
protect themselves from these hazards,
including specific procedures Contractor,
or its Subcontractors, or others have
implemented to protect those on the
Project Site from exposure to hazardous
chemicals, such as appropnate work
practices, emergency procedures, and
personal protective equipment to be used;
and
d. The details of the hazard commumcatIons
program developed by Contractor, or ItS
Subcontractors, mcludmg an explanatIOn
of the labehng system and the matenal
safety data sheet (MSDS), and how
employees can obtain and use the
appropriate hazard information.
E.
Contractor's responsibility for hazardous, tOXIC, or
harmful substances shall mclude the followmg
duties'
1. Contractor shall not keep, use, dispose,
transport, generate, or sell on or about the
Project Site, any substances now or hereafter
deSignated as, or which are subject to
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
regulation a~, hazardous, toxic, dangerous, or
harmful by any federal, state or local law,
regulation, statute or ordinance (hereinafter
collectively referred to as "hazardous
substances", 10 vIOlation of any such law,
regulatIOn, statute, or ordmance, but 10 no case
shall any such hazardous substance be stored
more than 90 days on the Project SIte.
2 Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of all
spIlls or releases of any hazardous substances
whIch are otherwIse reqUIred to be reported to
any regulatory agency and pay the cost of
cleanup. Contractor shall promptly notify
Owner of all faIlures to comply with any
federal, state, or local law, regulation, or
ordmance; all inspections of the Project SIte by
any regulatory entity concermng the same; all
regulatory orders or fines; and all responses or
interIm cleanup actIOns taken by or proposed
to be taken by any government entity or prIvate
party on the Project Site.
F All Work shall be performed WIth due regard for
the safety of the publIc. Contractor shall perform
the Work so as to cause a rmrumum of mterruptIon
of vehIcular traffic or inconveruence to
pedestrIans. All arrangements to care for such
traffic shall be Contractor's responSIbilIties. All
expenses involved in the maintenance of traffic by
way of detours shall be borne by Contractor.
G. In an emergency affecting the safety oflife or the
Work or of adjoming property, Contractor IS
permitted to act, at its discretion, to prevent such
threatened loss or injury, and Contractor shall so
act if so authorized or instructed.
H. Nothing provided in this sectIon shall be
construed as imposing any duty upon Owner or
NE with regard to, or as constitutIng any express
or implied assumption of control or responsibility
over, Project SIte safety, or over any other safety
conditions relatmg to employees or agents of
Contractor or any of ItS Subcontractors, or the
publIc
5.08 OPERATIONS. MATERIAL HANDLING, AND
STORAGE AREAS
A. Contractor shall confme all operations, including
storage of materials, to Owner-approved areas.
B. Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops,
offices) and utilities may be provided by
I
Contractor only with the consent of Owner and
WIthout expense to Owner. The temporary
bUIldmgs and utIlItIes shall remam the property of
Contractor and shall be removed by Contractor at
ItS expense upon completIOn of the Work
I
I
C. Contractor shall use only establIshed roadways or
temporary roadways authonzed by Owner. When
materials are transported m prosecutmg the Work,
vehIcles shall not be loaded beyond the loadmg
capaCIty recommended by the manufacturer of the
vehIcle or prescribed by federal, state, or local law
or regulation.
I
I
D. OwnershIp and control of all materials or faCIlIty
components to be demolished or removed from
the Project SIte by Contractor shall immediately
vest in Contractor upon severance of the
component from the faCIlIty or severance of the
materIal from the Project SIte. Contractor shall be
responsible for compliance with all laws
govern 109 the storage and ultimate dIsposal.
Contractor shall prOVIde Owner WIth a copy of all
mamfests and receIpts evidencing proper disposal
when reqUIred by Owner or applicable law
I
I
I
I
E. Contractor shall be responSIble for the proper care
and protection of Its materials and equipment
delivered to the Project Site. Materials and
equipment may be stored on the prermses subject
to approval of Owner. When Contractor uses any
pomon of the Project SIte as a shop, Contractor
shall be responSIble for any repaIrs, patchmg, or
cleaning arismg from such use.
I
I
F. Contractor shall protect and be responsible for any
damage or loss to the Work, or to the materIals or
equipment until the date of Substantial
Completion, and shall repaIr or replace WIthout
cost to Owner any damage or loss that may occur,
except damages or loss caused by the acts or
ormssions of Owner. Contractor shall also protect
and be responsible for any damage or loss to the
Work, or to the materIals or equipment, after the
date of Substantial Completion, and shall repaIr or
replace without cost to Owner any such damage or
loss that might occur, to the extent such damages
or loss are caused by the acts or ormssions of
Contractor, or any Subcontractor
I
I
I
I
5.09 PRIOR NOTICE OF EXCAVATION
I
A. "Excavation" means an operatIOn 10 WhICh earth,
rock, or other materIal on or below the ground IS
I
00700 - page 12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
moved or otherwise dIsplaced by any means, B. Contractor shall only remove trees when
except the tillmg of soilless than 12 inches in depth specifically authorized to do so, and shall protect
for agricultural purposes, or road dItch mamtenance vegetatIOn that wIll remam m place.
that does not change the onginal road grade or
dItch flow lme. Before commencing any 5.12 LAYOUT OF WORK
excavatIOn, Contractor shall provide notIce of the
scheduled commencement of excavatIOn to all A. Contractor shall plan and layout the Work m
owners of underground facIlIties or utIlItIes, advance of operatIons so as to coordinate all work
through locator services. without delay or revIsion.
B. Contractor shall layout the Work from Owner-
5.10 UNFORESEEN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS established baselines and bench marks indIcated on
the Drawmgs, and shall be responSIble for all field
A If Contractor encounters conditions at the SIte measurements in connectIOn with the layout.
which are subsurface or otherwIse concealed Contractor shall furnish, at it's own expense, all
phYSIcal conditions WhICh differ matenally from stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, tools,
those indicated in the Contract Documents, or matenals, and labor required to layout any part of
unknown phYSIcal conditions of an unusual nature the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for
which dIffer materially from those ordinarily found executIng the Work to the lines and grades that may
to eXist and generally recognized as mherent in be established. Contractor shall be responSible for
construction activities of the character provided for maintaining or restoring all stakes and other marks
m the Contract Documents, then Contractor shall establIshed.
give written notice to Owner promptly and in no
event later than 7 days after the first observance of 5.13 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
the condItIons. CondItIons shall not be disturbed
pnor to such notIce. A. All eqUIpment, matenal, and artIcles mcorporated
into the Work shall be new and of the most SUitable
B. If such conditions dIffer materIally and cause a grade for the purpose mtended, unless otherwise
change m Contractor's cost of, or time requued for, specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
performance of any part of the Work, the References in the Specifications to eqUIpment,
Contractor may be entitled to an equitable material, articles, or patented processes by trade
adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum, name, make, or catalog number, shall be regarded
or both, provided it makes a request therefore as as establishing a standard quality and shall not be
provided in Part 7; Changes. construed as lirmting competition. Contractor may,
at its option, use any equipment, material, artIcle,
5.11 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES, or process that, in the judgment of AlE, is equal to
EQUIPMENT, VEGETATION, UTILITIES, AND that named in the Specifications, unless otherwise
IMPROVEMENTS specifically prOVIded in the Contract Documents.
A. Contractor shall protect from damage all existing B. Contractor shall do all cutting, fittmg, or patchmg
structures, equipment, improvements, utilities, and that may be required to make its several parts fit
vegetation: at or near the Project Site; and on together properly, or receive or be received by
adjacent property of a thud party, the locatIons of work of others set forth in, or reasonably ImplIed
WhICh are made known to or should be known by by, the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not
Contractor. Contractor shall repair any damage, endanger any work by cutting, excavating, or
including that to the property of a third party, otherwise altenng the Work and shall not cut or
resulting from failure to comply with the alter the work of any other contractor unless
reqUIrements of the Contract Documents or failure approved in advance by Owner.
to exerCIse reasonable care in perfonning the
Work. If Contractor falls or refuses to repair the C. Should any of the Work be found defective, or m
damage promptly, Owner may have the necessary any way not in accordance with the Contract
work performed and charge the cost to Contractor Documents, thIs Work, m whatever stage of
completIon, may be rejected by Owner.
00700 - page 13
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
5.14 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY
SERVICES
A. Owner shall make all reasonable utIhtIes available
to Contractor from eXIstmg outlets and supplies, as
specified m the Contract Documents. Unless
otherwise provIded m the Contract Documents, the
utIhty service consumed shall be charged to or paid
for by Contractor at prevaIhng rates charged to
Owner or, where the utIhty IS produced by Owner,
at reasonable rates determined by Owner.
Contractor WIll carefully conserve any utIhtIes
furnIshed
B. Contractor shall, at its expense and m a skillful
manner satisfactory to Owner, install and mamtain
all necessary temporary connectIOns and
distrIbution lmes, together With appropriate
protective deVIces, and all meters required to
measure the amount of each utilIty used for the
purpose of determining charges. Prior to the date
of Final Acceptance, Contractor shall remove all
temporary connections, distrIbution lines, meters,
and associated equipment and materials.
5 15 TESTS AND INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall mamtain an adequate testmg and
inspection program and perform such tests and
mspections as are necessary or required to ensure
that the Work conforms to the requirements of the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall be
responsIble for inspection and quality surveillance
of all its Work and all Work performed by any
Subcontractor. Unless otherwise provided,
Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests,
inspectIOns, and approvals with an mdependent
testing laboratory or entity acceptable to Owner, or
with the appropnate public authority, and shall bear
all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals.
Contractor shall gIVe Owner timely notice of when
and where tests and inspecnons are to be made.
Contractor shall mamtam complete mspectIOn
records and make them available to Owner.
B Owner may, at any reasonable tlffie, conduct such
inspections and tests as It deems necessary to
ensure that the Work is in accordance with the
Contract Documents. Owner shall promptly notify
Contractor If an inspection or test reveals that the
Work is not in accordance with the Contract
Documents. Unless the subject items are expressly
accepted by Owner, such Owner mspection and
tests are for the sole benefit of Owner and do not.
I
I. ConstItute or imply acceptance;
I
2. Relieve Contractor ofresponsibIhty for
provIdmg adequate quahty control measures,
I
3. RelIeve Contractor ofresponsIbIhty for rIsk of
loss or damage to the Work, matenals, or
eqUipment;
4. RelIeve Contractor of its responsIbihty to
comply with the requirements of the Contract
Documents; or
I
I
5. Impair Owner's right to reject defective or
nonconformmg items, or to avaIl itself of any
other remedy to whIch it may be entitled.
I
C. Neither observations by an inspector retained by
Owner, the presence or absence of such inspector
on the SIte, nor inspections, tests, or approvals by
others, shall relieve Contractor from any
reqUirement of the Contract Documents, nor is any
such mspector authorized to change any term or
condItion of the Contract Documents.
I
I
D. Contractor shall promptly furnish, without
addItional charge, all faCIlities, labor, matenal and
equipment reasonably needed for performing such
safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be
required by Owner. Owner may charge Contractor
any additional cost of inspection or testing when
Work IS not ready at the tlffie specified by
Contractor for illspecnon or testmg, or when pnor
rejection makes re-inspection or retest necessary.
Owner shall perform its inspectIons and tests ill a
manner that will cause no undue delay in the Work.
I
I
I
I
5.16 CORRECTION OF NONCONFORMING WORK
A. If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the
requirements ill the Contract Documents, It must, If
required ill wntmg by Owner, be uncovered for
Owner's observatIOn and be replaced at the
Contractor's expense and without change ill the
Contract Time.
I
I
B. If, at any time prior to Final Completion, Owner
deSIres to examine the Work, or any portion of It,
which has been covered, Owner may request to see
such Work and It shall be uncovered by Contractor.
If such Work IS m accordance with the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall be enntled to an
adjustment in the Contract Sum for the costs of
uncovenng and replacement, and, If completIon of
I
I
I
00700 - page 14
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
I
the Work is thereby delayed, an adjustment in the
Contract Time, provided it makes a request
therefore as provided in Part 7; Changes. Ifsuch
Work IS not m accordance with the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall pay the costs of
exarrunatIon and reconstructIOn.
I
I
C. Contractor shall promptly correct Work found by
Owner not to conform to the reqUIrements of the
Contract Documents, whether observed before or
after Substantial CompletIOn and whether or not
fabncated, mstalled, or completed. Contractor shall
bear all costs of correctmg such non-conforming
Work, mcludmg addItIonal testing and inspectIOns.
I
I
D. If, wIthm one year after the date of Substantial
Completion of the Work or deSIgnated portIOn
thereof, or within one year after the date for
commencement of any system warranties
established under Section 6.08, or within the terms
of any applicable special warranty reqUIred by the
Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to
be not m accordance with the reqUIrements of the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct it
promptly after receIpt ofwntten notIce from Owner
to do so. Owner shall give such notice promptly
after discovery of the condItion. This period of one
year shall be extended, WIth respect to portions of
Work fIrst performed after Substantial Completion,
by the penod of time between Substantial
Completion and the actual performance of the
Work. Contractor's duty to correct with respect to
Work repaired or replaced shall run for one year
from the date of repaIr or replacement. OblIgations
under this paragraph shall survive Final
Acceptance.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Contractor shall remove from the Project Site
portions of the Work which are not in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents
and are neither corrected by Contractor nor
accepted by Owner.
I
I
F If Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work
withm a reasonable time after written notice to do
so, Owner may replace, correct, or remove the
nonconforming Work and charge the cost thereof to
the Contractor.
I
G. Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting
destroyed or damaged Work, whether completed or
partIally completed, caused by Contractor's
correction or removal of Work which is not in
I
I
accordance WIth the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
H Nothing contamed m thIS sectIOn shall be construed
to establIsh a penod of IIrrutation WIth respect to
other oblIgatIons WhICh Contractor rrught have
according to the Contract Documents.
EstablIshment of the tIme penod of one year as
descnbed in paragraph 5 .16D relates only to the
speCIfIc obligation of Contractor to correct the
Work, and has no relationshIp to the tIme WIthin
WhICh the Contractor's obligatIon to comply with
the Contract Documents may be sought to be
enforced, includmg the trrne withm whIch such
proceedmgs may be commenced.
I. If Owner prefers to accept Work which IS not in
accordance with the requIrements of the Contract
Documents, Owner may do so instead of requinng
ItS removal and correction, m WhICh case the
Contract Sum may be reduced as appropnate and
equitable.
5.17 CLEAN UP
Contractor shall at all tImes keep the Project site,
includmg hauling routes, infrastructures, utIlItIes, and
storage areas, free from accumulatIons of waste matenals.
Before completing the Work, Contractor shall remove
from the premises its rubbish, tools, scaffoldmg,
equipment, and materials. Upon completing the Work,
Contractor shall leave the Project site m a clean, neat, and
orderly condition satIsfactory to Owner. If Contractor
fails to clean up as provided herem, and after reasonable
notice from Owner, Owner may do so and the cost thereof
shall be charged to Contractor.
5.18 ACCESS TO WORK
Contractor shall provide Owner and AlE access to the
Work m progress wherever located.
5.19 OTHER CONTRACTS
Owner may undertake or award other contracts for
additIonal work at or near the Project site. Contractor
shall reasonably cooperate with the other contractors and
with Owner's employees and shall carefully adapt
scheduling and perform the Work in accordance WIth
these Contract Documents to reasonably accommodate the
other work.
00700 - page 15
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
5.20 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS
A.
Before submittIng the first ApplIcation for
Payment, Contractor shall furnish In wnting to
Owner the namef., addresses, and telephone
numbers of all Subcontractors, as well as supplIers
provIdIng matenals In excess of$2,500
Contractor shall utIlize Subcontractors and
supplIers whIch are expenenced and qualIfied, and
meet the requirements of the Contract Documents,
If any. Contractor shaIl not utilIze any
Subcontractor or suppher to whom the Owner has a
reasonable objection, and shall obtam Owner's
wntten consent before makIng any substItutIons or
addItIons.
B.
All Subcontracts must be In wnting. By
appropnate wntten agreement, Contractor shall
reqUIre each Subcontractor, so far as applIcable to
the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to
be bound to Contractor by terms of the Contract
Documents, and to assume toward Contractor all
the obligatIons and responsIbilItIes whIch
Contractor assumes toward Owner in accordance
WIth the Contracl Documents. Each Subcontract
shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner m
accordance with the Contract Documents with
respect to the Work to be performed by the
Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will
not prejudice such rights. Where appropnate,
Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter
Into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.
However, nothing in this paragraph shaIl be
construed to alter the contractual relatIons between
Contractor and its Subcontractors with respect to
msurance or bonds.
C.
Contractor shall schedule, supervise, and
coordinate the operations of all Subcontractors. No
Subcontracting of any of the Work shall relIeve
Contractor from Its responsibility for the
performance of the Work in accordance wIth the
Contract Documents or any other obhgations of the
Contract Documents.
D.
Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the
Work is hereby assigned by Contractor to Owner
provided that:
1. The assIgnment is effectIve only after
tennmation by Owner for cause pursuant to
SectIon 9.01 and only for those Subcontracts
WhICh Owner accepts by notIfying the
Subcontractor m writIng; and
I
2. After the assignment IS effective, Owner WIll
assume all fuhIre dutIes and oblIgatIons toward
the Subcontractor WhICh Contractor assumed
m the Subcontract.
I
I
3. The assIgnment IS subject to the pnor rIghts of
the surety, If any, oblIgated under any bond
provided in accordance WIth the Contract
Documents
I
5.21 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION
I
A. In addition to any speCIal warrantIes prOVIded
elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Contractor
warrants that all Work conforms to the
requirements of the Contract Documents and IS free
of any defect In eqUIpment, material, or deSIgn
furnIshed, or workmanshIp performed, by
Contractor.
I
I
B. With respect to all warrantIes, express or ImplIed.
for Work performed or matenals furmshed
accordmg to the Contract Documents, Contractor
shall:
I
I
1. Obtam all warranties that would be gIVen m
normal commercial practice;
2. Require all warrantIes to be executed, in
writing, for the benefit of Owner;
I
3. Enforce all warranties for the benefit of
Owner, if dIrected by Owner; and
I
4. Be responsible to enforce any subcontractor's,
manufachIrer's, or supplIer's warranty should
they extend beyond the period specified in the
Contract Documents.
I
I
C. The obligatIOns under this sectIon shall survIve
Final Acceptance.
I
5.22 INDEMNIFICA nON
A. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold
Owner and AlE hannless from and against all
claims, demands, losses, damages, or costs,
Including but not limited to damages arising out of
bodily injury or death to persons and damage to
property, caused by or resulting from:
I
I
1. The sole neglIgence of Contractor or any of ItS
Subcontractors;
I
00700 - page 16
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
I
2. The concurrent negligence of Contractor, or
any Subcontractor, but only to the extent of the
neglIgence of Contractor or such
Subcontractor; and
I
3. The use of any design, process, or eqUipment
which constitutes an mfnngement of any
Umted States patent presently issued, or
viOlates any other propnetary mterest,
mcludmg copyright, trademark, and trade
secret
I
I
B In any actiOn agamst Owner and any other entity
mdemnified in accordance With this section, by any
employee of Contractor, its Subcontractors, Sub-
subcontractors, agents, or anyone drrectly or
indirectly employed by any of them, the
mdemnificatiOn obhgatiOn of this section shall not
be lrrmted by a hrmt on the amount or type of
damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or
for Contractor or any Subcontractor under RCW
Title 51, the IndustrIal Insurance Act, or any other
employee benefil acts. In addition, Contractor
waives immunity as to Owner and AlE only, in
accordance With RCW Title 51.
I
I
I
I
I
PART 6 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
6.01 CONTRACT SUM
I
Owner shall pay Contractor the Contract Sum for
performance of the W 0] k, in accordance with the Contract
Documents. The Contract Sum shall mclude all taxes
imposed by law and properly chargeable to the Project,
including sales tax.
I
I
6.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
I
~ot less than twenty (20) days prior to submitting Its frrst
ApplicatiOn for Payment, Contractor shall submit to
Owner for approval a breakdown allocating the total
Contract Sum to each pnnc]ple category of work, m such
detail as requested by Owner. BreakdO\\-11 of costs ,>hall
follow the trade divisiolls of the Specification and each
Hem thereunder shall in:lude Its pro-rated part of
overhead and profit so the sum of the ite-rru, will equal the
Contract pnce. Breakd.)wn will correspond exactly to
Items of work m the prcgress schedule, including work of
Subcontractors. Furthe~' breakdown of specific line items
may be required by OW1cr after initial review. The
approved Schedule of Values shall include appropriate
amounts for demobilization, record drawings, O&M
manuals, and any other reqUirements for Project closeout,
I
I
I
I
and shall be used by Owner as the basis for progress
payments. Payment for Work shall be made only for and
m accordance with those items mcIuded m the Schedule of
Values.
6.03 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. At monthly mtervals, unless deterrnmed otherwise
by Owner, Contractor shall subnut to Owner an
]tenuzed Apphcation for Payment for Work
completed m accordance with the Contract
Documents and the approved Schedule of Values.
Each applicatiOn shall be supported by such
substantiating data as Owner may reqUire
B. By subnuttmg an ApphcatiOn for Payment,
Contractor is certifymg that all Subcontractors have
been paid, less earned retainage in accordance with
RCW 60.28.010, as their mterests appeared m the
last preceding certificate of payment. By
submitting an ApphcatiOn for Payment, Contractor
]S re-certifymg that the representatiOns set forth 111
Section 1.03 are true and correct, to the best of
Contractor's knowledge, as of the date of the
Apphcation for Payment.
C. At the time ]t submits an ApplicatiOn for Payment,
Contractor shall analyze and reconcile, to the
satisfaction of Owner, the actual progress of the
Work with the Progress Schedule.
D. If authorized by Owner, the Application for
Payment may include request for payment for
material delivered to the Project Site and SUitably
stored, or for completed preparatory work.
Payment may similarly be requested for material
stored off the Project site, prOVided Contractor
complies with or furnishes satisfactory evidence of
the followmg:
I. The material will be placed m a warehouse that
is structurally sound, dry, hghted and SUitable
for the materials to be stored;
2. The warehouse is located Within a 10-nule
radius of the Project. Other locations may be
utihzed, if approved in wntmg, by Owner;
3. Only matenals for the Project are stored withm
the warehouse (or a secure portiOn of a
warehouse set aside for the ProJect);
4. Contractor furnishes Owner a certificate of
insurance extendmg Contractor's msurance
00700 - page 17
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
coverage for damage, fire, and theft to cover
the full value of all materials stored, or in
transIt;
5. The warehouse (or secure portIOn thereof) IS
contInuous 1) under lock and key, and only
Contractor's authonzed personnel shall have
access,
6. Owner shall at all times have the nght of
access in company of Contractor;
7. Contractor and ItS surety assume total
responsibilIty for the stored materials; and
8. Contractor furnIshes to Owner certified lists of
materials stored, bills of lading, mvoices, and
other infonnatIOn as may be required, and shall
also furnish notice to Owner when materials
are moved fi om storage to the Project site.
6.04 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A Owner shall make progress payments, in such
amounts as Owner determInes are properly due,
WithIn 30 days after receIpt of a properly executed
ApplicatIOn for Payment. Owner shall notify
Contractor In accordance with RCW 39.76 If the
Apphcation for Payment does not comply with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Owner shall retam 5% of the amount of each
progress payment until 45 days after Final
Acceptance and receIpt of all documents required
by law or the Contract Documents, including, at
Owner's request, consent of surety to release of the
retainage. In accordance with RCW 60.28,
Contractor may request that monies reserved be
retained in a fund by Owner, deposIted by Owner
in a bank or savmgs and loan, or placed in escrow
with a bank or tmst company to be converted into
bonds and securities to be held in escrow with
mterest to be paid to Contractor. Owner may
permIt Contractor to prOVIde an appropnate bond
m heu of the retaIned funds.
C. Title to all Work and materials covered by a
progress payment shall pass to Owner at the tIme of
such payment free and clear of all hens, claims,
security mterests, and encumbrances. Passage of
title shall not, however, reheve Contractor from any
of its duties and responsIbilities for the Work or
materials, or waIve any nghts of Owner to InsISt on
I
full complIance by Contractor with the Contract
Documents
I
D. Payments due and unpaId In accordance with the
Contract Documents shall bear Interest as
speCIfied In RCW 39.76.
I
6.05 PAYMENTS WITHHELD
I
A. Owner may WIthhold or, on account of
subsequently discovered eVIdence, nullify the
whole or part of any payment to such extent as
may be necessary to protect Owner from loss or
damage for reasons includmg but not lImited to:
I
1. Work not In accordance WIth the Contract
Documents;
I
2. Reasonable eVIdence that the Work required
by the Contract Documents cannot be
completed for the unpaId balance of the
Contract Sum;
I
I
3. Work by Owner to correct defectIve Work or
complete the Work m accordance WIth section
5.17;
I
4. FaIlure to perfonn in accordance with the
Contract Documents; or
I
5. Cost or hability that may occur to Owner as
the result of Contractor's fault or neghgent acts
or ormssIOns.
I
B. In any case where part or all of a payment IS gOIng
to be withheld for unsatisfactory performance,
Owner shall notify Contractor in accordance with
RCW 39.76.
I
606 RETAINAGE AND BOND CLAIM RIGHTS
I
RCW chapters 39.08 and 60 28, concernIng the nghts and
responsibilIties of Contractor and Owner WIth regard to
the performance and payment bonds and retamage, are
made a part of the Contract Documents by reference as
though fully set forth herem.
I
I
6.07 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Substantial Completion IS the stage In the progress of the
Work (or portIOn thereof deSIgnated and approved by
Owner) when the constructIOn IS suffiCIently complete, In
accordance WIth the Contract Documents, so Owner can
fully occupy the Work (or the designated portIOn thereof)
I
I
00700 - page 18
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
I
for the use for whIch it lS intended. All Work other than
Incidental corrective or punch hst work shall be
completed. Substantial Completion shall not have been
achieved if all systems and parts are not functional, If
utlhties are not connected and operatIng normally, if all
reqUired occupancy permIts have not been Issued, or If the
Work IS not accessIble by normal vehIcular and pedestrIan
traffic routes. The date Substantial Completion IS
achieved shall be estabhshed in wrIting by Owner.
Contractor may request an early date of Substantial
CompletIOn WhICh must be approved by Change Order.
Owner's occupancy of the Work or designated portIOn
thereof does not necessarIly IndIcate that Substantial
CompletIon has been achieved.
I
I
I
I
6.08 PRIOR OCCUPANCY
I
A. Owner may, upon wrItten notice thereof to
Contractor, take posseSSIOn of or use any
completed or partIally completed portion of the
Work ("PrIor Occupancy") at any time pnor to
SubstantIal Completion. Unless otherwise agreed
In wntIng, Pnor Occupancy shall not: be deemed
an acceptance of any portion of the Work;
accelerate the tIme for any payment to Contractor;
prejudIce any nghts of Owner proVIded by any
insurance, bond, guaranty, or the Contract
Documents; relieve Contractor of the risk of loss or
any of the obligations established by the Contract
Documents; establish a date for termination or
partial termination of the assessment of liquidated
damages, or constitute a waiver of claims.
I
I
I
I
I
B. Notwithstanding anything in the preceding
paragraph, Owner shall be responsible for loss of or
damage to the Work resulting from Pnor
Occupancy. Contractor's one year duty to repair
and any system warranties shall begin on buildIng
systems activated and used by Owner as agreed in
writing by Owner and Contractor.
I
I
6.09 FINAL COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND
PAYMENT
I
A. Final CompletIOn shall be achieved when the
Work IS fully and finally complete m accordance
WIth the Contract Documents. The date Final
Completion is achIeved shall be estabhshed by
Owner In wntIng.
I
I
B Final Acceptance is the formal action of Owner
acknowledging Final Completion. Pnor to Final
Acceptance, Contractor shall, in addition to all
other reqUirements in the Contract Documents,
I
submit to Owner a written notice of any
outstanding disputes or claims between Contractor
and any of ItS Subcontractors, Including the
amounts and other details thereof. Neither FInal
Acceptance, nor final payment, shall release
Contractor or ItS sureties from any obhgatIOns of
these Contract Documents or the Pubhc Works
Bond, or constitute a waiver of any claims by
Owner arising from Contractor's failure to perform
the Work m accordance with the Contract
Documents.
C. Acceptance of final payment by Contractor, or any
Subcontractor, shall constitute a waiver and
release to Owner of all claims by Contractor, or
any such Subcontractor, for an increase In the
Contract Sum or the Contract Time, and for every
act or ormssion of Owner relating to or ansIng out
of the Work, except for those Claims made In
accordance With the procedures, mcluding the
time limits, set forth in Part 8: Claims and DIspute
Resolution.
PART 7 - CHANGES
7.01 CHANGE IN THE WORK
A. Owner may, at any time and without notice to
Contractor's surety, order additions, deletions,
revisions, or other changes in the Work. These
changes in the Work shall be mcorporated into the
Contract Documents through the execution of
Change Orders. If any change In the Work ordered
by Owner causes an increase or decrease in the
Contract Sum or the Contract Time, an equitable
adjustment shall be made as provided in Section
7.02 or 7.03, respectively, and such adjustment(s)
shall be incorporated into a Change Order.
B.
If Owner desires to order a change in the Work, it
may request a written Change Order proposal from
Contractor. Contractor shall submit a Change Order
proposal withm 14 days of the request from Owner,
or Within such other period as mutually agreed.
Contractor's Change Order proposal shall be full
compensation for Implementing the proposed
change m the Work, including any adjustment In
the Contract Sum or Contract Time, and includIng
compensation for all delays In connection with such
change in the Work and for any expense or
inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of
efficiency or productivity occasioned by the change
In the Work.
00700 - page 19
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
C. Upon receipt of the Change Order proposal, or a
request for equitable adjustment in the Contract
Sum or Contract Time, or both, as provided in
Sections 7.02 and 7.03, Owner may accept or
reject the proposal, request further documentatIon,
or negotIate acceptable terms with Contractor.
Pendmg agreement on the terms of the Change
Order, Owner may direct Contractor to proceed
Immediately wilh the Change Order Work.
Contractor shall not proceed with any change in
the Work untIl It has obtamed Owner's approval.
All Work done pursuant to any Owner-drrected
change in the Work shall be executed m
accordance with the Contract Documents.
D If Owner and Contractor reach agreement on the
terms of any change m the Work, mcludmg any
adjustment m the Contract Sum or Contract Time,
such agreement shall be incorporated in a Change
Order. The Change Order shall constitute full
payment and [mal settlement of all claims for time
and for direct, mdrrect, and consequential costs,
includmg costs of delays, mconvenience,
disruptIon of schedule, or loss of effiCiency or
productIvity, related to any Work either covered
or affected by the Change Order, or related to the
events glvmg nse to the request for eqUItable
adjustment.
responSible, Contractor shall be entItled to
make a request for an eqUItable adjustment m
the Contract Sum m accordance with the
followmg procedure No change in the
Contract Sum shall be allowed to the extent.
Contractor's changed cost of performance IS
due to the fault or neglIgence of Contractor, or
anyone for whose acts Contractor IS
responSible; the change IS concurrently caused
by Contractor and Owner; or the change is
caused by an act of Force Majeure as defined
in SectIOn 3.05.
a. A request for an equitable adjustment m
the Contract Sum shall be based on
written notIce delivered to Owner wlthm
7 days of the occurrence of the event
givmg nse to the request. For purposes
of this part, "occurrence" means when
Contractor knew, or in its dIligent
prosecution of the Work should have
known, of the event giving rise to the
request. If Contractor believes It IS
entItled to an adjustment m the Contract
Sum, Contractor shall rrnmediately notify
Owner and begm to keep and mamtam
complete, accurate, and specific dally
records. Contractor shall give Owner
access to any such records and, if
requested shall promptly furnISh copies
of such records to Owner.
E If Owner and Contractor are unable to reach
agreement on the terms of any change in the
Work, mcludmg any adjustment in the Contract
Sum or Contract Trrne, Contractor may at any
trrne in writing, request a final offer from Owner.
Owner shall provide Contractor with its wntten
response Within 30 days of Contractor's request.
Owner may also provide Contractor with a [mal
offer at any time. If Contractor rejects Owner's
[mal offer, or the parties are otherwise unable to
reach agreement, Contractor's only remedy shall
be to file a Claim as provided m Part 8; Clarrns
and Dispute Resolution.
b. Contractor shall not be entitled to any
adjustment in the Contract Sum for any
occurrence of events or costs that
occurred more than 7 days before
Contractor's written notice to Owner.
The written notice shall set forth, at a
minimum, a description of: the event
giving rise to the request for an equitable
adjustment m the Contract Sum; the
nature of the impacts to Contractor and
its Subcontractors of any tier, if any; and
to the extent pOSSIble the amount of the
adjustment in Contract Sum requested.
Failure to properly give such written
notIce shall, to the extent Owner's
interests are prejudiced, constItute a
waiver of Contractor's nght to an
equitable adjustment.
7 02 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT SUM
A General ApplIcatIOn
1. The Contract Sum shall only be changed by a
Change Order. Contractor shall include any
request for a change in the Contract Sum in ItS
Change Order proposal.
2. If the cost of Contractor's performance IS
changed due to the fault or neglIgence of
Owner, or anyone for whose acts Owner IS
c.
Within 30 days of the occurrence of the
event givmg rise to the request, unless
Owner agrees in writmg to allow an
00700 - page 20
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
I
addItIOnal period of time to ascertain
more accurate data, Contractor shall
supplement the wrItten notice provIded m
accordance WIth subparagraph a. above
with additional supporting data. Such
addItional data shall mclude, at a
rmlllmum: the amount of compensation
requested, Itemized In accordance wIth
the procedure set forth herein; specIfic
facts, CIrcumstances, and analysIs that
confirms not only that Contractor
suffered the damages claImed, but that
the damages claimed were actually a
result of the act, event, or condition
complained of and that the Contract
Documents provide entItlement to an
equitable adjustment to Contractor for
such act, event, or condition; and
documentatIon sufficiently detailed to
permit an informed analysis of the
request by Owner. When the request for
compensation relates to a delay, or other
change in Contract TIme, Contractor
shall demonstrate the impact on the
crItIcal path, In accordance WIth Section
7.03C. FaIlure to provIde such
additIOnal mformation and
documentation WIthIn the time allowed or
within the format required shall, to the
extent Owner's interests are-prejudiced,
constitute a waiver of Contractor's right
to an equitable adjustment.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
d. Pendmg final resolution of any request
made in accordance with this paragraph,
unless otherwise agreed in writing,
Contractor shall proceed diligently with
performance of the Work.
I
e. Any requests by Contractor for an
eqUItable adjustment in the Contract Sum
and In the Contract TIme that arise out of
the same event( s) shall be subrmtted
together.
I
I
3 The value of any Work covered by a Change
Order, or of any request for an equitable
adjustment m the Contract Sum, shall be
determmed by one of the following
methods:
I
I
a. On the basis of a fixed prIce as
deterrmned in paragraph 7.02B.
I
00700 - page 21
b. By applIcation of unit prices to the
quantIties of the items involved as
determined in paragraph 7.02C.
c. On the baSIS of tIme and materIal as
deterrmned m paragraph 7.02D.
4. When Owner has requested Contractor to
submit a Change Order proposal, Owner may
dIrect Contractor as to which method m
subparagraph 3. above to use when subrmttmg
its proposal. Otherwise, Contractor shall
determine the value of the Work, or of a
request for an equitable adjustment, on the
basis of the fixed price method.
B.
Change Order Pricing -- FIxed PrIce
When the fixed price method IS used to deterrmne
the value of any Work covered by a Change Order,
or of a request for an equitable adjustment m the
Contract Sum, the following procedures shall
apply:
1. Contractor's Change Order proposal, or request
for adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be
accompamed by a complete itefll1ZatlOn of the
costs, includIng labor, material, subcontractor
costs, and overhead and profit. The costs shall
be itemized in the manner set forth below, and
shall be submitted on breakdown sheets m a
form approved by Owner.
2. All costs shall be calculated based upon
appropriate industry standard methods of
calculating labor, material quantitIes, and
equipment costs.
3. If any of Contractor's pricmg assumptions are
contingent upon anticipated actions of Owner,
Contractor shall clearly state them in the
proposal or request for an eqUItable
adjustment.
4. The cost of any additive or deductive changes
in the Work shall be calculated as set forth
below, except that overhead and profit shall
not be included on deductive changes in the
Work. Where a change In the Work mvolves
additIve and deductIve work by the same
Contractor or Subcontractor, small tools,
overhead, profit, bond and insurance markups
will apply to the net difference.
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
5. If the total cost of the change in the Work or
request for equitable adjustment does not
exceed $1,000, Contractor shall not be
required to subrmt a breakdown If the
descrIptIon of the change m the Work or
request for equitable adjustment IS suffiCIently
defimtIve for Owner to determme fair value.
6. If the total cost of the change m the Work or
request for eqUItable adjustment is between
$1,000 and $2,500, Contractor may subrmt a
breakdown III the followmg level of detail if
the deSCrIption ofthe change in the Work or if
the request for equitable adjustment IS
sufficiently defimtive to perrmt the Owner to
deterrmne fair value.
a. lump sum labor;
b. lump sum material;
c. lump sum eqUIpment usage;
d overhead and profit as set forth below; and
e msurance and bond costs as set forth
below.
7. Any request for adjustment of Contract Sum
based upon the fixed price method shall
include only the following items:
a. Craft labor costs: These are the labor
costs deterrmned by multiplying the
estimated or actual additional number of
craft hours needed to perform the change
in the VI' ork by the hourly labor costs.
Craft hours should cover direct labor, as
well as mdirect labor due to trade
inefficienCIes. The hourly costs shall be
based on the following:
(1) BaSIC wages and benefits:
Hourly rates and benefits as
stated on the Department of
Labor and Industnes approved
"statement of mtent to pay
prevaIling wages." DIrect
supervIsIon shall be a reasonable
percentage not to exceed 15% of
the cost of direct labor. No
supervision markup shall be
allowed for a working
supervisor's hours.
00700 - page 22
Material costs' This is an itermzatIon of
the quantity and cost of materIals needed
to perform the change in the Work.
Material costs shall be developed fIrst
from actual known costs, second from
supplier quotations or if these are not
avaIlable, from standard mdustry prIcmg
guides. MaterIal costs shall conSIder all
avaIlable discounts. FreIght costs, express
charges, or speCIal delIvery charges, shall
be itemIZed.
EqUIpment costs: This is an itemIZation of
the type of equipment and the estImated or
actual length of time the constructIon
equipment appropriate for the Work IS or
will be used on the change m the Work
Costs wIll be allowed for constructIOn
equipment only if used solely for the
changed Work, or for addItional rental
costs actually incurred by the Contractor
b.
c.
(2)
Worker's insurance: DIrect
contrIbutions to the state of
Washington for mdustrIal
msurance; medIcal aid, and
supplemental penSIOn, by the
class and rates establIshed by the
Department of Labor and
Industries.
(3)
Federal msurance: DIrect
contributions required by the
Federal Insurance CompensatIon
Act; Federal Unemployment Tax
Act; and the State Unemployment
CompensatIOn Act.
(4)
Travel allowance: Travel
allowance and/or SubSIstence, If
applicable, not exceedmg those
allowances estabhshed by
regIOnal labor umon agreements,
whIch are Iterrnzed and IdentIfied
separately.
(5) Safety: Cost incurred due to the
Washington Industrial Safety and
Health Act, which shall be a
reasonable percentage not to
exceed 2% of the sum of the
amounts calculated in (1), (2),
and (3) above.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
I
EqUIpment charges shall be computed on
the basIs of actual mvoice costs or if
owned, from the current edItion of one of
the followmg sources:
I
(1) AssocIated General Contractors -
Washmgton State Department of
TransportatIOn (AGC WSDOT)
EqUIpment Rental Agreement;
1987 editIOn.
I
I
(2) The state ofWashmgton UtIlItIes
and TransportatIOn Commission
for trucks used on hIghways.
I
(3) The National Electrical
Contractors AssocIation for
eqUIpment used on electrical
work.
I
I
(4) The Mechanical Contractors
Association of America for
eqUIpment used on mechanical
work.
I
The Data Quest Rental Rate (Blue Book)
shall be used as a basIs for establIshmg
rental rates of eqUIpment not listed in the
above sources. The maximum rate for
standby equipment shall not exceed that
shown In the AGC WSDOT Equipment
Rental Agreement, 1987 editIon.
I
I
I
d. Allowance for small tools,
expendables & consumable supplies:
Small tools consist of tools which cost
$250 or less and are normally furnished by
the performing contractor. The maximum
rate for small tools shall not exceed the
following:
I
I
(1)
For Contractor, 3% of dIrect
labor costs.
I
(2)
For Subcontractors, 5% of direct
labor costs.
I
Expendables and consumable supplIes
dIrectly associated WIth the change m
Work must be itemized.
I
e. Subcontractor costs: ThIS IS defined as
payments Contractor makes to
Subcontractors-for changed Work
I
00700 - page 23
performed by Subcontractors of any tIer
The Subcontractors' cost of Work shall be
calculated and iterruzed m the same
manner as prescribed herem for
Contractor
f.
Allowance for overhead: ThIS IS defined
as costs of any kind attrIbutable to dIrect
and mdirect delay, acceleration, or
Impact, added to the total cost to Owner
of any change in the Contract Sum but not
to the cost of any change in the Contract
Time for which contractor has been
compensated pursuant to the condItIons
set forth m Section 7.03. ThIs allowance
shall compensate Contractor for all non-
craft labor, temporary construction
faCIlItIes, field engineerIng, schedule
updatmg, as-built drawings, home office
cost, B&O taxes, office engineering,
estImating costs, addItional overhead
because of extended tune, and any other
cost mcidental to the change m the Work.
It shall be strictly lIrruted m all cases to a
reasonable amount, mutually acceptable,
or If none can be agreed upon to an
amount not to exceed the rates below'
(1). For projects where the
Contract Award Amount is
under $3 million, the
following shall apply:
(a) For Contractor, for any
Work actually performed by
Contractor's own forces, 16% of
the first $50,000 of the cost, and
4% of the remaining cost, Ifany
(b) For each Subcontractor
(mcludmg lower tier
subcontractors), for any Work
actually performed by ItS own
forces, 16% of the fust $50,000
of the cost, and 4% of the
remaining cost, if any.
(c) For Contractor, for any
work performed by ItS
Subcontractor( s), 6% of the first
$50,000 of the amount due each
Subcontractor, and 4% of the
remaming amount if any.
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
(d) For each Subcontractor,
for any Work performed by Its
Subcontractor( s) of any lower
tier, 4% of the first $50,000 of
the amount due the sub-
Subcontractor, and 2% of the
remaimng amount If any.
(e) The cost to which
overhead IS to be applIed shall be
determined m accordance with
subparagraphs a.-e. above.
(2).For projects where the Contract
Award Amount is equal to or exceeds
$3 million, the following shall apply:
(a) For Contractor, for any
Work actually performed by
Contractor's own forces, 12% of
the first $50,000 of the cost, and
4% of the remammg cost, Ifany.
(b) For each Subcontractor
(mcludmg lower tier
subcontractors), for any Work
actually performed by Its own
forces, 12% of the first $50,000
of the cost, and 4% of the
remaining cost, if any.
(c) For Contractor, for any
Work performed by Its
Subcontractor(s), 4% of the first
$50,000 of the amount due each
Subcontractor, and 2% of the
remammg amount If any.
(d) For each Subcontractor,
for any Work performed by Its
Subcontractor( s) of any lower
tier, 4% of the first $50,000 of
the amount due the sub-
Subcontractor, and 2% of the
remaining amount if any.
( e ) The cost to which
overhead IS to be applied shall be
determined in accordance with
subparagraphs a.- e. above
I
g.
Allowance for profit: This IS an amount
to be added to the cost of any change m
contract sum, but not to the cost of
change m Contract TIme for which
contractor has been compensated
pursuant to the condItions set forth m
SectIOn 7.03. It shall be lirmted to a
reasonable amount, mutually acceptable,
or If none can be agreed upon, to an
amount not to exceed the rates below'
I
I
I
(1) F or Contractor or Subcontractor
of any tier for work performed by
theIr forces, 6% of the cost
developed m accordance with
7.02 b. 7a.- e. above
I
I
(2)
For Contractor or Subcontractor
of any tier for work performed by
a subcontractor of a lower tier,
4% of the Subcontractor cost
developed in accordance WIth
7.02 b. 7a. - h.
I
I
h.
Cost of change in insurance or bond
premium: ThIs IS defmed as:
I
(1) Contractor's lIabilIty insurance:
The cost of any changes m
Contractor's liability insurance
ansmg directly from executIOn of
the Change Order; and
I
I
(2) PublIc works bond: The cost of
the additional prermum for
Contractor's bond arising directly
from the changed Work.
I
The costs of any change in insurance or bond prermum
shall be added after overhead and allowance for profit are
calculated m accordance With subparagraph f. and g.
above
I
I
C Change Order Pricing -- Unit Pnces
1. Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform
Work on a unit-pnce baSIS, Owner's authorization
shall clearly state:
I
a. Scope of work to be performed;
I
b Type of reImbursement including pre-
agreed rates for matenal quantities; and I
00700 - page 24
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
c Cost limit of reimbursement.
2 Contractor shall:
a. Cooperate with Owner and aSSIst In
momtonng the Work beIng performed.
As requested by Owner, Contractor shall
Identify workers assigned to the Change
Order Work and areas in which they are
working;
b. Leave access as appropnate for quantity
measurement, and
c. Not exceed any cost limit(s) without
Owner's prior written approval.
3. Contractor shall submit costs in accordance
With paragraph 7.02B. and satisfy the
following reqUIrements:
a. Umt pnces shall include reimbursement
for all dIrect and indirect costs of the
Work, mcludmg overhead and profit, and
bond and insurance costs; and
b. QuantitIes must be supported by field
measurement statements signed by Owner.
D.
Change Order Pricing -- Time-and-Material Prices
1. Whenever Owner authorIZes Contractor to
perform Work on a time-and-material basis,
Owner's authorization shall clearly state:
a. Scope of Work to be performed;
b. Type of reimbursement including pre-
agreed rates, if any, for material quantities
or labor; and
c. Cost IIrmt of reImbursement.
2. Contractor shall:
a. Cooperate with Owner and assist in
monitormg the Work being performed.
As requested by Owner, identify workers
aSSIgned to the Change Order Work and
areas In whIch they are workmg;
b. Identify on daily time sheets all labor
performed In accordance with this
authorization. Submit copies of daily time
sheets within 2 working days for Owner's
reVIew;
c. Leave access as appropnate for quantity
measurement,
d. Perform all Work m accordance WIth thIS
sectIOn as effiCIently as possible; and
e Not exceed any cost lirmt(s) without
Owner's pnor written approval.
3. Contractor shall submit costs III accordance
WIth paragraph 7.02B and additional
venfication supported by:
a. Labor detailed on daily time sheets; and
b. Invoices for matenal.
7.03 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT TIME
A. The Contract Time shall only be changed by a
Change Order. Contractor shall include any request
for a change in the Contract Time in its Change
Order proposal.
B.
If the time of Contractor's performance is changed
due to an act of Force Majeure, or due to the fault
or neglIgence of Owner or anyone for whose acts
Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled
to make a request for an eqUItable adjustment In the
Contract Time in accordance with the follOWing
procedure. No adjustment in the Contract Time
shall be allowed to the extent Contractor's changed
tIme of performance is due to the fault or
negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts
Contractor is responsible.
1. A request for an equitable adjustment In the
Contract Trme shall be based on wrItten notice
delivered within 7 days of the occurrence of
the event givmg rise to the request. If
Contractor believes It is entitled to adjustment
of Contract TIme, Contractor shall
immediately notify Owner and begin to keep
and maintain complete, accurate, and speCIfic
daily records. Contractor shall give Owner
access to any such record and If requested,
shall promptly furnIsh copIes of such record to
Owner.
00700 - page 25
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
2.
Contractor shall not be entItled to an
adjustment III the Contract TIme for any events
that occurred more than 7 days before
Contractor's wntten notIce to Owner The
wntten notICe shall set forth, at a rmmmum, a
descnptIon of' the event gIvmg nse to the
request for an eqUItable adjustment m the
Contract TIme; the nature of the Impacts to
Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tIer, If
any; and to the extent possIble the amount of
the adjustment m Contract TIme requested.
FaIlure to properly give such written notice
shall, to the extent Owner's mterests are
preJudIced, constItute a waIver of Contractor's
nght to an equitable adjustment.
3. WIthm 30 days of the occurrence of the event
givmg rise to the request, unless Owner agrees
in writing to allow an addItIonal period of tune
to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor
shall supplement the wrItten notice proVIded m
accordance WIth subparagraph 7.03B.2 with
addItIonal supportmg data. Such addItIonal
data shall mclude, at a rmnimum: the amount
of delay claImed, Itenuzed m accordance WIth
the procedUle set forth herem; specific facts,
circumstances, and analysis that COnflITllS not
only that Contractor suffered the delay
claimed, but that the delay claimed was
actually a result of the act, event, or condItIon
complained of, and that the Contract
Documents provide entitlement to an eqUItable
adjustment in Contract Time for such act,
event, or conditIOn; and supporting
documentatIon sufficiently detailed to permit
an informed analysIs of the request by Owner.
Failure to provide such additional information
and documentation WIthin the time allowed or
wIthin the format required shall, to the extent
Owner's mterests are preJudIced, constitute a
waiver of Contractor's nght to an eqUItable
adjustment.
4. Pendmg fina 1 resolutIon of any request in
accordance with this paragraph, unless
otherwise agreed in writing, Contractor shall
proceed dIligently with performance of the
Work.
c.
Any change in the Contract Time covered by a
Change Order, or based on a request for an
equitable adjustment m the Contract TIme, shall be
limited to the change in the critIcal path of
Contractor's schedule attributable to the change of
00700 - page 26
I
Work or event(s) gIving nse to the request for
eqUItable adjustment. Any Change Order proposal
or request for an adjustment m the Contract TIme
shall demonstrate the impact on the critIcal path of
the schedule Contractor shall be responSIble for
showing clearly on the Progress Schedule that the
change or event: had a specific Impact on the
critical path, and except m case of concurrent
delay, was the sole cause of such Impact; and could
not have been aVOIded by resequencing of the
Work or other reasonable alternatIves.
I
I
I
D.
I
Contractor may request compensation for the cost
of a change in Contract Tlflle m accordance WIth
this paragraph, 7.03D, subject to the follOWIng
condItIons:
I
1. The change m Contract TIme shall solely be
caused by the fault or negligence of Owner or
AlE;
I
2. CompensatIon under this paragraph IS hrmted
to changes m Contract Tlflle for which
Contractor IS not entitled to be compensated
under section 7.02;
I
I
3. Contractor shall follow the procedure set forth
in paragraph 7.03B;
4. Contractor shall estabhsh the extent of the
change m Contract Tlflle m accordance WIth
paragraph 7.03C; and
I
I
5. The dally cost of any change m Contract Time
shall be lirmted to the Items below, less funds
that may have been paid pursuant to a change
in the Contract Sum that contributed to this
change m Contract Time:
I
a. cost of nonproductIve field supervISIon or
labor extended because of the delay,
I
b. cost of weekly meetings or smlilar
indIrect activitIes extended because of the
delay;
I
c. cost of temporary facIhties or eqUIpment
rental extended because of the delay;
I
d cost of msurance extended because of the
delay;
I
e. general and adrmnistratIve overhead m
an amount to be agreed upon, but not to
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
I
exceed 3% of Contract Sum divIded by
the Contract TIme for each day of the
delay.
I
PART 8 - CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION
I
8.01 CLAIMS PROCEDURE
I
A. If the partIes fall to reach agreement on the terms of
any Change Order for Owner-dIrected Work as
provided m SectIOn 7.01, or on the resolutIOn of
any request for an eqUItable adjustment in the
Contract Sum as provided in Section 7.02 or the
Contract Tune as provided m Section 7.03,
Contractor's only remedy shall be to file a ClaIm
with Owner as provided in this section.
I
I
B. Contractor shall file its Claim wlthm the earlIer of:
120 days from Owner's final offer in accordance
WIth eIther paragraph 7 OlE or the date ofFmal
Acceptance.
I
I
C. The Claun shall be deemed to cover all changes m
cost and tIme (mdudmg direct, indirect, Impact,
and consequentia 1) to whIch Contractor may be
entitled. It shall be fully substantIated and
documented. At a minimum, the ClaIm shall
contain the following information:
I
I
1. A detailed factual statement of the Claim for
addItional compensation and time, if any,
providing all necessary dates, locatIOns, and
Items of Work affected by the Claun;
I
2. The date on which facts arose which gave rise
to the Claim
I
3. The name of each employee of Owner or AlE
knowledgeable about the Claim;
I
4. The specific prOVISIOns of the Contract
Documents whIch support the ClaIm;
I
5. The identIficatIon of any documents and the
substance of any oral communications that
support the ClaIm;
I
6. Copies of any IdentIfied documents, other than
the Contract Documents, that support the
Claim;
I
7. If an adjustment m the Contract Time IS
sought: the speCIfic days and dates for whIch it
I
00700 - page 27
is sought; the speCIfic reasons Contractor
believes an extenSIOn m the Contract TIme
should be granted; and Contractor's analYSIS of
its Progress Schedule to demonstrate the
reason for the extension m Contract Time;
8. If an adjustment m the Contract Sum IS sought,
the exact amount sought and a breakdown of
that amount mto the categones set forth m, and
m the detail reqUIred by, SectIon 7.02, and
9. A statement certifying, under penalty of
perjury, that the ClaIm IS made in good faIth,
that the supportmg cost and pricing data are
true and accurate to the best of Contractor's
knowledge and belIef, that the Claim IS fully
supported by the accompanymg data, and that
the amount requested accurately reflects the
adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract
Time for WhICh Contractor belIeves Owner IS
lIable.
D.
After Contractor has subrmtted a fully documented
Claim that complIes with all applicable provISIons
of parts 7 and 8, Owner shall respond, m writmg, to
Contractor as follows:
1. If the Claim amount is less than $50,000, wIth
a decision within 60 days from the date the
ClaIm is receIved; or
2. If the Claim amount IS $50,000 or more, WIth a
decision within 60 days from the date the
Cia un is receIved, or with notIce to Contractor
of the date by which It will render Its decIsion.
Owner will then respond WIth a written
decISIon in such addItional tune.
E.
To assist in the review of Contractor's ClaIm,
Owner may VISIt the Project site, or request
addItional informatIon, m order to fully evaluate
the issues raised by the Claun Contractor shall
proceed with performance of the Work pending
fmal resolution of any Claim. Owner's written
decision as set forth above shall be fmal and
conclUSIve as to all matters set forth in the Claim,
unless Contractor follows the procedure set forth m
SectIOn 8.02.
F.
Any ClaIm of the Contractor agamst the Owner for
damages, additIonal compensatIOn, or addItIonal
tIme, shall be conclusively deemed to have been
waived by the Contractor unless timely made m
accordance with the requirements of this sectIOn.
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
I
8.02 ARBITRA nON
8.03 CLAIMS AUDITS
A.
If Contractor dIsagrees wIth Owner's decIsIon
rendered In accordance wIth paragraph 8 OlD,
Contractor shall provIde Owner wIth a wrItten
demand for arbItration. No demand for arbItratIOn
of any such Claim shall be made later than 30 days
after the date of Owner's decision on such ClaIm;
failure to demand arbItration wIthin said 30 day
perIod shall result in Owner's decIsIon being final
and binding upon Contractor and ItS
Subcontractors.
I
A
All ClaIms filed against Owner shall be subject to
audIt at any tIme following the filIng of the ClaIm.
FaIlure of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier,
to maintain and retam sufficient records to allow
Owner to verify all or a portion of the ClaIm or to
permIt Owner access to the books and records of
Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, shall
constitute a waiver of the Claim and shall bar any
recovery.
I
I
I
B.
In support of Owner audIt of any Claim, Contractor
shall, upon request, promptly make avaIlable to
Owner the following documents:
I
B.
Notice of the demand for arbItration shall be filed
with the American ArbItration AssocIatIOn (AAA),
With a copy provided to Owner. The partIes shall
negotiate or medIate under the Voluntary
ConstructIOn MedIatIOn Rules of the AAA, or
mutually acceptable service, before seeking
arbItratIOn m accordance With the Construction
Industry Arbitratton Rules of AAA as follows.
2. CollectIve bargamIng agreements;
I
Daily tIme sheets and supervISor's dally
reports;
3. Insurance, welfare, and benefits records,
I
1. DIsputes mvolvmg $30,000 or less shall be
conducted m accordance with the Northwest
RegIOn ExpedIted CommerCIal Arbitration
Rules; or
4. Payroll registers;
5 Earnings records;
I
2 DIsputes over $30,000 shall be conducted m
accordmce WIth the Construction Industry
ArbItration Rules of the AAA, unless the
partIes agree to use the expedited rules.
6. Payroll tax forms;
7 MaterIal Invoices, requiSItIOns, and delIvery
confirmatIOns;
I
c.
I
All Claims arising out of the Work shall be
resolved by arbitration. The Judgment upon the
arbItration award may be entered, or review of the
award may occur, in the superior court having
JUrIsdICtIon thereof. No independent legal action
relating to or ansing from the Work shall be
maintained.
8. Material cost dIstrIbutIOn worksheet;
9 Equipment records (list of company
equipment, rates, etc.);
I
10. Vendors', rental agenCIes', Subcontractors', and
agents' mvoices;
I
D.
ClaIms between Owner and Contractor, Contractor
and Its Subcontractors, Contractor and AlE, and
Owner and AlE shall, upon demand by Owner, be
submitted in the same arbItratIOn or medIatIon.
I
II. Contracts between Contractor and each of Its
Subcontractors, and all lower-tier
Subcontractor contracts and supplier contracts;
E
If the parties resolve the Claim prior to arbitration
Judgment, the terms of the resolution shall be
Incorporated in a Change Order. The Change
Order shall constitute full payment and final
settlement of the Claim, Including all claims for
tIme and for direct, mdlrect, or consequential costs,
Including costs of delays, inconvemence, disruption
of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productiVIty.
12. Subcontractors' and agents' payment
certificates;
I
13. Cancelled checks (payroll and vendors);
14. Job cost report, including monthly totals;
I
15. Job payroll ledger,
I
00700 - page 28
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
16. Planned resource loading schedules and
sununanes;
17. General ledger,
18. Cash disbursements journal;
19. Financial statements for all years reflecting the
operations on the Work. In addition, the
Owner may require, If It deems it appropnate,
additional financial statements for 3 years
precedmg execution of the Work,
20. DepreCiatIOn records on all company
eqUipment whether these records are
mamtamed by the company mvolved, its
accountant, or others;
21. If a source other than depreciation records is
used to develop costs for Contractor's internal
purposes m estabhshing the actual cost of
owning and operating equipment, all such
other source documents;
22. All nonpnvIleged documents which relate to
each and every Claim together with all
documents which support the amount of any
adjustment m Contract Sum or Contract Time
sought by each Claim;
23. Work sheets or software used to prepare the
Claun establishing the cost components for
Items of the Claim including but not limited to
labor, benefits and insurance, materials,
eqUipment, Subcontractors, all documents
which establish the time periods, individuals
involved, the hours for the individuals, and the
rates for the individuals; and
24. Work sheets, software, and all other
documents used by Contractor to prepare its
bid.
c.
The audit may be performed by employees of
Owner or a representative of Owner. Contractor,
and Its Subcontractors, shall provide adequate
facihtIes acceptable to Owner, for the audit during
normal busmess hours. Contractor, and all
Subcontractors, shall make a good faith effort to
cooperate With Owner's auditors.
PART 9 TERMINATION OF THE WORK
9.01 TERMINA nON BY OWNER FOR CAUSE
A.
Owner may, upon 7 days written notice to
Contractor and to its surety, terminate (WIthout
prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the
Work, or any part of It, for cause upon the
occurrence of anyone or more of the followmg
events:
1. Contractor fails to prosecute the Work or any
portion thereof WIth sufficient diligence to
ensure Substantial CompletIOn of the Work
withm the Contract Time;
2. Contractor is adjudged bankrupt, makes a
general assignment for the benefit of its
creditors, or a receiver is appomted on account
of its insolvency;
3. Contractor fails m a matenal way to replace or
correct Work not m conformance With the
Contract Documents;
4. Contractor repeatedly fails to supply skilled
workers or proper materials or equipment;
5. Contractor repeatedly fails to make prompt
payment due to Subcontractors or for labor;
6. Contractor matenally dIsregards or fails to
comply with laws, ordmances, rules,
regulations, or orders of any public authonty
having jurisdiction; or
7. Contractor is otherwise in material breach of
any provision of the Contract Documents.
B.
Upon termination, Owner may at its option.
1. Take possessIOn of the Project site and take
possessIOn of or use all matenals, equipment,
tools, and construction equipment and
machinery thereon owned by Contractor to
maintain the orderly progress of, and to fimsh,
the Work;
2. Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to
section 5.21; and
3. Finish the Work by whatever other reasonable
method it deems expedient.
00700 - page 29
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
C. Owner's rights and duties upon termmatIOn are
subject to the prior nghts and duties of the surety, If
any, oblIgated under any bond provIded m
accordance wIth the Contract Documents
D When Owner tenrunates the Work m accordance
WIth thIS sectIOn, Contractor shall take the actions
set forth m paragraph 9.02B, and shall not be
entitled to receive further payment until the Work
IS accepted.
E Ifthe unpaId balance of the Contract Sum exceeds
the cost of fimshmg the Work, mcluding
compensation fOJ AlE's servIces and expenses
made necessary thereby and any other extra costs
or damages mcurred by Owner m completmg the
Work, or as a result of Contractor's actIOns, such C.
excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such costs
exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
dIfference to Owner. These oblIgations for
payment shall SW"VIve terminatIOn.
F TennmatIOn of the Work m accordance WIth thIS
sectIOn shall not relIeve Contractor or its surety of
any responsIbIlItIes for Work performed.
G. If Owner terminates Contractor for cause, and it IS
later determined that none of the CIrcumstances set
forth in paragraph 9.01A exist, then such
terrnmation shall be deemed a terrnmation for
convemence pursuant to Section 9.02.
D.
9.02 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR
CONVENIENCE
A.
Owner may, upon wntten notice, terminate (without
prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the
W or!e, or any part of it, for the convenience of
Owner.
B.
Unless Owner dIrects otheTWlse, after receIpt of a
wntten notice of terrmnatIOn for either cause or
convemence, Contractor shall promptly'
1. Stop perfomring Work on the date and as
specified in the notice of terrmnation;
2. Place no further orders or subcontracts for
materials, eqUIpment, services or facilities,
except as may be necessary for completIOn of
such portIOn of the Work as IS not terminated;
00700 - page 30
I
3. Cancel all orders and subcontracts, upon terms
acceptable to Owner, to the extent that they
relate to the performance of Work termmated;
I
4. ASSIgn to Owner all of the nght, tItle, and
mterest of Contractor in all orders and
subcontracts;
I
5. Take such actIOn as may be necessary or as
directed by Owner to preserve and protect the
Work, Project SIte, and any other property
related to thIs Project m the possessIOn of
Contractor in wIDch Owner has an interest, and
6. Contmue performance only to the extent not
terrnmated.
I
I
I
If Owner terminates the Work or any portIOn
thereof for convemence, Contractor shall be
entitled to make a request for an equitable
adjustment for ItS reasonable direct costs mcurred
prior to the effective date of the terrnmation, plus a
reasonable allowance for overhead and profit on
Work performed pnor to terrnmation, plus the
reasonable admimstratIve costs of the terrnmatIOn,
but shall not be entitled to any other costs or
damages, whatsoever, provided however, the total
sum payable upon terrmnation shall not exceed the
Contract Sum reduced by prior payments.
Contractor shall be required to make its request m
accordance with the proVISIOns of Part 7; Changes.
I
I
I
I
If Owner terminates the Work or any portIOn
thereof for convemence, the Contract Time shall be
adjusted as determined by Owner.
I
PART 10 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
I
10.01 GOVERNING LAW
I
The Contract Documents and the nghts of the parties
herein shall be governed by the laws of the state of
Washington. Venue shall be m the county in WhICh
Owner's principal place of bus mess is located, unless
otherwise specified.
I
I
10.02 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, theIr
partners, successors, aSSIgns, and legal representatIves to
the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns,
and legal representatives of such other party m respect to
covenants, agreements, and oblIgatIOns contained m the
Contract Documents. NeIther party shall aSSIgn the Work
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
I
wIthout wntten consent of the other, except that
Contractor may assign the Work for security purposes, to
a bank or lendmg instItutIon authonzed to do business in
the state of Washington If either party attempts to make
such an assIgnment wIthout such consent, that party shall
nevertheless remam legally responsible for all obligatIOns
set forth m the Contract Documents.
I
I
10.03 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
I
No actIOn or faIlure to act by Owner or AlE shall
constItute a waIver of a nght or duty afforded them under
the Contract Documents, nor shall such actIOn or faIlure
to act constItute approval of an acquiescence in a breach
therem, except as may be specifically agreed m wntmg.
I
10.04 CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION
I
Pursuant to RCW 39.06, Contractor shall be registered or
licensed as required by the laws of the State of
Washmgton, including but not IIrmted to RCW 18.27.
I
10 05 TIME COMPUTATIONS
I
When computing any penod of time, the day of the event
from which the period of time begins shall not be counted.
The last day is counted unless It falls on a weekend or
legal holiday, in which event the period runs until the end
of the next day that is not a weekend or holiday. When
the penod of time allo",ed IS less than 7 days,
mtermedIate Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays are
excluded from the computation.
I
I
10.06 RECORDS RETENTION
I
The wage, payroll, and cost records of Contractor, and Its
Subcontractors, and all records subject to audit in
accordance with SectIOn 8.03, shall be retained for a
period of not less than 6 years after the date of Final
Acceptance.
I
I
10.07 THIRD-PARTY AGREEMENTS
I
The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a
contractual relationship of any kmd between: AlE and
Contractor; Owner and any Subcontractor; or any persons
other than Owner and Contractor.
I
10.08 ANTITRUST ASSIGNMENT
I
Owner and Contractor recognize that in actual econormc
practIce, overcharges resulting from antitrust violations
are m fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore,
Contractor hereby assigns to Owner any and all claims for
I
such overcharges as to goods, matenals, and eqUIpment
purchased in connection with the Work performed m
accordance WIth the Contract Documents, except as to
overcharges WhICh result from antItrust VIOlations
commencmg after the Contract Sum IS establIshed and
whIch are not passed on to Owner under a Change Order.
Contractor shall put a sirmlar clause m its Subcontracts,
and reqUIre a sirmlar clause m ItS sub-Subcontracts, such
that all clauns for such overcharges on the Work are
passed to Owner by Contractor.
END OF DIVISION 00-700
00700 - page 31
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
any, obhgated under any bond provided in
accordance wIth the Contract Documents.
D
When Owner tenrunates the Work m accordance
WIth thIS sectIOn, Contractor shall take the actIOns
set forth m paragraph 9.02B, and shall not be
entItled to receIve further payment untIl the Work
IS accepted.
E.
If the unpaId balance of the Contract Sum exceeds
the cost of fimshmg the Work, includmg
compensatIon fOJ AlE's servIces and expenses
made necessary thereby and any other extra costs
or damages mcurred by Owner m completIng the
Work, or as a result of Contractor's actions, such
excess shall be paId to Contractor. If such costs
exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
dIfference to Owner. These obhgations for
payment shall survive terrmnatlOn
F.
TerrmnatIon of the Work m accordance WIth tlus
sectIon shall not relieve Contractor or ItS surety of
any responsIbIhtJes for Work performed.
G.
If Owner terrmnates Contractor for cause, and it IS
later determined that none of the circumstances set
forth III paragraph 9.01A eXIst, then such
termination shall be deemed a termination for
convenience pursuant to Section 9.02.
9 02 TERMINA nON BY OWNER FOR
CONVENIENCE
A. Owner may, upon written notice, terminate (without
prejudice to any fIght or remedy of Owner) the
Work, or any part of it, for the convenience of
Owner.
B Unless Owner dIrects otherwIse, after receipt of a
wrItten notIce of terrmnatlOn for either cause or
convenience, Contractor shall promptly:
1. Stop perfornllng Work on the date and as
specified III the notIce of termination;
2. Place no further orders or subcontracts for
materials, equipment, services or facIlItIes,
except as may be necessary for completion of
such portIOn of the Work as IS not terrmnated;
3. Cancel all OJders and subcontracts, upon terms
acceptable to Owner, to the extent that they
relate to the performance of Work terrmnated;
I
4. ASSIgn to Owner all of the nght, tItle, and
interest of Contractor in all orders and
subcontracts;
I
5. Take such actIOn as may be necessary or as
directed by Owner to preserve and protect the
Work, Project Site, and any other property
related to thIS Project in the possessIOn of
Contractor III wluch Owner has an interest; and
6. Contmue performance only to the extent not
terrmnated.
I
I
C.
I
If Owner terminates the Work or any portIOn
thereof for convemence, Contractor shall be
entItled to make a request for an equitable
adjustment for ItS reasonable drrect costs mcurred
pnor to the effective date of the termination, plus a
reasonable allowance for overhead and profit on
Work performed pnor to temunation, plus the
reasonable adnunistrative costs of the temunatIon,
but shall not be entItled to any other costs or
damages, whatsoever, provided however, the total
sum payable upon termination shall not exceed the
Contract Sum reduced by prior payments.
Contractor shall be required to make its request m
accordance with the proviSIOns of Part 7; Changes.
I
I
I
I
D.
If Owner temunates the Work or any portIOn
thereof for convemence, the Contract TIme shall be
adjusted as determined by Owner.
I
PART 10 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
I
10.01 GOVERNING LAW
The Contract Documents and the nghts of the partIes
herein shall be governed by the laws of the state of
Washmgton. Venue shall be in the county in which
Owner's pnncIpal place of business is located, unless
otherwIse speCIfied.
I
I
10.02 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
I
Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, theIr
partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatIves to
the other party hereto and to partners, successors, aSSIgns,
and legal representatIves of such other party in respect to
covenants, agreements, and obhgatIOns contamed m the
Contract Documents. Neither party shall aSSIgn the Work
WIthout written consent of the other, except that
Contractor may aSSIgn the Work for securIty purposes, to
a bank or lending instItution authorIZed to do business m
the state of Washington. If eIther party attempts to make
I
I
I
00700 - page 30
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
I
such an assIgnment wIthout such consent, that party shall
nevertheless remaIn legally responsIble for all oblIgations
set forth In the Contract Documents.
I
10.03 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
I
No action or faIlure to act by Owner or AlE shall
constitute a WaIver of a right or duty afforded them under
the Contract Documents, nor shall such action or failure
to act constitute approval of an acquiescence in a breach
therem, except as may be specIfically agreed in wrIting.
I
10.04 CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION
I
Pursuant to RCW 39.06, Contractor shall be regIstered or
lIcensed as required by the laws of the State of
Washington, including but not lImIted to RCW 18.27.
I
10.05 TIME COMPUTATIONS
I
When computing any penod of time, the day of the event
from whIch the period of time begInS shall not be counted.
The last day IS counted unless It falls on a weekend or
legal holiday, in WhICh event the penod runs until the end
of the next day that is not a weekend or holiday. When
the penod of time allo",ed IS less than 7 days,
Intermediate Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holIdays are
excluded from the computation.
I
I
10.06 RECORDS RETENTION
I
The wage, payroll, and cost records of Contractor, and its
Subcontractors, and all records subject to audit in
accordance with Section 8.03, shall be retained for a
period of not less than 6 years after the date of Final
Acceptance.
I
I
10.07 THIRD-PARTY AGREEMENTS
I
The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a
contractual relationshIp of any kind between: AlE and
Contractor; Owner and any Subcontractor; or any persons
other than Owner and Contractor.
I
I 0.08 ANTITRUST ASSIGNMENT
I
Owner and Contractor recognIZe that in actual economic
practice, overcharges resulting from antitrust violations
are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore,
Contractor hereby aSSIgns to Owner any and all claims for
such overcharges as to goods, materials, and equipment
purchased in connection with the Work performed in
accordance with the Contract Documents, except as to
overcharges WhICh result from antitrust VIolations
I
I
commencing after the Contract Sum IS establIshed and
whIch are not passed on to Owner under a Change Order.
Contractor shall put a SImIlar clause In ItS Subcontracts,
and reqUire a SImIlar clause m its sub-Subcontracts, such
that all claims for such overcharges on the Work are
passed to Owner by Contractor.
END OF DIVISION 00-700
00700 - page 31
CLALLAM County - Effective: 3/3/02
Page 1 0: 11
I
I
I
I
IJ
.-
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
State of Washington
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES
Prevailing Wage Section - Telephone (360) 902-5335
PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540
Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts
The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the
hourly rate of fringe benefits. On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit
rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation
requirements is provided by clicking on the benefit code.
CLALLAM County
Effective 3/3/02
CLALLAM County - Effective: 3/3/02 Page 2 of 11 I:
STATIONARY POWER SAW OPERATOR $35.28 1M 50 I
STATIONARY WOODWORKING TOOLS $35.28 1M 50
....\., ~
CEMENT MASONS I
JOURNEY LEVEL $25.01 1
=
DIVERS & TENDERS
DIVER $75.57 1M 50 8A I
DIVER TENDER $37.85 1M 50 Q-
DREDGE WORKERS I
ASSISTANT ENGINEER $35.67 1B 50 8L ~~
ASSISTANT MATE (DECKHAND) $35.23 1B 50 8L ,
BOATMEN $35.67 1B 50 8L
ENGINEER WELDER $35.72 1B 50 8L
lEVERMAN, HYDRAULIC $37.11 18 50 8L I
MAINTENANCE $35.23 18 50 8L >:i:<
MATES $35.67 1B 50 8L I
OILER $35.33 1B 50 8L
DRYWALL TAPERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $34.92 14 5B I
ELECTRICAL FIXTURE MAINTENANCE WORKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $9.37 1 I
ELECTRICIANS - INSIDE
CABLE SPLICER $45.65 10 6H
CABLE SPLICER (TUNNEL) $62.70 10 6H I
CERTIFIED WELDER $43.99 10 6H
CERTIFIED WELDER (TUNNEL) $60.27 10 6H I
CONSTRUCTION STOCK PERSON $23.33 10 6H ~
;c::
JOURNEY LEVEL $42.33 10 6H l'
JOURNEY LEVEL (TUNNEL) $57.83 10 6H
ELECTRICIANS - MOTOR SHOP
CRAFTSMAN $15.37 2A 6C J
~
JOURNEY lEVEL $14.69 2A 6C ~
ELECTRICIANS - POWERLlNE CONSTRUCTION ~I
CABLE SPLICER $44.01 4A SA
~
CERTIFIED LINE WELDER $40.40 4A SA
GROUNDPERSON $29.62 4A SA ~I
HEAD GROUNDPERSON $31.13 4A SA ~,
HEAVY LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $40.40 4A SA iI
JACKHAMMER OPERATOR $31 .13 4A SA
JOURNEY LEVEL L1NEPERSON $40.40 4A SA
LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $34.44 4A SA ~'I
POLE SPRAYER $40.40 4A SA ~
http://WWW.1m.wa.gov/prevaI1mgwage/]wages/200211co05.htm 4/1 ~/O2
~I
-,
i~
.
I CLALLAM County - Effective: 3/3/02 Pa~,: 3 or i 1
I POWOERPERSON $31 . 13 4A SA
ELECTRONIC & TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIANS
I JOURNEY LEVEL $12.07 1
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS
CONSTRUCTOR $31.29 4A 6Q
I MECHANIC $42.25 4A QQ
MECHANIC IN CHARGE $46.63 4A QQ
I PROBATIONARY CONSTRUCTOR $16.27 4A QQ
FABRICATED PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS
ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $13.50 1
I FENCE ERECTORS
FENCE ERECTOR $13.80 1
I FENCE LABORER $11 .60 1
FLAGGERS
I JOURNEY LEVEL $24.99 1M 50
GLAZIERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $10.72 1
I HEAT & FROST INSULA TORS AND ASBESTOS WORKERS
MECHANIC $35.93 1F 5C
I HEATING EQUIPMENT MECHANICS
MECHANIC $18.45 14 SA
HOD CARRIERS & MASON TENDERS
I JOURNEY LEVEL $30.15 1M 50
INDUSTRIAL ENGINE AND MACHINE MECHANICS
I MECHANIC $15.65 1
INDUSTRIAL POWER VACUUM CLEANER
I JOURNEY LEVEL $9.07 1
INLAND BOATMEN
ASSISTANT ENGINEER $30.70 1K 50
I CHIEF ENGINEER $31.57 1K 50
COOK $26.58 1K 50
I DECK ENGINEER, ABLE SEAMAN, OILER $26.58 1K 50
DECKHAND $26.17 1K 50
FIRST MATE $30.80 1K 50
I MASTER $33.74 1K 50
MATE, LAUNCH OPERATOR $28.83 1K 50
I MESSMAN $21.96 1K 50
ORDINARY SEAMAN $23.28 1K 50
I INSPECTION/CLEANING/SEALING OF SEWER & WATER SYSTEMS BY REMOTE
CONTROL
http://www.lru. wa.gov/prevalhngwage/Jwages/20021/co05 .htm 4/ 1 ~/O2
I
CLALLAM County - Effective: 3/3/02 Page 4 of 11 It
:&..
CLEANER OPERATOR, FOAMER OPERATOR $9.73 1 I
GROUT TRUCK OPERATOR $11 .48 1 ~
HEAD OPERATOR $12.78 1 I
TECHNICIAN $6.90 1
TV TRUCK OPERATOR $10.53 ::a
1
INSULATION APPLICATORS I
JOURNEY LEVEL $20.50 1 -;.~
IRONWORKERS I
JOURNEY LEVEL $37.17 1B 5A
'"
LABORERS I
ASPHAL T RAKER $30.15 1M 50
BALLAST REGULA TOR MACHINE $29.67 1M 50
BATCH WEIGHMAN $24.99 1M 50 I
CARPENTER TENDER $29.67 1M 50
CASSION WORKER $30.51 1M 50 I
CEMENT DUMPER/PAVING $30.15 1M 50
CEMENT FINISHER TENDER $29.67 1M 50 !- ;i
CHIPPING GUN (OVER 30 LBS) $30.15 1M 50 'I
CHIPPING GUN (UNDER 30 LBS) $29.67 1M 50 '-.:.
CHUCK TENDER $29.67 1M 50 I
CLEAN-UP LABORER $29.67 1M 5Q
, .
CONCRETE FORM STRIPPER $29.67 1M 50
CONCRETE SAW OPERATOR $30.15 1M 50 -I
CRUSHER FEEDER $24.99 1M 50 ,
CURING LABORER $29.67 1M 50 I
DEMOLITION, WRECKING & MOVING $29.67 1M 50
(INCLUDING CHARRED MATERIALS)
DITCH DIGGER $29.67 1M 50 I
DIVER $30.51 1M 50 ,
DRILL OPERA TOR (HYDRAULIC, DIAMOND) $30.15 1M 50 I
DRILL OPERATOR, AIRTRAC $30.51 1M 50
~~
DUMPMAN $29.67 1M 50
FALLER/BUCKER, CHAIN SAW $30.15 1M 50 -I
FINAL DETAIL CLEANUP (Le., dusting, vacuuming, $22.67 1M 50 - '
window cleaning; NOT construction debris cleanup) ~,I
FINE GRADERS $29.67 1M 50
~
FIRE WATCH $29.67 1M 50
FORM SETTER $29.67 1M 50 ~I
;,
i
GABION BASKET BUILDER $29.67 1M 50 1;
GENERAL LABORER $29.67 1M 50 ~:I
GRADE CHECKER & TRANSIT PERSON $30.15 1M 50 "
~
http://www.lm. wa.gov/prevaIlmgwage/Jwages/2UU21/coU5 .htm 4/ 1 ~/U2 ~:I
.,
~
I CLALLAM County - Effective: 3/3/02 Page 5 0 ( 11
I GRINDERS $29.67 1M 50
GROUT MACHINE TENDER $29.67 1M 50
I HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL A $30.51 1M 50
HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL B $30.15 1M 50
HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL C $29.67 1M 50
I HIGH SCALER $30.51 1M 50
HOD CARRIER/MORT ARMAN $30.15 1M 50
I JACKHAMMER $30.15 1M 50
LASER BEAM OPERATOR $30.15 1M 50
MINER $30.51 1M 50
I NOZZLEMAN, CONCRETE PUMP. GREEN $30.15 1M 50
CUTTER WHEN USING HIGH PRESSURE AIR &
I WATER ON CONCRETE & ROCK, SANDBLAST,
GUNITE, SHOTCRETE, WATER BLASTER
PAVEMENT BREAKER $30.15 1M 50
I PILOT CAR $24.99 1M 50
PIPE RELlNER (NOT INSERT TYPE) $30.15 1M 50
PIPELA YER & CAULKER $30.15 1M 50
I PIPELA YER & CAULKER (LEAD) $30.51 1M 50
PIPEWRAPPER $30.15 1M 50
I POT TENDER $29.67 1M 50
POWOERMAN $30.51 1M 50
I POWOERMAN HELPER $29.67 1M 50
POWERJACKS $30.15 1M 50
RAILROAD SPIKE PULLER (POWER) $30.15 1M 50
I RE- TIMBERMAN $30.51 1M 50
RIPRAP MAN $29.67 1M 50
I SIGNALMAN $29.67 1M 50
SLOPER SPRA YMAN $29.67 1M 50
SPREADER (CLARY POWER OR SIMILAR TYPES) $30.15 1M 50
I SPREADER (CONCRETE) $30.15 1M 50
STAKE HOPPER $29.67 1M 50
I STOCKPILER $29.67 1M 50
TAMPER & SIMILAR ELECTRIC, AIR & GAS $30.15 1M 5Q
TAMPER (MUL TIPLE & SELF PROPELLED) $30.15 1M 50
I TOOLROOM MAN (AT JOB SITE) $29.67 1M 50
TOPPER-TAILER $29.67 1M 50
I TRACK LABORER $29.67 1M 50
TRACK LINER (POWER) $30.15 1M 50
I TUGGER OPERATOR $30.15 1M 50
VIBRATING SCREED (AIR, GAS. OR ELECTRIC) $29.67 1M 50
I http://www.Im.wa.gov/prevalImgwage/]wages/2UU21/coU5.htm 4/1 ~/O2
CLALLAM County - Effective: 3/3/02 Page 6 of 11 I-
VIBRATOR $30.15 1M 50 I-
WELDER $29.67 1M 50
WELL-POINT LABORER $30.15 1M 50 ,
LABORERS - UNDERGROUND SEWER & WATER
GENERAL LABORER $29.67 1M 50
PIPE LAYER $30.15 1M 50 I
LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION ,:;;
~
IRRIGATION OR LAWN SPRINKLER INSTALLERS $11.42 1 I
LANDSCAPE EQUIPMENT OPERA TORS OR $7.81 1
TRUCK DRIVERS ,>>,
LANDSCAPING OR PLANTING LABORERS $7.93 1 I
LATHERS ~,
JOURNEY LEVEL $34.94 1M 50 ,
MACHINISTS (HYDROELECTRIC SITE WORK)
MACHINIST $16.84 1
METAL FABRICATION (IN SHOP) ,
FITTERlWELDER $15.16 1
LABORER $11.13 1 I
MACHINE OPERATOR $10.66 1
~
PAINTER $11.41 1 I
PAINTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $28.63 2B 5A ~,
PLASTERERS -I
JOURNEY LEVEL $35.63 1R SA
~'""
PLAYGROUND & PARK EQUIPMENT INSTALLERS I
JOURNEY LEVEL $7.93 1
- --
PLUMBERS & PIPEFITTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $44.76 1G SA I
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERA TORS , -
ASSISTANT ENGINEERS $33.59 1T 50 8L I
BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (3 YO & $36.05 1T 50 8L -"
UNDER)
BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (OVER 3 YO & $36.49 1T 50 8L ,
UNDER 6 YO)
BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (6 YO AND $36.99 1T 50 8L t
OVER WITH A TT ACHMENTS)
BACKHOES, (75 HP & UNDER) $35.69 1T 50 8L w.'
BACKHOES, (OVER 75 HP) $36.05 1T 50 8t" 11
BARRIER MACHINE (ZIPPER) $36.05 1T 50 8L ~
BATCH PLANT OPERA TOR, CONCRETE $36.05 1T 50 8L
BEL T LOADERS (ELEVATING TYPE) ~I
$35.69 1T 50 8L -,
$
~
http://WWW.lm.wa.gov/prevalhngwage/Jwages/2002l/cOO5.htm 4/ 1 ~/O2 "il
'*'
I CLALLAM County - Effective: 3/3/02 Pa~~ 7 m:" . ~
I BOBCAT $33.59 1T 50 81..,
BROOMS $33.59 1T 50 ~b
BUMP CUTTER $36.05 1T 50 8L
I CABLEWA YS $36.49 1T 50 8L
CHIPPER $36.05 1T 50 8L
I COMPRESSORS $33.59 1T 50 8L
CONCRETE FINISH MACHINE - LASER SCREED $33.59 1T 50 ~h
I CONCRETE PUMPS $35.69 1T 50 8L
CONCRETE PUMP-TRUCK MOUNT WITH BOOM $36.05 1T 50 8L
ATTACHMENT
I CONVEYORS $35.69 1T 50 81..,
CRANES, THRU 19 TONS, WITH ATTACHMENTS $35.69 1T 50 8L
I CRANES, 20 - 44 TONS, WITH ATTACHMENTS $36.05 1T 50 8L
CRANES, 45 TONS - 99 TONS, UNDER 150 FT OF $36.49 1T 50 8L
BOOM (INCLUDING JIB WITH AT ACHMENTS)
I CRANES, 100 TONS - 199 TONS, OR 150 FT OF $36.99 1T 50 8L
BOOM (INCLUDING JIB WITH ATTACHMENTS)
CRANES, 200 TONS TO 300 TONS, OR 250 FT OF $37.49 1T 50 8L
I BOOM (INCLUDING JIB WITH ATTACHMENTS)
CRANES, A-FRAME, 10 TON AND UNDER $33.59 1T 50 8L
I CRANES, A-FRAME, OVER 10 TON $35.69 1T 50 8L
CRANES, OVER 300 TONS, OR 300' OF BOOM $37.99 1T 50 8L
INCLUDING JIB WITH ATTACHMENTS
I CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE ( 20 - 44 $36.05 1T 50 8L
TONS)
CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE ( 45 - 99 $36.49 1T 50 8L
I TONS)
CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (100 TONS $36.99 1T 50 8L
I & OVER)
CRANES, TOWER CRANE UP TO 175' IN HEIGHT, $36.99 1T 50 8L
BASE TO BOOM
I CRANES, TOWER CRANE OVER 175' IN HEIGHT, $37.49 1T 50 8L
BASE TO BOOM
CRUSHERS $36.05 1T 50 8L
I DECK ENGINEER/DECK WINCHES (POWER) $36.05 1T 50 8L
DERRICK, BUILDING $36.49 1T 50 8L
I DOZERS, 0-9 & UNDER $35.69 1T 50 8L
DRILL OILERS - AUGER TYPE, TRUCK OR $35.69 1T 50 8L
CRANE MOUNT
I DRILLING MACHINE $36.05 1T 50 8L
ELEVATOR AND MANLlFT, PERMANENT AND $33.59 1T 50 8L
I SHAFT-TYPE
EQUIPMENT SERVICE ENGINEER (OILER) $35.69 1T 50 8l
I http://www.lm. wa.gov/prevalllngwage/Jwages/2UU21/coU5 .htm 41l~,')1
CLALLAM County - Effective: 3/3/02 Page 8 of 11 I-
FINISHING MACHINE/BIDWELL GAMACO AND $36.05 1T 50 8L I;
SIMILAR EQUIP
FORK LIFTS, (3000 LBS AND OVER) $35.69 1T 50 8l
FORK LIFTS, (UNDER 3000 LBS) $33.59 1T 50 81" I'
GRADE ENGINEER $35.69 1T 50 8L
GRADECHECKER AND STAKE MAN $33.59 1T 50 8L I
HOISTS, OUTSIDE (ELEVATORS AND $35.69 1T 50 8L
MANLlFTS), AIR TUGGERS
HORIZONTAUDIRECTIONAL DRILL LOCATOR $35.69 1T 50 8L I
HORIZONTAUDIRECTIONAL DRILL OPERATOR $36.05 1T 50 8L ,"
HYDRALlFTS/BOOM TRUCKS (10 TON & UNDER) $33.59 1T 50 8L I
HYDRALlFTS/BOOM TRUCKS (OVER 10 TON) $35.69 1T 50 8L ~
LOADERS, OVERHEAD (6 YO UP TO 8 YO) $36.49 1T 50 8L
LOADERS, OVERHEAD (8 YO & OVER) $36.99 1T 50 8L I
LOADERS, OVERHEAD (UNDER 6 YO), PLANT $36.05 1T 50 8L ~
FEED I
LOCOMOTIVES, ALL $36.05 1T 50 8L
~
MECHANICS, ALL $36.05 1T 50 8L
MIXERS, ASPHAL T PLANT $36.05 1T 50 8L I
MOTOR PATROL GRADER (FINISHING) $36.05 1T 50 8L ~
MOTOR PATROL GRADER (NON-FINISHING) $35.69 1T 50 8L I
MUCKING MACHINE, MOLE, TUNNEL DRILL $36.49 1T 50 8L ~~
AND/OR SHIELD
OIL DISTRIBUTORS, BLOWER DISTRIBUTION $33.59 1T 50 8L I
AND MULCH SEEDING OPERATOR . -'"
PAVEMENT BREAKER $33.59 1T 50 8L I
PILEDRIVER (OTHER THAN CRANE MOUNT) $36.05 1T 50 8L
PLANT OILER (ASPHAL T CRUSHER) $35.69 1T 50 81"
POSTHOLE DIGGER, MECHANICAL $33.59 1T 50 8L ,
POWER PLANT $33.59 1T 50 8L
PUMPS, WATER $33.59 1T 50 8L I
QUAD 9,0-10, AND HD-41 $36.49 1T 50 8L
-~
REMOTE CONTROL OPERA TOR ON RUBBER $36.49 1T 50 8L
TIRED EARTH MOVING EQUIP I
RIGGER AND BELLMAN $33.59 1T 50 8L "--
ROLLAGON $36.49 1T 50 8L I
ROLLER, OTHER THAN PLANT ROAD MIX $33.59 1T 50 8L
<-A
ROLLERS, PLANTMIX OR MUL TILlFT MATERIALS $35.69 1T 50 8L
ROTO-MILL, ROTO-GRINDER $36.05 1T 50 8L 'I
SAWS, CONCRETE $35.69 1T 50 8L .....
-I
~
http://www.1ru. wa.gov/prevallmgwage/Jwages/2uu211coU5 .htm 4/US/U2 ':1
tIN
I CLALLAM County - Effective: 3/3/02 Page S o:~ 11
I SCRAPERS - SELF PROPELLED, HARD TAIL END $36.05 1T 50 8L
DUMP, ARTICULATING OFF-ROAD EQUIPMENT
( UNDER 45 YO)
I SCRAPERS - SELF PROPELLED, HARD TAIL END $36.49 1T 50 8L
DUMP, ARTICULATING OFF-ROAD EQUIPMENT
(45 YO AND OVER)
I SCRAPERS, CONCRETE AND CARRY ALL $35.69 1T 50 8L
SCREED MAN $36.05 1T 50 8l
I SHOTCRETE GUNITE $33.59 1T 50 8L
SLlPFORM PAVERS $36.49 1T 50 8l
SPREADER, TOPSIDE OPERATOR - BLAW KNOX $36.05 1T 50 8~
I SUBGRADE TRIMMER $36.05 1T 50 8L
TRACTORS, (75 HP & UNDER) $35.69 1T 50 8L
I TRACTORS, (OVER 75 HP) $36.05 1T 50 8L
TRANSFER MATERIAL SERVICE MACHINE $36.05 1T 50 8L
I TRANSPORTERS, ALL TRACK OR TRUCK TYPE $36.49 1T 50 8L
TRENCHING MACHINES $35.69 1T 50 8L
TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER ( UNDER 100 $35.69 1T 50 8L
I TON)
TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER (100 TON & $36.05 1T 50 8L
OVER)
I WHEEL TRACTORS, FARMALL TYPE $33.59 1T 50 8L
YO YO PAY DOZER $36.05 1T 50 8L
I POWER EQUIPMENT OPERA TORS- UNDERGROUND SEWER & WATER
(SEE POWER EQUIPMENT OPERA TORS)
POWER LINE CLEARANCE TREE TRIMMERS
I JOURNEY LEVEL IN CHARGE $29.97 4A SA
SPRAY PERSON $28.35 4A SA
I TREE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $28.75 4A SA
TREE TRIMMER $26.62 4A SA
I TREE TRIMMER GROUNDPERSON $19.48 4A 5A
REFRIGERATION & AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS
MECHANIC $27.68 1
I RESIDENTIAL BRICK & MARBLE MASONS
JOURNEY LEVEL $35.37 1M 5A
I RESIDENTIAL CARPENTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $17.85 1
RESIDENTIAL CEMENT MASONS
I JOURNEY LEVEL $18.00 1
RESIDENTIAL DRYWALL TAPERS
I JOURNEY LEVEL $21.05 1
RESIDENTIAL ELECTRICIANS
http://www.lm.wa.gov/prevallmgwage/]wages/2UU21/coU5.htm 4/1 ~/O1
I
CLALLAM County - Effective: 3/3/02 Page 10 of 11 I~
..'
:Q;.
JOURNEY lEVEL $27.78 1 I
RESIDENTIAL GLAZIERS :,:,s'
JOURNEY lEVEL $10.00 1 I
RESIDENTIAL INSULATION APPLICATORS
JOURNEY lEVEL ~
$9.86 1
RESIDENTIAL LABORERS "
JOURNEY lEVEL $18.08 1
RESIDENTIAL PAINTERS I
JOURNEY lEVEL $22.19 1
. .
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBERS & PIPEFITTERS I
JOURNEY lEVEL $16.97 1
RESIDENTIAL REFRIGERATION & AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS 1
JOURNEY lEVEL $43.46 1G 5A I
RESIDENTIAL SHEET METAL WORKERS
!
JOURNEY lEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $26.23 14 5A I
RESIDENTIAL SOFT FLOOR LAYERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $10.88 1
RESIDENTIAL SPRINKLER FITTERS (FIRE PROTECTION) I
JOURNEY LEVEL $34.70 1R 51
ROOFERS I
JOURNEY lEVEL $32.53 1R 5A
USING IRRITABLE BITUMINOUS MATERIALS $35.53 1R 5A I
SHEET METAL WORKERS
JOURNEY lEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $39.68 1J 6l
SIGN MAKERS & INSTALLERS (ELECTRICAL) 'I
JOURNEY lEVEL $19.29 1 , ~
SIGN MAKERS & INSTALLERS (NON-ELECTRICAL) I
JOURNEY lEVEL $12. 15 1
il:_>!'
SOFT FLOOR LAYERS
JOURNEY lEVEL $10.88 1 .1
SOLAR CONTROLS FOR WINDOWS ~
JOURNEY lEVEL $10.31 1B 50 11
SPRINKLER FITTERS (FIRE PROTECTION) '6
~
JOURNEY lEVEL $26.41 1 ~I
STAGE RIGGING MECHANICS (NON STRUCTURAL)
JOURNEY lEVEL $13.23 1 ~
SURVEYORS 11
CHAIN PERSON $9.35 1
INSTRUMENT PERSON $11 .40 1
~I
PARTY CHIEF $13.40 1 0,
k:
http://www.lm. wa.gov/prevaIllOgwage/jwages/2002I1co05 .htm 4/ US/02
~I
jt
~
ID.
I CLALLAM County - Effective: 3/3/02 Pagt: 11 of ' !
I TELEPHONE LINE CONSTRUCTION - OUTSIDE
CA8LE SPLICER $24.74 28 5A
I HOLE DIGGER/GROUND PERSON $13.18 28 5A
INSTALLER (REPAIRER) $23.66 28 5A
JOURNEY LEVEL TELEPHONE L1NEPERSON $22.91 28 5A
I SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER I $24.74 28 5A
SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER II $24.21 28 5A
I TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (HEAVY) $24.74 28 5A
TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERA TOR (LIGHT) $22.91 28 5A
TELEVISION GROUND PERSON $12.42 28 5A
I TELEVISION L1NEPERSONIINST ALLER $17.02 28 5A
TELEVISION SYSTEM TECHNICIAN $20.54 28 5A
I TELEVISION TECHNICIAN $18.33 28 5A
TREE TRIMMER $22.91 28 5A
TERRAZZO WORKERS & TILE SETTERS
I JOURNEY LEVEL $32.83 1H 5A
TILE, MARBLE & TERRAZZO FINISHERS
I FINISHER $26.66 1H 5A
TRAFFIC CONTROL STRIPERS
I JOURNEY LEVEL $27.67 1K 5A
TRUCK DRIVERS
ASPHAL T MIX ( TO 16 YARDS) $33.48 1T 50 8L
I ASPHAL T MIX (OVER 16 YARDS) $34.06 1T 50 8L
DUMP TRUCK $20.23 1
I DUMP TRUCK & TRAILER $20.23 1
OTHER TRUCKS $34.06 1T 50 8L
TRANSIT MIXER $23.73 1
I WELL DRILLERS & IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLERS
IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLER $11.60 1
I OILER $9.45 1
WELL DRILLER $11.60 1
I
I
I
I
http://www.lm.wa.gov/prevallmgwage/jwagesf2UU21/coU5.htm 4/ I ~;U2
I
BENEFIT CODE KEY
Page 1 of7
BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 03-03-02
OVERTIME CODES
Overtime Calculations are based on the hourly rate actually paid to the worker.
On public works projects, the hourly rate must be not less than the prevailing
rate of wage minus the hourly rate of the cost of fringe benefits actually provided
for the worker.
1. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY
(40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE
HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
A. All hours worked on Saturdays, Sundays and holidays shall be paid at one and one-half
times the hourly rate of wage.
B. All hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of
wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of
wage.
C. All hours worked on Sundays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage.
D. The first eight (8) hours worked on Saturdays of a five - eight hour work week and the
first eight (8) hours worked on a fifth calendar day, excluding Sunday, in a four - ten hour
schedule, shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked
in excess of eight (8) hours per day on Saturday; all hours worked in excess of eight (8)
hours in a fifth calendar weekday of a four - ten hour schedule; all hours worked in excess of
ten (10) hours per day Monday through Friday, and all hours worked on Sundays and
holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage.
F. The first eight (8) hours on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly
rate of wage. All hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours on Saturday, and all hours
worked on Sundays and holidays (except Labor Day) shall be paid at double the hourly rate
of wage. All hours worked on Labor Day shall be paid at three times the hourly rate of
wage.
G. The first ten (10) hours worked on Saturdays and the first ten (10) hours worked on a
fifth calendar weekday in a four - ten hour schedule, shall be paid at one and one-half times
the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked in excess of ten (10) hours per day Monday
through Saturday, and all hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the
hourly rate of wage.
H. All hours worked on Saturdays (except makeup days if work is lost due to inclement
weather conditions or equipment breakdown) shall be paid at one and one-half times the
hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the
http://www.lm.wa.gov/prevaI1mgwage/HenCodes/2U021/HenetitCodes.htm 4/1 ~/02
I
I:
I
,"
I
,"~'
,
I
i1..
I
,
I
I
I
;M
:,
-I
> ~
~I
~
"I
ih
~I
13
iI
~I
x
~
:[1
'.
"
oW
I BENEFIT CODE KEY
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Page 2 of7
hourly rate of wage.
J. The first eight (8) hours on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly
rate of wage. All hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours and Saturday, and all hours
worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage.
K. All hours worked on Saturdays and Sundays shall be paid at one and one-half times the
hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of
wage.
L. All hours worked on Saturdays, Sundays and holidays (except Thanksgiving Day and
Christmas Day) shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours
worked on Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day shall be paid at double the hourly rate of
wage.
M. All hours worked on Saturdays (except makeup days if work is lost due to inclement
weather conditions) shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All
hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage.
N. All hours worked on Saturdays (except makeup days) shall be paid at one and one-half
times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at
double the hourly rate of wage.
P. All hours worked on Saturdays (except makeup days) and Sundays shall be paid at one
and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at
double the hourly rate of wage.
Q. All hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate
of wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays (except Christmas Day) shall be paid at
double the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Christmas Day shall be paid at two and
one-half times the hourly rate of wage.
R. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of
wage.
S. All hours worked on Sundays between the hours of 12:00AM Sunday and 6:00AM
Monday and on holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage.
T. All hours worked on Saturdays, except makeup days, shall be paid at one and one-half
times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked after 6:00PM Saturday to 6:00AM Monday
and on holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage.
U. All hours worked on Saturdays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of
wage. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays (except Labor Day) shall be paid at two
times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Labor Day shall be paid at three times
the hourly rate of wage.
W. All hours worked on Saturdays and Sundays (except makeup days) shall be paid at
one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid
at two times the hourly rate of wage.
http://www.lm.wa.gov/prevallmgwage/BenCodes/2UU21/BenetitCodes.htm
4/ 1 ~/u:z
BENEFIT CODE KEY
Page 3 of7
2. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY
(40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE
HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
A. The first six (6) hours worked on Saturday shall be paid at one and one-half times the
hourly rate of wage. All hours worked in excess of six (6) hours on Saturday and all hours
worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage.
B. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of
wage.
C. All hours worked on Sundays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of
wage. All hours worked on holidays shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage.
D. All hours worked on Saturdays and Sundays shall be paid at one and one-half times the
hourly rate of wage. The first eight (8) hours worked on holidays shall be paid at straight
time in addition to the holiday pay. All hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours on
holidays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage.
E. All hours worked on Saturdays or hOlidays (except Labor Day) shall be paid at one and
one-half times the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Sundays or on Labor Day shall
be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage.
F. The first eight (8) hours worked on holidays shall be paid at the straight hourly rate of
wage in addition to the holiday pay. All hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours on
holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage.
G. All hours worked on Sunday shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. All
hours worked on paid holidays shall be paid at two and one-half times the hourly rate of
wage including hOliday pay.
H. All hours worked on Sunday shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. All
hours worked on holidays shall be paid at one and one-half times the hourly rate of wage.
J. All hours worked on Sundays shall be paid at two times the hourly rate of wage. All
hours worked on paid hOlidays shall be paid at two and one-half times the hourly rate of
wage, including the holiday pay. All hours worked on unpaid holidays shall be paid at two
times the hourly rate of wage.
M. All hours worked on Saturdays, Sundays and holidays shall be paid at double the
hourly rate of wage.
O. AU hours worked on Sundays and holidays shall be paid at one and one-half times the
hourly rate of wage.
http://www.lrn.wa.gov/prevallmgwagelHenCodeS/2UU2I1HenetitCodes.htm
4/1 ~/U2
I~
j
Ii
;
1-
-"
I
2,
I
~,
I
;&,
I
I
I
~
I
j.~
I
,
....
I
I
, ,
~I
......
I
~
LI
il
a:
JI
lll:'
~I
;:..
.
I BENEFIT CODE KEY
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Page';' 0 ~ .
4A. All hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week
shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage. All hours worked on Saturdays, Sundays,
and holidays shall be paid at double the hourly rate of wage.
5.
HOLIDAY CODES
A. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiv:ng
Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (7).
B. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving
Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, the day before Christmas Day, and Christmas Day (8).
C. Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor
Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (8).
D. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving
Day, the Friday and Saturday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (8).
G. HOlidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,
Thanksgiving Day, the last work day before Christmas Day, and Christmas Day (7).
H. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Thanksgiving Day, the
day after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (6).
I. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving
Day, and Christmas Day (6).
N. Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor
Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas
Day (9).
O. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Washington's Birthday, Independence Day, Labor Day,
Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (6).
a. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,
Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (6).
R. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,
Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving Day, one-half day before Christmas Day, and
Christmas Day (7 1/2).
S. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Mem.orial Day, Independence Day,
Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (7).
T.
Paid holiday: seven (7) paid holidays.
http://www.lm.wa.gov/prevallmgwage/HenCodes/20021/HenetitCodes.htm
4/11$/l)'2
BENEFIT CODE KEY
Page 5 of7
V. Paid Holidays: six (6) paid holidays.
W. Paid Holidays: nine (9) paid hOlidays.
X. Holidays: After 520 hours - New Year's Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day.
After 2080 hours - New Year's Day, Washington's Birthday, Memorial Day, Independence
Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day and a floating holiday (8).
Y. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Presidential
Election Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday following Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day
(8).
Z. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's
Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (8).
6. HOLIDAY CODES
A. Paid HOlidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day,
Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (8).
C. Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor
Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, the last work day before Christmas
Day, and Christmas Day (9).
D. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day,
Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, the day
before or after Christmas Day (9).
H. Holidays: New Year's Day, Martin Luther King Jr. Day, Memorial Day, Independence
Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day
(8).
I. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,
Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day (7).
L. Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving
Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, the last working day before Christmas Day, and
Christmas Day (8).
Q. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day.
Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day. Unpaid Holiday:
Presidents' Day.
S. Paid HOlidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,
Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Eve Day, and Christmas
Day (8).
http://www.lm.wa.gov/prevaIlmgwage/BenCodes/2UU21/BenetitCodes.htm
4/1 ~iU~
I,
I
;
I
~"
I
:>>.
I
~
I
I
I
,;u
I
I
, <
-I
I
I
I
I
~
'~I
;;U
.:r;1
~
1.
rl
~
'YI
:<
'.
.w
I BENEFIT CODE KEY
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Page 6 0 f ~
1. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day,
Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day, the last working day before
Christmas Day, and Christmas Day (9).
U. Holidays: New Year's Day, Day before New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Day before
Independence Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after
Thanksgiving Day, the day before Christmas Day, Christmas Day (10).
V. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,
Thanksgiving Day, day after Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Eve Day, Christmas Day,
Employee's Birthday, and one day of the Employee's choice (10).
W. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Day before New Year's Day, Presidents' Day,
Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, day after Thanksgiving
Day, Christmas Day, day before Christmas Day (10).
X. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, day before or after New Year's Day, Presidents' Day,
Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, day after Thanksgiving
Day, Christmas Day, day before or after Christmas Day, Employee's Birthday (11).
NOTE CODES
8.
A. The standby rate of pay for divers shall be one-half times the divers rate of pay. In
addition to the hourly wage and fringe benefits, the following depth premiums apply to
depths of fifty feet or more: over 50' to 100' - $1.00 per foot for each foot over 50 feet, over
100' to 175' - $2.25 per foot for each foot over 100 feet, over 175' to 250' - $5.50 per foot for
each foot over 175 feet, over 250' - divers may name their own price, provided it is no less
than the scale listed for 250 feet.
C. The standby rate of pay for divers shall be one-half times the divers rate of pay. In
addition to the hourly wage and fringe benefits, the following depth premiums apply to
depths of fifty feet or more: over 50' to 100' - $1.00 per foot for each foot over 50 feet, ov::r
100' to 150' - $1.50 per foot for each foot over 100 feet, over 150' to 200' - $2.00 per foot for
each foot over 150 feet, over 200' - divers may name their own price.
D. Workers working with supplied air on hazmat projects receive an additional $1.00 per
hour.
E. All classifications, including all apprentices, reporting to an employer's designated job
headquarters and working a minimum of four (4) hours in anyone (1) day shall receive a
wage supplement of twenty-four dollars ($24.00) in addition to the prevailing hourly rate of
wage and fringe benefits.
L. Workers on hazmat projects receive additional hourly premiums as follows - Level A:
$0.75, Level B: $0.50, and Level C: $0.25.
M. Workers on hazmat projects receive additional hourly premiums as follows - Levels A &
http://www.1m.wa.gov/prevallmgwage/HenCodes/2UU211HenetitCodes.htm 4/1 ~i():.!
BENEFIT CODE KEY
Page 70f7
B: $1.00, Levels C & 0: $0.50.
N. Workers on hazmat projects receive additional hourly premiums as follows _ Level A:
$1.00, Level B: $0.75, Level C: $0.50, and Level 0: $0.25.
.
Preyailing Wa~ Hom~ I Prevailing Wage Rates
Prevailing Wage Home
.
Last updated: Thursday, January 31, 2002
~ :1W1s1dngton
Washington State
Information & Services
Comments about this page to: dowI235@fni.wa.gov
http://www.lru.wa.gov/prevaIlmgwage/BenCodeSI2UU2I1BenetItCodes.htm
411 ~/U2
Il
I
~
I
...;.~
I
~:
I
:if;
,I
&.
I
I
J
~I
~
~I
"'~
'I
I
I
-..
I
u
'I
6-j:
"I
~
:1
;r~
"1
"
*'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01000 GENERAL
1. CondItIons:
a. General ConditIOns and other contractual documents apply to each DiVISIOn of the
SpecIficatIons.
b. ProvisIOns contamed m thIS DIvIsIOn apply to each DIvision of the SpecIfications.
c. In the case of conflIct between DivIsIOn Oland DIvision 00, the condItions set forth m
Ihvlsion 00 shall be followed.
2. Workmet!:
a. Contractor shall at all tImes enforce StrICt discipline and good order among his workmen
and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skIlled m the work
asstgned to him.
b. Further Contractor shall take due care and caution with portions of the Work dealing
wIth tITeplaceable time-dated Archttectural material.
c. Refer also to DIviSIOn 00 - General ConditIons 5.01
3. Taxes:
a. Except as contamed m the General CondttIons, sales, use, payroll, unemployment, old
age pensIOn, and surtax apphcable to this Project shall be paId by Contractor wIth the
exceptIon of sales or use tax on matenals furnished by Owner.
b. Taxes and assessments on real property comprising the site of this Project shall be paid
by Owner.
4. Manufacturer's Directions:
a. Follow Manufacturer's dtrections unless otherwise indicated m Contract Documents.
5.
Prolect Destgn Personnel:
a. ArchItect:
b. Structural Engineer:
c. CIVIl Engineer:
d. Mechanical Engineer:
e. Electrical Engineer:
f. HortIculturist:
Stuart Bonney, AlA, Olympic Design Works Inc; (360) 417-2777
Ira L. Gross, PE, Structural Engineer; (206) 623-0769
Bob Leach, PE, Northwestern Territones Inc.; (360) 452-8491
Henry Romer, PE, RIchmond/Archos Engmeers; (360) 357-9589
Rod Roche, PE, Richmond/Archos Engmeers; (360) 357-9589
Matthew Albright; (360) 452-0121
END OF SECTION 01 000
01 010 SUMMARY OF THE WORK
01 0 11 Work covered bv Contract Documents
1. Unless otherwIse prOVIded, Contractor shall provide at his expense all matenals, labor,
equipment, tools, transportatIon, and utilitIes, mcluding cost of connection, necessary for
successful completion of Project.
2. Refer also to DIvision 00 - General Conditions 4.01
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 01 - General Requirements
May 2002
ol~c Design Works Il1C, PS
I
01 012 OrganizatIon and Format ofProlect Manual
1. DIvIsIOn and paragraph numbers, of the Project Manual and the Items of work Included under the
headIngs generally conform to the "Master Format" of the ConstructIon SpecIficatIOn Institute.
NumberIng of paragraphs and dIvIsions IS merely for convemence and IdentIficatIon and may not
be consecutIve: the Contractor shall check hIS copIes of the Contract Documents WIth the
SpecIficatIOn and DrawIng index to be sure that they are complete. Trade headIngs are used in
the SpecIficatIOns for convemence only. The ArchItect is not bound to define the limits of any
Subcontractors.
I
I
I
2. These SpeCIficatIons are of the abbreVIated or "streamlIned" type, and frequently include
Incomplete sentences. Words such as "shall", "shall be", "the Contractor shall" and SImilar
mandatory phrases are noted on the draWIngs. Phrases follOWIng a headIng for materIal or item
of eqUIpment and lIstIng required features or characteristIcs of the Item shall be construed as
meanIng, "The Item shall be...", or "The Item shall Include...", and the Contractor shall provIde
all Items, artIcles, materials, and operations lIsted; Including all labor, material, equipment and
InCIdentals reqUIred for satisfactory InstallatIon and completion of the work.
I
I
I
3. The following terms are used m the Contract Documents and are defined as follows:
a. The terms "approved" and "for approval" mean "approved by Owner" unless explICItly
stated otherwIse in contract documents and "for the Owner's approval'" unless explIcItly
stated otherwIse m contract documents.
b. The term "coordmate" means "satisfactorIly combme the work of all trades for a
complete and operatIonal installatIOn".
c. The term "selected" means "selected by the Ov.mer" and unless noted otherwise is
hmIted to a manufacturer's standard lIne of colors, finishes, or details.
d. The term "provide" means "furnish and install".
e. The term "directed" means "as dIrected by the Owner".
f. "Vhere the terms, "or approved" or "or approved equal" are used, the Owner is the sole
judge of the qualIty and SUItabIlity of the proposed substItution.
I
I
I
.1
01 013 Work by Separate Contract:
1. Owner shall provide under separate Contract Items noted below, In addItIon to items noted on
Drawings. Electrical rough-m, all service and distribution condUIt, embedded attachment Items,
blockmg and backIng shall be provIded by Contractor. Contractor shall coordInate all work WIth
Owner contracted supplIers/installers.
a. Telephone, FIber Optic CommumcatIons, and Video wirIng
b. Computer and VIdeo Equipment
c. New Exhibition Casework (Extg' Casework @ Stairway in Base Bid)
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 01 010
I
01 020 ALLOWANCES
I
01 021 General
1. Allowances are monies provided the Owner under the constructIOn contract for Owner selected
Items. The Owner may select materials from any supplier and submit mVOIces to Contractor for
Inclusion m allowance amounts. Allowances shall be considered Subcontract amounts. Deletion
of any allowance item shall be accompanied by a 10% profit and overhead amount. Balances of
Port Angeles Carnegie Library May 2002
DlVlslOn 01 - General Requirements ol~c Design Works Inc, PS
I
I
I
I
allowances not used shall be remitted to Owner wIth a correspondmg 10% to cover overhead and
profit. AddItIons or increases m allowance amounts shall have a correspondmg 10% added.
I
I
2.
Allowances are for materials only, all Work reqUIred for mstallatIOn shall be mcluded in Base
BId unless noted otherwIse.
01 022 BId Allowances
I
1.
All Base BIds shall mclude the followmg Allowance amounts:
I
Allowance 1:
I
Allowance 2:
I
I
I
Allowance 3:
I
I
AlIowanl~e 4:
I
I
I
I
Spec 02-950 Trees, Plants, and Groundcovers
Allowance Amount $ 3000.00
. Quantity, size, and planting procedures indicated on Sheet
A-OI, SIte Plan and DIvisIOn 02-900, Landscaping
Spec16-500 Lighting Fixtures
Allowance Amount $ 5000.00
. Allowance covers type A-I and A-3 historic ambient lighting
fixtures only.
. ProvIde track lighting track, extenor hghtmg, exit and
emergency hghting under Base BId.
Spec 16-500 Lighting Fixtures
Allowance Amount $ 2500.00
. Allowance covers track lighting fixture heads only.
. Allowance is for Owner to select type of fixture heads from
installed manufacturers hne
. PrOVIde track lighting track and installation under Base Bid.
Spec 08-500 Hardware
Allowance Amount $ 1500.00
. Allowance covers door hardware only, window hardware 10
DIVISIon 08.
. Allowance is for Owner selected new hardware and salvage and
mamtenance of existing hardware
END OF SECTION 01 020
01030 BASE BIDS AND ALTERNATES
01 031 General
1. Intent:
a. It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract for the construction of the Project
complete as shown and mdicated. In order to allow the maximum amount of
construction within a fixed budget, the Owner reserves the nght to reject any or all bids,
to accept only the Base Bid, and any or all alternates.
I
I
I
2. Description of Base bid:
a. Refer to Part I BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 0 I - General Requrrements
May 2002
ol~c Design Warks Inc, PS
I
I
I
b. Washmgton State and local sales taxes shall not be mcluded m the Alternate BIds.
3.
Scheduling of Work by BId Alternate:
a. All Work by BId Alternates is to be pnced based on Notice to Proceed of July 01, 2003
b. Owner reserves nght to begm Work on any BId Alternate(s) pnor to July 01,2003
01 032
BId Alternates
1.
I
The BId Alternates mclude the followmg:
I
Bid Alternate 1:
Bid Alternate 2:
Bid Alternate 3:
Bid Alternate 4:
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 01 - General Requirements
Spec 09-550 Wood Flooring Finishes
Repair and Refinish Upper Floor Wood Flooring
· RepaIrs necessary to flooring m DIvIsion 06 - Fmish Carpentry
· Strip and re-finish floor per SpecIfication 09-550.
· Architects estImate: $18,500.00
I
I
Spec 04-210 Brick Masonry Veneer
Masonry-veneer Chimneys above roof
· Provide Wood Chase suitable for "B" gas-ventmg per DIvISIOn
06 - Rough Carpentry and Structural Details
· Provide Masonry Veneer per Drawings and DIVISIon 04-
Masonry and Structural Details.
· ArchItects estImate: $13,300.00
I
I
Spec 05-540 Castings
Cast Iron Front Porch Candelabrum
· Cast one (1) duplIcate replIca each Lamp Base, Stem, and Globe
ReceIver from original set provIded.
· Include purchase of new Globes and wmng of castings for
fixtures.
· Cast two (2) each Globe FIl1lals to Drawmgs and SpecIficatIOns
provIded.
· Include cost of shipping ongmal set to foundry. anginal set,
replIcate castmgs and new Globe FIl1lals will be return shIpped
FOB Job SIte.
· ArchItects estimate: $11,200.00
I
I
I
I
I
Note: Include interior conduit, foyer switchmg and interior wzring m
Base Bid.
Spec 05-730 Ornamental Sheet Metal
Pediment and Pilaster Scrolled-caps with Cresting Leaves
· ProvIde one (1) each Decorative Sheet-metal Pediment to
Drawings and SpecIficatIOns provIded
· Provide four (4) each DecoratIve Pilaster Scrolled caps to
Drawings and Specifications provided
· ProVIde four (4) each DecoratIve Crestmg Leaf sets for pIlasters
to Drawings and Specifications provided
· Include DiviSIOn 09 Finishes for these Architectural Sheet
Metals
I
I
I
I
May 2002
ol~c Design WoTks Inc, PS
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Bid Alternate 5:
Bid Alternate #6
Bid Alternate #7
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DivislOn 01 - General Requirements
. Include Labor and Equipment necessary for Installation
. Include shipping to Site
. Architects estimate: $49,100.00
Spec 05-725 Ornamental Metal Castings
Bronze Marquee Cresting
. Provide mne (9) each modular Crestmg castings to Drawmgs
and SpecIfications provided
. ProvIde two (2) each mItered comer Cresting castmgs to
Drawings and Specifications provided
. Provide two (2) each half-module end-cap Cresting castings to
Drawmgs and Specifications provided
. Include Labor and Equipment necessary for Installation
. Include shipping to Site
. ArchItects estimate: $31,400.00
Spec 05-730 Ornamental Sheet Metal
Copper Marquee Cladding
. Provide approximately 20 lineal feet of custom copper cladding
per Drawings and Specifications provIded
. Include Labor and Eqmpment necessary for InstallatIOn
. Include shipping to Site
. ArchItects estimate: $5,500.00
Note: Include painted steel channels, light-guage framing, support
chains, decking, membrane and soffit in Base Bid.
Spec 05-730 Ornamental Sheet Metal
Conductor Heads, Caps and Downspout Brackets
. Rephcate four (4) Conductor Heads and Caps to match existing
in-hand.
. Rephcate five (5) Downspout Brackets to match existing in-
hand.
. Repair two (2) Downspout Brackets provided
. ArchItects estimate: $4,300.00
Note: Include painted downspouts and gutters in Base Bid.
Spec 06-200 & 09-550 Finish Carpentry and Wood Flooring
Install salvaged wood flooring in downstairs Meeting Room
. Install Douglas FIr tongue & groove flooring salvaged from
ceihng furring throughout downstalfS.
. Supplement amount of material required for complete
installation.
. Finish floor as Specified in DiVIsion 09-550.
. Architects estimate: $6,500.00
Note: Include all framing and sub floors, plus carpet, in Base Bid.
END OF SECTION 01 030
May 2002
olympic l)esl{P1 warks Inc, PS
01040 COORDINATION
I
,I
\
I
01 042 InstructIOns
1. All mstructIOns wIll be gIven to the Contractor, or to his authonzed agent, by the Owner or hIS
representatIve for dIstrIbutIon to Subcontractors or tradesmen on the Work; in lIke manner, all
commumcation from Subcontractors and tradesmen on the Work to the O\\rner will be gIven
through the Contractor. No Subcontractors or tradesmen shall contact the Owner or Architect to
dISCUSS the work, except as the Contractor and Architect may arrange.
I
I
01043 CoordmatIOn WIth Other Trades:
1.
All ContI actors shall dIlIgently comply WIth the following reqUIrements:
a. Cooperate m planning and layout of the work well in advance of operations.
b. Inform other Contractors of requirements at proper time to prevent delay or revisions.
c. Be mformed on the reqUIrements of other Contractors and check own Work for conflicts
WIth the Work of other Contractors.
d. Insure delivery of materials and performance of Work on coordmated schedule WIth
other Contractors.
I
I
01 044 Cuttmg & Patchmg:
I
1.
Contractor shall coordmate all cuttmg, fitting, or patchmg of Work that may be reqUIred to make
the several parts of the Work come together properly and be fitted to receive or to be received by
other portIOns of hIS own Work; or that of Subcontractors or mstallIng tradesmen as shown or
reasonably ImplIed by Contract Documents for a completed structure. Also, make or have made
proper and suffiCIent repair or closure as Architect may direct.
I
I
I
2.
Do not endanger any work by cutting, dIgging, etc., and do not cut or alter work of any SectIOn
without pnor consent of Architect.
3. Refer also to DiVIsion 00 - General Conditions 5.13
END OF SECTION 01 040
I
I
I
I
01 050 FIELD ENGINEERING
1. Reference Pomt:
a. All locations and elevatIOns noted m the Contract Documents are based on surveyed
data. Before startmg work, locate all reference pomts for settmg and establishing fimsh
elevatIOns and lines and as required for proper placement of the work at each level as
work progresses. Employ the services of a lIcensed land surveyor acceptable to the
Architect, to perform such work. Carefully mamtam and protect new and eXIsting
monuments, benchmarks and other reference points; if disturbed or destroyed, replace as
directed at no additional cost to the Owner. The cost of performing the work under thIS
paragraph shall be borne by the Contractor.
b. Establish working lInes and level, locate and layout by instrumentation.
1) Site improvements, including paving, stakes for gradmg, fill and topsoil
placement, utIlity locations, slope and invert elevatIOns are based on reference
Elevation 100.00 of extg' Catch Basin in Lincoln Street per Sheet C-01.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DiVISIOn 01 - General Requirements
May 2002
O{~c Desi(pl Works Inc, PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
2)
Gnd or axis for building and Column/pIer locatIOns based on eXIstIng building
lines of common 12" exterior masonry face.
BuildIng foundation, and both floor elevations are keyed off of existIng floor
elevations at the rear center of the buildIng per Sheet 09, BUIldIng SectIOn #2.
3)
I
I
2.
Refer also to DIvision 00 - General Conditions 5.12
END OF SECTION 01 050
I
01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
01 061 Codes, Regulations, PermIts & OrdInances
I
I
1.
Refer to DIVIsion 00 - General ConditIons 5.02 and BIdding Requirements
END OF SECTION 01 060
I
01090 REFERENCED STANDARDS
01 091 Conformity to Standards
I
I
1.
Throughout the Contract Documents, reference IS made to codes and standards WhICh establish
qualitIes and types of workmanship and materials, and which establish methods for testIng and
reporting on the pertinent characteristics.
2.
Where matenals or workmanship are required by these Contract Documents to meet or exceed
the specIfIcally named code or standard, it is the Contractor's responsIbility to provide materials
and workmanshIp that meet or exceed the specIfically named code or standard.
I
I
3. It IS also the Contractor's responSIbIlIty, when so required by the Contract Document or by
wntten request from the Architect, to delIver to the ArchItect all required proof that the materials
or workmanshIp, or both, meet or exceed the reqUIrements of the specifically named code or
standard. Such proof shall be In the form requested III writing by the Architect, and generally
wIll be reqUIred to be copies of a certified report of tests conducted by a testing agency approved
for that purpose by the ArchItect.
I
I
I
01 092 AbbreVIatIOns
I
1. Reference in the technical diVISIOns of these SpecificatIOns to standard data of the follOWIng
organizatIOns shall be the latest editIOn at the date noted on the specificatIon book, unless
otherwise noted. The Contractor shall conform with said standard requirements when reference
is made thereto as If the data were repeated verbatIm in the Specifications, except where standard
data are supplemented and modIfied by these SpecificatIons.
I
2. Standard data of the following orgamzations are referenced in the specifications, and the
orgamzation names are abbreviated as noted.
I
I
AAN:
ACI:
AGA:
American Association of Nurserymen
American Concrete Institute
American Gas ASSOCIation
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DiVIsion 0 I - General Requirements
May 2002
ol~c l)esi(p1 wo-rks Ine, PS
AIA:
AIMA:
AISC:
AISI:
AMCA:
ANSI:
APA:
APWA:
ARm:
ASME:
ASTM:
AWl:
AWS:
AWWA:
CFR:
CRSI:
CS:
CSI:
FS:
FGMA:
IEEE:
IPCEA:
MLA:
NAAMM:
NBGQA
NEMA:
NFPA:
NWMA:
PS:
SDI:
SMACNA:
SSPC:
TCA:
UBC:
UL:
UMC:
UPC:
WWPA:
Amencan Institute of Architects
AcoustIcal and Insulating Materials AssociatIon
American Institute of Steel ConstructIOn
American Iron and Steel InstItute
AIr Moving and CondItIomng ASSOCIatIOn
Amencan National Standards InstItute
American Plywood AssociatIOn
Amencan Public Works AssociatIOn
Asphalt Roofing Industry Bureau
Amencan Society of Mechanical Engineers
Amencan SOCIety for Testing & Matenals
ArchItectural Woodwork InstItute
Amencan Weldmg SOCIety
Amencan Water Works AssociatIOn
Code of Federal RegulatIons
Concrete Remforcing Steel Institute
Commercial Standard of the U.S. Department of Commerce
ConstructIOn Specifications InstItute
Federal SpecificatIOn
Flat Glass Marketing AssociatIOn
Institute of Electrical & Electromc Engineers
Insulated Power Cable Engmeers ASSOCIation
Meal Lath Association
NatIOnal ASSOCIation of Architectural Metal Mfgs.
NatIOnal Budding Gramte Quarries AssociatIOn
NatIOnal ElectrIcal Manufacturer's ASSOCIatIOn
NatIOnal Fire Protection ASSOCIation
NatIOnal Woodwork Manufacturers ASSOCIatIon
Product Standard of U.S. Dept., of Commerce
Steel Door Institute
Sheet Metal & AIr CondItIonmg Contractors NatIonal Association
Steel Structures Painting CouncIl
TIle Council of America
Umform BUIldmg Code of Intemational Conference ofBUIldmg Officials
Underwriter's Laboratones
Umform Mechanical Code
Umform Plumbing Code
Western Wood Products AssociatIOn
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 01 090
01100 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01 110 TIME OF COMPLETION & LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
1. Refer to DlVlsIOn 00 - General Conditions 3.07
01 115 Procedural Outline for Starting Work
1. ReqUIrements Prior to Starting Work:
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVIsion 01 - General Requirements
May 2002
ol~c Design Works Inc} PS
I
I
a.
Pre-ConstructIOn Conference~
1) Prior to commencing work, the Owner, Architect and Contractor shall meet at a
time and place set by the Owner to discuss the Project schedule, storage of
materials and any other special requirements that concern the Project. The final
Project Schedule shall be submItted wIthin thIrty (30) calendar days followmg
the conference. ConditIOns mutually agreed upon at this conference may be
incorporated into the Contract.
I
I
I
b.
Contractor's receipt of the executed Contract is not to be considered as authonty to begin
\V ork. After the conclusion of the pre-constructIOn conference, the Owner wIll Issue to
the Contractor a wntten NotIce to Proceed.
01 120 EQUIPMENT AND STOCKPILE LOCATIONS
I
1. Stockplle materials and eqmpment only on areas of the SIte defined wIthm the Work lImIts
shown on the Drawings. Stockplle areas shall not endanger or inhIbIt the publIc use of the SIte,
outside the Work limits area, in any way.
I
2. Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.08
I
01 125 Restoration of Work
I
1. The Contractor shall restore to the Architect's satisfaction all areas dIsturbed by the construction
process. All ingress or egress points that are disturbed will have to be regraded, resodded, etc.,
to restore them to original condition.
I
2. Protect all existing trees and fencing on site from potential Contractor damage above and below
grade. If unavoidable damage occurs, notify Architect immedIately and a deCISIOn WIll be
rendered as to how the Contractor IS to replace or repair the damage at the Contractor's expense.
I
I
I
I
I
3. Refer also to DIvision 00 - General Conditions 5.11
01 130 ACCELERATION OF WORK
I
1. If, in jud!,rment of Owner, it becomes necessary at any time to accelerate the Work or a portIon
thereof, Contractor, when ordered or dIrected by Owner, shall deploy the workmen m such
portIOns of the Project where directed to enable others to properly engage and carry on theIr
Work.
a. If circumstances reqmre that the entire Work or a portIOn thereof be completed at a date
earlier than Contract completion date as adjusted by change orders, Contractor, when
ordered or directed by Owner, shall increase hIS forces, eqmpment, hours of work, and/or
number of shifts and shall expedite delivery of materials to meet the altered completion
date or dates ordered or directed. Any increase m cost to Contractor m compliance with
such orders will be adjusted in accordance with the Work.
b. If, in Judgement of Owner, the Work IS behind schedule and rate of placement of Work IS
1l1adequate to regain scheduled progress so as to insure timely completion of the Work or
a separable portion thereof, Contractor, when so informed by Owner, shall immediately
take action to mcrease rate of Work placement. This shall be accomplished by anyone
or a combination of the following or other suitable measures -
1) An increase m working forces,
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVision 01 - General Requirements
May 2002
ol~c Desi(Jft works Inc} PS
I
2) An mcrease m equipment or tools,
3) An mcrease in hours of work or number of ShIfts,
4) ExpedItmg delivery of materials.
Contractor shall, wIthm ten (IO) calendar days after bemg so informed, notIfy Owner of
specIfic measures taken and/or planned to mcrease rate of progress together with an
estImate of when scheduled progress will be regamed. Should the plan of action be
deemed madequate by Owner, Contractor will take addItIonal steps or make adjustments
as necessary to hIS plan of action until It meets Owner's approval. Acceleration of Work
wIll continue until scheduled progress is regamed. Scheduled progress shall be
establIshed from the latest reVIsed approved progress schedule for the job. Timely
completion wIll be understood as Contract completIOn date as revised by all tIme
extenslOns granted at the tIme acceleratIOn is undertaken. Contractor shall not be
entItled to additIOnal compensation for addItional effort he applIes to the Work under the
terms of thIS sub-paragraph.
c. Any dIrectIve or order to accelerate the Work WIll be in wntmg. Any dIrectIve or order
termmatmg accelerated Work WIll be in writing.
I
I
I
I
I
01 135
SuspenslOn of Work by Owner
I
I
1.
Refer to DIvislOn 00 - General CondItions 9.01 and 9.02.
01 150 BUILDING PERMIT SET
1.
The Contractor shall keep the building permit set ofDrawmgs at the Job during constructIon, m
good condItlOn. Just prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall delIver to the Architect the
approved set of plans.
I
END OF SECTION 01100
I
1. A pre-constructlOn conference between ArchItect, Owner's representatIve, and Contractor shall
be held at the SIte prior to commencement of the Work for the purpose of resolving current
problems, further orientmg Contractor to reqUIrements of the Contract Documents, informing
Contractor of ArchItect's responSIbIlIty to Owner for inspectIOn, and workmg out WIth Contractor
a general schedule of inspection.
I
I
I
I
01 200 PROJECT MEETINGS
01 210 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
01 220 PROGRESS MEETINGS
1. Weekly job site meetmgs will be held by the Owner to insure all actIVItIes are being coordmated
properly on the Project and to aSSIst m staying on schedule. Status of submittals, field
authonzatIons, change orders, progress payments, and other matters WIll be reviewed.
Contractor shall attend such meetings and shall require Subcontractors to attend as necessary.
I
I
END OF SECTION 01 200
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DiVISiOn 01 - General Requirements
May 2002
OlNmpic Design Warks 1m} PS
I
I
I
01300 SUBMITTALS
1. Dehver submIttals to the Architect unless indicated otherwise.
a letter of transmittal indIcating:
a. TItle of Project
b. Name of Contractor
c. Title of Submittal
I
I
Accompany each submIttal with
01 310 PROGRESS SCHEDULE
I
1.
Refer to Division 00 - General CondItIons 3.02
01 315 SubmIttal Schedule
I
1.
I
I
I
I
I
Contractor shall, WIthin twenty (20) calendar days after receIpt of NotIce to Proceed, furnIsh a
submIttal schedule hstmg all Items that wIll be furnIshed for review to Owner and ArchItect.
a.
This schedule shall include, among other things, shop drawings, Manufacturer's
hterature, certificates of comphance, materials samples, matenals colors, guarantees, etc.
Schedule shall mdIcate type of item, contract reqUIrement reference, Contractor's
scheduled dates for submitting the Items, and projected need dates for reVIew by
ArchItect. If resubmittal is required, and addItional fifteen (15) days wIll be allowed for
after receipt. Contractor shall revise and/or up-date thIS schedule as appropnate and
submit it with each payment estimate until all items have been submItted and reviewed.
Submittal schedule shall be coordinated WIth progress schedule for all the Work.
Contractor shall revise and/or up-date the schedule to insure consistency WIth the
progress schedule as it may be revised and/or up-dated. Such reVIsed submIttal
schedules shall be promptly prOVIded.
Furnishing of the submittal schedule or revIsion thereto shall not be mterpreted as
reheving Contractor of his obligation to comply with all the SpecIficatlOn reqUlrements
for items on the schedule.
b.
c.
d.
2. Contractor shall notifY Architect 24 hours mimmum m advance ofperformmg any Work whIch
would cover or otherwise make it dIfficult to mspect any structural, plumbmg, mechanical, or
electrical Work. Should any of said Work be covered without proper notIficatlOn having been
gIVen ArchItect, Contractor shall uncover that Work for mspection at his own expense per
DIviSIon OO-General Conditions 5.16 B. Contractor shall schedule the Work so that an
inspectlOTI team may observe and inspect a maXImum part to the mechamcal, electrical, and
plumbing Work in operating condItion, before It is covered up. ThIS formal mspectlOn team wIll
furnish a hst of Items that must be completed to satIsfactlOn of ArchItect before the Work IS
covered over. Contractor shall notifY ArchItect when he is ready for the mspectIon.
I
I
I
I
01320 PROGRESS REPORTS
I
1.
Contractor shall prepare daily reports of his operatIons and bring copies for the Owner to the
weekly meeting. The daily report will contain at least the following information:
a. Weather conditlOns,
b. Manpower on the job in each trade,
c. Major Items of equipment on the Job,
d. A bnef summary of Work accomplished that day,
e. Materials, equipment, or Owner-furnished items arriving or leavmg Site,
f. Significant events,
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 01 - General Requirements
I
I
I
May 2002
olympic Desip works lJU? PS
I
g. Any tests made and theIr result If known,
h. Any oral InstructIons receIved,
1. VIsitors to the Job.
I
I
2.
Contractor shall maintain a file of copIes of all daIly reports on the SIte and make it avaIlable to
ArchItect or Owner upon request.
01 370
SCHEDULE OF VALUES:
I
I
1.
A schedule of dollar values shall be submItted to ArchItect and Owner not less than twenty (20)
days prior to first request for payment. Breakdown of costs shall follow the trade DiVISIOns of
the SpecificatIon and each Item thereunder shall include ItS pro-rated part of overhead and profit
so the SUIn of the items WIll equal the Contract price. Breakdown WIll correspond exactly to
Items of Work In the progress schedule including work of Subcontractors. Further breakdown of
specIfic lme items may be required by Owner after imtIal review.
I
2.
See related sectIon DiVIsion 00 - General Conditions 6.02
I
END OF SECTION 01 300
01 400 QUALITY CONTROLS
I
1. Refer to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.15
I
I
I
01410 TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES:
2. Authonty of Inspectors:
a. Inspectors have full authority to see that Work is performed in accordance WIth
ConstructIon Documents and the directions of the Owner. In the event that unforeseen
CIrcumstances or conditions develop which he deems hazardous to the safety of
personnel or property, they may stop the Work and make an immedIate report to the
Owner.
I
I
I
3. Contractor's ResponsIbility:
a. Layout and plan Work so that parts of the Work requinng special InspectIon and
laboratory testing are avaIlable to such personnel and that times are allowed for theIr
inspectIOn and evaluation.
b. NOtIfy Owner and ArchItect at least 48 hours before Inspection will be reqUIred.
c. Access: FurnIsh access and arrange for inspection and testIng personnel to have free
access to the parts of the Work for which they nave evaluation responsibility. FurnIsh
records and drawings or data as may be required by testIng and inspectIon personnel for
the performance of theIr dutIes.
d. Defective Work: Refer to DiVISIon 00 - General Conditions 5.16
I
I
4. Submittals:
a. Reports: Address I copy to Contractor; address I copy to ArchItect; address I copy to
the Structural EngIneer; and address I copy to the Owner.
b. Laboratory Reports: In all reports include descriptIon of weather or climatic condItIons
pertinent to the report, date and tIme, Identification of portion of Work covered by
report, name of inspectors or testers, and analysis of cause In case of failure.
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
Division 01 - General Requirements
May 2002
ol>>mPic Design wcrrks Inc} PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
SIte Reports: SubmIt "InspectIOn at SIte" reports; mclude pertment data on weather,
condItIon of Work, and evaluation, consolidation methods, and fimshes.
5.
DutIes of Inspectors and Testmg Services:
a. General-
1) Independent mspectIon and testing servIces will be engaged for the checkmg and
testmg of the following phases of the Work.
b. Sitework and Utihties-
1) Compaction of Fill: Test fill after compaction for reqUIred densitIes; venfy
beanng capacity of all bearing surfaces.
c. Earthwork-
1) ExcavatIOn for FootmgslPlers: Inspect excavations for conformance wIth
specified depth of excavation, verify bearing capacity of all excavated beanng
surfaces.
d. Concrete Work-
1) Structural Concrete: Make tests of water/cement ratIo by weIght; check batch
conSIstency; make slump tests for each pour per ASTM C143. Make and cure at
least 3 test cylinders of each strength of concrete for each day's pour.
2) Obtam copIes of batch receipts at SIte from delivery truck driver and forward to
Owner.
3) For the purposes of this Specification, structural concrete IS defined as plIes,
grade beams, footings, stem walls, plinths, retaining walls, floor slabs, driveway
aprons and plazas.
4) Testmg of sidewalks and curbing IS not reqUIred.
e. Structural Steel -
1) Perform at least (2) two inspectIOns at the Site during erection; VIsual mspectIOn
dunng structural field welding and hIgh strength boltmg operatIOn at selsmlc-shp
connection for conformance with Contract Documents.
6.
DutIes of Laboratory:
a. SubmIt reports promptly. Test and obtain certifications for tests of structural
components as described above.
01420 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
FamIliarIty WIth Pertinent Codes and Standards:
a. In procunng all items used in thIS Work, it is the Contractor's responsibility to verify the
detailed reqUIrements of the specifically named codes and standards and to venfy that
the items procured for use in this Work meet or exceed the specified requirements.
2.
Reiection ofNon-Complving Items:
a. The Owner reserves the nght to reject items mcorporated into the Work that fall to meet
the specified minimum requirements. The Owner further reserves the right, without
prejUdICe to other recourse, to accept non-complying items subject to an adjustInent in
the Contract Amount as approved by the Owner.
b. The Owner and/or Architect reserve the right to take and analyze samples of materials
for conformity to SpecificatIOns at any time. The Contractor shall furnIsh samples upon
request. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the Site and replaced
WIth conforming materials at Contractor's sole expense. Cost of testing of materials not
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISIon 01 - General ReqUIrements
May 2002
ol~c Design works IncI PS
I
meetmg SpeCIficatIons shall be paid by the Contractor. Should matenal be found to meet
SpecIfications, the Owner shall bear the cost of testing.
I
c.
Refer also to DIvISIOn 00 - General CondItIons 5.16
I
I
END OF SECTION 01400
01 500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01 51 0 TEMPORARY UTILITIES:
I
1.
General:
a. Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.14
b. Contractor shall proVIde and pay for all temporary utIlities, unless other arrangements
are made at the Pre-construction Conference.
c. Temporary electrIcal system shall comply with local codes and condItIons.
I
I
01 513
temporary heating, cooling and ventilatmg
1.
I
Contractor shall provide and maintain, at his own expense, all temporary heatmg mcluding all
fuel and reqUIred attendance necessary to protect and dry all Work dunng cold weather.
SpecIfic heatmg reqUIrements mclude, but are not limited to:
a. Plaster - Umform temperature of 55d F mimmum for a week before application of
plaster, durmg plastenng operations, and untIl plaster IS dry. Distribute heat evenly
throughout buildmg.
b. Gypsum Wallboard - 55d F mmimum day and night during entire joint treatment
operatIOn and until executIon of Certificate of SubstantIal Completion.
c. CeramIc Tile - 50d F during preparation of mortar bed, laying of tile, and for 72 hours
after completion of tile work.
d. AcoustIcal Tile - 70d F minimum dunng settmg of tile.
e. Wood Floonng - 70d F minimum where material is stored prior to installatIOn, for one
week pnor to installation, contmuously durmg installation, and one week after
applIcatIOn of final coat of floor finish.
f. ReSIlIent Floonng - 70d F mmlmum during applIcatIon.
g. Carpetmg - 60d F minimum and 95d F maXImum for 7 days prior to laying of carpet and
contmuously dunng installatIOn.
h. Pamting - 55d F mmlmum dunng pamtmg operatIOns and until dry.
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
Temporary heat shall be provIded as soon as condItIon of the HV AC system warrants. After
such tIme no salamanders or open fires will be permItted.
3.
I
I
When temporary heatmg IS no longer required or as soon as the permanent heatmg system may
be used, Contractor shall dIsmantle the temporary heating system and shall at his own expense
(mcludmg cost of fuel) operate the permanent heatmg system, assuming all responsibilIty and
nsk thereof.
01 514 temporary telephone and FAX
1.
I
Contractor shall install and operate a hard-wIred job telephone and FAX at his own expense, no
cell phones.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DiVIsion 01 - General Requirements
May 2002
ol~c DesiEJlt Works Incl PS
I
I
01 515 temporary water
I
1. Contractor shall proVIde and pay for all water for bUIldmg purposes whIch is required by all
trades, unless other arrangements can be made at the Pre-constructIOn Conference.
I
2. Contractor shall make temporary connectIons and provide pIping, hoses, nozzles, and other
accessones reqUIred dunng constructIon, if necessary.
I
3. Contractor shall be responsIble for watering plants and trees to remain wIthin the construction
lImIts mdIcated on Sheet A-Ol.
I
01 516 temporary sanitary facIlItIes
I
1. Contractor shall proVIde and mamtam a sanitary temporary toilet and shall remove It at the
completIon of the Job.
I
01525 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
I
01 527 scaffoldmg, platforms, etc.
I
1. Contractor or his Subcontractors shall furnish and maintain all eqUIpment such as temporary
staIrs, ladders, ramps, platforms, scaffolds, hoists, runways, derrIcks, chutes, elevators, etc., as
reqUIred for proper executIon of the Work.
2.
All apparatus, eqUIpment, and constructIOn shall meet all requirements of the Labor Law, safety
regulatIons, and other Federal, State or local laws applIcable thereto.
I
3.
As soon as pOSSIble, permanent stair framing shall be erected. Contractor shall provide framing
wIth temporary treads, handraIls, and shaft protectIon.
I
I
4. General Contractor shall erect and maintain a full-height scaffoldmg at 180 Imeal feet of the
bUIldmg penmeter, exceptmg Elevator Tower area, for the duratIOn necessary for all trades to
complete theIr respective divisIOns of Work required under this SpecificatIOn. ProVIde a
mmimum of four months duration in Base BId; longer durations at discretIon and expense of
Contractor.
I
I
I
01530 BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
01 533 tree and plant protection
1. Refer also to DIVISIOn 00 - General CondItions 5.11 and speCIfic requirements m Division 02
I
2. Pnor to commencing sIte work, erect and mamtain protectIve chain lInk fencmg around existmg
trees and vegetation identified by "Protected" on the Site Plan.
3. IndIVIdual trees shall have protective fencing erected beyond drip line and to satisfaction of
Owner and Architect.
I
4.
Groups of trees and other vegetation shall have protective fencmg erected around entIre group to
satIsfactIon of Owner and Architect.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DivlSlon 01 - General Requirements
May 2002
ol~c Design Works Inc} PS
I
I
5.
Areas withm protective fencing shall remain undIsturbed and shall not be used for any purpose.
I
6.
VegetatIOn that has died or has been damaged beyond repan shall be removed and replaced by
Contractor to satisfactIOn of Owner and ArchItect.
I
01 534 temporary enclosures
1.
Contractor shall provIde temporary weather-ttght enclosures for all extenor openings as soon as
walls and roof are built so as to protect all Work from the weather.
I
2.
Refer also to DlvlSlon 00 - General CondItions 5.11
I
01 540 SECURJTY
01 542 snow and ice
I
1.
Contractor shall remove all snow and Ice as may be reqUIred for the proper protectIOn and
prosecutIOn of the Work.
I
01 543 bracing, shoring. and sheathmg
1.
Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing, and sheathmg as reqUIred for safety and for proper
executIOn of the Work and have same removed If reqUIred when the Work is completed.
I
01 544 persons
I
1. Contractor shall provide installation and maintenance of necessary precautIOns to protect all
persons on the SIte, mcluding members of the general public, from mJury or harm, mcludmg but
not ltmited to:
a. Posting of appropriate warning signs m hazardous areas.
b. Providing guardraIls, barricades of adequate heights, together with warnmg lights around
obstructions, pits, trenches, or similar areas in on-site or adjacent streets, roads,
Sidewalks, or on the site of structure Itself. All such guardrails around openmgs m floors
or roofs shall be at least 3'-6" in heIght.
I
I
2. Contractor shall enforce a "no profanity or harassment policy" amongst the workmen in
reference espeCIally to pedestrians in and around the Work area. Violators will be subject to
ImmedIate removal from Site.
I
I
I
3. Refer also to Division 00 - General CondItions 5.07
01 545 weather
1. Contractor shall at all ttmes provide protection agamst weather (ram, winds, storms, frost, or
heat) so as to mamtam all work, matenals, apparatus, and fixtures free from injUry or damage.
At the end of the day's work, all new Work or historical building objects likely to be damaged
shall be protected.
I
I
2. Contractor shall take speCIal care to protect plaster and lath ceIling from damage due to weather
exposure during period when roof surface is open. Effecttve temporary protection shall be
installed nightly.
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
Division 01 - General Requirements
I
May 2002
ol~c Desi(p1 Works IncI PS
I
I
I
3.
During cold weather, Contractor shall protect all Work from damage. Iflow temperatures make
It ImpossIble to contmue operations safely in spite of cold weather precautions, Contractor shall
cease work and so notIfy Owner and Architect.
I
I
I
I
01 546
temporary surface protection
1.
Pnor to commencement of any Demolition or General Contract Work, Contractor shall provIde
and mamtam in working order surface protection for the following hIstonc bUIlding elements.
I
a. Upstairs wood flooring:
1. Pnor to cover, glue and otherwise attach loose flooring splmters.
2. Lay contmuous layer of 4-mtl poly over clean floor surface. Lap joints 12" min.
3. Lay full-size 3/8" OSB panels over entire surface leaving a 12" working
perimeter at exterior walls and ceramic hearths.
4. Lay second layer of full-size OSB panels over first layer, fully staggering and
thus maximizmg laps. Adhere two surfaces together WIth periodIc daubs of
constructIOn adhesive as necessary to prevent slippage or shifting of panels.
I
b. StaIrway and Surroundmg Casework
1. Protect histonc Casework with framed OSB enclosure. Cover tops, east end
panels and open-shelf sides. Do not directly attach enclosure to protected
matenal.
2. Protect histonc stairway woods. Cover shoe rail with OSB cap, attach at pomts
to be covered by new pickets or newel post. Protect historic treads and risers
with OSB. Do not attach directly to protected material, rather attach assembly to
floor protection indicated above.
I
I
c. FIreplace Hearths
1. Protect hIStOriC ceramic hearths with the following addItional layers of
protection
2. Lay W' layer of closed cell foam over ceramic material.
3. Cover with 24"x 96" layer of %" OSB lapping over floor protection indicated
above, attach with 1 W' maximum length grabber screws. Leave about 3"
workmg space at bottom of fireplace face.
I
I
I
I
d. Protect wood floor m downstairs Office with (1) layer 00/8" OSB during all Work
through Drywall finish stage.
2.
In the event of chemIcal spill or other compromise of protection onto or beyond these specified
protected elements, Contractor shall remove and replace in-kind protection for the entire effected
areas, at no cost to the Owner, at the discretion of the Owner.
I
01 547
temporary fire protection
I
1.
Contractor shall prOVIde and maintain in working order 2 (two) Standard UL Labeled ABC all-
purpose 10 lb. fire extinguishers. These extinguishers shall not be incorporated into the final
Proj ect.
I
2.
Fires shall not be bUIlt on the premises except by express consent oflocal govermng authontIes.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIViSIOn 01 - General Requirements
May 2002
ol~c Design works Inc} PS
I
1. Contractor shall provIde all necessary protectIon for adjacent property and lateral support
thereof.
I
I
I
I
I
I
01 548 adiacent property
01 549 work area
1. Contractor shall confine operatIOns and storage to Work areas. Work areas for all Work are as
shown on the DrawIngs. In those locations where existIng vegetatIOn or improvements are to
remaIn, the Contractor must work around the material.
01550 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS
01 551 access roads
1. It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to maintain all reqUIred roads to the building as
required for construction equipment and delivery of matenals.
I
2. Contractor shall keep publIc nght-of-way clear by establIshmg clear zones m front of access
gates as shown on Drawings.
I
I
3. Contractor shall coordmate access road use WIth Fire Department.
01 552 parkmg areas
1. It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to see that the east side of Lmcoln Street parking In
front of Bonney's Bakery is available for their patronage.
I
1. Contractor shall keep premises broom clean dunng progress of the Work.
I
I
I
I
01 560 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01 561 constructIOn cleamng
2. Remove waste materials and rubbish caused by employees, subcontractors, and mstallers.
3. Pnor to and dunng process of painting and varnIshIng, clear area where such work IS In progress
of all debns, rubbIsh, and bUIldmg materials that may cause dust. Sweep floors as reqUIred and
take all pOSSIble steps to keep area dust free.
01 568 surface water control
1. Contractor shall at all times protect the excavatIon, trenches, and building from damage from ram
water, spnng water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers, and all other water, and:
a. Provide pumps and eqUIpment and enclosures necessary for such protectIon.
b. Construct and maintain necessary temporary draInage and do pumping necessary to keep
SIte free of water accumulatIOn.
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DivISIOn 0 I - General Requirements
May 2002
ol~c Desi(pt WOTks Inc, PS
I
I
I
2. Cost of water control shall be borne by Contractor. Owner may, If promptly notIfied of adverse
underground water conditions, negotiate reasonable financial relIef for Contractor where such
I
I
condItlons could not have been reasonably determmed from SOlIs Engmeer's Report or by
commonly known local conditions.
01 569
dust control
I
I
1. When constructIOn occurs during dry weather periods, dust resulting from construction shall be
mmImIzed through use of good operational technIques, such as watering of exposed areas.
01570 NOISE CONTROL
General:
a. The purpose of this SpecificatIOn is to keep the level of constructlon noise mside
adjacent buildmgs and/or rooms from exceedmg a DBE 55 curve (with wmdows closed)
dunng all occupIed hours. The Contractor may meet thIS cnterion by erecting barriers
between eqUIpment on Job and such mterior areas or by providmg eqUIpment nOIse
attenuators. Outdoor Vehicle and Internal Combustion Engine Noise: NOIse level of
each pIece of equipment shall not be greater than 86 DBA at a dIstance of 50 feet as
measured under nOISIest operatmg condItlons.
I
I
1.
I
I
01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
GENERAL 1.
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISIOn 01 General applies to this section.
2.
Scope:
a.
All signs used by the Contractor on the Site shall conform to the
requirements of thIS sectIOn. The Contractor shall supply the followmg
job sign and shall conform to the SpeCIfications given herein.
3.
ProhibitIOns:
a. The following may not be used by the Contractor on Site:
1) Separate Contractor's, Subcontractor's or supplier's signs or
advertIsements.
2) SIgnS that flash, blink, rotate or otherwIse draw unusual
attention (except there required by safety regulatIOns).
All Project Signs and ConstructIOn Signs shall be fabricated from the followmg
matenals:
2.
Plywood Face:
a. High denSIty overlay type, with overlay .012" thIck each side, 45% resm
content by dry weight, and mInImUm weIght of 60 pounds/thousand sq.
f1. of surface. 3/4" nominal plywood thickness shall be prOVIded.
3.
Pamt:
a. Provide 2 coats on all sign faces, backs and edges.
4.
Wood Posts:
a. Pressure treated, S4S. All signs will be reviewed WIth the ArchItect for
location and nature of mounting details.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVIsion 01 - General Requirements
May 2002
ol~c Design Works IncI PS
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
All Project SIgnS and ConstructIOn SIgnS shall conform to the folloWIng.
a. Sign Panel: All cuts and edges shall be square and clean and all defects
patched before paInting.
b. Image: Symbol or type may be screened or hand paInted.
c. Hand-made patterns must be carefully cut and true to the symbols
proVIded therein. Only clear, crisp SIgn paintIng IS acceptable.
Hand-paInted typeograph shall be true to the font design.
d. Posts: All signs 4' x 8' and larger shall have compacted gravel around
each post.
I
I
I
01590 FIELD OFFICES:
1. Contractor shall at all times provIde and maIntaIn a weather-tIght office for use by Contractor,
Owner and/or ArchItect, and Subcontractors. ThIS building shall be property of Contractor and
shall be removed when dIrected.
I
I
01 591 offices
2. ThIs office shall be heated when needed and provIded with doors and locks, tables, benches,
electrIc bghts, and racks for draWIngs.
I
I
01 593 first aId facIlitIes:
1. In accordance wIth the requirements of 296-24 WAC; furnish personnel traIned In first aId and
certIfied as approved by Washington Department of Labor and Industries. ProvIde first aId kits
on sIte; types and quantIties In accordance wIth requirements of 196-24-065 WAC.
I
END OF SECTION 01 500
I
I
01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
1.
Refer also to DIvIsIOn 00 - General CondItIons 5.13
I
I
I
2.
Contractor shall, If reqUIred, furnIsh eVIdence of the qualIty of any matenals.
3.
Contractor shall remove materials not meetIng reqUIrements of the Contract Documents from
Project WIthout expense to Owner.
4.
No asbestos or products contaIning asbestos have been knoWIngly specIfied for this Project.
NotIfy the Architect Immediately if-
a. Matenals contaIning asbestos are brought to the SIte for inclUSIOn In the Work.
b. Asbestos materials are encountered In any eXIsting structures upon whICh work IS beIng
performed.
I
1. Materials shall be delIvered to the Site in origInal packaging WIth labels and trademarks Intact,
and such labels and trademarks shall remaIn Intact until used.
I
I
01 610 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DivISIOn 01 - General Requirements
I
May 2002
ol~pic Desi(pt Warks Il1CJ PS
I
I
01 620 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
I
1.
Contractor shall confine hIS apparatus, storage of materials, and operations of hIS workmen to
bmlts mdlCated by law, ordmances, and permits and shall arrange and mamtain parkmg of
vehIcles and storage of matenals in an orderly manner leavmg all walks, dnveways, roads, and
entrances, unencumbered.
I
I
2.
All equipment on Site shall be protected from physical damage and from the elements by
measures satisfactory to Owner.
I
I
01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
I
1. Contractor's ResponsIbility:
a. It is strictly the Contractor's responsibility to be certain that all materials selected by hIm,
or for him by his Subcontractors or material suppliers, conform WIth the requirements of
the Contract Documents. The approval of a manufacturer's name by the Owner does not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibIlity for providing matenal and equipment that
comply with the Contract Documents.
b. It IS frequently necessary to design the structure and finish around, and to specify items
to accommodate, one manufacturer's product includmg mechamcal and electrIcal Items
or eqUlpment. In the event the Contractor receIves approval to prOVIde another
manufacturer's product or assembly, it shall be understood that any modifications
necessary to the proper installatIOn and function of the substItuted Items shall be made by
the Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. The Contractor shall bear the addItIonal
cost required for necessary detailing to accommodate the change. Changes made to
accommodate approved but not specified items shall be approved by the Owner prior to
construction.
c. All redeSIgn costs resulting from substitutIOns shall be borne by Contractor, and shall be
paId to Owner before final Certificate for Payment will be Issued.
I
I
I
I
I
2. Substitutlons and approval before receIPt of bids:
a. Whenever a matenal, article, or piece of eqUlpment is IdentIfied on the Drawmgs or III
the Specifications by reference to manufacturer's name, trademark, model, or catalog
number, only such speCIfic items may be used except as heremafter prOVIded.
b. \-Vhen the term "or approved" IS employed, any Items or matenal not specifically named
by manufacturer's name shall be subject to the Owner's approval. Written requests for
approval shall be submitted by bidders to the Architect at least 10 days prior to the
established bId date. Requests received after that tIme wIll not be conSIdered.
c. Requests for approval shall clearly describe the product for which approval is asked.
The specific applicatIon shall be accompanied by samples, record of performance,
certified copies of tests by Impartial and recognized laboratones, and engmeering data.
Approval of all items and materials WIll be given only by wntten addendum sent to all
Bidders.
d. Proposals for changes in structure, design, or functIon will not be considered.
I
I
I
I
I
3. SubstitutIOns After Award of Contract:
a. In general, the equipment and materials selected by the ArchItect are conSIdered to be
those best suited for this Project, and substitutions wIll be conSIdered after execution of
the Contract only under the following condItions:
1) That the eqUlpment or matenals proposed for substitutIOns are equal to, or
superior m construction, effiCIency, and utility to the equipment or material
Port Angeles Carnegie Library May 2002
DivlSlon 01 - General Requirements ol~c Desi(p1 works 1m, PS
I
I
I
2)
specIfied, and that eqUIpment or matenal specIfied cannot be dehvered to the job
m tIme to complete the work m proper sequence of work by other subcontractors
due to condItIons beyond control of the Contractor.
To receive consIderatIOn, requests for substitutions must be accompamed by
documentary proof of equahty, engineenng data, dIfference in pnce, and time of
dehvery in the form of certIfied quotatIOns from supphers of both specified and
proposed eqUIpment, showing prices and date of ordenng. In case of dIfference
in price, the Owner shall receIve all benefit of the difference m cost mvolved m
any substitutions as shown by the certIfied quotatIons. The Contract wIll be
altered by change order to credIt Owner with any savings obtamed. No
substitutions mvolvmg addItIonal cost to the Owner wIll be approved.
When the Owner approves a substItution, It IS WIth the understandmg that the
Contractor guarantees the substituted Item to be equal to, or better than the one
specified.
I
I
I
3)
I
4. SubstItutIOn Request Form
I
See the followmg page for the modIfied CSI SubstItutIon Request Form:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DlvlSlon 01 - General Requirements
I
May 2002
ol~c Design works 1m} PS
I
I
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
I
PROJECT'
, PROJECT NO,:
DATE:
I
SPECIFICATION SECTION:
PARAGRAPH:
TO:
I
FROM'
(Bidder / Contractor)
I
PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION
I
MANUFACTURER:
MODEL NO.
I
Attached data mcludes product descnptIOn, specIficatIOns, drawings, photographs, performance, and test data
adequate for evaluation of the request (applicable pomons of the data are clearly identified),
I
Attached data also mcludes descnption of the changes to Contract Documents which proposed substitution wIll
reqUire for Its proper installatIOn,
The followmg paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct:
I
The proposed substitutIOn does not affect dimensions shown on drawmgs.
I
1/ We wIll pay for changes to the building design, includmg engineering deSign, detailing, and
construction costs caused by the requested substitution.
I
The proposed substItution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the constructIOn schedule, or
specified warranty requirements.
Maintenance and service parts Will be locally available for the proposed substitutIOn
I
I / We state that the functIOn, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution is eqUivalent or supenor to the
specified Item.
I
SIGNATURE:
FIRM.
I
ADDRESS:
PHONE:
I
ARCHj'j'ECI'RECOMMENDATION:
I
_ Accept
_ Accept as Noted
_ Do Not Accepted
Received Too Late
FOR USE BY OWNER:
I
Accepted
Accepted as Noted
___ Not Accepted
Received Too Late
BY:
DATE:
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DivlSlon 0 I - General Requirements
May 2002
olympic Desi(p1 works IneJ PS
END OF DIVISION 01 600
01 700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1.
Scope:
a.
2.
At or near completion of constructIOn of the Project, certain Items, or Work and
submIttals as specIfied elsewhere, are reqUIred prior to the Owner's acceptance and final
payment for the Project whIch include, but are not limited to, the following:
\
Refer also to DIVIsion 00 - General CondItions 6.09
01 710 FINAL CLEANING
1. Intenor surfaces:
a. After all trades have completed their Work and just before final acceptance and
occupancy by the Owner, thoroughly clean all mterior surfaces of the project; vacuum
floors, walls, and ceIlmgs. Clean aIr ducts; replace filters; hand dust all shelves, counters,
and cabmets; clean fimsh floors and floor covenng and wax; wash and polish all mIrror
and metal tnm or fittmgs; clean toilet and plumbmg fixtures; clean lightmg fixtures and
electrIcal equipment, include washing and polIshmg lenses mSIde and out. Wash and
polish all exposed stainless steel surfaces and wash and polish all glass and glazing.
2.
Exterior Surfaces:
a. Remove constructIOn eqUIpment and temporary facilIties from premIses; clean and
dIsinfect areas occupIed by sanitary convemences; remove temporary connection to
serVIces and restore to "origmal" condition. Remove all construction debris and excess
materials.
01 715 PRE-FINAL. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. FINAL INSPECTIONS. & OCCUPANCY
1. Refer also to DIVIsion 00 - General CondItions 6.09
2. Upon Contractor's request, O\VI1er and ArchItect (and consultants as appropnate) wIll make a
pre-final inspectIOn and furnish to Contractor a lIst of Items to be corrected by Contractor. Upon
correctIOn of these items, Owner wIll arrange a substantIal completion mspection to include
Tenant representatIves at which tIme Owner wIll furnish final lIst of Items to be corrected. At the
substantIal completIOn mspectIOn, unless bUIldmg IS rejected, Owner and Contractor will execute
a CertIficate of Substantial CompletIOn that states the dates for user occupancy, commencement
of warrantIes, final completion inspectIOn, and for vOIdmg the liquidated damages requirement
contained in SectIOn 01 110 and 00 General ConditIons.
2. Fmal Completion Inspection will ensure that all deficiencIes noted at the substantial completIOn
inspection have been corrected according to terms of the substantIal completion certificate. When
all Items have been corrected, Owner will authonze final payment. If all Items have not been
corrected as agreed, Owner may elect to complete the Work under provIsions of General
ConditIOns.
3. NeIther the final payment nor the remaming retamed percentage or close-out shall become due
until the Contractor submIts to the Owner that:
(I) an affidaVIt that all payrolls, bIlls for matenals and eqUIpment, and other
mdebtedness connected WIth the work for which the Owner or his property might m
Port Angeles Carnegie Library May 2002
DIVISIOn 01 - General RequIrements ol~c Design Works Inc} PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
any way be responsible, have been paId or otherwIse satIsfied, due to final payment
and
I
(2) If reqUIred by the Owner, other data establIshmg payment or satIsfaction of all such
oblIgatIOns such as receIpts, releases and waIvers of liens ansing out of the Contract
to extend and in such form as may be deSIgnated by the Owner. If a subcontractor
refuses to furnIsh a release or waiver reqUIred by the Owner, the Contractor may
furnish a bond satIsfactory to the Owner to mdemnify him agamst any such lIen. If
any such lIen remams unsatIsfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall
refund to the Owner all moneys that the latter may be compelled to pay m
dIschargmg such lien, mcluding all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees.
I
I
01 720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
I
I
1.
Contractor shall delIver to Owner prior to final acceptance:
a. Accurate "as built" Drawmgs and/or other documentation If the Work is constructed m
any way at vanance to that shown on Contract Documents.
b. CertIficates of mspectIon and of occupancy that may be reqUIred by authonties havmg
junsdIctIOn over the Work.
I
I
2. Refer also to DiviSIOn 00 - General CondItIons 4.02
01 730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
I
1. Before execution of the Certificate of SubstantIal CompletIOn, Contractor shall furnish the
operatmg instructIons and mamtenance manuals as called for in the Contract Documents.
I
2. Operatmg Instructions:
a. Provide an operatIOn instruction period for Owner's representatIves and personnel
following completion and imtIal operatIOn of equipment and systems; includmg but not
lImited to HV AC, ElectrIcal systems, and landscapmg care. InstructIOns shall be gIVen
by manufacturer's authonzed personnel, Contractors' or Subcontractors' foremen, or
supenntendents for the trades mvolved. PrOVIde a thorough reVIew of the followmg
mformation:
1) OperatIOns and Mamtenance Manuals,
2) Spare parts, tools, and materials,
3) Lubncants and fuels,
4) IdentIfication systems,
5) Control sequences,
6) Hazards,
7) Warranties and Bonds, and
8) Maintenance agreements and similar contmumg commitments
I
I
I
I
I
3. OperatIons and Maintenance Manuals:
a. PrOVIde O&M manuals per specific reqUIrements of DIvision 02-16.
a. Organize operations and maintenance materials into sets of manageable size. Bmd mto
heavy-duty 3-ring bmders with pockets for folded sheet informatIon. Mark Project
identification on binder cover and spme including Project and Owner name and date of
submittal. Provide three (3) separate copies to mclude the following informatIOn:
1) Operational mstructIOns
2) Emergency mstructIons
3) Spare parts lIst
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 0 I - General ReqUirements
May 2002
ol~c Design Works Inc, PS
I
I
I
2.
I
4)
5)
6)
CopIes of warrantIes
Wmng dIagrams
Shop Drawmgs and product data cut sheets
I
o 1 740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
I
1.
Refer also to DIvIsIOn 00 - General CondItIons 5.21
2.
I
Contractor shall warranty the Project to be free from defects and wIthm conformatIOn to the
Contract Documents for a period of 12 months after the CertIficate of SubstantIal CompletIOn IS
Issued. When wntten guarantees beyond one year after substantIal completIOn are reqUIred of any
DIVISIon of the SpecIficatIon, Contractor shall secure such guarantees and/or warrantIes properly
addressed and in favor of Owner. These documents shall be delIvered to Owner upon substantial
completion of Contractor's work and prior to execution of CertIficate of SubstantIal CompletIOn.
I
I
3.
DelIvery of guarantees and warranties shall not relieve Contractor from any oblIgatIOn assumed
under any other provision of thIS contract.
I
4.
Nothmg heremmtends nor ImplIes that guarantees and/or warrantIes shall apply to Work abused
or neglected by Owner.
I
01 750 CORRECTION OF WORK DURING GUARANTEE PERIOD:
1.
I
CorrectIOns:
a. Where items on the Owner's "Punch List" have not been corrected pnor to expIration of
the speCIfied guaranteed period, It shall nevertheless be the responsIbIlIty of the
Contractor to permanently correct said Items after the specified guarantee penod. The
Contract shall not be fully performed untIl such permanent correctIons are made.
I
I
Guarantee Period:
a. All correctIve work performed by the Contractor m remedying defective Work dunng the
guarantee period followmg the Owner's acceptance of the project shall be subject to the
same guarantee requirements of the origmal Work for a penod as specified from the date
of completIOn of the correctIve Work.
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 01 700
END OF DIVISION 01
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DiVISIOn 01 - General RequIrements
May 2002
olympic Design Works Inc, PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART IV
DIVISION 02 - DIVISION 16 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 02 SITE WORK
GENERAL
1.
00 General CondItIons and DIvIsIon 0 I apply to thIs DIVISIon.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To-
I) ProvIde labor, matenals, and eqUIpment necessary for
completIon of Work unless noted otherwIse.
02010 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
GENERAL
1.
DIVIsIOn 02 GENERAL applies to thIS SectIon.
2.
Owner has secured the servIces of Consultants to aId m the determmatlOn of
existmg SIte condItIons. The followmg condItIons apply -
a. A utIlity locatIOn and crude topographIcal survey has been performed by
Northwestern Temtones Inc, Port Angeles, W A.
b. A deep SOIls bonng has been performed by Northwestern Temtones Inc,
Port Angeles, W A, hereafter referred to as the Geologist.
3.
Purpose:
a. These reports were obtamed only for the Architect's use in deSIgn and
are not a part of the Contract Documents. These reports have been
included wlthm the documents only for the bidders' information, and
are not a warranty of subsurface conditions. BIdders should VISIt the
SIte and acquamt themselves WIth all eXlstmg condItIOns.
4.
ExhibIt "A": Deep SOlIs Bormg Report (attached at end of DIvisIOn 02)
END OF SECTION 02 010
02 050 DEMOLITION
GENERAL
1.
DIVISIon 02 GENERAL applIes to thIs Section.
2.
Existing ConditIons:
a. Examine SIte to determine type of problems to be encountered.
3.
Care of Existmg BUIlding and SIte:
a. Exercise extreme care so as not to damage those parts of the existmg
bUIlding that are to remam m place.
b. LimIt demolitIOn to the ImmedIate area of Work speCIfied.
4.
EqUIPment:
a. Use eqUIpment SUItable for scale of demo operatIons undertaken.
b. Use of equIpment that damages hlstonc components of the buIldmg in
any way will removed from SIte Immediately at the sole discretIon of the
Owner or ArchItect.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISIon 02 - SltewOl k
May, 2002
ol~mpic Design works, Inc. PS
I
02 070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
I
GENERAL I.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) All work relatmg to Noted Items #1- #56 on Sheets 0-01,
SelectIve DemohtlOn Plans and 0-02, SelectIve DemohtlOn
ElevatIons.
2) Removal of eXlstmg roofing shmgles, paper and protrudmg
fasteners to provide a 'ready to work' surface for the installation
of new sheathmg and roofing over existmg sklp-sheathmg
3) Removal of miscellaneous overlaymg matenals to get at hlstonc
bUIlding components.
4) Loadmg, haulmg and disposal of all matenals and debns,
mcludmg any related disposal fees.
I
I
I
EXECUTION I.
Use means, methods and eqUIpment sUItable for the Work.
I
I
I
2.
ExerCIse extreme care as not to damage the structure or components of the
eXlstmg histoncal bUIlding or grounds that are to remam m place or to be reused.
3. HIstoncal components, surfaces, and features of the Carnegie LIbrary show their
age and thus are umque from any replacements that could be supphed,
fabncated, or otherwIse mstalled and are therefore conSIdered Irreplaceable.
Every effort has been made throughout the planmng process to work around thIS
ongmal architectural fabnc and to enhance and display It as hlstoncal matenal
and replace it only where it is missing. Needless damage or destruction of
histonc materials WIll be grounds for Contractors immediate removal from the
job Site.
I
I
END OF SECTION 02 050
I
I
I
I
02100 SITE PREPARATION
GENERAL
I.
Division 02 apphes to thIS Section.
2. Existmg COndItIons:
a. Examme SIte to determme type of problems to be encountered
b. Note the "LIMITS OF WORK" boundaries on Site Plan, Sheet
A-Ol. These hmIts will be strictly enforced.
c. Review "Site Plan Notes" on Site Plan, Sheet A-O I, for additIonal
mformatIon.
I
3.
Care of Plants to Remam on SIte:
a. For plants to remain within area indicated as "LIMITS OF WORK":
I) Protect tops, trunks, and roots of existmg trees on Site that are
mtended to remam or be moved. Protect shrubs, plants, and
other features that are to remain or be moved.
I
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVIsion 02 - SltewOI k
May, 2002
O[~mpic Design Works, Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
02 200 EARTHWORK
GENERAL
I
02210 GRADING
I
I
I
02 211 rough gradmg
GENERAL 1.
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
Port Angelcs Carneglc Library
DIVISIOn 02 - SltewOl k
I
2) Place cham lInk constructIOn fence around trees and shrubs to
remain, listed as "PROTECT" on Sheet A-O I, to create a
circular area at least 3' -0" clear all-around trunks of trees or
center pomt of tree clusters or equal to the eXlstmg limb spread
whichever is lesser. If branch spread below 10' in height
exceeds the bounds of thiS pen meter, bend branches upward and
wrap orange construction fenCing around lImbs to restrain them.
5.
EqUipment.
a. For Work within area indicated as "LIMITS OF WORK":
I) Observe and mamtam protected areas speCified above m 02-100
GENERAL 3.a.
2) Use of equipment best SUited for excavation, clearing, trenchmg
and grubbmg shall not be restricted wlthm areas beneath
buIldmg slabs or plaza. Limit building excavation to 24"
beyond building perimeters.
6.
FIeld Engmeenng:
a. Contractor shall hIre FIeld Engmeer to locate bUlldmg perimeters and
construction heights and grades, establIsh boundaries of "LIMITS OF
WORK" areas, and to map utility locations from CAD base maps
prOVIded by Architect. Such base maps are provided for informatIOnal
purposes only and do not relieve Contractor of responSIbilIties set forth
m SectIOn 02-010 GENERAL
END OF SECTION 02 100
DlVlsion 02 GENERAL and 02-100 GENERAL applies to this Section.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImited To -
I) All Work to prepare SIte for construction.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Structure excavation & trenchmg speCIfied m Section 02 220.
2) Backfilling & compactmg speCIfied m Section 02222.
b.
2.
Allowable Tolerances:
a. MaXImum variatIOn from mdlcated grades shall be 1/20 of one foot.
New Lawn Areas:
a. Well-dramed, SIlty sand, WIth good blndmg charactenstics.
May, 2002
o{~mpic Design works, Inc. PS
EXECUTION 1. PreparatIon:
a. Carefully examine SIte pnor to begmnmg of Work to pre-plan
procedures for making cuts, placmg fills, and other necessary Work.
I
I
2. CompactIOn of fills shall be as specIfied m SectIOn 02 222
I
I
I
3 Make proper allowance for final finIshes of slabs, ramps and plantmg areas as
outlmed m SectIons 02 500 and 02 212 respectIvely. Fmlshed rough grade pnor
to placmg mulch IS -
a Shrub or Ground Cover Areas (wlthm 10 feet of bUIlding) - 12" below
top of walk, stem wall, or curb. FInIsh grade of soIl is top of mulch
matenal after mulch has been laId.
b. New Lawn Areas - 6" below finish grade
I
I
4. If soft spots, water, or other unusual excavatmg condItIons are encountered, stop
Work and notIfy ArchItect.
02 212 finIsh grading
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) FurnIshlOg and spreadlOg of mulch over and through plantlOg
areas.
2) FlOe gradlOg reqUIred because of tolerances allowed m SectIOn
02 211.
3) FurnIshlOg and spread 109 ofmatenal below lawn areas.
I
I
I
2.
Quality Assurance:
a. Any materIal brought to SIte is subject to thIS SpecificatIon.
I
PRODUCTS 1.
Planting Areas:
a. Humus MaterIal: Dark, fine Douglas FIr or Alder bark, well-
decomposed.
I
I
I
2.
New Lawn Areas:
a. 60% course sand, 40% humus materIal
EXECUTION 1.
DUrIng preliminary grading, dIg out weeds from planting areas by their roots and
remove from SIte. Ensure that MornlOg Glory vme IS dead @ SE comer of
eXIsting buildlOg.
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISIon 02 - Sltewol k
May, 2002
Ol;gmpic Design Works, Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
2. Use eqUIpment SUItable for the Work.
3. Remove from Site rocks larger than 2" in size and foreign matter such as
bUIldlOg rubble, wire, cans, stIcks, concrete, etc., before placlOg topSOIl.
4. DIstribute topsoIl to brlOg grade to finIsh grades shown on Drawmgs
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.
Slope grade away from build10g for 6 feet mmimum from walls at slope of 1
inch per ft. mmImum, unless otherwIse noted. Fmal grade at buildmg should be
at ongmallevel as IS eVIdent by markmgs on ongmal concrete walls.
6.
DIrect surface dramage m manner mdIcated on Drawmgs by moldmg surface to
facilItate natural run-off of water. Fill low spots and pockets wIth mulch
matenal and grade to dram properly
02220 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, & COMPACTING
02 221 excavatl.TIg
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISIOn 02 - Sltewol k
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImited To-
1) Project excavation and trenchmg except as specIfied in SectIon
02 200 GENERAL.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Rough grad10g specified in SectIOn 02 211.
2) Excavatmg, backfillmg, and compactmg inSIde and outsIde of
bUlld10g required for ElectrIcal and/or Mechanical Work shall be
responsIbIlIty of respectIve SectIOn do1Og Work unless arranged
otherwise by Contractor.
b.
DebrIs and materIal not necessary for Project are property of Contractor.
However, If earthen materIal necessary for Project IS hauled away, replace WIth
equal or better kmd as specIfied in SectIon 02 222.
2.
EqUIpment:
a. Use lightest possible equipment suitable for the Work. Refer to 02-100
GENERAL.
Carefully exam10e SIte and available 1OformatIOn to determ10e type SOlI to be
encountered. DISCUSS problems with ArchItect before proceed1Og WIth Work.
2.
Excavate as necessary for proper placement and forming of footings and
foundations. Refer to Structural Plans and Build10g SectIOns for excavatIon
grades.
3.
ExcavatIon CarrIed Deeper Than ReqUIred:
a. Under Foot1Ogs - Fill WIth concrete specIfied for footmgs.
b. Under Slabs - Use thoroughly compacted earth, crushed rock, or gravel
as outl1Oed 10 Section 02 222 and General Structural Notes.
4.
If rock, water, or other unusual excavat10g conditions are encountered, stop
Work and notIfy ArchItect.
May, 2002
Ol~mpic Design works, I ne. PS
I
02 222 backfillIng & compactIng
3. Compactton of Backfills:
a Fills Under Slabs, Walks, Plaza, & around FoundatIOn Walls
1) Place backfill In 8 Inch layers, dampen (do not soak), and
mechanically tamp to 90% mImmum of maXImum densIty as
established by ASTM D 1557-78, "Tests for Moisture DensIty
RelatIons of SOlIs & SoIl-Aggregate Mixtures Using 10 Pound
Rammer and 18 Inch Drop."
b Backfill under footIngs IS not allowed unless footings are re-desIgned to
be placed on engIneered fill.
1) Place other fills In 12 Inch layers and mechamcally tamp.
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
2.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 02 - SltewOI k
Scope:
a.
I
I
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) Performance of backfillIng and compactIng except as specIfied
In SectIon 02 200 GENERAL.
2) Procedure and qualIty for backfilling and compacting performed
on Project unless specIfically specIfied otherWIse.
Related Work SpecIfied Elsewhere _
1) Structure excavatIon & trenching specIfied In Section 02 220.
2) Top 18 Inches of backfill In landscape plantIng areas wIthin 15
feet of bUIldIng specIfied 10 SectIOn 02 212.
b
I
I
2.
I
I
ProtectIOn:
a. Damage to dampproofing, mOIsture barner, waterproofing, basement or
foundatIOn draInage system or other portIOns of the Work due to Work
of this SectIon shall be repaIred by onginal Installer at no addItIonal cost
to Owner.
Backfill matenal shall be free from debns, stones over 6 mches dIameter, frozen
materials, brick, lime, and concrete.
a. Borrowed fill shall conform to AASHTO Spec M-145, A-I-A, A-I-B,
A-2-4, or A-2-5 granular, non-plastic matenal.
1) Ifnecessary contact local State Road CommISSIOn for locatIOn of
pits containing speCIfied matenals.
b SIte matenal, If approved by ArchItect.
I
I
I
PreparatIon:
a. Before backfillIng, locate on record set of Drawings utilIty and servIce
lines to be covered.
b. Do not backfill until utilities mvolved have been tested and approved by
ArchItect.
c. Take into account existmg landscapmg and existmg grades WIthIn the
hmb spread of trees to remain. Refer to Site Plan A-OJ.
I
I
I
I
Backfillmg:
a. Slope grade away from bUIldIng as speCIfied 10 Section 02 212.
b. Hand backfill when close to eXIsting trees to remain or where damage to
trees mIght result.
I
I
I
May, 2002
O{;gmpic Design works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. If Site matenal will not compact to specified density or It IS suspected that It will
not, remove and replace with matenal specified In PRODUCT sectIOn above.
END OF SECTION 02 200
02 350 PILES AND CAISSONS
I
GENERAL
DIvIsion 02 GENERAL applies to thiS Section
02370 BORED/AUGURED PILES
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISIOn 02 - SIIewOI k
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnish and Install Work of thiS Section as descnbed In Contract
Documents.
Bid BaSIS:
a. BId shall be for lump sum amount based on number of piers, estimated
length, and total estimated footage as shown in Contract Documents.
1) Quote separate umt pnces to cover each of the following-
a) Charge for addItional footage over total base amount of
footage quoted upon.
b) Credit for less footage than total base amount quoted
c) Charge for temporary pier caSings If reqUired.
2) Keep records shOWing depth to which each pier was placed and
amount of matenal used m each pier.
Remforcmg Steel:
a. Conform to requirements of SectIOn 03 200.
2.
Concrete:
a. Conform to reqUirements of Section 03 300.
EqUipment:
a. Dnll pier holes WIth power auger foundation dnlling rig especially
deSIgned for that purpose.
2.
WorkmanshIp:
a Accurately locate pIer holes WIthin one mch. Dnll pIers to dimensions
scheduled on Structural Drawings. Out of plumb pier holes of more than
one Inch in 10 feet With 3 Inch maXImum WIll be rejected.
b After pier holes have been dnlled to proper depth, pump all water out.
c. Clean bottoms of pier excavations ofloose matenal and foreign matter
and receive approval of Architect before allowmg concrete to be placed.
3. Casings:
a. Casings will be reqUired In event of excessive water or non-cohesive
SOlIs.
May, 2002
Ol~l11pic Design works, Inc. PS
b.
Seat and seal casmg bottom before removmg water or completmg
dnllmg of hole to depth reqUIred and under-reammg.
Withdraw casmg 10 short lIfts, makmg certam concrete IS always well
above bottom of casmg to assure seal agamst water penetration or entry
of loose soIl.
If seal IS lost dunng wIthdrawal of casmg or If remforcmg IS displaced,
remove remforcmg ImmedIately, dnll out wet concrete, and re-case hole.
If pIer IS lost entIrely due to mabIllty to remove concrete, steel, etc , cost
to add additIOnal piers, pier caps, etc., and the cost to deSign replacement
piers as well as necessary removal of portIOns of misplaced piers, shall
be fully borne by this SectIon. Corrective work shall be as directed by
Architect.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Casing Removal:
a. Pnor to breakmg temporary casmg seal, static head of plastic concrete
shall be suffiCIently above ground water head to prevent water and
cavmg SOlis from entering holes dunng casmg removal Once seals have
been broken, temporary cas lOgs can be slowly removed vertIcally (no
rotatIon permItted) whIle addItIOnal concrete IS placed m casmg tops.
5.
Placmg Concrete:
a. Wherever water is present 10 pIer holes, proVIde temporary cas lOgs and
leave casmgs 10 place untIl concrete IS poured 10 respectIve pIers
b. Block up remforcement 10 concrete pIers 3 mches from pIer bottom and
secure in place, free of contact WIth unformed SIdes. ProVIde steel
dowels, as detailed or scheduled, m concrete pIers.
c. Place concrete 10 each pIer hole wlthm two hours after completIon of
dnllIng. Use tremle to place concrete and VIbrate as reqUIred to fully
embed reinforcing steel and elImmate voids but not so much as to
segregate aggregate. Pour concrete 10 piers up to one lOch above soffit
of deepest intersecting beam or column at least 24 hours before
begmning to pour concrete for such beams or columns
d. Do not leave pIer holes open overnIght.
END OF SECTION 02 350
02500 PAVING & SURFACING
GENERAL
1.
DIviSIOn 02 GENERAL applIes to thIS Section.
02 501 Sub-base PreparatIon
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
Ballast conSIsting of sand and gravel conformmg to WSDOT 9-03.09 mInImUm
6" thick after compactIon.
FlOe grade parking surface area as reqUIred and thoroughly compact WIth power
eqUIpment. CompactIon shall be 90% of maXImum density.
2. Provide staking to assure slope for dramage of paved areas are as designed.
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISIOn 02 - Sltewol k
May, 2002
O{~mpic Design Works) Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
02 502 Crushed Surfacmg
I
GENERAL 1.
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
I
Scope:
a.
Includes But Not LImIted To -
1) Base under drIveways and parkmg areas as shown on Drawmgs.
Top Course:
a. 5/8" mInImum crushed rock and gravel conformmg to WSDOT 9-03 09
Top course shall be 2 mches thIck mmlmum after compactIOn
2.
Compact to 95% of maxImum denSIty.
02510 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING PAVING
I
I
02 511 Asphaltic Concrete Paving
GENERAL
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISIon 02 - SlteWQI k
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) FurnIsh and mstall base and asphaltIc concrete for drIveways
and parkmg areas.
2. Referenced Standards:
a. WSDOT 5-04 applIes to thIS Section.
LIqUId Asphalt:
a Use materIal meetmg the reqUIrements for Class B asphaltIc concrete
pavement as defined m WSDOT 9-03.8.
Placement:
a. Use self-propelled lay-down machme for placement.
b. Longitudmal bItummous Joints shall be vertical and properly tacked if
cold. Transverse Jomts shall always be tacked per WSDOT 5-04.3.
2.
FImshmg:
a. Leave fimshed surfaces reasonably clean and smoothly fimshed. Slopes
shall be unIform WIth no pockets left. When tested WIth a ten foot (3
mm) straIght edge, surface of complete work shall not contam
IrregularItIes m excess of 1/4 mch (6 rom).
3.
FIeld QualIty Control:
a. Do not execute work dUrIng unfavorable condItIons as specIfied below:
b. Temperature below 40 Degrees (4 deg C)
c Presence of free surface water
d Oversaturated base and subbase materIals
e. Work done under unfavorable condItIons will be done at the Contractor's
rIsk and IS subject to bemg rejected if It fails to meet the mstallatIon
requirements specified herem.
May, 2002
ol;gmpic Design worksJ Inc. PS
I
02 580 PAVEMENT MARKING
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION I.
I
I.
Scope.
a
I
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Provide parkmg stnpes, crosswalk stnpes, safety markmgs, and
handicapped markmgs as mdlcated on Drawmgs.
Pamt shall meet reqUirements of Fed Spec TT-P-II OC or TT-PI952B,
Non-Reflectonzed.
I
Do not apply until new pavmg has cured 72 hours minImum
I
2
Surfaces shall be dry and free of grease and loose dirt particles
I
I
I
3.
Mmlmum 4 mil thickness.
4
Make lines parallel, evenly spaced, and with sharply defined edges.
END OF SECTION 02 500
02660 WATER DISTRIBUTION
I
GENERAL
1.
Division 02 General applies to thIS Section.
2.
I
Excavation and backfill shall be as specified m Section 02 200 wIth followmg
addItional reqUirements:
a. Runs shall be as close as possIble to those shown on Drawmgs.
b. Excavate to required depth.
c. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp as reqUired.
d. Remove debris from trench prior to placement of pIpe.
e. Do not cut trenches near footings without consultmg Architect.
f. Backfill only after pIpes have been tested, mspected, and approved by
Architect.
g. Remove excess earth from SIte or place as directed by Architect.
h. Bury outside pipe 12 mches mmimum below frost lme or 18 mches
minimum below fimsh grade, whichever IS deeper.
I
I
I
I
02668 domestIc water systems
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
I
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish and install piping from existing to withm 5' -0" of
bUlldmg complete shut-off valve, and connections.
2) ProVIde domestic supply to SIdewalk dnnkmg fountam as
mdIcated on Sheet A-O I.
3) Pay hook-up fees reqUIred by agency furnlshmg water.
I
I
2. Reference Standards:
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVIsIon 02 - SltewOI k
May, 2002
O[~mpjc Design worksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
EXEC UTI ON 1.
I
I
I
I
I
a.
WSDOT 7-09 apphes to this Section.
Pipe:
a. Refer to DrawIngs for plans and details.
2.
Water Meter:
a. Not reqUired. Refer to DrawIngs for plans and details,
Install pipIng system so It may contract and expand freely.
2.
Completely elImInate cross connectIons, backflow, and water hammer,
3.
Complete Installation shall conform to governIng codes.
4. Install shut-off valve.
5.
Before covenng pipes, test system In presence of Architect or governing agency
at 100 pSI hydrostatIc pressure for two hours and show no leaks.
END OF SECTION 02 660
02 700 SEWER-\GE & DRAINAGE
I
GENERAL
1.
DIVision 02 applIes to thiS SectIOn.
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIviSIOn 02 - SltewOl k
I
2.
Scope'
a,
Includes but Not Limited To-
1) Sewer and draInage systems outside of bUlldmg.
3.
Reference Standards:
a. WSDOT 7-04 applies to thiS Section.
Excavation and backfill shall be as speCified In Section 02 200 with the
following additional reqUlrements-
a. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Drawmgs.
b. Excavate to required depth.
c. Grade to obtaIn fall required.
d. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp if required.
e Remove debns from trench pnor to laymg pipe.
r. Do not cut trenches near footmgs Without consultmg Architect.
g. Backfill only after pipes have been tested, inspected, and approved.
NotIfy Architect pnor to testmg.
h. Remove excess earth from site.
1. Bury outSide pipe 12 Inches mimmum below frost lIne or 18 inches
mlmmum below fimsh grade, whichever is deeper.
2. PrOVide all constructIOn stakmg and field engmeering, unless noted otherwise.
May, 2002
ol~mpic Design warks} Inc. PS
I
02 710 SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEMS
I
02 711 foundation dramage systems
GENERAL 1.
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
Scope:
a.
b.
I
ProvIde contmuous footmg drams for new Elevator Structure.
Repair or otherwise augment or supplement eXlstmg cobble dram system
at BuIldmg where disturbed at Elevator excavatIOn
ProVIde separate systems for downspout and footmg drams
I
,I
I
c.
Dramage Tile'
a Provide 4" perforated ASS plpmg complete with fittmgs, couplmgs, and
accessones reqUIred for complete mstallatlOn.
2.
FIlter Aggregate'
a. Use washed dram rock conformmg to ASTM C33 coarse aggregate No.
67 (3.4 to No.4).
I
3.
Glass Fiber Felt:
a. ProvIde Owens-Cornmg fiberglass Perma-Ply II or approved equal
I
Refer to Section 02 700 General for excavatmg.
I
2.
Drainage TIles:
a. Place drainage tiles over a minimum 1" deep bed of filter aggregate.
Keep tiles level WIth perforatIOns facmg downward.
b. Connect drainage tiles directly to Storm Sewer system min 6" below
lowest perforated pipe grade downstream.
c. After inspection prior to backfilling, place 6"of filter aggregate around
and over the dram tile. Install fiberglass felt over filter aggregate.
Backfill and compact m accordance WIth Section 02 221.
I
I
GENERAL
1.
I
I
I
02 720 STORM SEWAGE SYSTEMS
PRODUCTS I.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
I) FurnIsh and install storm drainage plpmg from pomt of water
collection to termmatmg pomt.
2) Pay necessary fees to agency governmg storm sewer system.
Pipe:
a. High DenSity Poly Ethylene (HPPE) ADS Pipe N-12 or equal.
I
Catch Basm and Control Release Umt:
a. WSDOT Type I Catch Basm
I
3 Refer to Drawmgs for plans and details
Port Angeles Camegle Library
DI VISIOn 02 - SnewOI k
END OF SECTION 02 700
I
I
May, 2002
Ol;y;mpic Design Works} Inc. PS
I
I
I 02 800 SITE 1M PROVEMENTS
GENERAL
1.
DIVISIon 02 GENERAL applIes to thIs SectIon.
I
02 8 I 0 IRRIGA nON SYSTEMS
I
I
I
02 8 I I underground spnnkler systems
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImited To -
1) Furnlshmg and mstallmg dnp irngatIOn system at front walk
planters and plantmg beds adjacent to front bUlldmg walls as
shown 10 Contract Documents complete wIth accessones
necessary for proper functIon. Connect new branches mto
eXlstmg Ram-bIrd controller umt.
2) Dnp Irngation system deSIgn, supply and mstallatIOn to be
mcluded in Base bId.
I
I
I
2. QualIty Assurance:
a. Regulatory ReqUIrements -
1) Work and matenals shall be 10 accordance wIth latest rules,
regulations, and other applIcable state or local laws. Nothmg 10
Contract Documents IS to be construed to permIt Work not
conformmg to these codes.
b. Pre-InstallatIOn Conference -
1) Meet with Owner and ArchItect to dISCUSS and clanfy all aspects
of job reqUIrements prior to commencmg work.
c. Mmor adjustments in system WIll be permItted to aVOId existmg fixed
obstructIOns.
d. System DeSIgn:
1) Plan deSIgn around specIfic drainage characteristIcs of thIS SOIl
type specIfied as topsOIl and mulch matenals.
2) Take mto account climatIc condItions of local area and
mlCroclImatic conditIOns of build 109 orientatIon and sheltenng.
3) Follow Arborist's recommendations for water requirements of
particular species.
4) Adjust water requirements from Base Table below for shade and
other mIcro-clImatIc factors.
5) Calculate flow rates and choose emitters.
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. SubmIttals:
a. Submlttal-
1) SubmIt proposed deSIgn 60 days pnor to mstallatIOn to ArchItect
for revIew. ArchItect WIll review deSIgn wIth Arbonst and return
proposed desIgn wlthm 21 days for proposed reVISIOns. SubmIt
three copIes.
2) Submit final deSign 30 days pnor to mstallatIon.
b. As-Built Drawmgs -
I) Prepare an accurate as-bUIlt draw 109 as mstallatlOn proceeds to
be submItted pnor to final mspectIon, mcludmg -
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISIOn 02 - SltewOI k
May, 2002
O{~mpic Design works} Inc. PS
I
PRODUCTS 1.
2.
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIvIsion 02 - Sltewol k
a) DetaIl and dImenSIOn changes made dunng constructIon
b) SIgnIficant detaIls and dImenSIOns not shown m ongmal
Blddmg Documents.
2) Mamtam at Jobslte, one copy of Contract Documents (as defined
m SectIon 2 of the General CondItIOns) and relevant shop
draWIngs. Clearly mark each document "PROJECT RECORD
COPY" and mamtam m good condItIOn for use of ArchItect and
Owner.
3) Fmal payment for system WIll not be authorized untIl accurate
and complete submIttals are delIvered to ArchItect.
c InstructIon Manual -
1) ProvIde instructIOn manual that lIsts complete InstructIOns for
system operatIon and mamtenance, includmg wmtenzmg
4.
Product Storage:
a. Dunng constructIOn and storage, protect matenals from damage and
prolonged exposure to sunlIght.
5.
Guarantee & Maintenance InstructIOns:
a. Standard 1 year guarantee stIpulated in General CondItIons shall Include.
1) FIlling and repaIring depreSSIOns and replacmg plantIngs due to
settlement of lITIgation trenches for one year follOWIng
acceptance of Project.
2) System can be adequately draIned to protect from freeze damage
in areas where freeZIng occurs.
3) System has been adjusted to supply proper coverage of areas to
receIve water.
b. After system IS installed and approved, mstruct College maIntenance
personnel m complete operatIon and mamtenance
PIPe, PIPe FIttIngS, & Connections:
a. PIpe shall be continuously and permanently marked WIth Manufacturer's
name, size, schedule, type, and workIng pressure.
b. PIpe sIzes shall be sufficient to provide adequate operatIng pressure to
emitters for proposed design to SUIt Landscape Plan L-O 1.
C. FittIngs -
I) Same material as pipe
e. Sleeves -
1) Sleeves shall be 4 Inch PYC graVIty sewer pIpe meetmg
reqUIrements of ASTM 0 3034-83 "SpeCIficatIon for Type PSM
PolYVInyl Chlonde (PYe) Sewer PIpe and FIttings", SDR 35.
EmmIters:
a. Conform to reqUIrements shown on Landscape Plan L-O I as to type, SIze,
and specIes of plant matenal and soIl type
b. Each emItter shall be product of smgle Manufacturer.
c. System deSIgn shall be deSIgned on the followmg cnteria'
May, 2002
Ol~mpic Design Works/ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvIsIOn 02 - SltewOI k
I
Base Plant*
Ground cover
Small shrub <3'
Large shrub> 3 '
Small tree < 10'
Large tree 10'-20'
SOli Tvpe
Course
Course
Course
Course
Course
Dally Run-time**
.1 hrs
.1 hrs
.3 hrs
.7 hrs
.8 hrs
EmIssion DevIce
Tube/ 2.0 gph
Emltter/ (2) 2.0 gph
EmItter! (2) 2.0 gph
EmItter! (4) 2.0 gph
EmItter! (4) 7.0 gph
* dIameter of mature canopy
** for worst-case dryest, hottest summer day
3.
Automatic SprInkler Systems:
a. Control valves shall be of SIze and type suitable to bIdder deSIgn
4.
Valves:
a. Manual Dram Valves-
I) Brass ball valve WIth "T" handle on mam hnes and 10 valve
boxes on lateral hnes
b. Hydro-zone gate valves -
1) Bronze construction, ball type, 150 pound class, threaded
connections, with cross-type operating handle deSIgned to
receive operatmg key.
c. Backflow Preventer -
1) Do not provide, eXIst 109 system already contains thIS component
d.
Automatic Controller -
1) Do not prOVIde, eXlstmg system already contams thIS component
e.
Pressure Reducmg Valve-
1) Do not provide, existmg system already contains thIS component
5.
Valve Accessories:
a. Valve Boxes -
I) Valve boxes shall be large enough for easy removal or
mamtenance of valves.
6.
Backfill Materials:
a. Pea Gravel - (for use around drams)
1) W' maximum round, water worn, washed rock.
Sand -
1)
b.
c.
FlOe granular materIal naturally produced by rock dlsmtegratIOn
and free from orgamc materIal, mIca, loam, clay, and other
deleterious substances.
Native Material -
I) SOlI native to project site free of wood and other materIals and
rocks over 1\;2".
Topsoil -
I) EXlstmg m-place topsoIl materIal Remove all rocks, roots,
sticks, clods, debris, and other foreign matter over I \;2" longest
dImensIOn encountered dUrIng trench mg.
d.
May, 2002
ol:gmpic Design W orksJ Inc. PS
EXECUTION 1.
3.
4.
02 900 LANDSCAPING
GENERAL
1.
2.
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIvIsIon 02 - SltewOl k
I
7.
Other Matenals:
a. Recommended by Manufacturer and subject to ArchItect's reVIew and
acceptance.
b. ProvIde all matenals necessary to complete and make system
operatIOnal.
I
I
Trenchmg: & BackfillIng:
a. Over-excavate trenches 2" and bring back to mdicated depth by fillmg
WIth fine, rock-free soil or sand.
b. Cover pipe both top and sides with 2" of material speCIfied in paragraph
above. In no case shall there be less than 2" of rock-free soil or sand
surroundmg pIpe.
c. Do not cover pressure mam, spnnkler pIpe or fittmgs untIl ArchItect and
Arbonst have mspected and approved system
d Balance of fill and compactIOn IS as speCIfIed m SectIon 02 222.
I
I
I
2.
I
Grades and Drammg:
a. Grade pIpmg so system can be completely dramed.
1) Slope pIpe to dram through control valves.
2) Where this IS not pOSSIble, slope pIpe to a mInImUm number of
low pomts. At these low pomts, mstall _
a) %" brass ball valve for a manual drain.
b) PrOVIde one cu ft. gravel sump at outlet of each manual
or automatIc dram.
3) Slope pIpes under paved areas to dram outSIde these areas
4) ProVIde and mstall qUIck-couplIng valve or valves m location for
easy blowout of entIre system.
I
I
I
Control Valves & Controller:
a. Install controller, control wires, and valves in accordance WIth
Manufacturer's recommendatIOns and accordmg to electrIcal code.
I
I
Flushmg & Testmg:
a. Test pressure lInes and make certam there are no leaks pnor to
backfillIng. Notify Architect pnor to testmg.
I
END OF SECTION 02 800
I
DIVISIOn 02 General applies to thIS SectIon.
I
ProtectIOn'
a. Take care and preparation m Work to aVOId condItIOns that WIll create
hazards. Post SIgnS or bamers as requIred.
b. ProVIde adequate means for protectIOn from damage through exceSSIve
eroSIon, floodmg, heavy rains, etc. RepaIr or replace damaged areas.
I
I
May, 2002
O[~mpjc Desjgl1 Works, Il1c. PS
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
Preparation:
a. Plant List and Vendors List are for convemence of Contractor. Some
substitutions may be reqUIred due to availabilIty.
b. Before proceeding wIth Work, check and venfy dimensIOns and
quantities. Report vanatlOns between Drawmgs and Site to Architect
before proceedmg wIth Work.
c. All plantmg mdIcated on Drawmgs IS reqUIred unless mdlcated
otherwise.
02 950 TREES, PLANTS, & GROUND COVER
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION I.
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIVIsIon 02 - S,tewOl k
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImited To -
I) Installation of landscapmg plants as descnbed m Contract
Documents.
2) Final SelectIOn of Plants IS to be by Landscape Allowance, see
SpecIficatIOn 01-020.
b.
Related Work SpecIfied Elsewhere -
I) Landscape plant maintenance specIfied In Section 02 970.
2.
Guarantee:
a. Guarantee furnIshed shrubs, trees, and ground covers to hve and remam
In healthy conditIOn for I-year mmlmum from date landscape work IS
accepted as complete.
Plant matenals shall conform to reqUIrements of Plant LIst to "HortIcultural
Standards" of Amencan ASSOCIation of Nurserymen as to kInd, SIze, age, etc.
a. Nomenclature - Plant names used m Plant List conform to "Standardized
Plant Names" by American JOInt Committee on HortIcultural
Nomenclature except m cases not covered. In these mstances, follow
custom of nursery trade. Plants shall bear a tag showmg the genus,
speCIes, and variety of at least 10% of each species delivered to SIte.
2.
Plantmg Tablets:
a. 21 gram Agriform (20-10-5).
3.
Bark Mulch:
a. Dark, fine Douglas FIr, well-composted
4.
Plant List: See Sheet A-O I; SIte Plan for Plant List
a. SIte Plan and Plant List mdlcate for Contractor the scope of installatIOn
reqUIred under the Base BId.
Do not plant trees and shrubs until major constructIon operatIOns are completed
2.
Lavout
May, 2002
Ol;9l11pk Design works, Inc. PS
5.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvIsion 02 - SltewOl k
I
a
Layout individual tree and shrub locatIOns and areas for multIple
plantIngs Stake locatIons and outline areas. Secure ArchItect's or
Arborist's acceptance before planting. Make minor adjustments as may
be requested.
I
I
3.
ExcavatIOn.
a If underground constructIon work or obstructIOns are encountered In
excavation of tree holes, ArchItect or Arbonst shall select alternate
locatIOns.
ExcavatIon SIze -
1) Cans-
a)
I
I
b.
2)
Plant plants delIvered In 5 gallon containers In holes at
least 2 feet In dIameter.
Plant plants delIvered In I gallon containers In holes 12
Inches In dIameter.
Earth Ball or Bare Root -
a) Plant trees In holes at least two tImes greater In dIameter
than ball of earth or natural bare root spread.
Depth of holes shall be at least 6 Inches below roots or root ball,
then filled sufficiently WIth good topsoil to bnng plant to proper
elevation.
I
b)
I
I
3)
4.
Planting:
a. Plant immedIately after removing plant from container.
b. Place trees and shrubs in holes so, In relatIon to fimshed grade, plant
shall be approximately one Inch hIgher than natural grade before being
transplanted.
c. Properly cut off broken or frayed roots. Remove binders from around
root ball. Lay back or cut top 1/3 of burlap from around root ball
d. Center plant In hole and backfill WIth mIxture of three parts good topsoil
and one part rotted composted manure making a ring of mounded soil
around holes pen meter to form watering baSin.
e. Add planting tablets In plant pit as follows-
I) One Gallon Shrub - I tablet.
2) FIve Gallon Shrub or Tree - 3 tablets.
3) 15 Gallon Tree - 4 tablets.
4) 24 inch Box Tree - 6 Tablets.
f. Settle by firming and watering to bnng ball down to proper level, Just
slIghtly higher than surrounding SOIl.
g. Do not use muddy soIl for backfilling
h. Make adjustments In positIons of plants as dIrected by ArchItect.
I. Thoroughly water trees and shrubs ImmedIately after planting.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Supports for New or Moved Trees:
a. In planting, Include placement of adequate support for trees noted on
DraWings to be staked.
b. Support shall conSIst of at least three 2" x 2" x 8'-0" lumber stakes dnven
Into hole base before backfill so roots are not damaged.
I
I
May, 2002
O[~mpjc Design works; Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.
c. TIe tree to stakes In two places mInImum (near top and In mIddle) wIth
rubber hose naIled to stake and applIed In figure eight to Insure safe
support.
All Ground Covers:
a. ContaIner-grown unless otherwIse specIfied on DrawIngs. Space 10
pattern specIfied by Arbonst on-site.
7.
Mulchmg:
a After plantIng, mulch shrub and ground cover planting areas with 2"deep
layer of specIfied mulch.
b. Place mulch to umform depth and rake to neat fimshed appearance
02 970 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
I
GENERAL I.
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angcles Carneglc Library
DIVIsion 02 - SltewOIk
I
Scope:
a
Includes but Not LImIted To -
I) ProVIde mamtenance for landscapmg as descnbed In Contract
Documents.
MaIntam trees, shrubs, and plants for 60 days after completion of landscape
installatIOn and acceptance of landscape work by ArchItect and Arbonst.
a ProVIde plant warranty of I year from date of final acceptance of
ProJect. Trees, shrubs, or ground covers whIch do not lIve and have to be
replaced shall be guaranteed and mamtamed an addItional I year from
date of replacement.
b Replace trees, shrubs, ground covers, or vmes that are dead or appear
dead as directed by ArchItect at end of mamtenance penod. Make
replacements within 30 days of notification.
c. Provide wrItten mstructIons on maintenance reqUIrements for the
balance of the I-year guarantee penod. Instructions shall be gIVen to the
ArchItect for forwardmg the Owner's custodIan.
2.
Trees, Shrubs, & Ground Cover:
a. Mamtam by prunmg, cultIVatmg, and weedmg as requIred for healthy
growth for a penod of 60days beyond final acceptance of Project.
b. Restore planting basins.
c. TIghten and repaIr stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrubs to
proper grades or vertIcal pOSItions as required.
d. Spray as reqUIred to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and dIsease.
e. PrOVIde supplemental water by hand as needed 10 addItIOn to water from
spnnklmg system.
END OF SECTION 02 900
May, 2002
O[;gmpic Design Works} Inc. PS
EXHIBIT A
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvIsion 02 - SltewQI k
May, 2002
Ol~mpic Design worksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I .NTI
I www ntl4u com
I
I
I.
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
NORTHWESTERN TERRITORIES; INC.
717 SOUTH .PEABQDY S1'REET, PORT ANGELES, WA 98362
EngineerS. Land Surveyors. Geologists . - '
Construction Inspection. Materials Testmg
(360) 452-8491 1-800-654-5545 FAX 452-6498 E-Mail Info@nll4u com
GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
For
'Carnegie Library Remodel :.
Located at
Lots 7, 8 and 9, Block 55
Port Angeles Township
Clallam County, Washington
Prepared for
OLYMPIC DESIGN WORKS
Prepared by
NORTHWESTERN TERRITORIES, INC.
717 S. Peabody Street,
Port Angeles, Washington 9'8362
March 4, 2002
2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.0 Introduction
During January of 2002, Northwestern Territories, Inc. (NTI) conducted a
geotechnical investigation at the Carnegie Library at Lincoln and Second Streets
in Port Angeles, Washington. The investigation included historical research, a
subsurface investigation and laboratory analysis of soils. It is'our understanding
that the existing library will be remodeled with the addition of an elevator and
other improvements. The Investigation was carried out at the request of Mr.
Stewart Bonney, AlA of Olympic Design Works (ODW).
2.0 Site Description
The subject pr<?perty is' loca!ed at the southeast corner of-Lincoln Street and.
Second Street in Port Angeles, Washington. The property is bounded on the
north by the entrance to Peabody Creek RV Park, on the south by BonnY's
Bakery, on the east by a steep slope leading down to Peabody Creek RV Park
and on the west by Lincoln Street. The existing library sits in the central portion of
the lot an~ the east side of the lot is an asphalt parking lot.
The library is believed to be founded on a monolithic slab with probably no rebar
in the slab. There are cracks in the exterior concrete walls that suggest some
settlement has taken place. Small cracks were also noticed inside the building
above the windows.' , , - -
. .
There are also many cracks in the asphalt along the east e:nd of the parking lot
suggesting settlement in this area.
3.0 Site History
Construction of the Carnegie Library began in 1918 and the library opened on
January 5, 1919. In 1962,'the library was remodeled and expanded. Prior to the
construction of the library, there was a wood framed Catholic Church on the site
that was later used as the courthouse. Judging from historic. photographs, it
appears that the Catholic Churc,h was. constructed on top. of a'knoll that was
several feet higher than Lincoln Street. The Church occupied the entire top of the
knoll and the ground dropped steeply away from the building edge. It appears
that the knoll was cut down- closer to the grade of Lincoln' Street prior to the'
construction of the library. ' .
The photos also reveal tha,t a gully used to parallel Lincoln Street-and drained
into Peabody Creek, which lies east a'nd north of the library. Lincoln Street was
con$tructed as a trestle over the gully, which was late'r fille~d in:,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.0 Regional/Site Geology
The Washington State Department of Ecology Coastal Zone Atlas of Washington
maps the soils in the area of the project as possibly the Everson Sand (Qes?).
The Atlas states this unit occurs as sand, pebbly sand and silt deposits in a
manner that suggests an age correlation with the Everson Interstade. An
interstade is a warmer substage of a glacial stage, marked by a temporary retreat
of the ice.
The USDA Soil Survey of Clallam County Area, Washington maps the soil in the
area of the project as the Clallam-Hoypus gravelly sandy loam. These soils are
generally described as a non-plastic silty sand or silty gravel formed in glacial till
or glacial outwash. The Survey also states that this unit also contains small areas
of Bellingham, Catla, Dick and McKenna soils. Based on the subsurface
investigation conducted by NTI, it appears that the Bellingham soils most closely
resemble the soils found on site. The Bellingham silty clay loam is described as a
very deep, gray to dark gray, poorly drained soil, formed in alluvium. Testing
done by the Survey indicates that the percent passing the 200 sieve is between
60 and 100 percent, liquid limits range from 40 to 65 and the plasticity index
ranges from 15 to 40. These test results are similar to the test results completed
by NTI (see attached laboratory test results).
Information from the three exploratory borings drilled by Holt Drilling and logged
by NTI revealed a sandy silt or silty sand fill layer of about three feet thick,
followed by a brown clay to depths of about seven to 12 feet. Below this layer, is
a layer of gray clay to about 38 feet followed by silty sand to the limit of
excavation. Water was encountered at a depth of about 40 feet in B-1. Please
see the attached soil logs for detailed descriptions and the attached site plan for
approximate boring locations. All soils were classified by visual means except
those samples on which laboratory analysis was performed. The boundary lines
between soil types on the logs are approximations. Actually, the transitions may
be gradual and subsurface conditions may vary between exploration locations.
5.0 Site Investigation
On January 14, 2002, Bill Payton of NTI and Stewart Bonney of Olympic Design
Works met on site to mark the boring locations for underground utility locating
prior to drilling. The boring locations were selected by Mr. Bonney and Mr. Ira
Gross, the structural engineer. Please see the attached site plan for approximate
boring locations.
On January 28, 2002, Bill Payton met with Michael Reynolds of Holt Drilling to
conduct the subsurface investigation. Three holes were drilled to a maximum
depth of 45 feet using a Foremost Mobile B-59 truck mounted drill rig and 4 inch
hollow stem augers. Split spoon or ring samples were taken every five feet. Bill
Payton recorded the subsurface conditions and obtained samples for laboratory
3
4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
testing.-AII borings were advanced in accordance with applicable'ASTM
standards and generally accepted geological and engineering praCtices.
6.0 Laboratory Analysis and Evaluations
Laboratory analysis consisted of grain-size distribution and Atterberg Limits for '
two samples, one of the orown clay (B-2, S-1 at 5') and one of the gray clay (B-1,
S-4 at 20'). Please see attached laboratory test results.
Calculated or estimated* soil properties are as follows:'
Brown Clay
· Total unit weight = 127.43 pcf
· Moisture content = 25.7% - 31.3%
· Friction angle (~) = 240
· Cohesion = 210 psf
· Plasticity index = 13
· Liquid limit '=: 38 '
· Classification = lean clay (CL)
Gray Clay
· Total unit weight = 95 pcf*
· Moisture content = 36.7%
· Friction angle (~) = not determined
· Cohesion = not determined
· Plasticity index:;: 22
· Liquid limit = 42 '
· ,"Classification =: lean clay (CL)
SiI!y Sand
· Total unit weight = 130 pcf*
· Submerged unitwei9ht = 67.6 pcf*
· Friction angle (~') = 300* '
· , Cohesion '= O~
· Classification = silty sand (SM)*
7.0 Con'clusions and Recommendations
The proposed construction appears feasible from a geotechnical perspective.
Howev,ert conventional shallow foundations in the'loose compressible day
material would likely experience settlement beyond tolerable limits. Furttler;:the '
, calculated allowable bearing capa'city for strip foo.tings Qne .foot wide 'and founded
I .' I ..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
five feet below grade in the brown clay is 562 pst. This value can be increased
for depth per Table 18-I-A of the Uniform Building Code (UBC), but no increase
for width is allowed.
It is therefore recommended that the elevator be founded on auger cast piles
embedded in the dense silty sand found below the clay layers.
For 1.5 foot diameter by 40 foot depth auger-cast piles founded in dense silty
sand, the allowable pile capacity is calculated to be 24 kips. The lateral bearing
of the silty sand is 150 Ibs./sq. ft./ft. of depth and the lateral bearing of the clay is
56 Ibs./sq. ft./ft. of depth. These values may be increased for wind and seismic
loads per the UBC. Expected settlement is estimated to be about one inch and
should occur during construction.
For retaining structures, where free unrestrained walls are planned to retain level,
clean, granular, non-expansive, imported backfill, an equivalent fluid pressure of
35 pet for walls allowed to deflect at least 0.002 times the wall height (active
condition) may be used. For walls not allowed to deflect at least 0.002 times the
wall height, the above value should be increased to 67 pet (at-rest condition). An
appropriate s(;!fety factor should be applied for the design of retaining structures.
We recommend using a safety factor of at least 1.5 for sliding and overturning.
Appropriate allowances should be made for anticipated surcharge,loadings.
Unless walls incorporate appropriately designed backdrainage systems,
allowances should be made for seepage and/or hydrostatic forces. Lightweight
compactors such as hand-operated tampers should be utilized for compaction in
close proximity to retaining walls in order to reduce the possibility of excess wall
movement.
The soils at the site are not considered to be susceptible to liquifaction, but are
frost susceptible. The fill material found in the upper approximately three feet had
small amounts of organics in B-3, and may contain other deleterious material. It
is therefore recommended that this material not be used under struCtures.
Construction activities would best be accomplished during the dry season in
order to minimize problems associated with disturbing wet clayey soil. Footing
drains are recommended at the base of all footings including retaining walls.
8.0 Limitations
This report was performed using the degree of care and skill ordinarily exercised,
under similar circumstances, by engineers and geologists practicing in this or
similar localities. No warranty, expressed or implied, is made as to the
conclusions and professional advice included in this report.
The samples taken and used for testing and the observations are believed to be
representative of the entire area of the proposed additions. However, soil and
geologic conditions can vary significantly between borings and surface outcrops.
5
, -\ "',
,As in many, developments, conditions revealed by E:xc'avations may 1;>e, at ;' ,,: '" (
variance with preliminary findings. If this occurs, the changed conditions must be
, ,
evaluated by the engineer and designs adjusted or alternative designs
recommended.
The report has be'en' prepared for the e~c1usive 'use of 'Olympic Design Wprks \', '
and their consultants in conjunction with the above referenced ,project.' It,may be
used by others only with exp~essed written permission of the Engineer: The' , "
report has nof been prepared for use ~y others or for other uses.
Sincerely,.
NORTHWESTERN TERRITORIES, INC.
9Jlh r
J. R. Jerry Newlin; P.E.
Principal Engineer
~,,'~~~"
Bill Payton, 'L.E.G: ~
Engineering Geologist
G'\Gen\8IU\Reporis\OLDW0102,geotech repc;>rt.PA! Carnegie Llbrary,doc
": '
t, ,
"
( .' '.: ; ~._~~
,- .')'
.. . -' - .
~ - .. - ..
"
J
" ,
"
",
. .. , ."';.
. .' J .. '. ,.' ~
, ,
'''"( -' ~ . '. ,-' ~ , -
,.1 ""
, ~
....
, -. ',' "
. ,
. f' . j
... .',,' - ,
, "
, .
':,
6
.'
. ',"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-------------------
/
LINCOlN STREET
a
a
NEW 51DBlJALK P
W) FIRf IW.l =1= 6.1 6. =1=
I p~~ I
o 0
o
RAMP .
FIGURE 1
. - Approximate soil boring locatIon
~
o
~
~
'"
/
,~
,0
/
U
oW
':I
.<C
I;
It::
r 1\\..JvL0 I. 01-\t\/\lt..Glc L1t5r<AK Y
Approximate round surface elevation:
30
I
10
20
25
[!:f='
o..W
wW
o~
SOIL DESCRIPTION
o
5
W We:::
....J -1 W
o..wCl.m
~~ ~~
5-1
----------------------------
Soft, gray, lean clay
(c1) very moist to wet
5-3
5-4
--------------------------
Firm, gray, lean clay
(c1) very moist to wet
with trace sand and fine
gravel; lense of clayey
sand at "-'25',
Becomes ver stiff at "-'30'.
2-inch 0 D
split-spoon
sample
n 3-lnch 0 D
nng sample
Drilling started 01/28/02
Drilling completed 01/28/02
Logged by: BILL PAYTON
Drilling by" MICHAEL REYNOLDS
This IS a reproduced copy
5-5
5-6
WI' Groundwater level
ill- at time of dnlllng
BORING NO. B-1 a I
o
ze:::
::>I::!
o<{
~~
StondordPenetratlon Resistance
TESTING
I
"-'2" Asphalt
Fill. Soft. dark brown, sandy
silt/stlty sand (ml/sm) -
moist to wet with trace
I "
\ grave. ,,'
~---------------------~,
Firm, brown, lean clay
(c1) very moist to wet
A Blows per foot
10 20 30 040
I I I I
1 I I I
I 1 f 1
I I 1 1
I J l I
I 1 I I
I I I 1
I I 1 I
I I I I
1 1 1 I
. ' I 1 'f I';
1 1 I 1
-~~---_L_~_~____L___
I I I
I 1 I
I I I
I I I
I I 1
I 1 f
I I I
I J I
I I ,
1 1 I
I I .,
I I I
--~----~---4----r---
I I I I
I J l I , _
I I I 1
I I I ,
I I . ,I 1--
I I I I
I I I I
I 1 f I"
I 1 I I
I J I I
I I I I
~-~----~---~----~---
I 1 1 I
I I I I
I 1 f 1
I 1 I 1
I., J l .1.
1 I I I
I 1 I I
I I., ,I I
I I I I
1 I I I
I 1 f I '
I I 1 I,
~-~__-_L___~____L___
1 I I
I I 1
I 1 I '
1 1 ,
I I I
1 r I
I I I
J .\ f
I 1 I
I I I
I ,I I
, I ,I 1
--~----~---4-~--~-~-
I I 1 I
1 J \ , 1
I I I I
1 I 1 I
f' I "1 1 .
1 I I I
It' ,
'I 1 'f .., '
I I , I
I, J l I
1 I I I
1 , I
o
040 50
L' I'd
IqUl
limit
50
I
20 30
MOISTURE CONTENT
I
Plastic
limit
Natural
I
I
I
I
I
I
Sieve
At terberg
Limits
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
fj NORTHWESTERN TERRITORIES, INC.
Engmeers - Land Surveyors - Gealoglsts
Construction CoordmatlOn - Matenals Testmg
NT!
I
717 SOOlH f'EABOOY. PORT ANGflIS, WA9iINGTlll 98362, (360) 452-8491
I
I
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
i
I
,
,
I
I
I
i
,
I
I
I
,
~
I
I
I
i
1
I
I\VULvl.
vl\l\I'ILVIL LIUI\f\I\ I
UVI\II~V I~V. U-IU
I~
I
-~
j
-1
'z
Approximate ground surface elevation:
W Wo:: 5 tandardPen etratlon Resistance
I""'" 0
1-1- ..J ..Jw
o..W SOIL DESCRIPTION o..w o..ro Zo:: TESTING
WW ~~ ::l:::l: :::>~ ... Blows per foot
o~ <1::::> 0<1:
(/)1- (/)z ~~ 10 20 30 <40 :50
-30 I 1 I ,
I I I I
- - - I 1 r I -
I I I I
- - - I J I I -
I I I I
I I , I
- - - I 1 I I -
if , I I I
- I I I I
- I 1 r I -
5-7 I I I I
-35- - ___~____JL__~____L___ -
I I I 1
I I I I
- 1 I I I -
I I I I
I I I I
- I . . I ( I -
I 1 I I
---------------------------- - - I J I , -
Very dense, brown, silty I I 1 I
T I I I I
sand (sm) wet with trace - I 1 I I -
5-8 Y I I I I
-40- fine gravel. - AlD _ __~-_--~---~----~ __...A ~ -
I J I
- - - , . . J I -
, I I
I I I
- - - I I I -
I I I
I I I
- - - I 1 r -
T 1 I I
- - - .1 . . J I - -
1 I I
5-9 I I I
1-45- ----------------------- - ---~----~---~----~--~ -
End of Boring I I I I
I I I 1
- - - I 1 '1 I -
I I I 1
- - - I J I . . I -
I I I I
I I I I
- - - ., l I I -
, I I I
- I I 1 I -
- - I 1 ( .. I
I I I 1
-50- - - ___~____L___J____L___ -
I I I I
I I I I
- - I i I I -
I I I I
I I 1 I -
- - I 1 r I
I I I I
- - - , . . J I I -
, I I I
I I I I
- - - I I I 1 -
I I I I
-55- - I I I I -
- ---'----r---,----r---
I I I I
- - 1 J I I -
I , I I
I I 1 I
- - I .. . { I I -
I I 1 I
I I I I -
- - "1" . 1 r . I
I I 1 I
- , . J l , -
I , I I
I I I I I
-60 0 10 20 30 <40 50
I 2-inch 0.0. II 3-inch 0.0. y Groundwater level I I. MOISlURE CONTENT L' I 'd I
split - spoon ring sample at time of drlllmg PlastIC Iqul
sample ATO limit Natural limit
r
ThiS IS a reproduced copy
~ NORTHWESTERN TERRITORIES, INC.
Engineers - Land Surveyors - Geologists
ConstructIOn Coordination - Materials Testing
NTI
717 SOUlH PEABOOY. POOT AN<nES. WASHlNGTal 98362. (J60) m-&491
Drilling started. 01/28/02
Drilling completed' 01/28/02
Logged by BILL PAYTON
Drilling by' MICHAEL REYNOLDS
~
o
~
~
CD
f
~
u
~
z
~
c:
.,~~~'-"" '-"''''''LVIL LIUI\f\I\1
Approximate round surface elevation:
I'"""""
1-1-
QW
wW
o!::'
5
10
20
25
30
I
SOIL DESCRIPTION
o
"'2" Asphalt
Fill Soft, dark brown, sandy
silt/silty sand (ml/sm) -
moist to wet
-
-
\ .......--
~-----------------------
Soft, brown, lean clay
(cl) very moist to wet
----------------------------
Firm to soft, gray, lean
clay (c1) very moist to wet.
----------------------------
End of Boring
2-inch 00
split-spoon
sample
3-inch 00
ring sample
]I
~
Drillmg started' 01/28/02
Dnlllng completed 01/28/02
Logged by' BILL PAYTON
Dnlllng by" MICHAEL REYNOLDS
'::J
Qw
~~
lIll-
Wfr::
-1w
QeD
:::!;:::!;
<1::::>
lIlZ
5-1
5-2
DUr\II~V I~V, 0- L
o
Zfr::
:::>~
0<1:
~~
StandardPenetration Resistance
I
TESTING
I
Groundwater level
at time of drilling
.... Blows per foot
10 20 30 ..0 ~o
I I I I
I I I I
I 1 r I
I I I I
I J I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I 1 r I
I I I I
~-~_-_-L___~____L___
I I I I
I I I ,
I j I I
I I I I
I I I I
I 1 r I
I , I I
I J I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I: I
~~----~---i-~--~---
I I I I
I J t. I
I I I I
I I I I
I I f I
I I I I
I I I I
I 1 r I
I I I I
I J I I
I I I r
~-~----~---~----~---
I I I I
I I I I
I 1 r I
I I I I
I J I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I 1 r I
I I I ,
-~-~---_L___~_~__L___
I , I I
I I I I
I j f ,
I I I I
I I I I
I 1 'f I
I I I I
I J. I .I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I ".. I
I I I ,
I I I I
---I----r---,----r-~-
I I I I
I J t I
I I I I
I I I I
I. j f I
I I , ,
I I I I
'I 1 r . I
I I I ,
I . J I.. I
I I I 1
I I I
o 10
I
Plastic
limit
20 30
t.lOISlURE CONTENT
..0 50
L' I'd
'qUi
limit
I
I
Sieve
Atterberg
limits
i
Ii
I
I
.
Natural
I
fj NORTHWESTERN TERRITORIES, INC.
Engmeers - Land Surveyors - Geologists
ConstructIOn Coardmatian - Matena/s Testmg
NTI
ThiS IS a reproduced copy
717 SOOlH I'EABOOY. Pan ANGOIS. WASHINGTal 98362, (360) 452-8491
I
""-/........1.-'-/1. '-"/\l\I~L-\.....IIL LIL-JI\/\I\I
I
Approximate round surface elevation:
~t::'
a.W
WW
o'!:::'
I
I
I
I.
I
10
I
I
I
I
I
20
I
I
25
I
I
.
m
~
:I
.
z
I
30
I
SOIL DESCRIPTION
o
Soft, brown, leon cloy
ecl) moist with trace fine
gravel and organ ics
(possible fill).
5
/
\ //
~------------------------~
Firm, brown, lean cloy
(c1) very moist to wet.
Firm to stiff, gray, lean
cloy (c1) very moist to wet
End of Boring
2-inch 0.0.
split-spoon
sample
TI
3-inch 0 O.
ring sample
.... Groundwater level
~ at time of drilling
w we:: 0
-.J -.Jw
a.w a.(D ze::
~~ ~~ ::>~
<{::> o<{
Vll- VlZ ~~
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
'-"'-', 'II....... . ,.....,. L....J V
StandardPenetrotron Resistance
.... Blows per foot
10 eo 30 <40 :50
I I I I
I I I I
... I 1 r I
- I I I J
I J L I
I J I I
I I I J
I 1 f I
I I I I
I I I I
I I r J
I I I I
__~____L___J____L___
J I I J
J I I I
I 1 I I
I J I I
I I I 1
I 1 r I
I I I I
1 J l I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I "I
I "I I I
-~~--~-~---i----~---
I I
J l
I I
I I
I I
I I
J I
1 r
I I
J l
I I
---~-~-~---~----I----
I I I I
I I I I
"' "" 1 r I
I I I I
I J l I
I I I J
I I I I
I 1 I I
I I I I
1 I I I
I 1 r I
I 1 I I
___~____L___J____L___
I I I I
I I I I
I "" 1 I I
I I I 1
I I I 1
I 1 r "I
I I I I
I J l. 1
I J I J
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I J
---,----r---,----r---
J I I
I J l
I I I
I I I
J "I I
I I I
I I I
I 1 r
J I I
""I. J l
I I I
I I
TESTING
o 10
I .
Plastic
limit
eo 30
1.400SlURE CONTENT
40 50
L" I "d
IqUl
limit
Natural
Drilling started: 01/28/02
Drilling completed: 01/28/02
Logged by BILL PAYTON
Drilling by MICHAEL REYNOLDS
O NORTHWESTERN TERRITORIES, INC.
Engmeers - Land Surveyors - Geologists
ConstructIOn CoordmatlOn - Matenals Testmg
NTI
This is a reproduced copy
717 SOOlH PEABOOY. poor ANOOiS, W~NGral 98362, (360) 452-8491
NTI MATERIALS TESTING LABORATORY
717 S. Poabody, Port Angelos, WA 98362
(360) 452-8491 Fax (360) 452-8498
I
SIEVE ANAL YSIS/SANO EQUIVALENCY
MATERIAL SAMPLE TRANSMllTAL & TEST RESULTS FORM I
FO( nr.t proloot .poclmon batch. camplote revor.o fO( rOlulll vanemlllal.
Client: o L-'--IM'F>\ C- ~E.s.1 GrN VlCt<..KS 1. Date (use one form per test sample): ~-\-O~ l
LAA-NE(;r11.3- 2. Sample collected by. B\LL PAy,oN
Project L\&<.A~Y 3. Material desc/source: f3 - I / S-LJ, 5' ~ II
18, - ~o
BILLING INFORMATION
If no open lab account or acUve proJectlD. must go through 4. Test requested: 11 Sieve Analysis (BC=241) I
Business Manager first. Sieve Analysis with Sand Equivalency (BC=242)
] Lab Account # [ ] Sand Equivalency Only (BC=243)
(
1><] Project Account IDOL DW 0 I o~ 5. Contractor: I
Project Manager ~RN
6. Remarks:
[ ] Pre-paid (reqUired if not on account. see reverse)
7. Date Rec'd in Lab: '-~e-o;;; 8. Rec'd by: GP
Specimen Control # 876 TESTS RESULTS (TO BE FILLED OUT BY NT! PERSONNEL ONLY)
COARSE PORTION % FINE PORTION % I
Sieve Dry % % X Dry % % X Comb. Spec
Size Weight Retained Pass Sample Weight Retained Pass Sample %
(grams) % (grams) %
..,. )t; 100
~ 9 J dO
\0 c;zj I () 0
Ib cd 100
~c::> o~C-, qq. ~
40 I. O? C1Q.3
5"D I . c:<, qe.8
160 3..q q 7. I
PlOD 3., QS.6
PAN D,q
!
, ~e3. q
:WASH
,
i
, Date Tested ~-,-c;o< Starting Weight PArv-=- 113.5 ; PAN t\Ncr S':>I\... "'Ill ~. \
Dry Weight Before Wet Sieve r"""" .. 01.- '""'\ ~,,~ 3 S '3, . 9 I ~(','-f ~o.L ~ "K> I
, f2, to.
. Tested By. Dry Weight After Wet Sieve PA~ ~ f)(.!'f S<::l I\... ~ 'Ol s. 0 , C>(l..'1 SO'1.. ' I\.5
N A, v/1..A L <<'101 S '-\.1(.1.<: 30..7% Remarks. L.L.-= Lj~J A r 7 c9;;) c:.. L-
~<lI' 1.1 r-:~ttbuut:ttiiY: C. <') (vrE" f'\ff ; c.LA-\~ 11'='1';:"r<..1'J LLP-~ LI<:..y
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~~
~
NTI
NORTHWESTERN TERRITORIES, INC.
Engineors . Land SUlVeyors . Planners
Cons/ruC/lon Coordlna/lon. Ma/erlals Testing
LIQUID LIMIT I PLASTIC LIMIT
ASTM D 4318
DATE. 1- 30- 0 ~
PROJECT: CA r<. NC:- C-rl"':'- L, Q,f1..A r<.. y 0 L..~wo I 0';
CLIENT. QL-'i M.p I C- ~ESl biN W~(1..~
PROJECT/LAB #: 9 <6 0
MATERIAL: ~ -', 5 - 4, I t3. 5" I' - P< 0 '
CONTRACTOR:
TESTED BY: BP.
TEST NO. 1 2 3
Can No C~ C ..../
Mass of can, W, (g) 13. q I Lf., /-1
(
~ ::" L/ --j I' '~'/
Mass of can + moist soil, W2 (g) ,-'C', ,-
Mass of can + dry soil, W3 (g) ;;) ,;) . ~) ;:;). ::~I
W2 - W3
MOisture content, W (%) = W3-Wl X 100 4eR, 0 ~ -= ( -.;
Number of blows, N .;<~ ;J -
LIQUID LIMIT
Liquid Limit =
L\\
-4-
-
-
LJ~
TEST NO. 1 2 3
Can No. ()
Mass of can, WI (g) I 4.5
Mass of can + moist soil, W2 (g) ~ 3;, 5
Mass of can + dry soil, W3 (g) ~ ;Z, D
W2-W3 ;)0
PL= X 100
W3-Wl
PLASTIC LIMIT
Plasticity Index, PI = LL - PL =
~0-)- ex 0
=
~~
G 1Gen\8dllFonns\lJqUld I.Jmol P1asllC l.Jnot T esl.wpd
717 SOUTH PEABODY, PORT ANGELES, WA 98362 (360) 452.a491 1~54-5545 FI\X 452.a498
E-mail: info@nb4u com
NT' MATERIALS TESTING LABORATORY
717 S. Poabody, Port Angolo8, WA 98362
(360) 452-8491 Fax (360) 452-8498
I
SIEVE ANAL YSIS/SAND EQUIVALENCY
MATERIAL SAMPLE TRANSMITTAL & TEST RESULTS FORM I
For nrat pro/eat Ipee/men balch. complete reverie for ralufll lranlmltlal.
Client: 0 L '-1M (' t L (')6~Il.AN \/vb f.Z K 5' 1. Date (use one form per test sample): ;<-\ - o~ -I
2. Sample collected by: B.tL-L "PAYICN
Project CAfZNlZG I t5 Lll?/?A ~ y B-o< , 3. 5" ~ ; ),
3. Material desc/source: $-( J 5
BILLING INFORMATION --'
If no open lab account or acUve proJectlD. must go through 4. Test requested: fX] Sieve Analysis (BC=241) ,
Business Manager nrsl. [ ] Sieve Analysis with Sand Equivalency (BC=2421
[ J Lab Account # ( ) Sand EquIvalency Only (BC=243)
,
~ Project Account 10 0 LD'vV a \ 0 ~ 5. Contractor: 1,
Project Manager ,)(-2.,N
6. Remarks:
r ) Pre-paid (required if not on account. see reverse) ~
I-&;( s- 0 C;) ep
7. Date Rec'd in Lab: 8. Rec'd by:
Specimen Control # 87Cj TESTS RESULTS (TO BE FILLED OUT BY NTI PERSONNEL ONLY) 1
COARSE PORTION % FtNE PORTION % J.
Sieve Dry % % X Dry % % X Comb. Spec.
Size Weight Retained Pass. Sample Weight Retained Pass. Sample % II
(grams) % (grams) %
4 q5 , I C> C
8 c9, f '19 ,'1 I
IC> 0, 0 99. '1
10 C). () 99,9 I
30 0,0 9 CJ. 9
-'io ~,;;:( gCt,C:O I
50 0, .3 Ct 9. "
10e) I I 5 Q6..J.f ,I
[;(GJO 3. B q 5.6
PA.N o. -i I
VVAS H I LfJ I 9
~
Date Tested p<-I-O~ Starting Weight: P AN ~ 'I 3. Cf ; P~N .. ~r .sP\~ =- 308. ~ I
Tested By f3. .p Dry Weight Before Wet Sieve' p~ ,,-. ..a. n 'f ! 0 ". " ~ (, I. ." ; O~'f .lOlL -; I 4~.5'
Dry Weight AtterWet Sieve: f>A"""C,rt.', SOIL~ 1.;1.0. O,'~'it::JI\..~ 6.~
fVAI LJF-<AL JY\o\S\I.>~12' 31.30/0 Remarks: L.. L.'" "3 8 , CL-
3",nd r.I"IJAI,."r:y: Co^JTFrJT': (-h:.~(3 Cl....,oQ,:';I\:"/CArrorv " L,",AiV CLAY
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
fJ
NTI
N08THWESTE8N TE881T081ES, INC.
Engmeers . Land SUNeyors . Planners
Conslrue/ion Coordination. Ma/erials Testing
LIQUID LIMIT I PLASTIC LIMIT
ASTM 0 4318
DATE'
PROJECT: CArt rvtE ~l ~ L-1(3.r<.A r<.y
CONTRACTOR:
TESTED BY: B P
CLlENT:OL'1Mf'Ic. D61bN WO~\~
PROJECT/LAB #: 8 5 \
MATERIAL: B-~, 5- I I 3.5"- S'
I
TEST NO. 1 2 3
Can No E C
Mass of can. W, (g) I 4. Lf /4.,i)
Mass of can + moist sOil, Wz (g) .:so, 0 c9 9. 5
Mass of can + dry sOil. W) (g) ::<5.7 :::< 5. Li
W2 - W3 4~",,,.., ~8.1 4.'
Moisture content, W (%) = X 100 ~-- y, ~ 0 - 3t.9
W3-WI ' I . '1 II, I
Number of blows, N ~5 ,;;;5
LIQUID LIMIT
I
I
I.
I
I'
I
I
I
I
Liquid Limit =
38
37
-:::
:s8
TEST NO. 1 2 3
Can No. F
Mass of can, WI (g) 1~,5
Mass of can + moist soil, Wz (g) 517. \
Mass of can + dry soil, W) (g) c:<-4.b
W2 - W3 ~ "'1~O.r ~5
PL= W3 - WI X 100 I t3, I
PLASTIC LIMIT
Plasticity Index, PI = LL - PL =
~r:3 - ~ 5
=
13
G \GenllldllForms\l.Jquld lJmrt Plas\JC lJml T est.WIld
717 SOUTH PEABODY, PORT ANGELES, WA 98362 (360) 452-8491 1-8()().054-5545 FAX 452-8498
E-malI: Info@nti4u rom
Respectfully Submitted,
GEOTECHNICAL TESTING LABORATORY
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
GEOTECHNICAL
TESTING LABORATORY
NORTHWESTERN TERRITORIES, INC.
717 SOUTH PEABODY
PORT ANGELES, W A
Attn: Bill Payton
Re: Mise. testing
B-1, RS-2, 8.5-tO'
Gentlemen:
We have concluded miscelIaneous testing on the above referenced sample sent to our lab in February, 2002.
The results are as follows:
Unit weight wet 127.43 IbslftJ
Unit weight dry 101.391bslftJ
Moisture 25.7%
Shear 0=240
Cohesion 2]0 Ibsl if
Jfyou have any questions concerning the test results, the procedures used, or if we can be of any further assistance please call on us
at (360) 754-4612
JI~ ~~
Harold Parks
Engineering Geologist
100 II Blomberg Street SW, Olympia, W A 98512
Phone #: (360) 754-4612 Fax #. (360) 754-4848
I
I
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
I
GENERAL
1.
00 General Conditions and DivisIOn 01 apply to this DIvIsIOn.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISIOn 03 - Concrete
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnish labor, matenals, and eqUIpment necessary for
completIon of Work unless mdlcated or noted otherwise.
2) ApplicatIon or mstallatIon of concrete remforcmg, accessories
and hardware.
3) Furnlshmg of concrete accessories by Contractor If so arranged
With Subcontractor.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Furnishing of Items to be embedded in concrete specified in
SectIon mvolved.
2) Furnlshmg and install 109 of Mechamcal and Electrical devices
mc1udmg boxes, conduits, hght fixtures, hangers, mserts, and
other Work to be embedded 10 concrete work pnor to pourmg
specified 10 DiviSIOns 15 & 16.
Furnished by Others but Installed by thiS SectIon-
1) Inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, hght fixtures, and fastenmg
devices for other Work, mcludmg those for Mechanical and
Electrical, shall be provided by SectIOn mvolved.
b.
c.
3
Quahty Assurance:
a. ACI Standards 30 I, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings"; ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete", and the CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice" shall govern
concrete Work except where specified differently.
b. Owner will engage a separate testmg agent to perform materials
evaluation. See DIVISIOn 01-400 for testmg.
1) Strength levels for concrete will be considered acceptable If
averages of three consecutIve tests fall at or above the reqUIred
compressive strength of the specimens and no mdlvldual
strength result falls below the required strength by more than
500 pSI.
2) Test results Will be reported to Contractor, Suppher and the
Architect Within 24 hours after breaks. Reports shall contam the
Project name, date of concrete placement, locatIon of speCific
batch in structure, concrete mix proportIOns, reqUIred 28 day
compressive strength, and tested breakmg strength at both 7 and
28 days.
3) The testmg agency may make additIonal tests ofm-place
concrete when test results mdicate speCified concrete strengths
and other characteristIcs have not been attamed 10 the structure,
as directed by the Architect. ThiS may be by testing cored
cyhnders complymg With ASTM C 42, or other methods as
directed. The Contractor alone shall bear the costs of such
additional testing.
May, 2002
O{~mpic Design Works, Inc. PS
I
03 050 CONCRETE PROCEDURES
1.
I
I
03 051
cold weather concrete procedures
GENERAL
03 052
Cold Weather ReqUirements:
a. Comply WIth ACI 306
1.
I
I
hot weather concrete procedures
GENERAL
Hot Weather ReqUIrements:
a. Comply WIth ACI 305
END OF SECTION 03 050
I
I
03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK
GENERAL
I.
GENERAL SectIOns 03000 & 06 000 apply to this SectIOn
PRODUCTS
2.
EXECUTION 1.
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIvISIon 03 - Concrete
2.
I
I
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) Labor, materials and eqUIpment necessary for complete
construction of reqUIred formwork ready for pounng of
concrete.
2) Matenals and eqUipment necessary to strIp and dIspose of
formwork.
3) DeSIgn, construction, and safety offormwork.
I
I
1.
Forms:
a.
Wood, metal, or plastic as arranged by Contractor. Formmg matenal
shall be compatible with fimsh requirements for concrete to be left
exposed or to receive decoratIve finish.
Release agents used shall be compatible with finish reqUirements.
I
b.
Screeds & Cold Jomt Forms:
a. Burke adjustable screed supports as manufactured by The Burke
Company, San Mateo, CA
b. Equal as approved by Architect prior to blddmg. See SectIon 01 630
'I
I
Forms:
a.
Forming shall conform to shape, Imes, and dImenSIOns called for on
Drawmgs and concrete tolerances speCIfied in SectIOn 03 300.
Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage, retighten during
pour If necessary.
Forms shall be properly braced and tIed.
Make proper form adjustments before, durmg, and after pounng.
Unless forms are new, clean forms of loose concrete and other debns
from previous work and repaIr to proper condItIon.
I
I
b.
I
c.
d.
e.
May, 2002
Ol~mpic Design worksl Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
Accessones:
a Furnish beveled 2"x4" (nommal) keys for contmuous footmgs.
b. Provide for mstallatIon of mserts, templates, fasten 109 devices, and other
accessories to be set 10 concrete pnor to placmg.
3.
Curmg Time:
a. Removal of forms can usually be accomplished 10 8 to 24 hours. If
temperature IS below 50d F or If concrete.
b Where cantIlever stair and second floor thm slabs depend on forms for
structural support, leave support mtact for a 7-day penod for concrete to
reach adequate strength.
END OF SECTION 03100
I
03190 GRANULAR BASE
GENERAL
1.
DIvIsIOn 03 GENERAL applies to this SectIOn.
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 03 - Concrete
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Gravel under slabs on grade.
2) Road base under Sidewalks
Granular Base:
a. Under Slabs On Grade -
I) Yt" to I" gravel or crushed rock.
b. Under Sidewalks-
I) Road Base type gravel or crushed rock, graded as follows:
Sieve % bv Weight Passmg
1" 100
3/4" 85 - 100
#4 45 - 60
#10 30 - 50
#200 5 - 10
(nonplastic)
Place four inches mimmum of granular base over compacted sub-base, level, and
compact thoroughly.
END OF SECTION 03190
May, 2002
Ol~mpic Desigl1 works, Il1C. PS
I
03 200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
I
GENERAL
1.
DIvision 03 GENERAL applIes to thIS SectIOn
03 210 CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL
I
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
4
5
6.
Scope:
a.
Includes But Not LImIted To -
1) FurnIshIng, bendIng, and InstallIng reInforcIng.
I
2.
I
OualIty Assurance:
a Fabncate and place reinforCIng steel accordIng to latest edItion of ACI
"Manual of Standard Practice for DetaIlIng ReInforced Concrete
Structures" and detaIls on DraWIngs.
I
3.
Submittals:
a. Shop Drawings -
1) See Section 0 I 340.
b. ProVIde mIll certIficate upon ArchItect's request.
I
I
4.
Product Delivery & Storage:
a. ReinforCIng steel shall be free of rust, scale, or other coatIng at time of
delIvery and placing.
b. Properly protect rebar on site after delIvery.
I
Rebar shall have grade IdentificatIOn marks and conform to ASTM A 615,
"SpeCIfications for Deformed & PlaIn BIllet-Steel Bars for Concrete
ReInforcing" .
a. Refer to Structural General Notes and Structural Drawmgs
I
I
I
Bend bars cold.
2.
Accurately place and support with chairs, bar supports, spacers, or hangers as
recommended by ACI detailing manual except slabs on grade work. Support
bars m slabs on grade and footings WIth plaIn concrete blocks (no wood or wire).
I
I
3.
Dowel vertical remforcement in columns or walls Into footmg or structure below
with rebar of same size and spacing reqUired above.
Securely anchor and tie reInforCIng bars and dowels pnor to plaCIng concrete.
Concrete ProtectIOn for ReInforcement.
Provide folloWIng mInImUm concrete cover for reInforcement (ACI 318):
a. Refer to Structural General Notes
I
I
A void splices of reinforcing bars at pOInts of maximum stress. Lap bars as
follows:
a. Refer to Structural General Notes and Structural Drawmgs
I
7. Steel reinforcing bars shall run contInUOUS through cold JOInts.
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISIon 03 - Concrete
May, 2002
Ol~mpic Design worksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
03 220 WELDED WIRE FABRIC
I
GENERAL
I
PRODUCTS
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To-
1) Furnishmg materials for use m remforced slabs other than
structural slabs.
Welded steel WIre fabrIc for concrete remforcement meetmg reqUIrements of
ASTM A 185, "SpecIfIcatIOn for Welded Steel WIre FabrIc for Concrete
Remforcement" .
a. Style - 6 x 6 - W1.4 x WI.4.
Install welded WIre fabric m as long of lengths as practIcable.
2.
Lap welded wire fabrIc at least one full mesh and tie splIce WIth WIre.
END OF SECTION 03 200
03 250 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
I
GENERAL
1.
DIVISIOn 03 GENERAL applIes to thIS SectIon.
I
I
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) FurnIshmg of concrete acceSSOrIes.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Application or mstallation of concrete acceSSOrIes specIfied m
SectIon 03 300.
b.
03251
expanSIOn & contractIon ioints
GENERAL 1.
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 03 - Concrete
I
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LimIted To -
I) Expansion joints in concrete except Portland cement concrete
pavmg.
FIber ExpanSIOn Jomts:
a. Manufactured commercIal type meetmg reqUIrements of ASTM D
1751-83, "SpeCIficatIon for Preformed ExpanSIOn Jomt Fillers for
Concrete Pavmg & Structural ConstructIon (Non-extrudmg) & ReSIlIent
BItummous Type".
b. !h" thick unless indicated dIfferently on Drawings.
c. Approved Manufacturers -
1) "Sealtight" by W R Meadows Inc., Elgm, IL
2) "FIber ExpanSIon Jomt" by The Burke Company, San Mateo,
CA
May, 2002
o{~mpic Design works} Inc. PS
EXECUTION I.
MInImal spacmg of expansIOn JOInts:
a. SIdewalks: 50'-0" o.c.
b. Curb & Gutter: 50'-0" 0 c
I
I
END OF SECTION 03 250
I
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
I
GENERAL
I.
DIVIsIOn 03 GENERAL applIes to thIs SectIOn.
I
I
2.
Scope:
a.
3.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) Furnishmg and mstaIlIng all concrete work unless noted
otherwIse m the Contract Documents.
2) Placing concrete accessones.
3) Placmg under-slab vapor barner, if shown on DraWIngs
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
1) Furnishmg of under-slab vapor barrier specIfied In SectIOn 07
190.
SubmIttals:
a. Wntten report to Structural Engmeer or ArchItect for each proposed
concrete mix design at least two weeks pnor to pour Do not begIn
concrete production WIthout reVIew of deSIgn mIx submIttals
b. Refer also to Structural General Notes.
c. Laboratory test reports or evaluatIOn reports for concrete matenals and
concrete mix deSIgns.
b.
I
I
I
I
4. QualIty Assurance:
a. Delivery Tickets _
1) Require mix plant to furnIsh delivery tIcket for each batch of
concrete. Keep delIvery tickets at jobsite for use of Owner or
his representatives. Tickets shall show followmg-
a) Name of ready-mIx batch plant
b) Senal number
c) Date and truck number
d) Name of Contractor
e) Name and locatIon of Job
f) Specific class or deSIgnatIOn of concrete In conformance
with that employed in job specIficatIOn
g) Amount of concrete
h) TIme loaded
I) Type, name, and amount of admIxtures used
J) Amount of cement
k) Total water content
I) Water added by receIver of concrete WIth hIS InitIals.
b. AIlowable Tolerances _
I) VanatIon from plumb-
a) 0 to 10 feet - 1/4" maxImum
b) 20 feet or more - 3/8" maXImum
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISIOn 03 - Concrete
May, 2002
O{~mpic Design W orks/ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvIsIon 03 - Concrete
I
c.
d.
e.
2)
3)
VanatIon In thickness - 1/4" to 1/2" standard, 5% for footIngs
VanatIon in grade -
a) 0 to 10 feet - 1/4" standard, 1/8" for floor slabs
b) 10 to 20 feet - 3/8" standard, 1/4" for floor slabs
c) 40 feet or more - 3/4" standard, 3/8" for floor slabs
VanatIon In plan -
a) 0 to 20 feet - 1/2"
b) 40 feet or more - 3/4" standard, plus 1/2" for footIngs
VanatIon In openings
a) Size - plus 1/8"
b) Location - 1/4"
Vanation In stairs & landings -
a) Consecutive steps -
(1) Treads - 1/8"
(2) Rlsers-I/16"
b) FlIght of stairs -
(1) Treads - 1/4"
(2) Risers - 1/8"
4)
5)
6)
PlaCing Rate -
1) In order to avoid overloading of forms and ties, observe
follOWing rate of filling per hour for vanous air temperatures -
Temperature Rate of Fill Per Hour
40 deg. F 2'
50 deg. F 3'
60 deg. F 4'
70 deg. F 5'
RainY Weather - Protect concrete whIch has not received Its initial set to
aVOId excess water In mix.
Notify Architect 24 hours minimum prior to plaCing concrete.
Products:
a. Mixer -
1) Approved AGC Type or ready-mix eqUipment conforming to
reqUirements of ASTM C 94, "Specification for Ready-Mixed
Concrete" .
b. Portland Cement -
1) Meet reqUirements of ASTM C 150, "SpecificatIOns for Portland
Cement" .
2) Type I
c. Coarse Aggregates -
I) Meet reqUirements of ASTM C 33, "Specification for Concrete
Aggregates", or nonconforming aggregate which by test or
actual service produces concrete of reqUired strength and
conforms to local governing codes.
2) Aggregate shall be Uniformly graded as follows -
a) Flat Work - Size #67 (3/4 Inch to #4 or 3/4 maximum to
1/4 Inch minimum).
b) All Other - Size #57 (One inch maximum to 1/4 Inch
minimum).
4.
May, 2002
o{~mpIc DesIgl1 Works} Il1c. PS
5.
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIvIsIon 03 - Concrete
I
d.
Fme Aggregates-
I) Meet reqUIrements of ASTM C 33, "SpecIficatIOn for Concrete
Aggregates" .
Water -
I) Clean and potable.
AdmIxtures -
I) Except for aIr entramIng agents specIfied below, use of
admIxtures is forbIdden WIthout wntten approval of Owner
a) Do not use calcIUm chlonde.
AIr EntraInIng Agents -
I) Meet requirements of ASTM C 260, "SpecIficatIOn for
AIr-Entrammg AdmIxtures for Concrete", except those
containIng chlondes may not be used.
Fly Ash-
I) Meet requirements of ASTM C618
2) Type F
3) Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25% of cement content by
weIght.
I
e.
I
f.
I
g.
I
h
I
I
I. Water-reducmg, Retardmg, and Acceleratmg ChemIcal AdmIxtures
I) Meets reqUIrements of ASTM C 494
2) Notify ArchItect of mtended use 7 days pnor to pour.
I
ExecutIon:
a. MIxmg of Concrete -
I) MIX a minImum of one mInute
2) Increase mixmg time 15 seconds for each addItIOnal yard of
concrete or fractIon thereof in excess of one cubIc yard.
3) AdditIon of Water to Concrete-
a) AVOId use of extra water. If water IS added on the job,
do not exceed specified slump.
I
I
I
b.
Fmish -
I) Rubbed -
a) Exposed foundatIon walls and retaInIng walls shall
receIve rubbed finIsh.
2) Rough -
a) Top of footings.
3) No SpecIal FInIsh -
a) Grade beams, gIrders, and JOIStS
4) Steel Trowel FmIsh -
a) Intenor flatwork.
5) Broom FInIsh -
a) Extenor flatwork, ramps, staIrs, curbs, and gutter.
Remove edger marks.
Control Jomts - (Unless shown otherwIse)
I) Walks, curbs, and gutters shall be scored 5' -O"o.c.
I
I
I
I
I
c.
I
May, 2002
O[~mpic Design works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
normal weight structural concrete
03311
Scope:
a.
I.
GENERAL
I
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) FurnIshmg and placmg 3000 pSI concrete m followmg locations
a) Foundations and Walls
b) StaIrs and Landmgs
c) ExterIor Walks and Slabs m frost areas
d) Curbs and Gutters
e) Retammg Walls
f) ExterIor EqUIpment Bases
2) FurnIshmg and placing of 2500 pSI concrete m following
locations -
a) Footmgs
b) All other concrete not specified elsewhere.
I
I
I
I
MaterIals shall be as specIfied under SectIOn 03 100.
PRODUCTS 1.
ProportIOns:
a. 2500 pSI Concrete -
1) Min. weIght cement per CUbIC yard concrete - 517 Ibs.
2) Air Entramment (plus or mmus 1/2%) - 3%
3) Slump - 4 mches maximum.
b. 3000 pSI Concrete -
1) Mm. weIght cement per CUbIC yard concrete - 587 Ibs
2) AIr Entrainment (plus-or-mmus 1/2%) -
a) Exterior Flatwork - 5%
b) All Other - 3%
3) Slump - 4 inches maXImum.
2.
I
I
I
I
Inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, pIpes, condUIts, and other accessones shall be
mstalled by appropnate Section and inspected prior to pourIng. See Section 03
000.
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
2. Remove water and debris from space to be poured.
3. Placmg:
Place as soon after mixing as possIble.
DeposIt as nearly as possible in final posItion.
Do not use contammated, detenorated, or retempered concrete.
Placing of concrete shall be contmuous until a panel or section IS
complete.
Thoroughly work m concrete around remforcing bars.
Do not embed alummum m concrete.
Compact concrete m forms by vlbratmg and other means where reqUIred.
A void accumulation of hardened concrete.
Locate construction Joints where shown on Drawmgs to least impair
strength of completed structure. Construction Jomts in foundation walls
shall not occur Within 6 feet of comer and be keyed, and have
contmuous plastic waterstop mcorporated into pours.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
I
1.
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISIon 03 - Concrete
May, 2002
Ol~mpic Design works, Inc. PS
I
8.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DivIsion 03 - Concrete
I
4.
I
Bondmg Fresh and Hardened Concrete:
a. RetIghten forms.
b Roughen surfaces.
c. Clean off foreign matter and laltance.
d. Wet but do not saturate.
e. Slush with neat cement grout.
f. Proceed with new concrete pour.
I
I
5
CUrIng'
a. Keep concrete mOist seven days minimum for regular concrete and three
days for high early strength.
b. See SectIon 03 370 for cunng compounds.
I
I
6.
Groutmg Anchor Bolts and Plates:
a. Grout solId leaving no vOids. See SectIOn 03 600 for materials.
I
7.
Special ReqUirements:
a. F ootmgs -
1) Bear 12 mches minimum into undisturbed earth or on
mechanically-compacted engineered fill. ExterIor wall footmg
shall bear 18 mches minimum below finish grades.
2) Level finish footing top and leave rough.
3) Set in beveled keyway on contmuous footIngs.
4) Where jomts are reqUired, bulkhead, key hOrIzontally, and dowel
with two #5 rebars, 4 feet long.
b. FoundatIons & Walls-
1) Leave steel projectmg where reqUired for floor tIe IfmdiCated by
DrawIngs.
c. InterIor Slabs On Grade -
1) If vapor barners are specified, cover with Yz" - 2"of sand prior
to pouring concrete. See Detail I-A 17.
d. Extenor Walks, Slabs, & Formed Curbs-
1) Use air-entrained concrete miX, providIng not less than 4.0% nor
not more than 6.0% entrained air for concrete exposed to
freezmg and thawIng cycles.
2) Limit maximum water-cement ratIo of concrete exposed to
freezIng and thawIng to 0.45.
3) Slope to specific grades Indicated See Site Plan Sheet A-O 1.
e. EqUipment Bases -
1) CoordInate With appropnate Sections for locatIOns and
dimensIOns. See Site Plan, Sheet A-O I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FInishes:
a. Rubbed Fmlsh -
1) Immediately after removIng forms from foundatIon walls or
retainmg walls, remove JOInts, marks, bellies, projectIOns, loose
materIals, and cut back metal ties from surfaces to be exposed.
2) Point up VOids With cement mortar, 1:2 mix, and rub exposed
surface With carborundum to smooth, even surface
I
I
May, 2002
O[~mpic Design Works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03 370 CONCRETE CURING
I
I
GENERAL 1.
2.
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
2.
3.
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvIsion 03 - Concrete
I
b.
Steel Trowel FInIshes -
1) Float and steel trowel Intenor slabs after concrete has set enough
to aVOId bnngIng water and fines to surface and when concrete
has stiffened suffiCIently to permIt operation of power trowel.
2) Check and level surface plane to tolerances 1/8" in 8' -0" for
floor flatness and W' in 20' -0" for floor levelness. Grind smooth
any hIgh spots.
3) UnIformly slope surfaces to dram where mdIcated on Floor
Plans In JanItors Room and Restrooms..
Broom FInIShes -
1) Broom finIsh extenor walks, ramps, landmgs, slabs, & formed
curbs.
2) Apply broom finIsh perpendIcular to dIrectIOn of travel on ramps
and parallel to travel on landIngs.
3) Round edges includmg edges formed by expansion JOInts.
4) Remove edger marks.
c.
END OF SECTION 03 300
DIVISIon 03 GENERAL applIes to thIS Section.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) FUrnIShIng and applYIng to Intenor and extenor slabs and all
flatwork and ramps
SodIUm SIlIcate based compound provIdIng waterproofing, cunng, hardenIng,
dustproofing, and sealIng of substrate.
DIsolvmg formula, acrylIc based sealer.
Approved Manufacturers -
a. Acuncon as manufactured by Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Co., Newark,
NJ
b. Ashford Formula - by Curecrete ChemIcal Co., Grem, UT
c. Equal as approved by ArchItect.
Apply all compounds In accordance WIth Manufacturer's instructIOns.
END OF SECTION 03 370
END OF DIVISION 03
May, 2002
o{~mpic Design works} Inc. PS
I
I
DIVISION 04 MASONRY
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvIsion 04 - Masomy
I
1.
00 General CondltlOns and DIVlSlOn Olapply to thIs DIvIsIon.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LimIted To -
1) ProvIde labor, matenals, and eqUipment necessary for
completIOn of Work unless mdlcated or noted otherwIse
2) Refer also to Structural General Notes.
FurnIshed By Others but Installed By ThIS Dlvlslon-
I) Bolts, hardware and steel embedded In masonry specIfied In
SectIOn 05 127.
2) Flashmg and sheet metal specified In SectIOn 07 600
3) Jomt sealers specIfied m SectlOn 07 900
b.
SubmIttals
a. Product Data -
I) SubmIt manufacturer's product data for each type of masonry
accessory, remforcement or anchorage system and other
manufactured products, mcludmg certIficatIOns that each type
complIes WIth specIfied reqUirements
b VenficatIon Samples -
1) Masonry Cleanmg Test Panels
a) In the area mdlcated on Sheet A-07, test and evaluate the
followmg masonry cleanIng methods;
b) Power-wash nnse only:
c) Vmegar hand wash.
d) MIld ACId wi Power-spray nnse
e) Create separate and dlstmct test areas through the use of
vlsqueen to protect surroundIng areas from the effects of
vanous test procedures
3
2)
Masonry and Mortar mIx Test Panel:
a)
Construct 24"w x 48"h test panel of materials as
follows;
4 weeks pnor to commencmg bncklaymg begm
constructlOn of sample panel. Clean eXIstIng masonry
walls first. Follow specified mortar mIx desIgn
carefully. Cured mortar IS mtended to match cleaned
mortar m cleaned wall. Histonc masonry umts wIll be
provided by Architect.
Construct first half of test panel Demonstrate abIlIty to
match mortar texture and projected color, bnck layout,
WIdth of Jomt and flush strIke technIque. Panel wIll cure
two weeks. At the end of two weeks, evaluate color and
texture match to that of eXlstmg clean mortar on cleaned
wall. There wIll be no new sealer applIed Apply any
knowledge gamed to second half.
b)
c)
May 2002
Ol~Wlpic Design worksJ Inc. PS
7.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvIsIOn 04 - Masonry
d) Construct second half of test panel. Demonstrate abihty
to match mortar texture and projected color, brick
layout, width of joint and flush strike technique. Second
half of panel will cure an additional two weeks.
e) At the end of 4-week test penod, evaluate final mortar
match with ArchItect. After an additional two weeks
knock down sample, clean hIstoric bnck and mcorporate
them mto the Work.
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.
Cold Weather Requirements:
a. Cold weather, as referred to m thIS Section, is four hours below 40d F m
a 24-hour penod.
b. Do not lay masonry when temperature is below 40d F unless authonzed
by ArchItect.
c Keep matenals free of Ice and snow.
d. Heat water and sand 140d F maXImum if temperature is below 40d F.
e. Temperature of mortar shall be between 70 and 120d F when used.
f. Heat hollow masonry units to 40d F when temperature is below 10d F
and solid masonry to 40d F when temperature is below 0 d F.
g. Do not lay masonry on frozen material. Cover Work at end of each work
day with tarpaulms If temperature is 25 to 40d F. If temperature IS
below 25d F , protect with heaters. Maintam temperature around
masonry to 40d F minimum for 48 hours.
I
I
I
5.
Quality Assurance:
a. Source Control -
I) Obtam exposed masonry units from ArchItect
2) Non-exposed masonry units are to be of SImIlar size to face bnck
and purchased by Contractor in Base Bid.
I
I
6.
Dehverv, Storage, and Handling
a. Dehver, handle, and store masonry units by means which WIll prevent
mechamcal damage and deterioratIOn due to moisture, temperature
changes, and corrosion.
b. Store cementious materials off the ground and protected from moisture.
c. Store aggregate in a manner that will preserve grading characteristics.
d. Store masonry accessories to prevent corrosion, dirt accumulatIOn, and
other deterioration.
I
I
I
Project CondItions:
a. Protection of Work -
I) During constructIon, cover tops of exterior walls WIth
waterproof sheet material at end of each day. Cover partially
completed masonry construction when work is not m progress.
2) Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down on both sides,
securing firmly in place.
3) Immediately remove mortar, SOlI, and other such matenals from
exposed masonry faces to prevent stammg.
I
I
I
May 2002
O{~mpic Design WorksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b.
4) Protect wall bases from ram splashed mud and from mortar
splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall
surfaces.
5) Protect sills, ledges, and projections from droppmgs of mortar.
Loadmg protectIOn -
1) Do not apply anybloads for at least 48 hours, or concentrated
loads for at least 7 days, after completion of masonry walls or
columns.
8.
Coordmation:
a. Coordinate Work with other trades.
b. Make cuts proper size to accommodate work of other trades.
c. Verify rough-in dImenSIOns for items to be bUilt mto walls.
9.
General Execution:
a. Step back unfinished work for Joming with new work.
b. Do not tool until mortar has taken mItial set.
c. Remforcmg shall be free of material that may destroy bond.
d. Use mortar within 1 Y:z hours of initial mixing. Discard mortar that has
begun to set.
10.
Repair and Pointing:
a. Remove and replace/reset masonry units which are loose, broken,
stained, or otherwise damaged, or if units do not align with adjoming
unItS as intended. Provide units to match adjoining units, and mstall
mortar per Specification to elIminate evidence of replacement.
END OF SECTION 04 000
04100 MORTAR & GROUT
GENERAL
1.
DiVIsion 04 GENERAL applies to thIS Section.
I
I
04 110 masonry mortar
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISIon 04 - MaSOn! Y
I
MIX ProportIOns:
a. Use of premixed mortar is not allowed.
b. Loose Volumetric Proportions:
1) Cement Content:
2) Lime Content
3) Aggregate Content
Dry mix ratios
1) Lime / Cement ratio 2.5: 1
2) Aggregate / Cement ratIO 5: 1
Volumetric proportIOns and ratios based on loose bulk densities of
80 pcf for aggregate, 94 pcf for cement, and 40 pcf for hme.
1
2.5
17.5
c.
d.
May 2002
o{~mpic Design W orksJ Inc. PS
2.
Portland Cement:
a. Meet requirements of ASTM C 150, Type lor Type II. ProvIde natural
color or whIte cement as requIred to produce eXIstIng mortar color
match.
I
I
I
3.
Hydrated LIme:
a. Meet requIrements of ASTM C 207, Type O.
I
4. Aggregate for Mortar:
a. Natural fine aggregates meetIng reqUIrements of attached graduated
sIeve analysIs. Crushed or manufactured sands are not acceptable.
b. Original source based on the analysis and report is "washed beach
sands". Thoroughly wash any material obtained from beach source.
c. Suggested process for mortar matching
1) Obtain aggregate sample provided by Architect.
2) Obtain materials most closely resemblIng sample for color, SIze,
and gradIent.
3) Pass matenals though sIeves to produce natural aggregates of
vanous sIzes reqUIred In mix.
4) Remix aggregates to proportions stated in "Grain Size
Distribution Report" attached.
5) Compare aggregate mIX back to control sample for color and
texture match. Use aggregates In test panels for final
companson.
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 04 100
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. Water:
a. Clean and Potable
6. AcceleratIng admIxtures not allowed. Conform to SectIOn 04 000 GENERAL.
04 150 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
GENERAL
1.
DIVISIOn 04 GENERAL applIes to thIS SectIOn.
04 160 honzontal ioint reInforCIng
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImited To -
1) Furnishing of materials for 12" Masonry Walls
Related Work Specified Elsewhere _
1) Installation specified In Section 04 200.
2) Steel ReinforCIng Bars specified In SectIon 03-210
3) Any reinforcing called for in Structural Plans and Structural
General Notes.
I
b.
I
END OF SECTION 04 150
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 04 - Masonr y
May 2002
O{~mpic Design WorksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
04 200 UNIT MASONRY
GENERAL
1.
DlVlslOn 04 GENERAL applIes to thIS SectIon.
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angelcs Carncglc Library
DIvIsIon 04 - Masom y
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImited To -
1) FurnIsh and install unit masonry Work IncludIng mortar and
masonry grout. Owner or ArchItect to provIde face bnck.
2) InstallatIOn of reinforcement steel.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) FurnishIng of masonry accessones specIfied In SectIon 04 150.
2) Flashing specified In Section 07 600.
3) Water Repellant coatIngs specified in SectIon 07 175.
b.
Clay Masonry Units (for non-exposed areas only):
a UnIts shall conform to ASTM C 216 and as follows:
b. SIze: 2 3/4"x 3 3/4"x 8"
c. Color. Carob or Red
2. ProvIde stretcher units where required to match..
3.
Use Type "0" mortar for all masonry above grade, as specIfied in SectIon 04
100.
4.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Mutual Materials
b. Equal as approved by ArchItect prior to biddIng. See SectIOn 01 630.
Cut masonry UnIts with motor driven saws. Allow units cut WIth water-cooled
saws to dry before placement unless wetting of UnIts is specIfied. Install cut UnIts
with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
2.
Wet bricks prIor to laying if the InItial rate of absorptIon exceeds 30g/30 sq. In.
per minute when tested per ASTM C 67.
3.
Construction tolerances: as follows
a. Variation from plumb. level and bUIlding lIne: Match stlye, pattern,
and character of existing flemIsh bond.
b. VarIation in mortar ioint thickness: Match widths of existIng masonry
bed and head joints.
4.
Layout repaIrs and patchs in advance for accurate spacing of bond patterns and
for accurate placement of sills, rowlocks, soldIers, etc.
5.
Bond pattern: FlemIsh to match eXIstIng.
6.
BUIlt-In work: As constructIon progresses, buIld In items specIfied under other
SectIOns of the SpecIfications. Fill In WIth solId masonry around buIlt-In Items.
Refer to Structural DrawIngs.
May 2002
ol;gmpic Design works} Inc. PS
I
7.
StrIke mortar Jomts flush to match eXIsting Jomts. Do not tool.
I
I
8
Refer to Structural and ArchItectural Drawmgs for remforcement, hardware and
detaIlmg of rem forced masonry and veneer masonry.
9.
Masonry Waste DIsposal: Remove masonry waste from SIte, includmg broken
masonry units, waste mortar, and excess or sOlI contammated sand.
I
END OF SECTION 04200
GENERAL
1.
I
I
04210 BRICK MASONRY VENEER
DIvIsIOn 04 GENERAL apphes to thIs SectIon.
2.
Scope:
a.
I
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) Rephcate Masonry-veneer Chnnneys above roof m BId
Alternate 2:
Related Work SpecIfied Elsewhere
1) Provide Wood Chase suitable for "B" gas-ventmg per DivisIon
06 - Rough Carpentry and Structural Details.
2) Provide Masonry Veneer Anchorage per Structural DetaIls.
b.
I
I
04 500 MASONRY CLEANING
GENERAL
1.
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvIsIon 04 . Masomy
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImited To-
1) Cleaning brick masonry dunng constructIon and prior to close-
out.
Related Work SpecIfied Elsewhere-
1) Water Proofing specIfied in SectIOn 07 175.
b.
Cleaner:
a. "Fabnkleen Masonry Cleaner Type R", as manufactured by Fabnkem
Chemicals International.
b. ProSoCo "Sure Klean 600" buffered acid detergent.
a. Equal as approved by Architect prior to biddmg. See SectIon 01 630.
I
I
In-Progress Cleaning:
a. Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brush to remove mortar
fins and smears.
b. Turn over scaffold planks at night so ram WIll not splash mortar from
dIrty planks onto wall surfaces.
c. Before washmg, remove any large partIcles of mortar wIth non-metalhc
scraper. Large mortar partIcles cannot be removed by water or cleaning
solutIOns alone.
I
I
I
May 2002
O[~mpjc Desjgn warks} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
2.
Fmal Cleanmg:
a. After mortar has thoroughly set and cured, remove mortar partIcles WIth
non-metallIc scraper, and clean as follows:
b. Do not exceed 250pSI at the wand for any pressure-washing devIce.
Use broad fan tIp only.
c. Thoroughly protect adjacent surfaces from contact WIth cleaners other
than ordinary water.
d. Wet wall surface prior to applIcatIOn of cleaner, remove cleaners
promptly by rmsmg thoroughly WIth clean water.
e. Clean brick by bucket and brush method as descnbed m BIA Tech note
#20 reVIsed, usmg specified cleaner.
f. When cleanmg solutIOn becomes dIrty, replace.
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 04 500
I
I
I
END OF DIVISION 04
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 04 - Masonry
May 2002
O{;9mpic Design Works} Inc. PS
I
~~r: bY: K-~Z3n;
3::30 598 2~27,
~ay-l -02 9:35AM; Page 1/3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
----
~~I<razan. & ASS 0 C I ATE S, INC.
G E 0 T ! C H N r c <l. L E.'i G I :i E c: R I N G . S ~ V I RON MEN TAl E N G T N" E ~ R T N ~
CON3;RUCTiO;\ TESTIl\"G &: INSPECTION d c.. . LJ
FAX TRANSMITTAL
r - (r- 0 d-
DATE:
TO:~~':]::)J (;.,lofl-E
3tf1I9f\/ eonf/ E-\j
/
From; -sEFF &0"'./ E f2.f
KRAZAN & ASSOCIA:ES, iNC.
207:4 STATE! Hv..fY 305 NE, SUITE 3C
POUlS80, \NA 98370 .
R E : i-m)/1); (, ~E- L:ro {<. f1(z-Y
Pop-T I1P{,ELE.s '
Number of pages includfng cover sheet:
Fax;
Phone:
()~) Lfl7 - ;)ff88
( )
Fax: (360) 598-2127
Phone: (360) 598-2126
MOS/LE ( )
kev E- fl.-r= 5 fA l "1 J - L.oo/tr $ ~k c; tu ~ H t:=::) 136 qJ-f .> If /J 0 .
CAli ~/ OlA~fhll'\-
o/p/
, Wlch Ten Oftjc~, St!rvinz The Western United Sc.:!ce3
~Oi I"' S'~ce '-1wy. JOS ~"E. SI.lIlC JC . Poulst:o. w~!:!tni(on 98J 70 . (J60) '93-2 (26. Fvc: (J6C) 598.2 :21
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
Se""':: 5 y: k"u zan;
100
90
a:::
w 60
Z
u:
!Z SO
W
()
ex:
W40
Cl.
% COBBLES
0.0
SIEVE
SIZE
0.375 in,
~
#8
#16
#30
#60
11100
#140
#200
360 598 (!l'!'/J
MaY-l -u~ ~:~(AM;
Particle Size Distribution Report
~ a ~
% GRAVEL
9.3
GRAIN SIZE - mm
% SAND
90.6
,
.Ii "S 1; -' 1;'
.. ",,-,-~Sll <1 ..
! : '1!1!,11: : ~~:! : ji'I",:' :i i:
, .! I" II i ' : I:!; i l" I I :1 !:
'I -~ -- -rr1: Ii, j:i i I ,.\ j ill': I I :: I
, 1,1 I I :i' II: ~\ 1 1 :111 :1 I,
80 --t- ~-:-lL; I' :II! II: II~I -ir! 1- -::I! 1---
. 'I I . I ,I ,'I, I
: ,;,; i ',I," J:'! . i'
70 '~~-! - ':JTlTi' - - -- -- "'T .! I'
i i: : l! ~I: i i 1\ :" II ~I I':
-t I I', I I ' " . , ,I': I 1"r.,;-1 -;, : o-
r I [ . , I , " 11 'I '
I I" . 'I' I' '" ", ,
' I ii"~:: ,:1 Lr il:I:I;"
'1' ' " '-,'-'- -'I: -l:i - ~ III'
I II: I: I' !, I: , :' 'I' I "IIi:!'
, I' I'" , , " . , I I "
I l I. I' ; I "I: Ill! ' , I t 'I :
, ~-I t - t' - . f " I , ,I
I: "~I: I'j: :' ':: : I' I V~'I:II ::
, ,":: ,j, . I '..: :', . !' .!
I: ,; I: I' i :;! 'i--:', u: :! : :
30 I 'II ,: 11 i: :: I': I,:,' ! Ii' ;- I r -: II' - -~ I :,',' ,
20 +--; --/1:'1' l, I:: ~: ,: : ::: r--~-+ {', : , , :1' : .! !'
I I i: I' ,I,', '111"1' I 'I' i' , 'U-I I
: : 11:1 ::: I: , i:: ; i 'i: ~. I : :f-: I i
10 ! I 1:/1 "I'" :,' r ---r-I--, '" i~-: :1-: , I
I \11:111!' . I: : I I:'; I I : i' I: 1\:'J' , I:
o ,II' i; I' Ii" ,,' , " .,.........." , I
500 100 1 1 0 1 -
PERCENT
FINER
100.0
90.7
72.5
53.2
36.7
10.5
2.9
0.4
0.1
SPEC." PASS?
.
PERCENT I (X-NO)
5011 Descrfption
MORTAR AGGREGATE AFTER ACID WASH
PL=
085= 3.69
030= 0.4&2
Cu= 6.26
USCS=
SAMPLE #: P3261
DA TE: 04.30.1002
(no s~lficaIion provided)
Sample No.: P3261
Location:
i !! ~
,I ' I'
: i:1 : i
1,1 ,I
, I :! II \
, I :1 i I
,'I!
:I! I
'I! I
:, ' I
U! I
: I! :
:; !1
, ' ! I I
: : I i
: I , I
, ::I! i
I!,
! l:
, !'
" ,:
% SILT
, II
i i I
,I'll
; i I
, i
, ,
: I i
1-L+ I
III I
I i III
1TT11 !
I , , '
i --- -ijHJ--
I 1: i i
! J'1
I I I
, , ! I
: !
j~ j :-1--
II!
i
,
'! I ! I
001
I
I
I
0.1
Atterbera Limits
U.. PI=
t'age ~/~
I ;
!
I
i
I
--
0001
Coefficients
060= 1.53 050= 1 03
015= 0.299 D10= 0.244
Cc= 0.62
Classification
AASHTO=
Remarks
Source of Sample: MORTAR AGGREGATE
Date: 04-30-2002
ElevJDepth:
KRAZAN & ASSOCIATES, INC.
Client: CITY OF PORT ANGELES
Project: CARNEGIE LIBRARY RETROfiT
Pro'ect No: 106-02027
Plate
':-t:IIL oy. "'dLlnj
360 598 2~27J
:~ay-1-02 9:39AMj
Page 3/3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION TEST DATA
Client: CITY OF PORT ANGELES
Project: CARNEGIE LIBRARY RETROFIT
Project Number: 106-02027
Sample D~ta
Source: MORTAR AGGREGATE
Sample No.: P3261
Elev. or Depth: Sample Length (in. / em. ) :
Location:
Description: MORTAR AGG~EGATE AFTER ACID ~ASH
Date: 04-30-2002 PL: LL: PI:
USCS Classification: AASHTO Classification:
Testinq Remarks: SAMPLE #: P3261
DATE: C4-30-2002
Mechanical Analysis Data
-----
Initial
Dry sample and tare- 171.00
Tare - 0.00
Dry sample weight = 171.00
Tare for cumulative weight retained= .00
Sieve Cumul. Wt. Percent
retained finer
0.00 100.0
15.90 90.7
47.10 72.5
80.00 53.2
l08.2C 36.7
153.10 10.5
166.00 2.9
"70.30 0.4
170.80 0.1
0.375
it 4
f 8
# 16
it 30
# 60
* 100
lj. 140
it 200
inch
Fractional Components
Gravel/Sand baaed on #4
Sand/Fines based on 1200
" COBBLES - % GRAVEL:: S'..>
" FINES I: 0.1
% SAND = 90.6
085= 3.69
030: 0.48
Cc= 0.6211
060= 1.53 050. 1.G3
015= 0.30 010= O.~4
Cu. 6.2553
I<RAZAN &. ASSOCIATES ( me. -
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 05 METALS
GENERAL
1.
General ConditIons and DIVISion Olapply to this DIvIsIOn.
2.
Scope'
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
I) Provide labor, matenals, and eqUipment necessary for
completIon of work mdlcated In Drawmgs or SpeCificatIOns.
Related Work SpeCified Elsewhere-
1) Refer to Structural General Notes.
b.
05100 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
GENERAL
1.
DiviSion 05 GENERAL applies to thiS Section.
2. Reference Standards:
a. Fabrication and ErectIOn-
1) AISC "SpecificatIOn for Structural Steel for BUlldmgs-
Allowable Stress Design and PlastIc Design", latest editIon,
shall serve as a mimmum standard. ErectIOn mcludes settmg,
ahgning, and bracmg as necessary.
b. Weldmg meet reqUirements of -
1) A WS D.l.l "Structural Weldmg Code - Steel Gas Welding",
latest apphcable editIOn.
2) A WS D.l.3 "Specifications for Welding Sheet Steel in
Structures", latest applicable edition.
3. Submittals:
a. Shop Drawmgs:
Shop drawmgs shall detaIl fabrication of structural steel components,
includmg connections, splices, holes, welds and bolts. Submit In
quadruplicate to Architect 21 days pnor to beginning fabncation.
PRODUCTS 1.
Structural Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars:
a. Meet requirements of ASTM A 36, carbon steel.
b. Refer to Drawmgs for other reqUirements.
2. Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubmg:
a. Meet reqUirements of ASTM A 500, Grade B.
3. Anchor Rods, Bolts and Nuts:
a. ASTM A 36
4. Non-high Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
a. ASTM A 307, Grade A.
5. High Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
a. ASTM 325.
1) Submit copies of factory tests reqUired by ASTM Standard to
Architect before erectIon begms.
2) Mamtam bolts on Job Site untIl lot numbers IdentIfied m test
submittals are venfied.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 05 - Metals
May 2002
ol~mpic Design worksJ Inc. PS
EXECUTION I.
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIvIsIon 05 - Metals
6.
7
8.
I
PrImer:
a. Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, non-asphaltIc, rust
inhIbItIng prImer.
I
I
Non-metallIc, ShrInkage-ResIstant Grout:
a. Pre-mIxed, ASTM C I I07, of consIstency sUItable for application.
I
I
Weld Connections.
a. Comply with A WS D I. I, applIcable type to meet current AISC
SpecIficatIOns for procedures, appearance and qualIty of welds, and
methods used In correcting welded work.
Structural Steel:
a. FabncatlOn & Manufacture:
I) Fabricate and assemble structural steel In shop to the greatest
extent possIble to maximIze controlled conditIOns.
I
I
2)
Fabricate accordIng to AISC speCIficatIons referenced In this
SectIon and in Shop Drawings.
I
3)
Comply with fabrication tolerances of AISC's "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural
steel.
I
b.
Pnming:
1) Shop prime steel, except for surfaces to be embedded In concrete
or mortar, surfaces to be field-welded, surfaces to be high-
strength WIth slip-cntical connections, and surfaces to receive
sprayed-on fireproofing.
I
I
2) Do not prime at temperatures below 45 deg F. Protect machine-
finished surfaces agamst corrosion.
'I
I
I
3) Clean field welds, gnnd senous abraSIOns, and apply field prime
touch-up.
c.
Shop and FIeld OualIty Control.
1) Owner WIll engage an Independent testIng and InspectIon agent
to perform shop and field inspectIons and tests and to prepare
test reports.
I
2) Contractor is to correct deficiencIes in Work or remove and
replace structural steel that inspectIons and test reports IndIcate
do not comply WIth specified requirements.
I
3)
AddItIonal testmg, at Contractor's expense, wIll be performed to
determIne complIance of corrected Work WIth specIfied
reqUIrements.
I
May 2002
O[~mpic Design WarksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
d.
I
I
I
I
I
I
05 120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
GENERAL
4)
High-strength bolted connections will be tested and mspected
according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts".
5)
In additIOn to visual mspectIon, welded connectIOns will be
mspected and tested accordmg to A WS D 1.1 procedures.
Erection:
1) Erect structural steel accurately and to elevations mdlcated and
accordmg to AISC specifications referenced in this Section.
2)
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's
"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"
3)
Clean concrete and masonry surfaces of bond-reducmg matenals
and roughen surfaces pnor to settmg base and bearing plates.
Clean bottom surface of base and beanng plates and set on
settmg nuts as required. TIghten anchor bolts and pack grout
solidly between bearing surfaces and plates.
4)
Field welds WIll comply with A WS D 1.1 for procedures,
appearance and qualIty of welds and methods used m correctmg
welded Work.
5)
Bolted Connection type shall snug-tightened, unless indIcated as
slIp-cntical, dIrect tensIoned, or shearlbearmg connectIons.
1.
Division 05 GENERAL and Section 05 100 GENERAL apply to thIS SectIOn.
I
I
I
I
05 121 beams & colUlnns
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImited To -
1) Furnish and install beams and columns as shown on Drawmgs.
PRODUCTS 1.
W, S, HP, C, or TEE shapes m honzontal or vertIcal apphcatIon, together WIth
angles, plates, etc, as shown on Drawmgs.
EXECUTION 1.
Conform to Drawmgs, Schedules, and Section 05 100 General.
I
I
05 124 tubular steel
GENERAL 1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Structural pipe and tubing shown on Drawings
I
PRODUCTS 1.
Unless shown differently on Drawmgs, Materials shall conform With the
followmg:
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISIon 05 - Metals
May 2002
O{~mpic Design Works} Inc. PS
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIvision 05 - Metals
May 2002
O[~mpic Design Works, Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Round Structural Pipe shall meet reqUirements of ASTM A 53-84a,
"Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, ZinC
Coated, Welded and Seamless", Type E or S, Grade B.
Nominal Pipe Size Wall Weight Schedule
NPS Thickness Class Number
3" 0.216" STD 40
4" 0.237" STD 40
5" 0.258" STD 40
6" 0.280" STD 40
b. Shaped Structural Tubing shall meet requirements of ASTM A 500-84,
"Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing m Rounds and Shapes", Grade B.
05 127 bolts & steel embedded in concrete or masonry
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To:
1) Anchors, plates, channels, angles, bolts, etc.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
1) InstallatIOn specIfied m SectIOn 06 100
b.
PRODUCTS 1.
As specIfied m SectIOn 05 100 General
2 Fabncate and install accordmg to approved details and instructions of SectIOn
fabricatmg work to be connected.
3. Threaded rod used as a substitute for anchor or holdown bolts must be provided
with a mIll certificate or equivalent proof of specified strength.
END OF SECTION 05100
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
GENERAL
1.
DlVlsIOn 05 GENERAL applies to this Section.
2. Form from matenals of type, SIze, thIckness, and shapes mdICated. Work to
dImensIOns indIcated or accepted on Shop Drawmgs, field venfied by fabncator,
usmg proven details of fabncatIon and support.
3. Shear, punch or drill metals cleanly and accurately. Remove sharp edges or
rough areas and ease exposed edges.
I
I
I
PRODUCTS
I
I
I
I
Comply wIth ANSI AI-U and provIde the following
a Side Rails Continuous Yz"x 2Yz" steel bars, spaced 1 8" apart,
Provide (2) @ 9' -0".
b Bar rungs :y."d steel bars, spaced 12" 0 c , Provide (6)
c FIt rungs m center of sIde rads, plug weld and gnnd smooth
d Support ladders at bottom, wall top plate level, and maxImum
4' -O"o.c with welded steel wall brackets designed to hold ladder rungs
away from wall by 5"clear. Verify wall clearance with Inspector
f Apply standard Fabncator's standard lead and chromate-free, non-
asphaltIc, rust mhlbltmg pnmer
05 520 HANDRAILS & GUARDAILS
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVIsion 05 .. Metals
Scope
a
Includes but Not LImIted To -
I) FurnIsh and Install Steel pIpe handrads at ex tenor Ramps In
Base BId.
2) FurnIsh and mstall Guardrad and Steel pIpe handrads at extenor
StaIrway, Balcony, and Landings per Detad m Base BId
2
Shop DraWings
a. SubmIt Shop DraWings In quadruphcate for ArchItects approval 2 I days
pnor to beglnmng fabncatlOn. See SectIOn 01 340
Extenor Steel PIPe HandraIls'
a 11/4" inside diameter black steel pipe, meeting requirements of ASTM A
53, "Standard SpecIfIcatIOn for PIpe, Steel, Black and Hot-DIpped.
Zmc-Coated Welded and Seamless"
b. Other SectIons as shown on DraWings
2.
Welded Wire Fabnc'
a SIze deSIgnatIOn 4x4-W5xW5
3
Post Settmg MastIC:
a "Por-Rok" by Hallemlte Manufactunng Co, Montvale, NJ
b "Burke Stone" by The Burke Company, San Mateo, CA
c SubstItutIOns allowed
4
Supply necessary wall and post brackets and mountmg hardware to provIde
secure mstallatlOn per DraWings.
5
FabncatlOn:
a. Extenor -
I) Cap pIpe ends, gnnd smooth welded JOints, and shop pnme See
SectIOn 05 100 General.
b. All seams and Jomts to be well sanded, and If reqUIred, have polyester
auto body filler apphed to achIeve proper finIshed product
May 2002
O[~Wlpic Design warks! Inc. PS
05 540 CASTINGS
GENERAL I.
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION I.
POM Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvIsion 05 - Metals
2.
2.
3.
4
I
Scope
a.
I
I
Includes but Not LimIted To -
1) Furnish Cast Iron Front Porch Candelabrum lo Bid Alternate 3
a) Cast one (I) each duplicate rephca Lamp Base, Stem
and Globe ReceIver from onglOal set prOVIded
b) Cast two (2) each Globe FInials per drawIngs
c) Powder coat or Shop Pnme pnor to leavlOg foundry
d) installatIOn and shlpplOg by General Contractor
I
I
Iron CastIngs
a. Cast Iron, meetIng reqUIrements of ASTM A 48-Class 30, or slmJ!ar to
sample matenal proVIded.
b FInIals to be of Identical matenal, and, as shown on DraWIngs
I
I
Recommended Iron Foundnes:
a Fremont FlOe Arts Foundry, Seattle, 206-632-4880
b Insh Foundry, Seattle, 206-623-7147
PreparatIOn and Shipment of EXlstlOg CastIng
a. General Contractor to receive onglOal castIng at Owners shop
b. General Contractor to stnp old finishes down to bare metal and prOVide
shop pnme finish per SpecIficatIOn below, pnor to shIpment to
foundry. ShlpplOg costs, IncludIng Insurance, IS to be borne by
General Contractor.
c. Pack or otherwIse prepare components for shipment so as to mInimIze
chance for potential damage.
I
I
I
I
CastlOg
a Receive onglOal castlOg from General Contractor RetalO
packaglOg/shIpplOg matenals for return shIpment.
b. Sand cast or otherwIse produce one (1) rephcatlOn base, stem and globe
receIver to match ongmal castIng receIved.
c. After castlOg, clean, grlOd, spot and fill-weld to achIeve surface
character match to onglOal castIng
d. Test components for fit and machlOe as necessary
I
I
FlOIshes
a Shop pnme cast Iron pnor to shIpment from foundry.
b Do not pnme at temperatures below 45 deg F Protect machIne-finIshed
surfaces agalOst corrosIOn.
I
I
ShIpment.
a. Package and shIp ongInal and replIcatIOn castlOgs to Contractor, F.O B
SIte
b General Contractor to pay shIppIng costs, IncludIng Insurance.
I
I
END OF SECTION 05 500
I
May 2002
O[~Wlric Desigl1 WarksJ Il1c. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
05700 ORNAMENTALMETAL
GENERAL
1.
DIvision 05 GENERAL applIes to this Section.
05 725
2. Form from matenals of type, SIze, thickness, and shapes mdIcated. Work to
dImensIOns mdICated or accepted on Shop Drawmgs, field venfied by fabricator,
usmg proven detaIls of fabncation and support.
ORNAMENT AL METAL CASTINGS
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LimIted To-
I) FurnIsh Cast Bronze Marquee Crestmg m Bid Alternate 5
a) Cast mne (9) identIcal crestmg modules per Sheet A-18.
b) Cast two (2) Identical comer crestmgs per Sheet A-18.
c) Cast two (2) umque crestmg end caps (simIlar but
reversed) per Sheet A-18.
r
Note' Illustration shows both Copper Marquee Cladding and Bronze Cresting above. See Drawings
Architect can provide higher resolution photos for replication
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIvIsIOn 05 - Metals
Bronze Castings:
a. Cast Bronze, meeting requirements of Alloy 836 or 855, or sImIlar, if
containmg a nominal composition of 82% copper, 2.5% tin, 2.5% lead,
and 13% zmc. cladding in Spec 05-730,
b. Alternate to Alloy 836 or 855 allowed only with approval of ArchItect
c. Alternate alloy or method must achieve color match with specified
copper
2.
Recommended Bronze Foundries:
a. Bronze Works, Kevin Keating, 360-427-2857 or 253-396-0396
b. Running Dog Foundry, Steve Messelear, 360-732-4522
Modeling:
a. Model all objects In clay, wood or otherwIse create pOSItive models
representatIve of Artist's interpretation of Architect's drawings. Test fit
indIvidual models together to view overall modular effect. Contact
May 2002
O[~mpic Design W orksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
ArchItect for shop VISIt and receIve approval of models pnor to
proceedIng.
Lost Wax CastIng'
a Produce mold In plaster, rubber, or matenal-of-chOlce from approved
models
b Create wax rephcas
1) For flat modular and end castIngs pour wax off early to create
wall thickness of around 11 gauge (1/8").
2) For comer castIng, create sImIlar wall thIckness but remove wall
opposIte face
c Add sprue and vent system
d Create castIng vessel, bum out wax and pour bronze Break or otherwIse
remove vessel.
FInIshes and InstallatIOn'
a Remove sprue and vent system, gnnd, weld and otherwIse dress and
pohsh face to achleveM22 buffed finIsh on front and MIO mIll finIsh on
back
b. Apply sulfur solutIOn to achIeve shop petIna finIsh. Color to match aged
copper alloy specIfied In Spec 05-730 PRODUCTS 2., below
c. InstallatIOn IS to be by foundry personnel after InstallatIOn of copper
marquee cladding.
2
3
4.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Shop and FIeld Quahty Control:
a. ArchItect wIll VISIt foundry for approval of models pnor to first mold
creatIOn
b. General Contractor shall prOVIde SIte access, scaffoldIng, and otherwIse
assIst In InstallatIOn.
05 730 ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL
GENERAL
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 05 - Metals
Scope
a.
I
I
a)
I
I
I
Includes but Not LImIted To-
I) Create PedIment and PIlaster Scrolled-caps wIth CrestIng Leaf
sets In Bid Alternate 4:
ProvIde one (I) each zInc/steel sheet-metal PedIment to
DraWIngs and SpeCIficatIons provIded to Include the
folloWIng stamped ZInC components:
1. Four (4) each 5"x5" stamped daffodil flowers
11 6" high lettering" 1918 CARNEGIE LIBRARY"
11l One (1) oval ShIeld
IV. Two (2) flankIng scroll and WIng motIfs
PrOVIde four (4) each stamped ZInC PIlaster Scrolled-Cap
assembhes to DraWIngs and SpecIficatIOns prOVIded
PrOVIde four (4) each stamped ZInC CrestIng Leaf sets
for Scrolled Caps to DraWIngs and SpecIficatIOns
provIded
Include DIVISIOn 09 FInIshes for these ArchItectural
Sheet Metals
Include Labor and EqUIpment necessary for InstallatIon
May 2002
O[;9mpic Design warks/ Inc. PS
I
b)
I
c)
I
I
I
d)
e)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Note: Historic photo showing original front entry Pediment, Pilaster Caps, and Cresting Leaf Sets.
See also Drawings
Note: Architect can provide higher resolution photos for replication
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
, ,
Note: Photo shows existing north Pediment for the purposes of indicating depth and level of detail for
stamped zinc parts for new front entry Pediment to be provided by this Specification. See also Drawings
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIvIsIOn 05 - Metals
May 2002
O[~mpic Design worksJ Inc. PS
2) Create Copper Marquee Cladding In Bid Alternate 5:
a) ProVIde approxImately 20 lmeal feet of custom copper
claddmg per Drawings and SpecIficatIOns provIded.
b) Include Labor and EqUlpment necessary for installation.
c) Include shIpping to Site.
Note: Illustration shows both Copper Marquee Cladding and Bronze Cresting above. See Drawings
Architect can provide higher resolution photos for replication
3)
Replicate Conductor Heads, Caps and Downspout Brackets in
Bid Alternate 6:
a) Rephcate four (4) Conductor Heads and Caps to match
existing in-hand.
b) Rephcate five (5) Downspout Brackets to match existmg
m-hand.
c) Repair two (2) Downspout Brackets, provided.
d) Include shippmg to and from shop,
e) Include Labor and Equipment necessary for installatIOn.
Port Angeles Camegle Llbrary
D1VlSlOn 05 - Metals
May 2002
o[~mpic Design works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit Shop Drawings in quadruplicate for ArchItects approval 28 days
prior to beginnIng fabricatIOn. See Section 01 340.
b. Shop drawings to convey Artist's interpretation of Architect's drawings
and historical photos.
c. Do not begin fabrication prior to Architect's written approval.
PRODUCTS 1.
Zinc coated sheet Steel Pediment:
a. 24 gauge zInc-galvanized sheet Steel meeting requirements of
ASTM-A653, or similar. Sample material can be proVIded.
b. Lead Solder
1) OrdInary 40/60 Alloy tIn/lead meter-bar Solder conformmg to
ASTM-B32-89, 50/50 or 60/40 also acceptable.
2) Use extreme caution to protect workers and their envIronment m
the use of this product. Follow all MSDS recommendations
carefully.
c. Two-part TDI/MDI isocyanate expandIng poly foam
1) Use extreme caution to protect workers and their environment in
the use ofthis product. Follow all MSDS recommendations
carefully.
2. Die-stamped Zinc ornamental parts
a. 99.9% pure sheet Zinc generally conformIng to ASTM B69
b. Thickness/gauge: 020" thickness
c. Allow up to 180 days lead-time for custom stamped parts
3. Copper Marquee Cladding:
a. 26 gauge Copper sheet meeting requirements of Alloy 280 (Muntz
metal).
1) Alloy 280 shall meet reqUIrements of Federal Spec QQ-B-613
b. Lead Solder
1) Ordinary 40/60 Alloy tin/lead meter-bar Solder conforming to
ASTM-B32-89, 50/50 or 60/40 also acceptable.
2) Use extreme caution to protect workers and their environment In
the use of this product. Follow all MSDS recommendations
carefully.
c. Two-part TDI/MDI isocyanate expanding poly foam
1) Use extreme cautIOn to protect workers and theIr environment In
the use of this product. Follow all MSDS recommendations
carefully.
4. Conductor Heads. Caps and Downspout Brackets:
a. 26 gauge zinc-galvanized sheet Steel meetIng reqUIrements of
ASTM-A653, or match material of brackets submItted for repaIr.
b. Lead Solder
1) Ordinary 40/60 Alloy tIn/lead meter-bar Solder conforming to
ASTM-B32-89, 50/50 or 60/40 also acceptable.
2) Use extreme caution to protect workers and their environment in
the use of this product. Follow all MSDS recommendations
carefully.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DiVISion 05 - Metals
May 2002
o{~mpjc Design works, Inc. PS
EXECUTION 1.
5.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Suggested resources:
a. Matenals:
1) ZInC coated sheet Steel:
Hubbell Steel, KeVIn Cox, Chicago, IL, 800-231-6033
2) Sheet ZInC
Alltnsta ZInC, BIll Brown, Greenvllle, TN, 800-251-7506
3) Lead Solder
Mayco Industries, Ed Langan, GranIte CIty, IL, 800-851-3300,
ext6110
b. Stamped Parts:
1) W.F. Norman Corp, Mark QUltnO, Nevada, MO,
phone' 800-641-4038, fax: 417-667-2708
c. Assembly:
1) Schmitt's Sheet Metal, Dean Schmitt, Port Angeles, WA,
phone: 360-457-6452, fax' 360-457-0883
2) Valley Metal & HeatIng, Gary TIn Man Baxter, Baker City, OR,
phone: 541-523-3402, fax: 541-523-1045
ZInC coated sheet Steel Pediment:
a. Provide Pediment base and cornice from specified matenal, brake metal
as detailed on DraWIngs.
b. Apply die-stamped decoratIve parts with specified solder
c. FIll hollow back with 2-part foam and strike off flush
d. MInimize the use of exposed fasteners.
e. Include InstallatIon In Bid Alternate #4.
2.
Ole-stamped ZInC ornamental parts
a. Supply die-stamped ZInC parts and lettenng for Pediment assembly.
b. Standard parts or Custom Work
I) If specific part number IS Indicated below, then supply that part
2) If"similar to", then assume custom work will be required.
c. Part Numbers:
I) Scrolled Cap Assembly
a) Side plates; WF Norman #162
b) Bracket Roll; Similar to #162, but 12" wide
2) Crestmg Leaf Sets
a) Similar to WF Norman #440, but 6Y2"wide x 8"high
d. Letters
I) Block type letters made from flat sheet stencIls hand-soldered to
ZInC Strip edgmg.
2) StenCils provided by Architect for fabncatIon, see photo for bid.
e Oval Shield, scroll and WIng motIfs, and daffodils, see photo for bid.
I) Assume custom fabncatlOn unless precise match can be found In
complete mventory.
f. Include supply and/or pre-assembly costs m Bid Alternate #4.
3. Copper Marquee Claddmg:
a. Provide Marquee claddmg from specified material, brake metal as
detaIled on Drawmgs.
b. Cut triangular openIngs for rehefparts. Apply rehefparts from behind
With specified solder.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 05 - Metals
May 2002
O[;9mpic Design Worksl Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c. Fill hollow back wIth 2-part foam and strIke off flush wIth bottom
flange, leaVIng top flange available for attachment.
d. Form mItered comers, use of copper nvets allowed. No pop rivets.
e. Include installation In Bid Alternate #5.
4. Conductor Heads, Caps and Downspout Brackets:
a. 26 gauge zinc-galvamzed sheet Steel meetIng reqUlrements of
ASTM-A653, or match material of brackets submItted for repair.
b. Lead Solder
1) Ordinary 40/60 Alloy tin/lead meter-bar Solder conforming to
ASTM-B32-89, 50/50 or 60/40 also acceptable.
c. Brackets made from flat sheet stencils hand-soldered to
zinc strIp edgIng. Refer to brackets submitted for repair.
d. Include Installatton in Bid Alternate #6.
END OF SECTION 05 700
05 900 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
GENERAL
1.
Division 05 GENERAL applies to this Section.
05 980
steel pipe downspouts
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnish one (l)steel pipe downspout and welded support
brackets at Tower
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Installation specified in Section 07 637.
b.
PRODUCTS 1.
3" Standard Black Pipe, as shown on Drawings, meetIng reqUlrements of ASTM
A 53, "Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-dipped, Zinc-coated
Welded and Seamless"
2. See Drawings for specific Details.
05 993 beam connectIOns
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnish beam connections that are to be welded to metal or
embedded in masonry or concrete.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Installation specified in Section 06 100.
b.
PRODUCTS 1.
See Drawings for specific Details.
END OF SECTION 05 990
END OF DIVISION 05
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIviSIOn 05 - Metals
May 2002
ol~mpic Design works} I J1C. PS
I
DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS
I
GENERAL
1.
General Conditions and Division 01 apply to thIS DIVISion.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISIon 06 - Wood & PlastICS
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) Furnish labor, matenals, and equipment necessary for
construction of wood framing and fimsh carpentry as descnbed
in Drawings and SpecIfications.
2) Perform general labor masonry restoratIon operatIons normally
specified under DiviSIOn 04, here Specified in DIviSIOn 06-050.
3) Perform finish carpentry on wood Window and Door frames
normally specified under DiVIsion 08, here SpecIfied m DIvision
06-200.
b.
Related Work SpecIfied Elsewhere-
1) Refer to Structural General Notes on Drawings.
3.
Grading:
a. Lumber -
1) In accordance with PS 20-70, ANSI A 199.1-1974, and National
Gradmg Rules for softwood dimension lumber and beanng
grade stamp ofWWPA, SPIB, or other association recognized
by the American Lumber Standards CommIttee
b. Plywood -
1) APA Performance Rated units are specified. Gradmg shall be
in accordance with PS 1-83/ ANSI A 199 .1. Every sheet shall
bear appropriate APA grade stamp.
4.
Grade Marking:
a. Identify species of lumber, plywood, and structural glu-1am lumber by
grade mark or CertIficate of Inspection issued by approved lumber
gradmg or mspection bureau or agency listed above.
b. For exposed lumber apply grade stamps to ends or back of each piece, or
omIt grade stamps entirely and Issue certificate of grade compliance
from mspectIon agency in lieu of grade stamp.
5.
Seasomng:
a. Lumber 2 inches or less in nominal thickness shall not exceed 19% in
moisture content at time of fabrication and installation and be stamped
liS-DRY", "K-D", or "MC15".
b. Plywood shall not exceed 18% moisture content when fabncated nor
more than 19% when installed.
6. Lumber shall be S4S unless noted otherwise.
7. Product Delivery. Storage. & Handling:
a. Protect lumber and plywood and keep under cover in transit and at job
SIte.
b. Do not dehver material unduly long before it IS required.
c. Store on level racks and keep free of ground to avoid warping. Stack to
msure proper ventilatIOn and drainage.
May 2002
Ol~mpic Desi9l1 works, Inc. PS
I
8.
I
I
I
ExecutIOn:
a. Frame, anchor, tIe, and brace members or parts to develop strength and
ngidIty necessary for purposes for which they are used.
b. Preparation, fabricatIOn, and installatIon of wood members as well as
glues and mechanical devices for fastening them shall conform to good
engmeering practices.
06 050 FASTENERS & SUPPORTS
GENERAL
1.
I
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
2.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvIsion 06 - Wood & Plastics
DIvisIOn 06 GENERAL applies to thIS SectIon.
2.
Scope:
a.
I
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) FurnISh and Install per manufacturers recommendations.
a) Framing Connectors
b) Construction Mastics
c) Rough hardware not specified in other SectIOns.
2) Furnish and Install Retrofit masonry Anchorage and Multi-
wythe Wall Ties
a) Diaphragm Tie-rods and Rosette Anchorage per
Structural Drawings
b) All multi-wythe brick is to be stabIhzed by means of an
8mm Helifix 304 stainless steel remedial wall tIe by
Helifix -North America.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere _
1) Bolts embedded in concrete or masonry.
2) Miscellaneous metal specified in Section 05550.
I
I
I
I
b.
I
Bolts. Nails. Adhesives. Steel Joist Hangers. ExpanSIOn
Bolts:
a. Standard type and make for Job requirements.
I
2.
ConstructIon Mastics:
a. Meet requirements of Amencan Plywood AssociatIOn SpeCIfication
AFG-Ol and be Phenol Resorcmol type when used on pressure treated
wood products.
I
I
3.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Hangers, Framing Connectors, and Masonry Anchorage _
1) SImpson Strong-TIe Co., San Leandro, CA
2) Equal as approved by Architect
b. Multi-wythe Wall Tie and Installation Accessones:
1) Helifix - North America Corporation, 905-761-0042,
www.helifix.com
2) No Substitutions Allowed.
I
I
Bolts. Nalls. Adhesives. Steel Joist Hangers. ExpansIOn Bolts:
a. Install as instructed, required, and accordmg to best practIce.
I
Retrofit masonry anchorage:
I
May 2002
O{~mpic Design works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Refer to Structural General Notes.
3. MultI-wythe Wall Ties:
a. Install 8 mm Hehfix stam1ess steel ties into the exterior masonry using a
"dry-fix" technique at a spacing of 24"0.c. each way, and denser spacing
at masonry window columns, per the following procedure:
b. A 6.5 mm entry hole shall be dnlled through extenor brick and
continuously dnlled through second and third bnck wythes of masonry
to a depth specified by Structural Detail. Drill IS by hIgh speed rotary
percussion dnll(3 jaw chuck type).
c. Site testing WIll be made to venfY entry hole size and necessary
adjustments made at that tIme.
d. The Helifix Tie shall be driven mto positIon and recessed by means of a
Helifix "Dryfix" setting tool mounted on a electric hammer drill
(S.D.S.type).
e. Dryfix support tool may be required for longer bores into denser brick.
f. Patch all penetrations to match existing material as approved by
Architect.
END OF SECTION 06 050
06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
GENERAL
1.
DIvision 06 GENERAL applies to this Section.
2.
Scope:
a.
b.
Includes but Not LimIted To-
1) Furnish and Install -
a) Wood Framing 06110.
b) Sheathing 06115.
c) Miscellaneous Framing 06 125.
d) Pre-fabricated Structural Woods 06 170.
2) Work Installed But Furnished By Others-
a) Metal Fabncations not noted otherwIse
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
1) Furnishing of Metal Fabrications speCified in Section 05500.
2) Building paper specified in SectIon 07 150.
3. Reference Standards:
a. Uniform Building Code, latest edition
1) Standards listed within UBC are to be considered minimum
standards and are often exceeded by thIS Contract Work.
PRODUCTS I.
Dimension Lumber:
a. Bearing Walls & Shear Walls-
1) Douglas Fir #2 or btr.
2) Douglas Fir # I or btr. for studs over 16'-0"
b. Interior Non-Bearing 2x4 or 2x6 Partitions (other than shear walls)
Douglas Fir (WWP A), Std or Better
c. Dimension lumber shall be clearly grade marked.
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISion 06 - Wood & PlastICS
May 2002
Ol~mpic Desl{1l1 Works, Inc. PS
2. Boards: (IncludIng fumng and bridging)
a. Adequate for intended use.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Posts, Beams & TImbers:
a. 5" x 5" & larger - #1 or better mimmum, Douglas FIr.
06110 WOODFRAMING
06 111
floor fi'aming
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
06 112 wall framing
PRODUCTS 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
1) Plywood web joists at MeetIng Room floor.
2) Dimensional Lumber framing at Entry StaIr Landing
Wood:
a. As indicated on Drawings.
b. DF #2 & better for dimensional framing matenals
2. Nalls:
a. 16d box or common.
Floor Joist Erection:
a. Locate 16"0.c. unless indicated otherwise.
b. MInimum 3 inch bearing on sleepers.
c. Coordinate layout with Mechanical Sheet M-02 for under-floor
ductwork.
Wood:
a. Conform with Section 06 100 General except as specIfied below.
b. Pressure Treated Wood - See SectIon 06300.
c. Posts & Beams -
1) #1 Douglas Fir or better.
2. Bolts:
a. Meet requirements of ASTM A 307, "SpecIfications for Carbon Steel
Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners", size as indicated below unless
Drawings show otherwIse.
3. Nails:
a. Box or Common.
EXECUTION 1.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVision 06 - Wood & PlastICS
Walls:
a.
Openings -
1) Stud (frimmer wIth Double studs at holdowns.
Comers & Partition Intersections-
1) Triple studs or framed L.
Top Plates In Bearing Partitions _
1) Doubled and lapped. Stagger joints at least 4 feet.
Headers -
1) See Structural Plans and DetaIl 15-S41.
b.
c.
d.
May 2002
O[~mpic Desi[p1 Works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e. Ends Of Stud Wall to Remforced Masonry-
1) Connect Double stud with W' anchor or expansion bolts
maximum 48"0.c. to Masonry wall.
f. FIrestops -
1) Spaces m wall over 10 feet high, at ceiling and floor levels, and
staIrs.
g. Stud Spacing -
1) 16"0.c.
2. Wood m Contact with Concrete or Masonry:
a. Use pressure treated wood as specified 06300.
b. Set true and level to provide full bearing. Use mortar for leveling if
leveling is required. See Section 04 100.
c. Bolt sill to concrete as follows unless otherwise noted on Drawmgs.
Minimum embedment of 7 inches.
1) Exterior walls and bearing walls -
a) 5/8"xI2" bolt, 32 inches o.c.
2) Interior non-bearing partitions -
a) 1/2"xlO" bolt, 4 feet o.c. or powder actuated fasteners at
24" o.c., Hilti or equal.
3. Posts & Beams:
a. Frame wood columns and posts to true end bearings.
b. Extend posts or columns down to supports of such design as to hold
them securely m position.
c. Securely fasten column at top to beam or girder.
d. Beams & Girders -
1) Stagger individual members of each beam or girder so over any
one support, no more than halfthe members will have a joint.
In all cases, however, joints shall occur over supports.
2) Stagger-nail built-up members 9"0.c. or bolt, if shown on
Drawings. Set with crown edge up with full bearing at ends and
intermediate supports.
3) Wood shims are not acceptable under ends.
4) Do not notch without permission of the Architect.
4. Nail As Follows:
a. Stud to plate - End nail, two I6d.
b. Stud to plate - Toe naIl, three I6d or four 8d.
c. Top plates - Spiked together, 2-16d, 24"0.c.
d. Top plates - Laps and intersections, two I6d.
e. Comer studs and angles - I6d, 24 inches o.c.
06 113 roof & ceiling framing
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LimIted To-
1) Roof Deck and ceiling joists.
2) Roof Rafters.
3) Ledger, wall, and valley plates.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DivIsIOn 06 - Wood & PlastIcs
May 2002
Ol;gmpic Design W orksJ Inc. PS
PRODUCTS
EXECUTION 1.
06 115 SHEATHING
GENERAL
Wood:
a. Conform with Sectlon 06 100 General.
b. Note specialty lumbers m Tower roof frammg. Refer to Drawmgs
especIally BUIldmg Sections and DetaIls.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2 Nalls
a. l6d box or common, Smkers O.K.
b. Use Manufacturer's recommendatIon for fasteners on frammg anchors.
Place rafters or JOIsts wIth crown sIde up at 16 inches o.c. unless otherwIse
mdlcated m Drawmgs or dIrected by the ArchItect.
2.
Block and bndge as necessary and as shown. See SectIOns 06 126 and 127
1.
Products:
a. ThIS specification is wntten for AP A Performance Rated Plywood.
Wafer-board, Composite board, and Onented Strand Board (but not
Structural Particleboard) are accepted as equals proVIdIng specIfied span
ratIngs are met, subject to prior approval by Architect.
1) In all cases, thickness shown IS mInimum regardless of span
ratmg. Matenal used for same purpose shall be of same
thIckness.
General Use SheathIng
1) Exposure 1.
b.
3/8 Inch
15/32 Inch
1/2 inch
19/32 inch
5/8 Inch
23/32 inch
3/4 Inch
24/0
32/16
32/16
40/20
40/20
48/24
48/24
c.
Nails -
1)
2)
Up to 19/32" panel - 8d box or common.
19/32" and thIcker panel - 10d box or common.
2. ExecutIOn:
a. NaIl heads shall be flush WIth, but not penetrate, plywood surface
b Observe and follow panel edge and SIde spacIng reqUIrements shown on
panel faces.
06 116 plywood wall sheathIng
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISion 06 - Wood & PlastICS
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LimIted To -
1) Tower sheathing
2) Chair storage room
Plywood:
a. 15/32 inch thick mInImUm, complYIng WIth table above.
May 2002
O{~mric Design worksJ Inc. PS
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
2 Nalls:
a.
As specified m 06 115 General.
Panel edges shall bear on frammg members and butt along theIr centerhnes.
Back block panel edges which do not bear on framing members with 2" nominal
frammg.
2.
Place naIls not less than 3/8 mch m from edge and 6 mches o.c. along
mtermedIate supports and along panel edge unless shown otherwise on drawmgs.
Use 8d box naIls.
3.
Refer to Shear Walls on Drawmgs for specIal reqUIrements.
4.
Stagger panel end jomts.
5.
Follow spacmg reqUIrements recommended by Manufacturer.
06 117 plywood roof and ceiling sheathing
I
GENERAL
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a
Includes but Not LImIted To -
I) DIaphragm Sheathmg at all roofs
2) DIaphragm Sheathmg throughout downstaIrS ceIlmgs
3) Other roof deckmg plywood per Structural Drawmgs
Plywood:
a. Sheathmg vanes per apphcation. See Structural Drawings
b. 3/4 inch thICk mmlmum per Structural for over-wood deckmg at all
eXlstmg roof construction and throughout downstaIrS ceIlmg.
2.
NaIls:
a. As specIfied m 06 115 GENERAL.
Placmg:
a. Lay face gram at nght angles to supports.
b. Stagger panel end joints 48".
2
NaIlmg: (Unless noted otherwIse on Drawmgs.)
a Place naIls at least 3/8 mch m from edge.
b NaIl 6 mches o.c. along supported edges.
c. NaIl 12 mches o.c. on mtermedlate supports.
d. NaIl 4 mches o.c. at dIaphragm boundary.
3.
Protect sheathing from excess mOIsture untIl roofing IS mstalled.
I
06 118 plywood floor sheathmg
GENERAL
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 06 - Wood & Plastics
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
I) Sub-floormg at Meetmg Room
May 2002
Ol:gmpic Design works, Inc. PS
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
2) Sub-flooring at Entry Landing
3) Platform above Elevator Equipment Room
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Subflooring:
a. Plywood - 23/32 inch thick minimum, AP A rated Sturd-I-Floor panels
with fully sanded face at locatIons mdicated to receIve glue down
flooring.
2.
Nalls:
a.
b.
Subflooring - As specified in 06 115 General.
Underlayment - 8d Galvanized.
Subflooring:
a. Apply bead of glue to structural supports and apply plywood at nght
angles to supports.
b. Nail panel edges at 6 inches o.c. and along intermediate bearing at 10
inches o.c. with 8d nails.
06 125 WOOD DECKING
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImited To-
1) Roof Decking at Elevator Tower (exposed to Soffit)
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
Roof Decking:
a. Rough-sawn full 1" x random width planks as shown on Drawings.
b. Species: Douglas Fir or Cedar
c. Grade: Appearance
d. Nails: l6d Galvanized Box
Lay-up to be Type ill (combination two-span and continuous)
2.
Spike Decking to P.T. Rafters below with (2) nails per plank at each rafter
3.
Apply plywood diaphragm layer.
06 129 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImited To -
1) Solid blocking as necessary or detaIled.
2) Installation of flat blocking at intenor downstairs partitions at all
diaphragm panel edges, parallel and perpendicular to floor joists.
3) Backing (nailers) for attaching moldings, trim, base, chair rails,
hardware, equipment, accessories, or plumbing.
4) FurnISh and install furring where required.
PRODUCTS L
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVIsion 06 - Wood & PlastICS
Solid Blocking:
a. Conform with Table in Section 06 100 General except for Shear Nailing.
May 2002
Of~mpic Design works, Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
b.
Blockmg shall be full heIght to the members bemg blocked and drIlled
for ventIlatIOn when and as shown on Drawmgs.
Refer to Structural Drawmgs and General Notes
c.
2.
Flat Blockmg:
a. 2x material in suitable widths to provide 2" overlap to plywood edges
while spannmg over top plates of eXlstmg walls.
b. Refer also to Structural Drawmgs
3.
Wood Furnng:
a. DImenSIOns as shown on Drawmgs.
b. Grade: UtIhty or better.
c. Nalls to be SIze and type to fit substrate and secure furrmg firmly.
Sohd Blockmg:
a. Provide between joists per Structural and/or per Manufacturer's
recommendatIOn, whIchever IS more StrICt.
b. Nail each end with two 8d naIls, min.
c. ProvIde continuous hOrIzontal blockmg row at mId-heIght of walls or
partItIons over 8 feet hIgh, using 2-mch-thick members of same WIdth as
wall or partItIOn studs.
2.
Flat Blockmg.
a. Install flat dIaphragm blockIng by draWIng [down] to top plate WIth three
3" grabber screws per 14Y2" block or eqUivalent length on parallel joists.
b. Attach panel edges to flat blocking With 8d nails @ 6" o.C.
3.
BackIng'
a ProVIde mIscellaneous blockIng and framIng as shown and as reqUIred
for support of handraIls, facmg materIals, fixtures, speCIalty Items, and
trIm.
END OF SECTION 06 100
06170 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD
I
I
GENERAL
1.
DIVISIOn 06 GENERAL apphes to thIS SectIOn
06 198 lamInated veneer lumber (L VL)
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted Ta-
1) FurnIshmg L VL products for frammg
Related Work SpeCIfied Elsewhere-
1) Installation of 1 %"x 15" PSL sistered-Jolsts at MeetIng Room
CeIhng
2) Section 06 190 GENERAL apphes to thIS SectIon.
b.
2. CoordmatIOn:
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISIOn 06 - Wood & PlastICS
I
May 2002
Ol~mric Design works! Inc PS
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
a. Coordinate duct, pipe and ventmg holes required by other divisions.
Provide additional members as required for accommodation of other
trades.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MaterIals:
a. L VL wood beams-
1) Approved Manufacturers:
a. Products specIfied as M=L or PSL shall conform to the
performance criterIa of L VL or PSL products as
manufactured by TrusJoist as MICRO=LAM and
P ARALLAM.
b. Substitutes are acceptable provided they have the same
structural value subject to approval by the ArchItect
prIor to bIdding. See Section 01 630.
2.
AccessorIes:
a. Fasteners-
1) Galvanized steel, type to suit application.
Install work in accordance with Manufactures instructIons and Industry ErectIon
Safety Practices.
2.
Adequately support and brace work untIl tied into buildmg structure to msure
agamst collapse due to wind or other forces.
END OF SECTION 06 170
06 200 FINISH CARPENTRY
GENERAL
1.
DlVlslOn 06 GENERAL applies to thIS Section.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DlVlSlOn 06 - Wood & PlastICS
2.
Scope'
a.
Includes but Not Limited To installation of following items unless
arranged for otherwIse-
1) ArchItectural Woodwork specified in 06 400.
2) Wood doors specified in Division 08.
3) Wmdow Sashes and Window Framing specified m DiVIsion 08.
4) Hollow Metal Frame specified m Division 08.
5) FInIsh Hardware speCIfied in Division 08
6) Building Specialties specified m Division 10.
7) Miscellaneous trim and moldmgs 06 205.
8) Custom Architectural Casework 06 410
9) Closet and Storage Shelving 06 430.
10) Window Framing specified m 06 450.
11 ) Wood siding 07-462
12) Exterior wood faSCIa, barges and soffits 07-465
3. Execution:
a. Work shall be made m accordance WIth measurements taken on the Job.
b. Scribe, miter, and join accurately and neatly.
c. Back prime all Work to be installed agamst concrete or masonry.
May 2002
O{~mpic Design Works, Inc. PS
I
I
06 210 installation of doors & metal frames
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Storing and installIng of wood and metal doors.
Related Work SpecIfied Elsewhere -
1) FurnIshmg of doors and metal frames specified in DIvisIOn 08.
2) FID1shmg of doors specIfied m SectIon 09 900.
b.
2. Product Storage & Handling:
a. Wood Doors -
1) Do not have doors delivered to bUIlding Site until after plaster,
cement, and tapmg compound are dry. If doors are to be stored
at jobsite for more than one week, seal top and bottom edges.
2) Store upright on a level surface in a dry, well-ventilated
building. Cover to keep clean but allow aIr cIrculation.
3) Handle with clean gloves and do not drag doors across one
another or across other surfaces.
4) Do not subject doors to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidIty or
sudden changes therein. Condition doors to average prevailing
humidity of locality before hangmg.
Wood Doors:
a. Install with 3/16" clearance between door and frame. Form a square
frame with jambs and stops.
b. Install door according to Manufacturer recommendations. When
finished, doors shall not bind, stick, or be mounted so as to cause future
hardware difficulties.
c. Do not impair utility or structural strength of door in fittmg of door,
applying hardware, or cutting and altering door louvers, panels, or other
special details.
d. Read Hardware Manufacturer's instructions pnor to mountmg hardware
and follow as closely as possible.
e. Use hardware templates furnished by Manufacturer when mounting
hardware.
f. Set hinges flush with edge surface. Be sure that hinges are set m a
straight line to prevent dIstortion. Use three hinges per door on doors 7
feet m height or less and four hinges per door on doors over 7 feet m
height.
g. Mount door latches m top of strike plate openmg so when door later
settles, latch WIll not bind.
2. Metal Frames:
a. Install per manufacturers instructions.
06212
hardware installation
GENERAL
I
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISIOn 06 - Wood & PlastICS
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Installation of finish hardware.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Hardware speCIfied in Section 08 700.
b.
May 2002
Ol~mpic Design works} Inc. PS
EXECUTION I.
06 220 millworJ-;
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISion 06 - Wood & PlastIcs
I
PreparatIOn
a ProvIde solid block1Og for all wall stops and bumpers.
b Fasteners: Check all condItIons and use fasten10g devIces as needed to
secure or anchor all hardware as per manufacturer's publIshed templates
Self-tapp1Og sheet metal screws are not acceptable All closures and exit
devIces on wood doors shall be thru-bolted. The General Contractor
shall be responstble for dnllIng wood or metal wIth the recommended
hole sizes.
I
I
I
2
InstallatIOn:
a. The General Contractor shall be responSIble for proper 1OstallatlOn and
operatIOn of hardware 10 locatIOns specified. Door closures shall be
10stalled and adjusted to close and latch the door WIthout slamm10g
b. The Contractor shall protect exposed hardware surfaces dunng the
constructIon penod from damage to products and finIshes.
c. Mount1Og HeIghts: Mount UnIts at heIghts recommended 10
"Recommended LocatIOns for Builders Hardware for BHMA" except as
otherWIse mdlcated.
d. Install each hardware Item m complIance WIth manufacturer's
mstructIons.
e Whenever cutt10g and fitt10g are reqUIred to 10stall hardware on surfaces
which wIll be pa10ted or finIshed at a later tIme, 10stall each Item
completely and then remove and store 10 a secure place. After
completIOn of the finIshes, remstall each Item.
f. Do not 10stall surface mounted items unless finIshes are completed on
the substrate.
g Adjust and check each operatmg Item of hardware and each door to
10sure proper operatIOn or functIon of every UnIt. Replace UnIts that
cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
AdJustment:
a Whenever hardware 1OstallatlOn IS made more than one month pnor to
acceptance or occupancy, make a final check and adjustment of all
hardware Items dunng the week pnor to acceptance or occupancy.
Clean and lubncate operatmg Items necessary to restore proper functIOn
and finIsh of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devIces to
compensate for final operatIOn for heating and ventIlat10g equIpment
b. Instruct Owners personnel 10 proper adjustment and ma10tenance of
hardware and hardware finIshes
I
I
I
I
Scope'
a
I
Includes but Not LImIted To-
1) New wood Door Frames as detailed
2) Shelving m JanItors Closet as detaIled
I
Door Frames:
a. Matenal: VG Douglas FIr #1 per DetaIls
b Refer to Sheet A-16 for millmg profiles
I
May 2002
O(~mric Design works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1
2.
Shelvmg:
a. Matenal vanes, see Sheet A-12
b. Pamt grade Hemlock for material not otherwIse specIfied
3.
Pegboard:
a. MasonIte, typIcal
b. Include set of assorted hangers to fit, mm (20) pIeces.
Shelvmg and Pegboard.
a. Secure shelf brackets to studs withm walls or provIde backmg behmd
drywall
b. Space pegboard %" off of wall with horizontal 1 x2 strips secured to
studs or backmg
c Ease leadmg edges of shelvmg and Bench
END OF SECTION 06 200
06 300 WOOD TREATMENT
GENERAL
1.
DIVIsion 06 GENERAL applies to this Section.
06 310 PRESER V A TIVE PRESSURE TREATMENT
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library.
DIvIsion 06 - Wood & Plastics
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) FurnIsh and mstall Pressure Treated lumber or plywood m
contact wIth concrete or masonry and for components mdlcated
as "pressure treated" or "P.T." according to Drawings
2) Mud SIlls, Fumng, Sleepers, Skylight Curb and others as
mdlcated on Drawmgs.
2. Reference Standards:
a. Impregnated lumber or plywood conformmg to A WP A Standard C 1 and
P5.
b. Apply preservatIve m pressure cylinder m accordance wIth A WP A
Standard C15.
3. Grade: CCA-40
4. Lumber shall be dned to 15-19% mOIsture content after treatment. Matenals to
be pamted shall have knots and pItch pockets sealed.
#2 Douglas FIr or better (Hem-FIr and Southern Pme permItted).
2. Approved Manufacturers:
a. "Wolmanized Pressure Treated Wood", Wolman CCA type C, by
HIckson CorporatIOn, Atlanta GA.
b. CCA Pressure Treated Lumber Type C, by Hoover Treated Wood
Products Inc, Thomson, GA.
c. SubstItutlOns permItted.
May 2002
Of;gmpic Design works! Inc PS
EXECUTION 1.
I
PreservatIve Pressure Treated Material:
a. LIberally brush cut ends, bolt holes, and machined areas with the same
material in accordance with A WP A Standard M4.
b. Hand-select materials to be used for exposed locatIons.
I
I
END OF SECTION 06 300
06400 ARCIDTECTURAL WOODWORK
I
GENERAL 1.
EXECUTION 1.
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIVISIOn 06 - Wood & Plastics
Division 06 GENERAL applies to thIS Section.
I
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
1) FabricatIon and dehvery to SIte ofmtllwork specIfied below.
2) Installation of Shop and Site fabricated components.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Installation of wood WIndow sashes specIfied m Section 08-600.
2) Furring and blockmg members specified in Section 06-100.
I
I
I
b.
3.
Reference Standards:
a. Applicable standards of A WI "QualIty Standards and Guide
Specifications" apply to this Section as if written m this Project Manual
unless noted otherwise.
b. A WI "Custom" grade except as otherwise indicated shall be base quality
reqUIrement.
I
4.
SubmIttals:
a. SubmIt shop Drawings.
b. Submit samples of wood species that is to receive a transparent fimsh to
the Architect.
I
I
5.
Product DelIvery & Storage:
a. Assemble work at shop and delIver ready for erectIOn msofar as
possIble.
b. Protect millwork from moisture and damage while in transit to jobsIte.
Unload and store in a place where it will be protected from mOIsture and
damage and convenient to use.
I
I
6.
Execution:
a. Fabncate work in accordance WIth measurements taken on jobsIte.
b. Install hardware in accordance with Manufacturer's dIrectIOns.
c. Repair & Cleaning-
I) In addition to A WI requirements, exposed fimshed surfaces of
millwork shall have damaged surface or defects removed or
repaired to match adjacent similar undamaged surface as
directed by Architect.
I
I
I
General Fabrication:
a. Fabricate to dImensions, profiles, and details indIcated. To greatest
extent possIble, complete fabrication and assembly before shipment to
SIte.
I
May 2002
Ol~mpic Design worksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b.
Disassemble components only as necessary for shIpment and
Installation. Precut openings for applied fixtures and fitting, where
possIble.
Predrill mountings for applIed hardware, where possible.
c.
2.
FabricatIon - Cabinetwork:
a. Veneer matching shall be contmuous across doors, drawer fronts, and
panels. Install cabmet hardware.
3.
InstallatIon:
a. CondItIon woodwork to humidity and temperature In mstallation area
prior to installing. Verify that blocking and backings have been installed
at appropnate locations for anchorage.
b. Examine shop-fabncated work for completion, complete work as
required, and remove packIng.
c. Make joints neatly, with uniform appearance.
d. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight, WIth no distortions.
Install with no variation in flushness of adjOIning surfaces.
e. Shim as required, using concealed shims.
f. Refinish cut surfaces and repair finish at cuts.
g. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to
substrates.
h. Use anchorage methods indicated; where anchorage method IS not
indIcated, use only concealed fasteners or blInd nailing except where
impossible.
1. Repair damaged and defective woodwork to elIminate visual and
functional defects; where repaIr IS not possible, replace woodwork.
J. Touch up shop-applied finishes where damaged or soiled.
4.
Adjustment:
a. Install so doors operate smoothly and are accurately aligned.
b. Install so drawers operate smoothly and are accurately alIgned.
c. Complete hardware installation.
d. Anchor tops securely.
e. Install tops plumb and level, within 1/8 inch In 8 feet.
f. Adjust and lubricate cabinet hardware for smooth operatIOn.
5.
Cleamng:
a. Clean exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
6.
ProtectIOn:
a. Protect woodwork from damage and maintam envIronmental condItiOns
reqUIred.
06 430 Stairwork and HandraIls
GENERAL
I
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISIOn 06 - Wood & PlastICS
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) New Lower Stair Flight to match hIstonc Upper Flight
2) New Bannister and Handrails per DraWIngs
May 2002
Ol~mpic DesifJl1 Works, Inc. PS
PRODUCTS 1.
StaIrs, BannIsters, and HandraIls:
a. Exposed Matenals: Clear VG Douglas Fir #1.
b Shapes and profiles to match eXlstmg remammg components and per
Sheet A-09, Sheet A-16 and Details wIthm the Drawmgs
I
I
1.
Scope'
a
Includes but Not LimIted To -
1) Wood Base where Baseboard Raceway not mstalled
2) Wood Base m Entry
3) Tnm m Stairway
4) Door casmg and Tnm at new Openmgs
I
I
I
06 450 Standmg and Runnmg Tnm
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
06 460 Extenor Frames
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 06 - Wood & PlastICS
Intenor for Transparent FmIsh:
a. SolId wood shall be Douglas FIr.
b. Grade vanes, see DetaIls
c. Where not speCIfically detaIled, proVIde Identical profile, speCies, and
grade to eXIstmg hIstoncal matenal.
I
I
I
I
Scope'
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) New Wmdow Frames and SIlls at Masonry Rough Openmgs
2) Structural Muntms at new and eXIstmg wmdow frames
3) New Door Frames and Transoms at Masonry Rough Openmgs
4) New Door, Transom, and SIdelIte frammg at Front Entry.
I
I
Intenor for Transparent FInIsh:
a. Clear VG Douglas FIr, see DetaIls.
b. FInIsh Spec 09 931
I
2.
Extenor Pamted FInIsh'
a. Clear VG Douglas Fir, see DetaIls.
b. FmIsh Spec 09 915
I
I
General FabncatIon:
a. Fabncate to dImenSIOns, profiles, and detaIls mdlcated. To greatest
extent pOSSIble, complete fabncatIon and assembly before shipment to
Site.
b. Seamlessly weave new work mto histoncal work.
c. Pre-dnll mountmgs for applIed hardware, where possible.
I
2 InstallatIOn.
a. ConditIOn woodwork to humIdity and temperature m mstallatIon area
pnor to mstallIng.
b. Examme shop-fabncated work for completIOn, complete Work as
required.
c. Make Jomts neatly, WIth UnIform appearance
I
I
May 2002
O{;~rmric Design works) Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
d. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straIght, wIth no dIstortions.
Install with no variation m flushness of adJoming surfaces.
e. ShIm as reqUIred, using cedar shims when against masonry.
f. Use sUItable anchorage methods; locate fasteners where they wIll be
concealed by sash mstallatIons except where impossIble.
g. RepaIr damaged and defectIve woodwork to elImmate visual and
functIOnal defects; where repair is not possIble, replace woodwork.
3.
Adlustment:
a. Install so doors operate smoothly and are accurately aligned.
b. Install so casement wmdows WIll operate smoothly and are accurately
alIgned.
c. Complete hardware installatIOn.
d. Anchor tops securely.
e. Install tops plumb and level, within 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
4.
Cleamng:
a. Clean exposed and semI-exposed surfaces.
5.
ProtectIOn:
a. Protect woodwork from damage and maintain environmental conditIons
required.
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 06 400
I
I
I
I
I
END OF DIVISION 06
I
I
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISion 06 - Wood & PlastICS
May 2002
Ol;gmpic Design works, Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
DIVISION 07 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
GENERAL
1.
General ConditIons and DIVlsion 01 apply to thIS DIVlSlon.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) FurnIsh labor, materials, and eqUIpment necessary for full
completIOn of Work unless indicated or noted otherwIse.
07 150 DAMPPROOFING
GENERAL
1.
DIViSIOn 07 GENERAL applIes to thIS SectIOn.
07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnish and apply to exterior foundation walls and top of
footings at new constructIOn.
2) Extend coverage to existing construction where exposed by new
Work.
2. Delivery. Storage and Handling:
a. Deliver materials to project SIte in Manufacturer's origmal unopened
containers.
3. Site CondItions:
a. Comply with manufacturer's recommendatIons regarding weather
conditions before and during installation, condition of the substrate to
receive damproofing, and protection of the installed damproofing
system.
BItummous Damproofing Materials:
a. Cold Applied Asphalt Emulsion Semi-Mastic-
1) Fibrated damproofing mastic ofmedmm conSIstency, asbestos
free.
b. Approved Manufacturer's-
1) A-H Semi-MastIc EmulsIOn, Anti Hydro Company, Inc.
2) Emulsified Asphalt Semi-MastIc, The Euclid ChemIcal
Company
3) Hydrocide 700B Mastic, Sonneborn Building Products.
4) Tex-MastIc 633-FB, TexMastic InternatIOnal
5) Sealmastic Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing Type II, W R
Meadows
6) Equal as approved by Architect pnor to bIddmg. See SectIon 01
630.
c. Asphalt Primer-
1) Conform to reqUIrements of ASTM D 41.
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIVISIon 07 - Thermal & MOIsture Protection
May 2002
O(~mpic Design Works, Il1C. PS
EXECUTION 1.
5.
6.
I
2.
Installation Accessones:
a. Remforcmg Fabric-
1) Woven or non-woven fiberglass, treated with orgamc bmders
and coated for compatibIhty wIth damproofing bitumen
I
I
ExammatIon;
a. Venfy that surfaces are smooth, sound, clean, and dry, and that elements
whIch wIll penetrate damproofing have been completed and are ngldly
mstalled.
b. Beginnmg of mstallatIOn constItutes acceptance of substrate.
I
I
2.
Preparation;
a. Remove honeycomb, aggregate pockets, fins, ndges, and proJectmg
rough areas.
b. FIll cracks wIth latex patchmg mortar, or detailing mastic as
recommended by membrane manufacturer.
c. Form fillets (cants) at inside comers and around projecting elements
using latex patching mortar or detailIng mastic.
I
I
3.
General InstallatIon;
a. Comply wIth manufacturer's instructions for handling, preparatIon,
applicatIon, and protectIon of damproofing matenals.
I
4.
I
Below-Grade Damproofing:
a. Form flashmgs at outsIde comers, changes in plane, and penetrations.
Apply coatmg of damproofing or detaIhng mastic, embed layer of
fiberglass remforcing extending at least 12 inches onto damproofing
surface, and topcoat with another layer of damproofing or detaIlmg
mastIc.
b. Apply a umform coat of mastic damproofing usmg brush or mop.
Coverage, 4~ to 5~ gallons per 100 square feet to provide minimum
30-mll dry film thickness
d. Apply a "touch-up" coating over areas where coating IS thm or has not
formed a smooth lustrous surface.
e. Apply second coat of damproofing as specified above.
I
I
I
I
InspectIon;
a. Before covenng or backfilling damproofing, notIfy Architect.
I
ProtectIOn and Cleaning;
a. Take measures reqUIred to protect completed damproofing after
installation.
b. Clean spillage and soihng from adjacent surfaces usmg cleaning agents
and procedures recommended by the manufacturer of the surface.
I
II
I
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIvISIon 07 - Thermal & MOisture ProtectIOn
May 2002
O{~jc Desj(JJ1 Works, Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
07190 VAPOR & AIR RETARDERS
GENERAL
1.
DIVISIOn 07 GENERAL applies to this Section
07 196 aIr retarders
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
07200 INSULATION
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes But Not Limited To -
1) Furnishing and installing air retarders on the extenor SIde of
Tower wall sheathing pnor to mstallatIOn of sidIng.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Tyvek Housewrap by DuPont Company, WIlmington, DE
Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructIOns over extenor wall
sheathing. Seal penetratIOns through air infiltratIOn barrier Immediately pnor to
installation of fimsh material.
2.
Tape all Joints with manufacturer approved tape.
3.
At completion of air infiltration barrier mstallation, inspect exposed aIr
infiltration barrier for holes, tears, and punctures and repair damaged areas.
Barrier is to be free from holes, tears, and punctures.
END OF SECTION 07 190
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes But Not Limited To -
Furnishing and installing Insulation Boards and Batts
2. InsulatIOn shall be manufactured and installed in comphance with UBC,
WSNREC, or other applicable building codes.
07210 BATT lNSULATION
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes But Not Limited To -
1) Furnish and Install Batt Insulation at Elevator EqUIpment Room
walls and cei1mgs and Tower above
2) Furnishing and instalhng Batt Insulation at vertIcal AttIC Wall
2. InsulatIon shall be manufactured and mstalled in compliance with UBC,
WSNREC, or other applicable buildIng codes.
"FnctIon-Fit" unfaced batts, either 16" or 24" wide accordIng to framIng spaCIng.
2. R-19 at Elevator Equipment Room ceihng in accordance with Fed Spec
HH-I-521e.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIviSIOn 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
May 2002
Ol:gmpic Design works, Inc. PS
EXECUTION 1.
I
3.
R-19 10 walls.
I
I
'I
I
4
Approved Manufacturers:
a. CertalOteed Corp, Valley Forge, PA
b. Manville Corp FIberglass, Denver, CO
c. Owens-ComIng Fiberglass Corp, Toledo, OH
Install in accordance wIth Manufacturer's dIrectIOns and the folloWIng:
a. Leave no gaps 10 insulation envelope.
b. Install insulatIon between jambs & framing, behind plumbing & winng
and in sImIlar places.
c. Fit ends ofbatts snug against top and bottom plates.
d. Where IOsulation is not enclosed by Structure or drywall, support 10
place with WIre at 16" o.c. or other sUItable matenal as approved by
ArchItect.
I
I
07212 BOARD INSULATION
07 213 board 1l1SUlatlOn
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
1.
I
I
I
I
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnish and install at undersIde of roof structure between rafters
Foil-faced Foam Insulation Board:
a. Polyisocyanurate with radiant barrier foil face
b. Meet requirements specified 10 Federal Spec HH-I-1972/1, Class 1 and
ASTM C1289 Type I, Class 1.
c. Approved Manufacturers-
1) ThermalGlas AGS, by thermal systems, Inc., Huntington Beach,
CA.
2) Celotex CorporatIon
I
I
2. "R" Factor of 30 mlOImum, (In two layer applicatIOn).
EXECUTION 1.
3. SIze: 4'x8'x2" thIck (each layer).
2.
3.
4.
Install 10 accordance WIth Manufacturer's recommendatIOns with foil face
downward.
I
Install first layer with friction fit to existing rafters, leaving I \;2" free air space
above. In thIS pOSItIon boards should flush with bottom of rafters.
I
Toe-nail or otherwise secure into positIOn. Do not drive board up into required
aIr space.
II
I
Apply second layer In full sheets over the bottom of rafters and previous layers.
Fasten to rafter bottoms with grabber screws and washers.
5. Fit tIghtly to pipe and duct hangers. Tape joints with duct tape.
END OF SECTION 07 200
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISIon 07 - Thennal & MOIsture ProtectIOn
May 2002
olJJmpic I)esj{JJ1 Works, Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
07300 SHINGLES
07310 Wood Shmgles andShakes:
GENERAL
1.
I
I
I
I
2.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I,
I
I
I
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LimIted To -
1) FurnIshing and installatIon of Roof Shingles.
2) installatIon of Valleys, HIPS, RIdges, dnp edges, vent flashmgs,
step flashing, trim details, etc.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) DemolItion specIfied in SectIon 02 050.
2) Rough Carpentry specIfied in SectIon 06100.
3) Furnlshmg of Sheet Metal Work specified in
Section 07 600.
4) Vent flashing specified m SectIon 07 727.
b.
QualIty Assurance:
a. ThIs SpecificatIon sets mmimum standards for materials and
workmanship. Manufacturer's bonding requirements shall apply where
they Impose higher standards.
b. Building codes are to be used as minimum standards only. Codes or
"industry standards" will not be recognized as standards of quality for
workmanship.
c. Installation standard shall be as written by the "Cedar Shake and Shingle
Bureau".
3.
Warranties. Guarantees. and Bonds:
a. At completIOn of roofing, furnish Owner with standard written warranty
or bond.
b. Contractor shall furnish written one-year guarantee covering repaIrS and
replacements for any defect or faIlure due to faulty workmanship at no
additional cost to Owner.
c. To qualify for stated warranty, bureau standard mstructions must be
explicitly followed.
4. SubmIttals:
a. Submit product samples for quality venficatIon.
5. Replacement Shingles:
a. Leave one (1) bundle of shingles, and two (2) bundles of hip and ndge
shingles with Owner. Storage location will be determined by Owner's
representatIve.
Shingles:
a. Meeting "Cedar Shake and Shingle Bureau" requirements for
"Certi-Sawn" taper-sawn Cedar Shakes and following requirements:
1) Grade: Premium or Number I
2) 1 00 % edge grain
b. Descnption:
1) 18" length
2) 5/8" or 3/4" butt thickness
3) 4"-14" width
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIVISIon 07 - Thermal & MOIsture Protection
May 2002
ol;gmpic Design works} Inc. PS
5.
I
2.
I
I
Accessories:
a. Hip and RIdge Shingles shall be pre-made at mill in complimentary
grade
b. Use IS" length # 1 grade Starter-fimsh course for use on underlying
starter course at eavehne and for final course at ridge where tnmmmg
would required.
I
I
3.
U nderlavment:
a. Pnmary underlayment: _
1) Equal or exceeding ASTM Type 15
2) 36" width.
b. Secondary underlayment
1) Equal or exceedmg ASTM Type 30
2) 36" width.
c. Shake liner -
1) Equal or exceeding ASTM Type 30
2) 18" width.
I
I
4.
Fasteners:
a. Nails:
1.
2.
I
I
b.
Aluminum or Hot-dipped galvanized
Fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate all roofing materials
and at least W' into roof substrate
a) 6d Box at field nailmg
b) 8d Box at accent courses
Staples:
1. Aluminum or Type 304 or 316 Stainless Steel
2. 16 gauge
3. 7/16" crown min.
4. Length shall be long enough to achieve W' penetration into roof
substrate. Length wIll vary accordmgly at accent courses.
I
I
I
I
Approved MIlls/Suppliers:
a. Any mill registered and certified by
The Cedar Shake and Shingle Bureau
PO Box 1178
Sumas, W A 98295-1178
phone: 604-820-7700 fax: 604-820-0266
I
EXECUTION Note: The following text brief is taken from Cedar Shake and Shingle Bureau, "New
Roof Construction Manual". It is the sole responsibility of the installer to verify and
follow the complete written instructions in the manual. All bureau recommendations will
be followed, unless exempted in writing from ArchItect after biddmg. For complete text
refer to www.cedarbureau.org/techinfo/roofmanual
I
I
I
1. Underlavment:
a. Primary Underlayment _
1) Apply 36" wide sheets over complete deck, including area to be
covered with secondary underlayment, with each sheet
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVIsIon 07 - Thermal & MOIsture ProtectIon
May 2002
Ol;9mpic Design Works, Inc. PS
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b.
overlappmg preceding sheet and doublIng through valleys. Lap
underlayment 2" horizontally and 4" minimum end lap.
Secondary Underlayment -
1) Apply specIfied matenal along eaves. Apply matenal full wIdth
centered down each valley. Lap end joints 12".
NaIling -
1) If shmgles applIed as felts are laId -
a) NaIl suffiCIently to hold m place
2) If felts to be left exposed for extended perIod -
a) Apply as above then spot mop In field and contmuously
seal at lower edge and end laps WIth asphalt emulSIon to
protect from blow-off. Use emulSIOn or adheSIves
approved by Manufacturer
c
2
Valleys
a. Apply secondary underlayment as follows:
1) Use contmuous maxImum length whenever possIble. NaIl top of
each section and lap 8" in the direction of flow.
2) Center full WIdth roll roofing materIal m the valley over prImary
underlayment.
3
Shmgles:
a. Starter Course:
Use 15" starter course shakes expressly for starter and fimsh courses
b. Butts of starter and first course should project 1 V2" beyond the fascia.
c. The CSSB recommends the use of an 18" Wide of Type 30 "shake liner"
roofing felt laId over the top portIOn of the shakes and extended onto the
sheathmg. The bottom edge ofthe felt should be pOSItIOned above the
butt at a dIstance equal to tWIce the weather exposure
d Spacing of adjacent shakes should be 3/8".
e Weather exposure is 6W' with every 4th course doubled m an accent
band.
f. Shakes shall be laid with a side lap of not less than 1 12" between joints
m adjacent courses.
4
RIdges and HIps:
a All Certl-label shake hIp and rIdge shakes shall be of alternate overlap
type applIed at same exposure as field of roof.
b. Nalls shall be long enough to penetrate "ridge-vent" and into sheathing.
5
Cleanmg:
a. Clean shmgles and bUlldmg of any SOIlIng caused by thIS mstallatlOn.
b. Clean up SIte mghtly
END SECTION 07 300
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIVISIon 07 - Thermal & MOIsture Protection
May 2002
O{~>>1pic Design works, Inc. PS
GENERAL
1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
07 400 PREFORMED ROOFING AND CLADDING / SIDING
07 460 CLADDING / SIDING
Scope:
a.
Includes But Not Limited To -
Installation of Exterior Siding and Tnm
2. Matenals shall be manufactured and installed in compliance with UBC,
WSNREC, or other applIcable buildmg codes.
07-462 mmeral fiber-cement sldmg
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
1.
Section 06 200 GENERAL applies to this Sectton.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes But Not Limited To-
1) Siding at exterior of Elevator Tower.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
1) Moisture barriers specIfied m SectIOn 07 190.
b.
Cementious Sheet Siding
a. 4'x8' nominal sheets
b. Marketed as "Hard i-board"
2. Nalls:
a) 6d Galvanized Box
Cementious Sheet SIdmg
a. Install m full height panels per layout shown on Sheets A-05 and A-07.
b. Trim outside comers, honzontal joints, panel edges, and bottom edge
with metal flashings as shown in DetaIls 7 through10 on Sheet A-14
c. Layout nails in regular pattern.
d. Pre-dnll nails near panel comers to aVOId breakage.
e. Panels will be unfinished, aVOId use of layout or markings that Will
remam.
f. Secure panels in straight, true hnes WIthout buckles, sags, tool marks, or
other defects.
07-465 exterior wood fascia, rakes, barges, and bands:
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIvision 07 - Thermal & Moisture ProtectIOn
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LimIted To -
1) Furnish and mstall, faSCIa, barges, rakes, bands and soffits as
described m Contract Documents.
1.
Fascias, Rake, Barge, and Bands-
a. V erticallaminated boards, typical for fascia, barge and rake boards. All
sizes detatled on Drawmgs.
Nails: 16d Galvanized, casing type.
Approved Manufacturers:
1) Socomi-lam by South Coast Lumber, Brookmgs OR
May 2002
O[~pic Design works) Inc. PS
b.
c.
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1
I
I
2)
Other vertlcal-lammated factory pre-pnmed substItutIOns
allowed
FaSCIa, Rake, Barge, and Bands-
a. MIter boards at splIces.
b RIgIdly secure m place, naIl as necessary.
c. Use care to prevent hammer-head or naIl set markmgs.
d Secure m straIght, true, level lIne wIthout buckles, sags,
splIttmg, ragged edges, tool marks, or other defects.
a. Set exposed naIl heads 1/8 mch to receIve putty.
07 500 MEMBRANE ROOFING
I
GENERAL
1.
DIVISIOn 07 GENERAL applIes to thIS SectIOn.
I
I
2.
ExecutIOn:
a. NotIfy ArchItect In wntIng five days pnor to commencmg work
a. Before final acceptance of roof and pnor to InstallatIon of mtenor
fimshes, test roof for leaks by floodmg WIth hose to satIsfactIOn of
ArchItect
I
07 530 MECHANICALL Y ATTACHED ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
GENERAL
1.
DIVISIOn 07 GENERAL applIes to thIs Section.
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To-
1) PrOVIde membrane at new Mechamcal platform atop new Tower
In Base BId
2) PrOVIde membrane at new Front Entry Canopy m Base BId
3) Base flashmgs and accessones includmg two (2) umque bldder-
deSIgned scupper tranSItIOns.
Related Work SpeCIfied Elsewhere-
1) Rough Carpentry speCIfied In SectIon 06100.
2) Metal Flashmgs speCIfied In SectIOn 07600.
b
3.
QualIty Assurance:
a. ApplIcator QualIficatlOns-
1) The applIcator shall be expenenced WIth mechamcally fastened
smgle-ply matenals, substrate preparatIOn and methods of
applIcatIOn.
2) The applicator shall be traIned by and approved by manufacturer
for installatIOn of elastIc sheet roofing system
3) Sheet metal work to be performed as a subcontract under the
roofing contract; no exceptIOns.
4. SubmIttals:
a SubmIt manufacturer's InstallatIOn mstructIons and specIficatIOns to the
Architect.
b. SubmIt Items to manufacturer as reqUIred for theIr program In a tImely
manner
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 07 - Thermal & MOisture ProtectIOn
May 2002
O(~mrjc Design works} Inc. PS
PRODUCTS 1.
2.
I
5.
I
I
I
Product Delivery and Storage:
a. Matenals shall be delIvered to the SIte m new, dry, unopened and well-
marked contamers that clearly show the name of the manufacturer,
product name, appropnate warnings, storage condItIons, lot numbers,
and usage mstructions.
b. Maintain items in accordance wIth Manufacturer's recommendations.
c. AdhesIves, primer, and caulks as mdicated are extremely flammable
and/or tOXIC. Use precautions indIcated on cans or carton labels.
d. HandlIng Matenals-
1) SheetIng rolls shall not be bent excessIvely in lIftIng or in other
handling. Rolls whIch have been bent excessively and where the
backer is broken, shall be removed from the SIte.
2) Sheeting shall not be exposed to plasticIZIng OIls, solvents,
concentrated acids, or alkalIs.
I
I
6.
EnVIronmental Conditions:
a. The ambient temperature shall be a mInimum of 40 deg F and rising,
whIle installing the elastic sheet roofing.
b. No Installation work shall be performed dunng raInY or mclement
weather.
I
I
I
7.
Protection:
a. ElastIc sheet metal roofing flashings, and insulation shall be
mechanically fastened, and sealed in a watertight manner on the same
day they are Installed.
b. At the end of each working day, the Incomplete installatIon shall be
sealed along the edges to prevent water from entering the roof system.
c. Application workmen shall wear clean, soft rubber-soled shoes for any
applIcation work where they may be walking on the in-place roofing
membrane. Precautions shall be taken to protect the membrane and to
maintain a clean, bright appearance.
I
I'
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Hi-Tuff Roofing System by J.P. Stevens, Northampton, MA.
b. Burkeline Roofing by Burke Rubber Co.
c. Equal as approved by Architect 1 week pnor to BIdding. See SectIon 01
630.
I
I
Matenals:
a. Roofing system shall be Thermoplastic single-ply reInforced sheet type
complying with ASTM D 751. All matenals shall be furnIshed by
roofing system manufacturer or approved by roofing manufacturer as
compatible to system. The completed roofing system shall meet
reqUIrements for min. U.L. Class B for fire exposure and mm. Factory
Mutual 1-90 for uplift.
1) Membrane: Membrane shall be .045" mInimum overall
thickness.
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles CamegJe Library
DIVISion 07 - Thermal & MOlsture ProtectIOn
May 2002
Ol~mpic Design works/ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2)
Flashings: Flashmgs shall be same as membrane except as
noted. Flashmgs wIth factory adhered membrane material
preferred. Include thIS optIon m Base BId.
Bondmg AdhesIve: As furnished by manufacturer for flashmgs.
Seam Sealant: As furnIshed by manufacturer.
Pnmer: As furnIshed by manufacturer.
Sealants: As furnished by manufacturer.
Mechamcal Fasteners: As furnished by manufacturer.
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Preparation:
a. Roofing Contractor shall examme substrate and condItIons under whIch
roofing work is to be performed and shall notify the ArchItect for
inspection ImmedIately upon dIscovery of unsatisfactory conditions. Do
not proceed with roofing work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in manner acceptable to mstaller, manufacturer, and ArchItect.
b. Condition on eXIstIng decks and roof surfaces: Provide surfaces free
from projections, depression, projecting naIl heads, loose scale, sand,
curling compounds, grease, oil pamt, asphalt and other foreIgn depOSIts
ConstructIon work on the deck shall be completed.
c. FIeld Measurements-
1) The applIcator shall have the sole responSIbIlity for the accuracy
of all measurements, and for the estImate of matenal quantities
required and necessary to satisfy the requirements.
2.
Flashmg Installation:
a. Parapets, perimeters, curbs, vents, drains, and other detaIls shall be
flashed in accordance with manufacturer's written mstructIons, detaIls
and as supplemented WIth the Drawings.
3.
Cricket Installation:
a. Apply cnckets and tapered insu1anon in accordance WIth both the
roofing and insulation manufacturer's instructIons and shop drawmgs.
b. Mechamcal area will taper to the east termmating at two scuppers.
c. Entry Canopy will taper slightly to east, then south termmating at
scupper collectIOn to drain pIpe.
4.
Adlustmg and Cleamng:
a. Repair of DefiCIencies -
1) installatIOn or details noted as defiCIent dunng Fmallnspection
must be repaIred and corrected by the applicator, and made
ready for re-mspection within 5 working days of verbal rejectIOn
at FmallnspectIon Conference.
b. Clean-up -
1) ImmedIately upon completion of all work as speCIfied, the roof
membrane and flashing surfaces shall be cleaned of any debns,
constructIOn dirt, footprints, or other flaws in appearance. The
final finished surfaces shall be in a clean, bright and white
membrane.
2) Clean all roof drams, scuppers, conductor heads or downspouts
as required.
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISIon 07 - Thermal & MOisture ProtectIOn
May 2002
Ol;gmpic Des1!P1 works, Inc. PS
I
I
07600 FLASIDNG & SHEET METAL
I
GENERAL
1.
DIvIsIon 07 General apphes to thIs SectIOn.
I
I
07 620
2.
CoordinatIOn:
a. Cooperate wIth related Sections dunng shop drawing and erectIon stage.
3
Products:
a. Screws, Bolts, Nails, & Accessory Fasteners-
1) Of strength and type consIstent wIth functIon and roofing
warrantee performance period.
I
4. ExecutIon:
a. Form accurately to details.
b. Profiles, bends, and intersectIons shall be even and true to line.
c. Allow suffiCIent tolerance for expansIOn and contractIon.
d. Leave metals clean and free of defects, stainS, and damaged fimsh.
e. Insulate work to prevent electrolytic action.
I
I
5 SubmIttals:
a. SubmIt samples for flashings to ArchItect for approval.
I
I.
I
I
SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM
07 621
Prefinished Flashing & Counterflashing
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
2.
EXECUTION 1.
2.
3.
4.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To _
1) Flashmg and counterflashlng not specIfied to be of other
matenal.
I
2.
Warranty:
a. 25 year mimmum.
I
I
I
26 gauge steel conforming to ASTM A-446, Grade A or hIgher.
Finish'
a) ZinC Galvamzed
Install WIth Details per DraWings as mlmmum standard.
Slope to provIde positive drainage.
I
Fold exposed edges 1/2" to provide stiffness.
ProvIde sufficient hold-down clips to insure true ahgnment and secunty against
wind.
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 07 - Thermal & MOIsture ProtectIOn
May 2002
O{;9mpic Design works, Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
07 630 SHEET METAL ROOFING SPECIALTIES
07 637 Contmuous Rolled Gutters and Downspouts
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a
Includes but not lImited to -
1) Gutter at bUlldmg eXlstmg penmeter and new tower roof
2) BuIldmg downspouts to be provided without Conductor heads
and DecoratIve Brackets m Base Bid.
3) Tower Conductor Head at Mechamcal platform scupper m Base
Bid
Related work specified elsewhere -
1) Conductor heads m Bid Alternate #6 specified m
DlVlslOn 05-730
2) Steel Pipe Downspout specified m DlvlslOn 05-590 Mlsc Metals
b.
2
Warranty:
a PrOVide Owner with two (2) year written warranty agamst leakage.
Gutters:
a. 28 gauge steel, roll formed and contmuous lengths up to 60'-0",
prefimshed enamel. Color to be selected by Architect.
b Hanger system' Spike and ferrel.
c Cross-sectional configuration of gutter shall be 4" x 3", type "ogee"
2
Downspouts and Hangers'
a. SIX (6) downspouts (double at lower north Side) mcluded m Base Bid
b. Continuous length 3 W'x 4", rectangular and corrugated, 24 gauge zmc
galvamzed mcludmg necessary elbows.
c Use standard strap system m Base Bid.
3
Tower Conductor Head:
a. Matenal: 26 gauge galvamzed sheet steel
b Size: 21"x l2"x 8"
c Transition per detail to 3" vertical steel pipe, verify Inside pipe
dlmenslOn.
d InstallatIon: PrOVide vertical sheet metal flange per DetaIl, fIeld-bend
for attachment to top plate, such that bottom comers of umt allgn wlth
bottom of wood band
4.
Stramers:
a Beehive stamless steel stramers required at all downspout tops
PreparatlOn:
a. Before startmg work, venfy governmg dimenSIOns at bUlldmg. Inspect
for condltlOns that would prevent mstallatlOn of first class system. Do
not mstall over Improper conditIons.
2. Installation:
a. Furnish and mstall outlet tubes and gutter ends where required to
connect to steel downspouts. Furnish and mstall discreet expansIOn Jomt
m west Side run
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 07 - Thermal & MOisture ProtectIOn
May 2002
O[;9mpic Design works; Inc. PS
I
I
b.
OngInal downspout locatIOns are eVIdent on buIldIng base. Venfy these
locatIons precisely pnor to cuttIng outlet tubes Into gutters. General
Contractor to adjust ground Inlet locatIOn If necessary to match.
I
3.
I
Lap JOInts In downspouts at least 1-1/2 Inches In directIOn of water flow
4.
At completIOn of this work, block downspouts and flood gutters. Notify
Architect pnor to testIng. Repair leaks and adjust gradients for proper draInage
Install straIners at each outlet tube.
I
I
5.
Install spikes and ferrels at on-center dIstance to match roof rafter taIls. Install
shts In ferrels downward.
6.
Make final adjustment In storm sewer upnght and Install mortar to seal openmg
I
END SECTION 07600
GENERAL
1.
DlVlslOn 07 GENERAL applIes to thiS SectIOn.
I
I
07 700 ROOF SPECIALTIES & ACCESSORIES
07 723
graVIty ventIlators
I
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
Scope'
a.
Includes But Not LImIted To -
1) Furnishmg roof ventIlators at Tower membrane
Related Work SpeCIfied Elsewhere -
1) InstallatIon speCIfied In SectIon 06 100.
I
b.
I
Approved Manufacturers & Models:
a. APE-2000 one-way extruded alumInum ventIlator by Jlmco
Install In accordance WIth Manufacturer's recommendatIOns.
I
I
I
07 725 prefabncated ndge vents
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
Scope:
a
Includes -
1) FUrnIShIng ndge vents m locatIOns shown on DraWIngs
Related work speCIfied elsewhere -
1) InstallatIon speCifIed In SectIOn 07 310
I
b.
Matenal:
a. Polypropylene - .080 - .250 gauge.
I
2.
Approved Manufacturers'
a. "RIdgelIne Vent" by RldgelIne Corporation, DetrOIt, MI.
b Equal as approved by Architect pnor to blddmg See SectIOn 01 630.
I
May 2002
Ol~mric Design works; Inc. PS
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISion 07 - Thermal & MOisture Protection
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
07 725 roof hatches
GENERAL 1.
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
07727 pIpe flashmg
I
GENERAL 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
07 729 bIrd deterrents
I
I
I
GENERAL
2.
3.
2.
2.
Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendatIOns m locatIOns shown
on Drawmgs.
Scope:
a.
Included But Not LImIted To -
1) FurnIshmg roof hatch as shown on Drawmgs.
Related Work SpecIfied Elsewhere -
1) Roofing specIfied m Section 07 500.
2) InstallatIOn specIfied m Section 06 200.
3) Pamtmg specIfied m Sectlon 09 900.
b.
ConstructIOn:
a. 14 ga. galvamzed steel with shop pnme coat.
SIze:
a. 3'-0" x 2'-6".
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Type "S" as manufactured by Biko Inc., New Haven, CT.
b. Type "M-1" as manufactured by Mllcor Inc., LIma OH.
"
Scope:
a
"
b.
Includes -
I) Installmg pipe flashmg on existing roof vents or roof vent
extensIons.
Related work specIfied elsewhere -
1) DemolitIOn specIfied m Sectlon 02050.
2) InstallatIOn specIfied m SectIOn 07 310
Approved Manufacturer:
a. Any metal lead type
b. Any product from roofing manufacturers specIfic product lme for
applicatIOn WIth the specIfied roofing.
Size
a. 1 1/2",2",3",4", or as reqUlred to conform to eXIstmg condItlons
FIeld venfy SIzes and quantltles reqll1red.
Install per manufacturer's recommendatIOns.
Scope:
a.
Includes -
1) FurnIshmg and Installmg bIrd deterrent StrIp along ndgelme of
bUlldmg
Port Angeles Camegle LIbrary
DIVISIOn 07 - Thermal & MOisture Protection
May 2002
O{~mpic Design works; Inc. PS
PRODUCTS
EXECUTION 1.
1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
a.
b.
Linear sharp plastIc guard strIp.
#2005 BIrd-Guard
2.
Approved Manufacturer:
a. What-ever Works, 800-499-6757
Venfy quantItIes reqUIred for full length coverage ofbUIldmg ndge.
2.
Install per manufacturer's recommendatIOns.
END OF SECTION 07 700
07 900 JOINT SEALERS
GENERAL
1.
DIvIsIOn 07 GENERAL applIes to thIs SectIOn.
07 920 SEALERS & CAULKING
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
1.
Scope'
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) Furnish and mstall sealants as specIfied below for types and
usage and as shown m Drawmgs.
Related Work SpecIfied Elsewhere -
1) Caulkmg alummum thresholds at entrIes specIfied m DIVIsIOn
08.
b.
2. Product Storage:
a. Handle to prevent mcluslOn of foreIgn matter, damage by water, or
breakage.
b DelIver and keep m ongmal contamers untIl ready for use
c Do not use damaged or detenorated matenals.
d. Store m a cool place, but never under 40 Degree F
TyPe of ApplIcatIOn:
a Extenor Jomts and cracks around wmdows, louvers, wall penetratIons,
connectIOns, and other Jomts necessary to seal offbUIldmg from outsIde
aIr and mOIsture. Meet reqUIrements of -
1) ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, or
2) ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, or
3) Fed Spec TT-S-00227e, Class B, Type 1.
b. Jomts m masonry. Meet reqUIrements of -
1) ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Use NT, Class 25, or
2) ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, Class 25 (SIlIcone),
or
3) Fed Spec TT-S-001543A.
2 Color'
a.
Where sealant IS not to be pamted and IS exposed to VIew, color match to
background, as close as possible, WIth manufacturer's standard colors.
May 2002
O[~mric Design works; Inc. PS
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 07 - Thermal & MOIsture ProtectIOn
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
Cleaners & Pnmers:
a. As recommended by Manufacturer.
4.
Backmg (If necessary):
a. Flexible polyethylene rod equal to Ethafoam or Mmcel.
5.
Bond Breaker:
a. As reqUIred for proper application and functIOn.
ASTM C 962, "Standard GUIde for Use of Elastomenc Jomt Sealants", together
wIth Manufacturer's dIrections apply to preparatIOn and applIcatIOn of sealants.
2.
Preparation of Surfaces:
a. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free of dust, 011, grease, dew, or frost.
b. Do not apply caulkmg to pamted surfaces. Remove old pamt surfaces
and old caulkmg matenal.
c. Prime very porous surfaces.
d. Clean and pnme surfaces receIVmg caulkmg before caulkmg m
accordance wIth Manufacturer's recommendations. FurnIsh
Manufacturer's latest mstructIOns If reqUIred.
MIXmg:
a. MIX m exact proportions as recommended by Manufacturer.
b. Do not thin.
c. Secure perfect blend by thorough, slow mixmg.
d. MIX fIVe mmutes mechanically (one gallon umts), or ten minutes by
hand.
e. Do not mix in direct sunlIght.
3.
4.
ApplIcation of Backmg:
a. Polyurethane for openjomts be at least 1-1/2 tImes wIdth of openjomt
and of thickness to give solid backing.
b. Backmg shall fill up jomt so depth of jomt IS at least one-half ItS WIdth
for jomts from 1/2 mch to one mch.
5.
ApplIcatIOn:
a. Apply WIth a hand-caulkmg gun. Use gun nozzles of proper SIze to fit
JOInts.
b. Mmlmum adhenng surface shall be at 1/2 mch.
c. Seal jomt when It IS m normal condItIon, not contracted or expanded.
d. Use maskmg tape to protect surroundmg surfaces, and remove
immedIately after drawing bead, with inner edge drawn away first to
elimmate feather-edgmg.
e. Do not apply caulking at temperatures under 50 degrees F.
6.
Clean-up;
a. Clean adjacent matenals which have been soIled Immediately (before
settmg) WIth solvents as recommended by Manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 07 900
END DIVISION 07
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DlvlslOn 07 - Thermal & MOisture ProtectIOn
May 2002
O[~mp1c Des1gn worksf Inc. PS
I
I
I
DIVISION 08 DOORS & WINDOWS
GENERAL
I
I
1.
General CondItions and DIVISIOn 01 apply to thIS DIvISIOn.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) Furnish labor, material, and eqUIpment necessary for completion
of speCIfied Work unless 10dICated or noted otherwIse.
08 100 METAL DOORS & FRAMES
I
I
GENERAL
1.
DlVlslOn 08 GENERAL applIes to this SectIOn.
08 III
steel hollow metal doors
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Doors listed as "New Metal Entry". See Door Schedule.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
1) Installation specified in Section 06 200.
2) Door Hardware speCIfied 10 SectIOn 08 700.
b.
Doors:
a. Grade 1, Modell as specified 10 Steel Door Institute Bulletin SOl
100-83.
2.
FInIsh:
a. Use either of following systems-
1) Before assembly, clean metal accord1Og to Fed Spec TT-C-490b,
then pnme surfaces with one shop coat. After assembly, apply
one baked-on pnmary coat.
2) GalvanIze at exterior apphcatIons or subjected to high humIdIty.
3.
Labeling:
a. Label each door as conforming to above reqUIred standards.
4.
Insulation:
a. Extenor doors to heated spaces to have thermal rat10g equal to or better
than solid core wood door.
5.
Construction:
a. Mortise and reinforce doors for hinges and locks.
b. Reinforce doors for closers and other surface apphed hardware.
c. Dnll and tap on job.
d. Seams along vertIcal edges of door need not be filled.
6.
FIre Doors:
a. Doors deSIgnated as 3/4 hour or greater labeled doors shall carry
appropriate UL label on door and frame.
b. Construct UL fire doors and frames to meet UL's specific approval
accord1Og to current procedure for door rat10g involved, Procedure No.
R-3791 and R-3821 as lIsted by UL.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISion 08 - Doors .md Windows
May 2002
ol;gmpic Design W orksJ Inc. PS
I
I
c. Double doors shall have overlappmg rolled steel astragal.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Any current member of Steel Door Institute.
08 112 hollow metal frames
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) Furnishing hollow metal frame per Door Schedule.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Installation speCIfied in DIVISIOn 06.
PRODUCTS 1.
b.
Sheet Steel:
a. 16 gauge cold rolled steel.
2. FInIsh:
a. Use one of following systems -
1) Prime surfaces with rust inhIbItmg pnmer.
2) GalvanIze at exterior applIcatIOns or subjected to hIgh humIdIty.
3.
Anchors:
a. 14 US gauge meetmg UL requirements
I
I
4.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Any current member of the Steel Door Institute.
b. Atlanta Metal Products, Long Island, NY
c. Forderer Hollow Metal Products, San FranCISco, CA
d. Hol-O-Met Manufacturing Corporation, Mesa, AZ
e. Stiles Custom Metal, Ceres, CA
I
I
I
I
5.
FabncatIon:
a. General Requirements -
1) Provide frame form as detailed.
2) Frames shall be welded units.
a) PrOVIde temporary spreader on each welded frame.
3) Check with finish hardware schedule.
4) ProvIde Manufacturer's gauge label for each Item.
b. Make breaks, arises, and angles unIform, straIght, and true. Accurately
fit comers.
c. Do not extend hinge cut out full WIdth of door unless fill stnp is
inserted, weld filled, and ground smooth so no seam appears on back
face plate.
d. PrOVIde mortar guards at stnkes and hinges.
e. Punch frame for door SIlencer.
f. PrOVIde a mInImum of SIX Jamb anchors and two floor anchors per
pre-mstalled frame. Frames installed after wall constructIOn shall have a
minImum of eIght jamb anchors with each frame leg being anchored near
bottom of frame. Anchors to meet wall condItions.
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1. InstructIons to Installers:
a. Erect frames plumb, true, and square.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary May 2002
DIVIsIon 08 - Doors and Wmdows O[:gmpic Design worksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
b.
Stuff frames shown to be Insulated wIth insulatIOn of type specIfied In
SectIOn 07 200.
END OF SECTION 08100
08 200 WOOD & PLASTIC DOORS
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) FurnIsh standard and custom manufactured doors as IOdlcated 10
ConstructIOn Documents.
Related Work SpecIfied Elsewhere -
1) installatIOn specIfied In SectIon 06 200.
2) FinIsh Hardware specIfied In SectIOn 08 700
3) FInIShlFlg specIfied 10 SectIOn 09 925 and 09 931
DIvIsIon 08 GENERAL applIes to thIS SectIOn
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b
c
2
QualIty Assurance:
a A WI quality standard "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of
the ArchItectural Woodwork InstItute and additIOnal requIrements gIven
below.
3
Shop DrawlOgs:
a SubmIt In quadruplIcate. indIcate locatIon, SWIng and sIze of each door,
product data confirmlOg adherence to SpeCIficatIOns, IOcludIng but not
necessanly lImIted to detaIls of constructIon, locatIOn and extent of
hardware backlOg, and other pertlOent data. Do not beglO fabncatlOn
untIl approval from ArchItect.
4.
Product DelIvery, Storage, & HandllOg:
a. Store upnght on a level surface In a dry, well-ventIlated buIld 109. Cover
to keep clean but allow air CIrculatIon.
b Handle WIth clean gloves and do not drag doors across one another or
across other surfaces.
c Do not subject doors to abnormal heat, dryness, or humldlty.
d. DelIver In clean truck and, If wet weather, under cover.
e DelIver to buIldlOg SIte after plaster, cement, and drywall JOInt
compound are dry.
5.
WarrantV'
a. See below
I
08 211
f1 ush wood doors
GENERAL
I
I
1.
Scope:
a
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) FurnIsh doors noted as "Interior Flush Doors", See Door
Schedule.
Porr Angeles CJrneg/{? Llbrdry
01\ i,lon 08 - Doors ..md WIndows
May 2002
O{~mric Design Works/ Inc. PS
I
PRODUCTS 1.
5"
4 Y:z"
8%"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Flush Doors:
a. Type - (Custom Grade)
1) A WI Spec Symbol PC-5, Flush.
b. Core Matenal -
1) Wood Block
c. Construction -
1) 7 ply
2) ThIckness: 1%"
d. Fimsh per Spec 09 925, color to match drywall
e. Warranty-
1) Provided by the NatIOnal Woodwork Manufacturer's
Association, Chicago, IllinOIS (latest edItIon & reVISIOn).
f. Approved Manufacturers -
1) Vancouver Door, Inc.
2) Eggers IndustrIes, Neenah, WI
3) Weyerhaeuser, Marshfield, WI
4) Equal as approved by ArchItect pnor to biddmg.
08 214 panel wood doors
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnish doors and sIdelite noted as "Interior Panel Doors" or
"Interior Panel wi Lite, Sidelite only". See Door Schedule.
2) Moldmg shapes and raIl SIzes may be considered custom
dependmg on Manufacturer. See Casement DetaIl Sheet A-16.
Panel to match wlo LIte, See Door Elevations, Sheet A-12.
Stile and Rail
2-Panel Doors wlo top LIte, to match dimenSIOn and detaIl of
existmg doors wi top lite.
Panel to match wi LIte, See Door Elevations, Sheet A-12.
Stile and RaIl
2-Panel SIdehte wi top Lite to match vertical dimension and
detail of adjacent existing door.
ConstructIon -
1) Material - Select KD VG Douglas Fir
2) Rail wIdths
a) Top:
b) Mid:
c) Bottom:
StIle Width:
a) 5"
Panel Thickness:
a) %" min.
FImsh to match eXIsting downstaIrs doors
Warranty -
1) NWWDA I.S 6-91
2) Each panel door must bear brand identIfication mark.
Panel Doors:
a. Type:
1)
2)
b.
Type:
1)
2)
c.
3)
4)
d.
e.
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIVISIOn 08 - Doors and Wmdows
May 2002
o[~mpjc Design works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f. Approved Manufacturers -
1) Buffelm Door, Tacoma, W A
2) Simpson Mastermark, McCleary, W A
3) SummIt Woodworking, Oregon CIty, OR 503-656-1078
08 215 custom wood doors
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
Scope
a
Includes but Not LimIted To -
I) FurnIsh doors noted as "Exterior Typical Entry" and "ExterIor
Main Entry", See Door Schedule.
Extenor TypIcal EntrY'
a Type: Solid Core T&G VertIcal Flush
I) Flush Door wi vertIcal Veneer panels
2) I-Ox 1-0 wIred-glass Lite. See Door ElevatIons, Sheet A-12
b. Core MaterIal -
1 ) Wood block
c. Construction -
1) 7 ply
2) Thickness: I W'
d FInIsh per Spec 09 935
e. Warranty-
1) PrOVIded by the NatIOnal Woodwork Manufacturer's
AssocIatIOn, Chicago, IllmOls (latest edItIOn & reVISIOn).
f Approved Manufacturers-
I) SummIt Woodworking, Oregon City, OR 503-656-1078
2) Style-wood International, CoqUltlam, B.C., 604-944-9969
2. Extenor Mam Entry:
a. Type: StIle and Rail wi LIte, See Door ElevatIOns, Sheet A-12
1) StIle and RaIl
2) Smgle 2-6x4-1 0 LIte over extra Wide bottom raIl
b. ConstructIon-
1) Material - Select KD VG Douglas FIr
2) RaIl WIdths
~ Top. 6"
b) Bottom: 20"
3) StIle WIdth:
a) 6"
4) Laminate lower rad to full depth and I %" thickness
c. Fmlsh per Spec 09 935
d Warranty-
1) NWWDA IS 6-91
2) Each door must bear brand IdentificatIon mark
e Approved Manufacturers -
I) SummIt Woodworkmg, Oregon City, OR 503-656-1078
2) Style-wood InternatIOnal, CoqUltlam, B.C, 604-944-9969
END OF SECTION 08200
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISIon 08 - Doors ..md Windows
May 2002
O{~mpic Design works! Inc. PS
GENERAL
1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
08 300 SPECIAL DOORS
DlVlsion 08 GENERAL applIes to this Section.
08 305 ACCESS DOORS
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImited To -
1) FurnIsh access doors at Restrooms If reqUIred by Code.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
I) Installatton specIfied m SectIOn 06 100 or 03300 as reqUIred.
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
b.
Wall Access:
a. Wallboard -
1) Style C by BOICO
2) Style DW or M by MiIcor
3.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Babcock-DavIs Associates Inc, Arlmgton, MA
b. The BiIco Company, New Haven, CT
c. BOICO - Birmmgham Ornamental Iron Co, BIrmingham, AL
d. MIIcor DIvision INRYCO Inc, MIlwaukee, WI
Install m accordance with Manufacturer's recommendatIOns.
END OF SECTION 08 300
08 600 WOOD WINDOWS
08 610 CUSTOM WOOD WINDOWS
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
1) Furnishing wood window sashes complete wIth glazmg.
2) Furnish necessary anchors and accessories, mcludmg glazmg
beads and weatherstripping.
Related Work SpecIfied Elsewhere -
1) Caulkmg specified in Sectton 07900.
2) Performance of installation specified m Sectton 06 200.
3) InstallatIOn of Extenor Frames specIfied m DIVIsIOn 06-460.
3) Quality of glazing specified m SectIOn 08 800.
b.
2. Reference Standards:
a. No performance standard.
3. Coordination:
a. Verify dImenSIons of framed openings of all windows pnor to ordermg.
b. Coordmate with DiVIsion 06 through the use of full SIze patterns.
c. Verify glazing required to be tempered per code.
d. Window installation shall be done in a timely manner so as to not hmder
operations requinng close in of build mg.
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIVIsIon 08 - Doors and Wmdows
May 2002
O[~mpic Design works! Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.
Shop Drawmgs:
a. Submit four (4) copies showmg wood construction detaIling, proposed
glazmg bead, and product data for hardware selectton.
b. See also Speclficatton 00, General Condlttons, 4.03.
Matenals:
a. Sash, and all wmdow materials-
1) VG Douglas Fir Select
2) All wood shall be water repellant preservattve treated in
accordance wIth NWWDA I.S.4.
3) All exposed wood shall be solid, WIthout finger Jomts, sUItable
for transparent finish.
b. Casement Hardware-
1) Push-out cam and latch hardware
2) SlIdmg Rod and Thumb screw wind stops
c. Fmishes-
1) Exterior surfaces shall be provIded in Manufacturer's whIte
acrylic prime coat.
2) Interior surfaces shall be treated bare wood ready for fimshmg
by Section 09 931.
2.
Operatton:
a. Fixed and Casement sashes per Drawmgs
3.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Quantum Windows, Mike Brogan, Everett, W A
phone: 206-682-9553, fax: 425-339-1522
b. Three Rivers Wmdows, Ionni Reed, Mukllteo, W A
phone: 425-493-8136, fax: 425-493-8133
Wmdows:
a. Sash manufacturer to verify pattern fit on site, in frame openmg, prior to
manufacture of any units.
b. Experienced mechanics shall install windows. Do not force windows
into openings. Installation by Division 06 or DiVIsion 08.
c. Set sashes plumb, level, and in alignment and secure properly to frames
and mullions with anchors and fastening devices supplied by
Manufacturer.
d. Bed joints at mullions and contacts of fixed sashes with sills in mastic
cement supplied by wmdow manufacturer. Tnm off excess mastic.
e. Weatherstripping is by Division 06 or Division 08.
f. Protect wmdow surfaces from adjacent work as necessary.
2.
Adiustment & Cleaning:
a. After wmdows are in place, erection mechamc shall adjust hardware and
ventilators to operate smoothly.
b. After installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces of windows and
accessones of plaster, paint, and other contaminants. Maintam
protectIOn and provide final cleanmg.
END OF SECTION 08 600
I
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISion 08 - Doors .md Windows
May 2002
o[~mpjc Design Works, Inc. PS
ONE SGL DOOR (DR#) CORRIDOR (RM#) FROM OFFICE (RM#) LHR 90
3'0" X 7'0" X 1-3/4 WD x HM 20 MIn
1-1/2 PRo Butts BBI279 652 4-1/2 X 4-1/2
1 Lockset 5056L 2 LUSTRA - 626
1 Closure P2820 - 689
1 Klckplate #37 - 12 x 34 - COLOR_
1 Wall Bumper W9 626
3 SIlencers 64
08 700 HARDWARE
GENERAL
I
Scope.
a
I
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) Installation of new Hardware as descrIbed In Contract
Documents.
2) Remove, DIsassemble, Clean, and Lubncate and otherwIse
servIce and restore eXIstIng Hardware to remaIn
3) FInal selectIOn ofmatenals IS to be by Hardware Allowance, see
SpecI ficatIon 01-020
I
I
I
2
Guarantee'
a Related Work SpecIfied Elsewhere -
1) SubmIttals specIfied In General CondItIons
2) InstallatIon of hardware specIfied In SectIon 06 200
I
3
QualIty Control'
a. Installer-
1) FInIsh hardware shall be Installed only by experIenced
tradesmen In complIance wIth trade UnIon JunsdlctlOns, eIther at
the door and frame fabncatlOn plant or at the project Site.
b Codes-
1) All north Entry, east Entry, and Restroom finIsh hardware shall
comply wIth the Amencans wIth DlsablhtIes Act
2) Hardware for fire-rated openIngs shall also be In comphance
wIth all fire buddIng codes apphcable to the dIStrICt In whIch the
buddIng IS located. ProvIde only hardware whIch has been
tested and hsted by UL for the types and SIzes of doors requIred
and whIch complIes with the reqUIrements of the door and door
frame labels.
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.
SubmIttals:
a SubmIt one (l) copy of manufacturer's data for each Item of finIsh
hardware wIth one hardware schedule submItted. Data to be used to
assIst Architect In revIewIng schedule.
b SubmIt a keYIng schedule In accordance wIth the InstructIOns from the
Owner
c. FurnIsh approved hardware schedule and templates for each fabncator of
doors, frames and other work to be factory prepared for the InstallatIOn
of hardware. Upon request, check the shop draWIngs of such other work
to confirm that adequate provIsIons WIll be made for the proper
Installation of hardware.
d Format for Schedule (Sample Only)'
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Dlvl,lon 08 -. Doors .md Windows
May 2002
Ol~W1ric Desigl1 Works, Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
5
Guarantee:
a. New fimsh hardware shall carry a hmIted warranty agamst defects m
matenal, workmanshIp and operatIon for a penod of one year, backed by
a factory warranty of the hardware manufacturer, except the door closers
shall have a five year warranty. No habIllty shall be assumed by the
hardware supplIer where faulty operatIOn IS due to abuse, Improper
usage, Improper mstallatIon or faIlure to exerCIse normal mamtenance
6
SubstitutIOns:
a No substitutIOns of matenal hsted wIll be allowed without wntten
consent of the Architect, except approved substitutIOns as listed When
substitutIOns are requested, they shall be m wntmg and accompanIed by
catalog cuts of the proposed Item, as well as the specified Item. Request
for substitutIOns to be made no less than ten (10) days pnor to bid date
7
Keymg:
a Provide hardware compatible with the "Best" lock system.
b. Keymg wIll be as dIrected by the Owner.
c. ProvIde temporary cyhnders for use dunng construction, keyed alike
The General Contractor shall receIve SIX (6) copies of this key Upon
completIOn of the buIldmg, It shall be the responsibility of the hardware
supplier to furnish permanent cylmders and keys to the Owners
d Furnlsh-
4 Masterkeys
15 Key Blanks of Keyway used on this project
Stamp "DO NOT DUPLICATE" on key bow of all keys and blanks
8.
Fmlsh.
a. Exposed surfaces of all new hardware shaIl be satm brass, US4, unless
noted otherwIse.
b. Closures shall be sprayed neutral bronze.
Butts:
a.
SIzes:
1) 1-3/4" Exterior Entry doors
2) 1-3/4" mtenor doors
3) Fit eXlstmg mortises per Hardware Groups
NOTE: Butt SIzes are to be modIfied If door tnm mterferes With the
fullest possible degree of openmg for doors.
Quantity:
1) 1-1/2 pair for Extenor Entry doors
2) Match eXlstmg quantity and layout for Intenor doors
All extenor reverse bevel locked doors to have non-removable pms
(NRP set screw m barrel).
Approved Manufacturer:
1) Hager
Acceptable SubstItutlOns.
1) McKmney
2) Stanley
5.0 x 4 5
45x45
b
c
d.
e
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
01\ ISlon 08 - Doors Jnd Windo\\'s
May 2002
O(~mpic Design works; Inc. PS
a. Provide curved IIp strikes of minimum length to protect tnm wIth
wrought boxes.
b. Design: Lever
c. Approved Manufacturer:
1) Schlage
d. Acceptable Substitutions:
1) CorbinlRusswin
2) Arrow
I
I
I
I
I
3.
Door Closures:
a. SIze as recommended by manufacturer.
b. Spray closures to match adjacent hardware.
c. ProvIde the proper feet to suit the condItIons and the proper length arm
to allow fullest degree of opening for doors.
d. ProvIde drop plates where required.
e. Contractor shall mstall all the screws reqUIred for the foot.
f. ProVIde special closer mounting as required where interference with
weather-strip or sound seal occurs.
g. Door closer brackets shall be mstalled without notching door seal.
h. Approved Manufacturer:
1) Norton
1. Acceptable Substitution:
1) LCN
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.
KIck Plates:
a. FurnIsh kick plates at Owners discretion by Allowance.
b. Matenal shall be .050 minimum thickness brass.
c. Plates shall be mounted with truss-head screws of matchmg fimsh.
d. SIze: All plates shall be furnIshed WIth WIdth 2" less than door WIdth.
Venfy heIght of kickplate WIth bottom stIle heIght. ThIS heIght specIfied
in the door elevatIons.
e. Where door seal, sound seal or weatherstrip is mstalled on the jamb stop
adjust ktckplate width to allow 1/8" - 1/4" clearance each side.
f. Where kickplate WIdth will mterfere WIth installation of other hardware,
adjust width for proper clearance.
g. Approved Manufacturer:
1) Rockwood
h. Acceptable Substititions:
1) Builders Brass Works
2) Quality
3) Trimco
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISIOn 08 - Doors and Wmdows
May 2002
Ol;'9mpic Design Works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
5. Stops & Holders:
a. There shall be stops to protect all walls, cab met work or hardware
operatIOn. Wall Stops shall be used wherever possible, unless otherwise
called for in the hardware types. Where floor stops are used they shall
be installed no farther than 8" from the latch edge of the door.
b. Approved Manufacturer:
1) Rockwood
c. Acceptable SubstItutions:
1) Builders Brass Works
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2) QualIty
3) Tnmco
6. Weatherstrip and Thresholds:
a. Where It occurs, weatherstrip shall be applIed to both sides of a mullIon
b. All 20-mmute doors shall have PK55D door seal, except where sound
seals are specified.
a. Door closures shall be adjusted to allow closmg and latchmg of the door
without slammmg.
b. See Drawings for ADA threshold detail.
e. Approved Manufacturer:
I) Pemko
f. Acceptable Substitution:
I ) Reese
7. Door Silencers:
a. Quantity: Furnish three (3) for each single door frame and four (4) for
each double frame.
b. Type: 64 for metal frame and 65 for wood frame.
c. Approved Manufacturer:
I) Rockwood
d. Acceptable Substitutions:
1) Builders Brass Works
2) Glynn Johnson
3) Quality
8. Flush BoIts & Dustproof Strikes:
a. BoIts shall be installed top and bottom of new intenor Sidelight.
Dustproof stnke - Mounted in floor to accept boIt at bottom of SidelIght
leaf. SelectIOn by Architect by Allowance.
b. Approved Manufacturer:
1) Builders Brass Works
c. Acceptable Substitution:
1) Glynn Johnson
9. Hardware Groups:
DOOR 0 I
NEW SNGL LEAF 3-0x7-0 ACCESSIDLE ENTRY DOOR
ADA Lever lockset wi Best cylmder per SpecificatIOn
No ADA Power Accuator
Norton P8501 BF-AL closer
Butts, weather stripping, sweeps by Allowance
DOOR 02
NEW SNGL LEAF 3-0x7-0 ACCESSIDLE ENTRY DOOR
ADA Push pad and Power Accuator
ADA Lever lockset wi Best cylinder per Specification
Butts, weather stripping, sweeps by Allowance
Pon Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIvISion 08 - Doors and Wmdows
May 2002
Ol~mpic Design works, Inc. PS
DOOR 03
EXTG SNGL LEAF 2-8x7-0 ROOM ENTRY DOOR
Restore eXIsting Hardware
Provide new door stops by Allowance
DOOR 04
EXTG SNGL LEAF 2-8x7-0 ROOM ENTRY DOOR
Restore eXIsting Hardware
ProvIde new door stops by Allowance
DOOR 05
NEW SNGL LEAF 2-8x7-0 ROOM ENTRY DOOR
Install salvaged and Restored Hardware
ProVIde new self-closing butts to fit extg' mortise
ProVIde new door stops by Allowance
Save hIstone butts
DOOR 06
EXTG SNGL LEAF 2-8x7-0 ROOM ENTRY DOOR
Restore eXIsting Hardware
ProVIde new door stops by Allowance
DOOR 07
EXTG SNGL LEAF 2-8x7-0 ACCESSffiLE RESTROOM DOOR
ADA Lever lockset wi Best cylinder per Specification
Provide new self-closing butts to fit extg' mortise
Provide new door stops by Allowance
Save all hIstone Hardware
DOOR 08 (door and frame moved from #5)
EXTG SNGL LEAF 2-8x7-0 ACCESSffiLE RESTROOM DOOR
ADA Lever lockset wi Best cyhnder per Specification
ProVIde new self-closing butts to fit extg' mortise
Provide new door stops by Allowance
Save all hIstOriC Hardware
DOOR 09 (door moved from #8 into new frame)
EXTG SNGL LEAF 2-8x7-0 ROOM ENTRY DOOR
Restore eXIstmg Hardware
Install salvaged Butts
Provide new door stops by Allowance
DOOR 09-B (new hmged sIdelite)
NEW SNGL LEAF 2-Ix7-0 SIDELIGHT
Install salvaged Butts
ProVIde new head and foot bolts by Allowance
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIVISion 08 - Doors and Wmdows
DOOR 10
NEW SNGL LEAF 3-0x7-0 ROOM ENTRY DOOR
Install salvaged and Restored Hardware
Install salvaged Butts
ProVIde new door stops by Allowance
May 2002
Ol~mpjc Design worksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DOOR 11
NEW DBL LEAF 2-0x5-0 FLUSH PAIR
No lock or lever set
Butts, stops, knobs & ball-catches by Allowance
DOOR 12
NEW SNGL LEAF 3-0x7-0 METAL ENTRY DOOR
New OrbIt lockset wi Best cylinder per SpecIficatIOn
Butts, weather-stripping, sweeps, stops, SIlencers by Allowance
ProvIde new door by Allowance
DOOR 13
NEW SNGL LEAF 3-6x7-0 MAIN ENTRY DOOR
HIstoric Lockset and Piston Closer purchased by Allowance
Butts, stops, sweeps, SIlencers per SpecificatIon
DOOR 14
NEW SNGL LEAF 3-0x7-0 ACCESSIBLE ENTRY DOOR
ADA Push pad and Power Accuator
ADA Lever lockset wi Best cylmder per SpeCIficatIon
Butts, weather stripping, sweeps by Allowance
Preparation:
a. Provide solId blocking for all wall stops and bumpers.
b. Fasteners-
1) Check all condItIons and use fastening devIces as needed to
secure or anchor all hardware as per manufacturer's publIshed
templates. Self-tappmg sheet metal screws are not acceptable.
All closures on wood doors shall be thru-bolted. The Contractor
shall be responSIble for drIlling wood or metal with the
recommended hole SIze.
2.
Installation:
a. The General Contractor shall be responsible for proper installatIOn and
operation of hardware in locatIons specified. Door closures shall be
installed and adjusted to close and latch the door without slammmg.
b. The General Contractor shall protect exposed hardware surfaces dunng
the constructIOn period from damage to products and finishes.
c. Mounting Heights: Mount units at heights recommended in
"Recommended LocatIons for BUIlders Hardware for BHMA" except as
otherwIse mdIcated.
d. Install each hardware Item in compliance WIth manufacturer's
instructions.
1) Whenever cuttmg and fitting are reqUIred to mstall hardware on
surfaces that WIll be pamted or fimshed at a later tIme, mstall
each Item completely and then remove and store In a secure
place. After completIon of the finishes, reinstall each item.
2) Do not mstall surface mounted Items unless fimshes shall be
completed on them.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 08 - Doors .md Wmdows
May 2002
Ol;9mpic Design WorksJ Inc. PS
08 800 GLAZING
GENERAL
3.
4.
5.
6.
I
e Adjust and check each operatIng Item of hardware and each door to
insure proper operation or function of every umt. Replace units that
cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
I
I
3.
Ad1ustment:
a. Whenever hardware Installation IS made more than one month pnor to
acceptance or occupancy, make a final check and adjustment of all
hardware items durIng the week pnor to acceptance or occupancy.
Clean and lubricate operatIng items necessary to restore proper functIOn
and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to
compensate for final operation for heatIng and ventilating eqUipment.
b. Instruct Owners personnel in proper adjustment and maIntenance of
hardware and hardware finishes.
I
I
END OF SECTION 08 700
I
I
1.
DIVISIOn 08 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
I) QualIty of glazing and assemblIes used In WIndows WIth
Insulated thermal glaZIng.
2) SpeCIal Glazing per Drawings (tempered, wired, etc.)
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Furnishing and installIng of glaZIng used In windows WIth
insulated glazing specified In Section 08520.
I
b.
Glass Standards:
a. Glazing shall meet applicable reqUirements of Federal Consumer
Product Safety Standard 16CFR1201.
b. Insulated units shall meet ASTM E-773 and ASTM E-774.
c. Cut clear glass so any wave WIll run horizontally when glazed.
c. Do not install glass having broken or chIpped edges.
I
Manufacturer's Labels:
a. Labels showing strength, grade, thIckness, type, and quality are reqUired
on each piece of glass.
I
I
I
Products:
a. Glazmg compound shall be type recommended by WIndow
Manufacturer for specified function.
I
Execution:
a. Order glass in sufficient tIme to prevent delay In the Work.
b. Glaze other glass WIth a glaZIng compound In a manner whIch will leave
glass free of rattles, and WIth waves running hOrIzontally.
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 08 - Doors and Wmdows
May 2002
Ol~mpic Design warksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
08 830 PATTERNED & WIRED GLASS
08 832 wire glass
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Exterior door lItes where scheduled.
2. Submittals:
a. Submit sample or lIterature indicating patterns of wires.
Glass specified in this paragraph shall meet requirements of Fed Spec
DD-G451d with following classificatIons accordmg to use -
a. Type II rolled flat, 1/4 mch, Wired glass.
1) Class 1, Style A, Form 1.
a) QualIty q8 Glazmg.
b) Hexagonal Mesh pattern, UL listed.
Install in glass stops in accordance WIth Manufacturer's recommendatIOns.
08 840 HEAT TREATED FLAT GLASS
08842 fully tempered glass
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnishmg and installIng glass in mam Entry door and adjacent
Sidelights and Transom.
Meet requirements of ASTM C 1048-85, "Standard SpecificatIOn For
Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kmd HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass".
a. Kind - IT
b. QualIty -
1) q3 - Glazmg select.
c. Thiclmess
1) 1/4 mch single at door lIte.
2) 3/32"-3/8"-3/32" at sidelights and transom
See SectIon 08 800 General.
08 850 INSULATING GLASS
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
1) Furnish and install insulatmg glass in wmdow sashes as shown
on Drawmgs.
PRODUCTS 1.
Meet reqUIrements speCified under 08800 or 08842, and the followmg.
a. Glass -
1) Clear/Clear typical
2) Clear/Patterned in Restrooms
b. Unit ThlClmess -
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISIOn 08 - Doors and Wmdows
May 2002
Ol;gmpic Design works) Inc. PS
I
c.
1) 5/8" overall maximum.
2) 3/32"-3/8"-3/32" typical
Strength: -
1) Heat-annealed typical
2) Tempered where noted
Fill Material: min. 90% Argon Fill
I
I
d.
2.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Members of Sealed Insulatmg Glass Manufacturers ASSOCiation
(SIGMA).
I
EXECUTION 1.
Sashes shall be square and true m plane before mstallatlOn.
I
2.
Glass stop clearance 1/8 inch.
I
I
3.
Frame clearance 1/8 mch.
4.
Use non-hardening sealants.
5.
Use a full bed of glazmg material on bottom of sash.
I
6.
Do not cover glass with paper, pamt, or other materials. Such covenngs act as a
heat trap and may contnbute to glass failure due to thermal stresses caused by
mcreased uneven temperatures.
I
END SECTION 08 800
I
I
END DIVISION 08
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISIon 08 - Doors ..md Windows
May 2002
O{~mpic Design Works, Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 09 FINISHES
GENERAL
1.
General ConditIons and DIVISIOn 01 apply to this DIvIsion.
I
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnish labor, matenals, and eqUIpment necessary for
completIon of work unless mdlcated or noted otherwise
09 250 GYPSUM BOARD
I
GENERAL
1.
DIVIsIOn 09 GENERAL applIes to this SectIon.
I
09 260 gypsum wallboard
GENERAL 1.
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvISion 09 - Finishes
Scope:
a.
2.
Includes but Not LImited To -
1) Replacement Wall and Ceiling surfaces Downstairs
2) Drywall where shown on Drawings.
3) Fire protection where required
Job ConditIOns:
a. EnVironmental ReqUIrements -
1) Temperature shall be 55 deg F mmimum day and mght dunng
entire Jomt operation and until buildmg is occupied. See SectIOn
01 513.
ProVide ventIlation to ehmmate excessive mOisture.
A VOId hot air drafts which will cause too rapid drymg.
2)
3)
Gypsum Board:
a. Meet reqUIrements of ASTM C 36-84a, Type X, UL one-hour rated.
b. 5/8 lOch thick tapered edge. Face paper SUItable for pamting.
c. Use water-resistant type conformmg to ASTM C 630-84a, for board 10
contact With hollow metal exterior door frames, and on walls and
ceilings 10 Restrooms and Elevator Equipment room.
2.
Metal Accessories:
a. 26 gauge steel, electrolytic galvanized zinc-coated, treated for maxImum
cement and paint adhesion. Surfaces to receive beddmg cement shall be
knurled for maximum bondmg.
1) Comer Beads -
a) I 1/8" leg minimum.
2) Casmg -
a) Channel type.
3) Control Joints -
a) USG #093
4) Furrmg Channels-
a) 25 gauge galvamzed USG DWC
3.
Jomt Compound & Remforcmg:
a. Best recommended by Wallboard Manufacturer.
May, 2002
Ol~mpic Design Works, Inc. PS
EXECUTION 1.
3.
I
4.
I
Bugle Head Screws:
a. Meet requIrements of ASTM C 1002-83,
I) Type G - For fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.
2) Type S - For fastenmg gypsum board to steel frammg members
3) Type W - For fastenmg gypsum board to wood members.
I
Metal Wood Gypsum Lammate
(Tvpe S) (Type W) (Type G)
5/8" Single Layer 1" 1-3/8" None
3/8" Double Layer 1-1/8" 1-1/2" Nommal sIze
ReqUIred
1/2" Double Layer 1-3/8" 1-3/4" "
5/8" Double Layer 1-5/8" 2" "
I
I
I
Fastenmg:
a. Apply from center of wallboard towards ends and edges.
b. Do not apply screws closer than 3/8 mch to ends or edges.
c. Space screws not over 12 inches o.c.
d. Adjust power screw-dnver to set heads in 1/32 mch dImple.
e. Do not break face paper. If face is accIdentally broken, apply second
screw 2 inches away.
f. Screws on adjacent ends or edges should be opposite each other
g. Dnve screws WIth shank perpendicular to face of board.
I
I
I
2.
Smgle Layer ApplicatIon:
a. Apply ceilings first. (Use minimum of two men)
b. Use board of size to gIVe minimum number of joints.
c. Apply board at right angles to support. Shim to level.
d. Stagger end joints. End joints shall occur over framing members or be
back blocked WIth 2x4.
e. Butt edges in moderate contact. Do not force m place
f. Leave facings true wlthjomt, finishmg flush, vertical work plumb, and
ceIling surfaces level.
g. Scnbe work closely. Keep joints as far from opemngs as possible. If
joints occur near an opening, apply wallboard so vertical joints are
centered over openings. No vertical joints shall occur wlthm 8 inches of
external comers or openings.
h. After mstallatIon, pound on walls and ceIlIngs to detect loose screws.
Push on board adjacent to fasteners to detect movement. Tighten loose
screws.
I
I
I
I
I
Double Layer ApplIcatton:
a. Apply base layer parallel to studs and attach WIth appropriate speCIfied
screws 8 inches o.c. at edges and 12 inches o.c. m field.
b. Apply face layer with joints staggered m relationshIp to base and
occurnng over studs. Use combmation of adheSIve and screws to meet
Manufacturer's speclficattons for fire-rated constructIOn.
c. Caulk pen meter m offices, etc, for sound attenuatIOn.
I
I
I
4 Metal Tnm:
a Comer Beads -
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISIOn 09 - Finishes
I
May, 2002
Ol~mpic Design Works, Inc. PS
I
I
I
I) Apply tape-on metal tnm.
2) USing metal bead as a screed, cover both flanges with Jomt
compound about 3" to 4" wide. Topping or finishing compound
IS not recommended for first applicatIOn Allow 12 to 24 hours
or more to dry.
3) Sand lightly If necessary. Apply second coat ofJomt or tOpping
compound feathermg edges 2" to 3" beyond preceding coat
I
I
5 Taping:
a Buttenng JOints -
I) Check screws by drawing finIshmg knife across surface Dnve
home protruding screws, leaving a dimple In wallboard
2) With broad steel finishing knife, butter JOint compound Into
channel formed by tapered edges of board Fill channel fully
and evenly. AVOid heavy fills.
b Embedding Tape -
I) Center tape reinforcement and press It down Into fresh JOint
compound. Hold knife at approximately 45 deg angle to board
and draw along JOint With suffiCient pressure to remove excess
compound. Leave suffiCient compound under tape for proper
bond but not over 1/64 Inch under feathered edge
2) Do not use tOpping or finishing compound for embedding tape
c Covenng Tape -
1) When tape IS embedded, apply skim coat of JOint compound
Immediately after embedding to reduce possibIlity of edge
wnnklIng or curling, or edge cracking
2) Allow to dry twelve hours.
d Spotting Screw Heads -
I) Apply first coat of compound over screw heads Immediately
pnor to or after embedding tape. Use pressure on knife to finish
compound level With wall surface.
2) Spot screw heads In Similar manner dunng second coat
application of compound
3) Dunng application of third coat over JOints, sand screw heads
lightly and apply third finishing coats. "Dunte" Screenbak
sandmg cloth, 320 or 220 gnt, is recommended for best results
Allow compound over screw heads to completely dry
4) Light sanding may be necessary before decoration
e Second Coat Application -
1) After embedding and covenng coat IS completely dry, 24 hours
under good drying conditions, apply second coat feathered
approximately 1-1/2 Inches beyond edges of first coat. Allow to
dry.
f Third Coat ApplicatIOn -
1) After second coat IS dry, sand lightly. Apply thin "finishing"
coat to JOints. Feather JOint edges 2 Inches minimum beyond
second coat. Sand hghtly when dry
g End JOints -
1) Treat butt or end JOints the same as tapered JOints
2) Fill JOint With compound to a pOint slightly above surface of
boards to allow for shrmkage In drying.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISIOn 09 - Finishes
May, 2002
O{~mric Design works, Inc. PS
3) Apply additIonal compound along each sIde ofjomt and embed
tape as described for tapered jomts. Apply covenng, second,
and third coats m same manner as tapered jomts.
4) Feather finishing coats of compound wider (approxImately 24
mches) as there is no taper in whIch to embed tape.
h. Fmishing InsIde Comers -
1) Fold tape along center crease. Butter both SIdes of comer wIth
joint compound and apply tape.
2) Apply second and third coats of compound (one SIde at a time)
in same manner used to finish flat jomts.
1. Standards -
1) At Jamtors Closet, Chair Storage, Elevator EqUIpment Room
and EqUIpment Room achIeve ArchItectural Tape level II, fire
tape only
2) At Restrooms achieve ArchItectural Tape level V, high gloss.
3) All other rooms achIeve ArchItectural Tape level IV for matte
finish after pnme coat.
6. Cleanmg:
a. Remove from Site all debns connected WIth thIS work.
END OF SECTION 09 250
09 550 WOOD FLOORING
GENERAL
1.
DIvision 09 GENERAL applies to this Section.
09-560 WOOD STRIP FLOORING
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Base Bid: Includes but Not LImIted to -
1) Repair and clean eXIsting wood floor at ExhIbItion space.
2) Install salvaged or purchased T &G FIr flooring at entry Foyer.
Bid Alternate 1: Re-finish Upper Floor wood flooring.
Includes but Not Limited to -
1) Strip and re-finish floor per SpecificatIOn 09-550
Bid Alternate 7: Install salvaged and/or purchased wood floonng in
downstairs Meeting Room.
Includes but Not Limited to -
1) Install Douglas Fir tongue & groove floormg, salvaged from
budding throughout room.
2) Supplement amount of material reqUIred for complete mstallatIon
if necessary.
3) Fmish floor as speCIfied m Division 09-550
b.
c.
2. SubmIttals:
a. Product data
b. Sample: Submit 12" square section of flooring showing full range of color
and fimsh match to eXIsting if supplementary materials are reqUIred
c. Mamtenance data for care and cleaning ofre-fimsh in bid Alternates.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISIOn 09 - FInishes
May, 2002
Of~mpic Design worksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
Wood Floormg
a 1 x4 nom mal solid wood plankmg, vanable length.
b. Profile and pattern to precisely match origmal installatIon(s)
2.
Species:
Douglas FIr/ select
3.
FmIsh:
Stam and Fmish to match origmal
4.
Suggested materIal resources:
a. Waste Not-Want Not, Port Angeles, 360-417-3016
Installation:
a. Comply with Industry Standard.
2.
Protection:
After completmg installation, provide temporary protective cover of 3/8" plywood
or OSB over 6mil poly. Protection to remam in place untIl Just pnor to final
acceptance.
END OF SECTION 09 550
09 678 RESILIENT BASE & ACCESSORIES
I
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) Furnish and install molded rubber products as descrIbed m
Contract Documents. See Room Fimsh Schedule.
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISion 09 - FInIshes
2.
Protection:
a. Keep traffic away untIl adhesive has set.
3.
SubmIttals:
a. SubmIt samples to ArchItect for approval.
Rubber Material:
a. Homogeneous, first-quality rubber compound, free of foreIgn matenals,
properly vulcanized, free from objectionable odors, blisters, cracks, and
other defects affecting appearance or serviceability of rubber.
b. Color pigments used shall be highly fade-resistant, msoluble In water,
and resistant to light, alkali and other cleanmg agents.
c. Color as selected by ArchItect from standard line.
2.
Base:
a.
b.
Molded or Extruded/Vulcamzed rubber.
SIze - 1/8" x 6".
Use preformed external comers, butt jomt interIor comers.
Style -
c.
d.
May, 2002
Ol;gmpic Design W orksJ Inc. PS
EXECUTION 1.
09 680 CARPET
GENERAL
I
e.
1) Use coved base over glued-down carpet, resIlIent floonng or
concrete slabs.
Approved Manufacturers-
1) Burke Floonng Products, San Jose, CA
2) Flexco, TuscumbIa, AL
3) Johnsomte FloorIng Products DIV, MIddlefield, OH
4) Roppe Rubber Corporation, Fostona, OH.
I
I
3.
I
I
AdhesIve:
a. Best for work as recommended by Manufacturer.
Surface to receive rubber shall be sound, clean, free from foreIgn matter, tIghtly
naIled, and dry.
2.
I
InstallatIon:
a. Fit rubber tIghtly. Use fillers where necessary.
b. Secure rubber with Manufacturer's approved adhesIve. Cement base
substantially to vertical surfaces IncludIng cabInet bases, tnm If
necessary.
c. LIne up top and bottom lInes of base throughout.
d Roll rubber until firm bond has been established.
I
I
END OF SECTION 09 650
I
1.
I
DIviSIOn 09 GENERAL applIes to this Section.
09 686 SHEET CARPET, DIRECT GLUE DOWN
GENERAL
4.
I
1.
Scope:
a.
I
Includes but Not LimIted To -
1) Labor, matenals, and eqUIpment necessary for complete,
finished carpet installation. See Room FmIsh Schedule.
2.
I
I
EnVIronmental Requirements:
a. Temperature shall be 60d F minimum and 95d F maXImum for seven
days prior to InstallatIOn of carpet and contInuously during mstallation.
See SectIOn 01 513.
3.
ReqUIrements of Regulatory Agencies:
a. Carpet specified meets less than 450 Smoke DenSIty reqUIrements when
tested In accordance with ASTM E662.
b. StatIc Resistance: less than 3.0kV - AATCC-134
I
I
Installer QualificatIon:
a. Carpet layer shall be skIlled mechamc who has served full two-year
apprentIceship and mstalls carpet as a full tIme profeSSIon.
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISIOn 09 - FinIshes
May, 2002
o{~mpjc Design works! Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
3
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvIsion 09 - FInishes
5
SubmIttals:
a. SubmIt samples showmg colors and patterns avaIlable to ArchItect for
selectIOn. See SectIon 01 300.
6.
Guarantee:
a. ProvIde one year free servICe for correctmg condItIons resultmg from
faulty workmanshIp. Faulty workmanshIp shall Include but not be
lImIted to -
I ) Open seams
2) Over compressed (humped) seams
3) Frayed seams
4) AIr bubbles or wnnkles
5) FaIlure to neatly butt to walls and around door frames
6) Poor pattern match
Carpet.
a. Style -
I) BrIstol
b Manufacturer -
1) WeavePomt ZG Carpets
c Color as selected from BrIstol standard Ime.
d. No substItutes accepted.
2.
Glue-Down Carpet Accessones:
a AdheSIve -
I) 41-3100 by Roberts ConsolIdated IndustrIes, CIty of Industry,
CA.
2) MultI-purpose AdheSIve #356 by W W Henry Company,
Huntmgton Park, CA
b PlastIc TrIm Stnps-
I) ReSIlIent vmyl as manufactured by Mercer PlastIc Co.
2) Equal as approved by ArchItect.
3
Floor Patchmg Compound:
a. Ardex K-15 by Ardex Inc, CoraopolIs (PIttsburgh), P A
b. Webpatch by Durabond ProfeSSIOnal Products Company
c. Equal as approved by ArchItect.
NotIfy ArchItect m wntmg If sub-floor base IS not acceptable. Do not lay carpet
over unsUItable surface.
2
Installation:
a. Seammg-
1) MInImIZe seams by runOIng roll m long dIrectIOn of rooms.
b. Restnct use of small pIeces of carpet to complete Job WIth carpet
avaIlable to small rooms other than offices.
Lavmg of Glue-Down Carpet
a Seal concrete WIth a sealer recommended by Carpet Manufacturer and
compatIble WIth adheSIve. Damp mop area of applIcatIOn.
May. 2002
O[~mpic Design WorksJ Inc. PS
I
b.
Tnm selvedge and two rows of pIle from longItudinal edges.
Cut two pieces of carpet to length plus tnm and lay in place formIng
seam by method recommended by Carpet Manufacturer. Snap a chalk
lIne to mark seam locatton.
Turn each pIece back approximately 3 feet from seam and spread
adheSIve uniformly for 2 feet each side of chalk lIne.
Unroll one pIece of carpet Into adheSIve. Roll out aIr bubbles towards
seam. Unroll second pIece toward seam and work cut edge Into adheSIve
to pIck up sufficIent adheslVe to "butter" seam. Roll out aIr bubbles In
second pIece toward seam.
Roll up un-cemented portIOn of first pIece toward seam. Apply adheSIve
and unroll carpet Into adheSIve. Roll out aIr bubbles away from seam.
Do likeWIse wIth second piece but omit adheSIve for 2 feet from un-
cemented edge where next seam WIll occur. Cut off excess carpet.
Cut next length of carpet and lay In place. Repeat InstallatIOn procedure.
Use seam adhesive along trimmed edges of seamed area.
At columns and other penetratIOns, cut carpet wIth maXImum possIble
overage. PosItion seams made by these cuts first.
Use carpet bars at exposed edges.
I
c.
I
I
d.
e.
f.
I
I
g.
h.
1.
I
J.
I
4.
Salvage:
a. Usable pIeces of carpet left over from installatIon are property of Owner.
Roll neatly and store In one locatIOn in bUIldIng. Remove scraps and
tnmmIngs from SIte.
I
I
END OF SECTION 09 680
09 900 PAINTING
I
GENERAL 1.
DIVIsion 09 GENERAL applies to this Sectton.
2.
Scope:
a. Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnish labor, materials, and eqUIpment necessary for finish of
interior and exterior surfaces and trim as indicated in the
Contract Documents.
b. Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Painttng mechanical eqUIpment specified in DiviSIOn 15
2) Back-primIng of soffit, fascia, and trim specIfied m DIVISIon 06.
I
I
I
3.
Product Delivery & Storage:
a. DelIver specIfied products in ongInal contamers WIth seals unbroken and
labels intact.
b. Store matenals In SIngle place.
c. Keep storage area clean and recttfy damage thereto. Maintain storage
area temperature at 55 deg F mInimum.
I
I
I
4. Environmental Conditions:
a. Perform paIntIng operattons at temperature condItions recommended by
Manufacturer for each operatton.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISIon 09 - FinIshes
May, 2002
Ol~mpic Design worksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIvIsIon 09 - FInishes
5.
Protection:
a. Remove all oily rags and waste from bUIlding each mght. Take every
precaution to avoid danger of fire.
b. Protect fimsh work and adjacent materIals dUrIng pamtmg
6
Products:
a. Lmseed 011, shellac, turpentme, and other pamtmg materIals shall be
pure, of highest quality, and bear IdentIfymg labels on contamers.
b. Tmtmg color shall be best grade of type recommended by Manufacturer
of paint or stam used on job.
c. Approved Manufacturers -
1) PPG Industries, PIttsburgh, P A
2) Fuller O'Brien, South San FrancIsco, CA
3) Parker Pamts, Tacoma, WA
4) Benjamin Moore, Montvale, NJ
5) Pratt & Lambert, Buffalo, NY
6) The Sherwm- Williams Company, Cleveland, OH
7) Martm-Senour Paints, Clevland, OH
d. For the purpose of this specificatIon, PPG PIttsburgh Pamts has been
hsted as the gUIde. Other approved manufactures shall submit
documentatIon WIth submIttals to assure conformance with products
specified.
7.
ExecutIOn:
a. PreparatIOn -
I) Examme Contract Documents for pamtmg requirements of other
trades. Become famihar with their painting prOVIsions and the
pamtmg of finish surfaces left unfimshed by the requirements of
other Sections.
2) Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of loose dIrt.
Clean and dust surfaces before pamting or finishing.
3) Wash metal surfaces with mineral spints to remove dIrt and
grease before applying materials. Where rust or scale is present,
use WIre brush or sandpaper to clean before painting. Clean
shop coats of paint that have become marred and touch up with
proper type primer.
4) Treat galvamzed metal and zmc surfaces as specified and in
accordance with Manufacturer's dIrections before applymg first
pamt coat. Perform adheSIon test to ensure bonding.
5) Sand smooth woodwork to be finished WIth enamel, stain, or
finish varnIsh. Clean surfaces before proceedmg with first coat
apphcatIOn.
6) Fill holes and cracks in surfaces to receIve paint or stam.
7) Backprime and endprime all exterior wood or other wood
subjected to mOIsture.
b. WorkmanshIp-
I) Carefully follow Specifications and color schedule, pamtmg
complete all surfaces to be painted.
2) Spread materials smoothly and evenly.
3) Do no exterIor paintmg WhIle surface IS damp, unless
recommended by Manufacturer, nor durmg ramy or frosty
weather. InterIor surfaces shall be dry before paintmg.
May, 2002
ol;gmpic Design Works, Inc. PS
I
c.
4) Putty naIl holes in wood after first coat usmg natural colored
type to match wood fimsh. Bring putty flush wIth adjoinmg
surfaces.
5) Fmished work shall be umform, of approved color, smooth, and
free from runs, sags, defectIve brushmg, rollmg, cloggmg, and
exceSSIve floodmg.
6) Read color schedule for rooms before pnmmg walls.
7) Touch up suctIon spots after applIcatIon of first coat.
8) Use fine sandpaper between coats to produce even, smooth
surfaces as needed to ensure adhesIOn.
9) Paint shall be thoroughly dry before applymg succeedmg coats
per manufacturer's instructions.
10) Make edges ofpamt adjolmng other matenals or colors clean,
sharp, and without overlappmg.
Protecting Other Surfaces -
Good pamting practice excludes splattenng, dnppmg or paintmg any
surfaces not intended to be painted. These Items WIll not be spelled out
in detail but special attention must be paId to the followmg _
1) Do not paint finish copper, bronze, chromium plate, mckel,
stainless steel, anodized aluminum, or metal except as explICitly
specified.
Adjustment & Cleaning-
I) At completIon of job, touch up work to match specIfied fimsh.
Repaint areas damaged dunng constructIon to specIfied fimsh at
no cost to Owner.
2) Upon completion of the work, remove pamt spots from floors,
walls, glass, or other surfaces and leave work clean, orderly, and
m acceptable conditIOn. Remove debns caused by work of thiS
Section from premises.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
d.
I
09910 EXTERJOR OPAQUE FINISHES
I
09913 paint on plam Iron & steel
I
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
2.
Includes but Not LImited To -
1) Steel brackets, handrails, guardrails, & mISC. metals m Base BId.
2) EXIstmg and ReplIcated Cast Iron Candelabrum and Globe
Fmlals in Bid Alternate #3
I
I
DeSign Cnteria:
a. Systems specified are in addItIon to prime coats proVIded by other
Sections.
Flat:
a. PIttsburgh Pamts -
1) First Coat - 6-208 or 6-212 Speed-hide Rust-mhIbltIve pnmer
2) Second Coat - 72-XXX Sunproof
3) Third Coat - 72-XXX Sunproof
PRODUCTS 1.
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIVISIOn 09 - FinIshes
I
I
I
May, 2002
O{~mpic Design works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
Gloss
a. PIttsburgh PaInts -
1) First Coat - 6-208 or 6-212 Speed-hIde Rust-InhIbItIve pnmer
2) Second Coat - 90-XXX DTM IndustrIal Enamel
3) ThIrd Coat - 90-XXX DTM Industnal Enamel
4)
See appropnate paragraphs of SectIOn 09 900.
EXECUTION 1.
09914 pamt on extenor ZInC galvanized metals
GENERAL
Scope
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
I) PaIntIng eXIstIng ZInC steel ornamental sheet metals In Base Bld
a) CornIce band at buIldIng pen meter
b) RefinishIng north pedIment
c) EXIstIng Conductor heads and Brackets
2) PaIntIng downspouts to match ornamental sheet metals In Base
BId.
3) PaIntIng zmc steel ornamental sheet metal PedIment, Scroll caps
and Crestmg leaf sets m BId Alternate #4.
4) Pamtmg zmc steel ornamental sheet metal conductor heads and
brackets m BId Alternate #6
PRODUCTS 1. Flat
a. PIttsburgh Pamts -
1) FIrst Coat - 6-209 Speed-hIde Galvanized Steel pnmer
2) Second Coat - 72-XXX Sunproof
2 Gloss'
a. PIttsburgh Pamts -
1) FIrst Coat - 6-209 Speed-hIde Galvanized Steel pnmer
2) Second Coat - 90-XXX DTM IndustrIal Enamel
EXECUTION 1.
See applIcable paragraphs of SectIOn 09 900.
a. Treat galvanized metal and z10c surfaces pnor to applY10g first coat of
pamt
b Pnme surface.
c. Note sand texture 10 ong1Oal coat1Ogs and match texture m new finish
coats.
09 915 pamt on extenor wood
GENERAL
Scope
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) Pamt10g and backpnm10g of extenor woods to 1Oclude'
a) mIscellaneous trIm and mold1Ogs 06 025
b) extenor wood faSCIas and barges 06 206
c) new and eXIstIng wood soffits
d) MIscellaneous as speCIfied elsewhere
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DI\'ISIOn 09 . Finishes
May, 2002
O{;9mpic Design works} Inc. PS
2.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1. Flat:
a. Pittsburgh Paints -
1) First Coat - 6-9 Speed-hide Extenor Wood Primer
2) Second Coat -72-XXX Sunproof
Semi-Gloss:
a. Pittsburgh Paints-
1) First Coat - 6-9 Speed-hide Extenor Wood Pnmer
2) Second Coat -78-XXX Sunproof 100% Acrylic
EXECUTION 1
See appropnate paragraphs m Section 09 900.
09 920 INTERIOR OP AOUE FINISHES
09 923 pamt on mterior drywall
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
Rest Rooms:
a. Pittsburgh Pamts -
1) First Coat - Pitt-Glaze Pigmented Sealer
2) Second Coat - Pitt-Glaze High SolIds Acrylic Epoxy
2.
Other Intenor Drywall:
a. Pittsburgh Paints or as mdicated below-
1) First Coat - 5-2 Speed-craft pnmer (Under Texture)
2) Second Coat - 5-2 Speed-craft pnmer (Over Texture)
3) Third Coat - 6-411 Speed-hide Eggshell (std.) or
Z-4191 Pratt & Lambert Acolade Velvet
See appropnate paragraphs of Section 09 900 General.
09 925' pamt on mtenor wood
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
1) Painting woodwork not requiring transparent fimsh.
Semi-Gloss:
a. Pittsburgh Pamts or as mdicated below -
1) First Coat - 6-6 Speed-hide Enamel Undercoater
2) Second Coat - 6-411 Speed-hide Eggshell (std.) or
Z-4191 Pratt & Lambert Acolade
See appropnate paragraphs of Section 09 900.
09 930 INTERIOR TRANSPARENT FINISHES
09 931 transparent fimsh on mterior softwood
GENERAL 1. Scope:
a. Includes but Not LImited To -
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISIon 09 - FInishes
May, 2002
o{~mpic Design works! Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
09 935
1) Stnppmg eXlstmg Wmdow sIlls and frames and Casework at
Stairway
2) Strippmg and refimshmg eXIsting downstaIrs doors and frames
per Base BId Door Schedule
3) Fmishing new intenor doors to match re-fimshed doors.
4) (Re)finishmg eXIsting and new wmdow sIlls, frames and sashes.
5) (Re )finishmg new and existmg Casework, StaIr, and Tnm at
Stairway and Entry
Approved Systems:
a. Pittsburgh Pamts or as mdicated below -
1) First Coat -77-1 REZ Sealer Primer
2) Second Coat -77-302 Interior SemI-transparent Stam
3) Third and Fourth Coats - 65-492 Rudd Sandmg Sealer
4) FIfth and SIxth Coats - 65-1420.70 Rudd Waterwhite 70% sheen
See appropriate paragraphs of SectIon 09900.
a. Fmishing of Doors -
1) Surfaces shall be clean and dry.
2) Sand hghtly to achieve smooth surface and clean before
applymg finish. Sand again between fourth, fifth and sIxth
coats.
3) Make certain surfaces are dry before applymg next coat.
4) Apply finish as soon as door IS fitted. Top and bottom edges
shall receIve at least two coats of PIttsburgh 6-10 sealer after
door has been fitted and IS ready to hang. Flmsh and refimsh
doors with no hardware applied to doors.
5) AVOId fimshmg too soon after a rain or damp weather and
during periods of hIgher than average humidity. Allow ample
tIme for wood to dry before applying finish.
transparent finish on exterior woods
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISIOn 09 - Finishes
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LimIted To -
1) Extenor Doors
Approved Systems:
a. Pittsburgh Paints or as indicated below -
1) First Coat - Daly's Benite Sealer Primer
2) Second Coat - Daly's Semi-transparent Stam
3) Third through Sixth Coats - Four (4) coats DIamond AcrylIc
Outdoor Finish
See appropriate paragraphs of SectIon 09 900.
END OF SECTION 09 900
May, 2002
Ol~mpic Design W orks/ Inc. PS
I
I
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
GENERAL
1.
00 General CondItIons and DIvisIOn 01 apply to thIS DlVlsIOn.
I
I
I
I
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) FurnIsh matenals, labor, and eqUIpment for completIon of Work
unless indIcated or noted otherwIse.
Related Work SpeCIfied Elsewhere -
1) ReqUIred blockmg m framed walls speCIfied m SectIon 06 100
b.
3.
Product Storage:
a. Store materials where adVIsed by Contractor to aVOId hmdenng work of
other SectIons and to aVOId damage or sOIlmg of matenals.
I
GENERAL
10260 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1. FurnIsh and install comer guards @ Elevator door Jambs
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
2.
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 10 - SpeCialtIes
2.
b. Related Work SpeCIfied Elsewhere -
1) InstallatIOn specified in Section 06 200.
2) Elevator Door Jamb specified in DIvision 14
Samples:
a. Comer Guards -
1) SubmIt two 24 mch sectIOns of comer guards Illustratmg
component deSIgn, configuration, color, and finish.
Manufacturers:
a. Subject to compliance with Project reqUIrements, Manufacturer's
offering Products which may be incorporated m the Work include the
followmg:
1) Baleo, Inc., Wichita, KS (316) 945-9328
2) ConstructIOn Specialties, Inc., Muncy, P A (717) 546-5941
3) Pawling Corporation, Pawling, NY (914) 373-9300
b. Substitutions: Permitted upon Architects approval.
Approved models:
a. Subject to complIance WIth requirements, prOVIde comer guards by one
of the followmg manufacturers:
1) Baleo, Inc.: Comer Guards Surface Mounted Type CGS-3, 590
2) Construction SpecialtIes, Inc. (CIS): Acrovyn - SM-20
3) PawlIng CorporatIOn: Pro-Tek Comer Guards Surface Mounted
CG-I0 with TC-I0
b.
Comer Guards: Snap-on covers of Class 1 fire-rated reSIlIent matenal,
minimum 0.078 inch thick, free-floated over contmuous aluminum
retainer, 0.063 mch thick, surface mounted and anchored to wall at 20
mches on center maximum; molded end caps color matched to covers.
May 2002
ol~mpic Design worksJ Inc. PS
EXECUTION I.
I
3.
I
Accessones:
a. ProvIde attachment accessones as recommended by wall and comer
guard manufacturer.
I
I
I
4.
Fabncatton:
a. Fabncate components wIth ttght Joints, comers, and seams.
b. Pre-dnll holes for attachment.
c. Form end tnm closure by cappmg and fimshmg smooth
InstallatIOn.
a. Install m accordance wIth manufacturer's publtshed mstructlOns, square
and plumb, secured ngldly m posItton.
b. Install @ all Elevator door jambs from sills upwards for 24" minimum to
prevent jamb damage from palettes moving through openings.
I
I
10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES
GENERAL
1.
I
DIVIsion 10 GENERAL appltes to this SectIOn.
2.
Scope:
a.
I
I
Related Work SpecIfied Elsewhere -
1) Exterior accessIble Entry IdenttficatlOn slgnage.
2) ADA Parkmg signage
3) Intenor room Occupancy slgnage.
4) ADA-compltant Room IdenttficatlOn slgnage.
10 430 EXTERIOR SIGNS
I
GENERAL
1.
I
I
I
2. SubmIttals:
a. Samples:
I) ADA Entry Identification Signage -
a) Provide 8W'x II" sample sign showing color, texture,
pattern, graphIc image process, text style and BraIlle.
PRODUCTS I.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISIOn 10 - SpecialtIes
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnish and install ADA-compliant AccessIble Entrance
Identtficatton signage.
2) ADA Parking Identtfication Slgnage
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) InstallatIon specIfied m Sectton 06 200.
b.
I
ADA Entry IdentIfication SIgnage: (2) total
a. Slgnage to be composed of engraved plasttc, adheSIve mounted.
b. Provide BraIlle text on each SIgn
c. Material: Cast acrylic sheet plastic
d. Size: 8Y2"x 11"
e. Color: To be selected by ArchItect from standard color hne.
f. Font: Anal
I
I
May 2002
O{~mpic Design WorksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1
I
I
I
2.
ADA Parkmg IdentificatIon Signage: (2) total
a. Signage to be reflectIve metal
b. Follow local requirements
Locate SignS where directed usmg mountmg methods specified.
2.
Install SignS square, plumb, level, true and at height mdlcated on drawmgs or as
dIrected by Architect wIth surfaces free from distortIOn or other defects m
appearance or functIon.
3. After mstallatIon, clean SOIled surfaces. Protect umts from damage until final
acceptance from Owner.
10 440 INTERIOR SIGNS
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVIsIon 10 - SpecIaltIes
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LimIted To -
1) Room Occupancy sIgnage.
2) ADA Room IdentIficatIon slgnage -
Related Work SpeCified Elsewhere -
1) InstallatIon specified in SectIon 06 200.
b.
2. Samples:
a. Room occupancy Signage -
1) PrOVide full-size sample of sign to be prOVided showmg color,
texture, pattern, graphiC image process, and text style.
b)
Room Identification Signage -
1) Provide sample sign showing color, texture, pattern, graphiC
image process, text style and Braille.
Occupancy Load Signs: (3) total
a. Meet requirements ofUBe or local junsdictions, whichever IS more
strict.
1) Verify verbiage With Architect
2.
Room IdentIficatIOn SignS: (2) total
a. Accessible Restroom signs meeting reqUIrements of ADA or local
junsdlctions, whichever is more StrICt.
Install signs square and plumb and m accordance with Manufacturer's
instructions and details and at location mdlcated by Architect or BUlldmg
OffiCial.
END OF SECTION 10400
May 2002
Ol;gmpic Design warksJ Inc. PS
I
10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
I
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
2.
3.
4.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIvIsion 10 - SpecIaltIes
DIvIsIon 10 GENERAL applies to this SectIon.
2
I
I
Scope.
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
I) Three (3) ExtIngUIshers wIth cabmets
3. CoordInate wIth SectIons involved for proper wall opemngs.
FIre ExtIngUIshers:
a. Umts shall be 5 pound nomInal capacIty dry powder pressunzed type
eqUIpped with pressure gauge that indIcates need for rechargIng.
b. instructIOns for repairs, maIntenance, and rechargIng shall be attached.
c. Umt shall be tested and approved by UL and have a mimmum 2A-lOB.C
UL ratIng. UL ratIng shall appear on extinguisher labels and be attached
to and a part of fire extinguisher umts.
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
FIre ExtIngUISher Cabinets:
a. CabInets shall be two-pIece non-lockIng, non-recessed type and have
steel tubs In baked enamel fimsh, and glass door Supply each cab met
WIth one fire extIngUIsher specIfied above.
b Metal and fimsh: Enameled steel
c. Door GlaZIng: Fully tempered float glass complYIng WIth ASTM
CI048, condItIon A, Type I, QualIty q3, KInd FT, and Class I (clear)
d. Identify cabinet with "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" silk-screen letterIng
applIed to door. ProvIde lettenng to comply with authoritIes having local
JunsdIctIOn for letter style, SIze, color spacing and locatIon.
Prepare wall surfaces for cabinets as reqUIred by type and SIze of cabInets and
style of trim and follow Manufacturer's instructions for mounting.
I
Mount where dIrected by authority havIng local junsdIction.
I
I
I
Securely mount cabInets and hangers plumb WIth wall surfaces.
Tnm for cabInets shall be neat In appearance.
END OF SECTION 10 520
I
I
May 2002
O{~W1pic Design W orksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10800 TOILET & BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
GENERAL
1.
DIVlsIOn 10 GENERAL applies to thIS SectIon.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not LImIted To -
1) FurnIsh items listed on Interior Elevations.
Related Work SpecIfied Elsewhere -
1) Installation specIfied in SectIon 06 200.
b.
3. SubmIttals:
a. Submit schedule showing Items used, location where mstalled, and
conformance with Contract Documents.
PRODUCTS 1.
Approved Products:
a. See Intenor ElevatIOns for FIxture and Accessory LISt.
EXECUTION 1.
Install Items m accordance wIth Manufacturer's mstructIOns. ProVIde mountmg
devIces proper for base structure.
2.
Locate as shown on Drawmgs.
END OF SECTION 10 800
END OF DIVISION 10
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIVISIOn 10 - Specialties
May 2002
O{~mpic Design Works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
NO REQUIREMENTS
END OF DIVISION 11
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvIsIOn J J - EquIpment
May 2002
o{~mpic Design worksJ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
NO REQUIREMENTS
END OF DIVISION 12
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISIon 12 - Furnlshmgs
May 2002
Ol~mpjc Design works, Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NO REQUIREMENTS
END OF DIVISION 13
Port Angcles Carneglc LIbrary
DIVISIon 13 -SpecIal ConstructIOn
May 2002
O{;9mpic Design works, Inc. PS
I
I
nrvrsrON 14 CONVFVrNf; SYSTEMS
I
14 200 Fr ,FV A TORS
I
]4245 HYDRAlJI-IC PASSENGER ELEVATORS
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
&ope:
a. Includes But Not LImited To-
1) Elevator machmery.
2) Control system and sIgnal equipment.
3) Rough car enclosure.
4) Elevator car finishes.
5) Hoistway entrances.
6) Guides and safety equipment.
7) Testing and inspectIon of elevator systems.
8) Maintenance service.
b. Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
I) Concrete work, including settmg of inserts specified m SectIOn 03 300.
2) Rough sIlls at hoistway entrances specified in Section 05 100
3) PIt ladder specified m Section 05 500.
4) Heating, ventIlating, and cooling ofmachme rooms specified in Division
15.
5) ElectrIcal power to machine room specified m DIvIsIon 16.
6) FIre alarm system specified in Division 16.
2.
Snhmitta Is:
a. Product Data-
1) Submit for each pnncipal component or product, including but not
limited to the following:
]4240 HYORAIJT -Ie ELEV ATORS
I
I
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
1.
Scope.:
a. Includes but Not LImIted to- Hydraulic passenger elevators as shown and specIfied.
Elevator work mcludes:
1) Commercial, standard pre-engineered hydraulic passenger elevators.
2) Elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances and signal eqUIpment.
3) Jacks.
4) OperatIon and control systems.
5) Accessibility provisions for physically disabled persons.
6) Equipment, machmes, controls, systems and devices as reqUIred for safely
operating the specified elevators at their rated speed and capacity.
7) Matenals and accessories as reqUIred to complete the elevator mstallation.
b. Related Work speCIfied elsewhere:
1) Division 3 Concrete
a. Installing mserts, sleeves and anchors in concrete.
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DiVISIOn ] 4 - Conveymg Systems
May 2002
ol>>mPic DesifPt Works Inc) PS
I
SlIhmltta Is.
a. Product data: SubmIt product data for the folloWIng:
1) Elevator car enclosures and hoistway entrances.
2) Operation, control, and signal systems.
b. Shop drawings:
1) Show eqUIpment arrangement In the machIne room, pIt and hOlstway. ProvIde
plans, elevatIons, sections and details of assembly, erectIOn, anchorage, and
equipment location.
2) Indicate elevator system capacitIes, sizes, performances, s.afety features,
finishes and other pertInent information.
3) Show floors served, travel distances, maximum loads Imposed on the bUIldIng
structure at points of support and all similar consideratIons of the elevator
Work.
4) IndIcate electrIcal power reqUIrements and branch CIrcUIt protectIOn deVIce
recommendations.
c. Color selection: Submit color charts of exposed finishes and matenals for color
selection.
1) When requested, submIt samples of exposed fimshes and materials selected
for the elevator system matenals and components.
d. CertIficates: Inspection and acceptance certIficates of elevator system InstallatIOn.
2.
e.
3.
I
2)
I
DIviSIOn 5 Metals:
a ProvIdIng pIt ladder
b. ProvIdIng steel angle sIll supports and groutIng hOlstway entrance SIlls
and frames.
DiVIsion 9 FInishes:
a. Shop pnmed ferrous matenals.
DIVISIOn 10 Specialties
a. ProvIde comer guards for bottom of elevator door Jambs per 10 260
DIViSIon 15 Mechanical:
a. Sump pIt and oil Interceptor.
b. HeatIng and ventIlatIng hoistways and machIne rooms.
DiVIsion 16 Electrical:
a. PrOVIding electrIcal service to elevators, Including fused dIsconnect
switches.
b. Emergency power supply, transfer SWItch and auxihary contacts.
c. Heat and smoke sensing devices.
d. Convenience outlets and IllummatIOn m machIne room, hOlstway and
pIt.
I
3)
I
4)
5)
I
6)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
OperatIOn and maintenance data. Include the follOWIng:
1) Operation and maintenance InstructIons.
2) Parts lIst, with recommended parts inventory.
I
I
QlIalIty AsslIrance.
a. Manufacturer Quahfications: An approved manufacturer regularly engaged in
manufacturing, installing, and servicing elevators of the type required for the project.
1) The manufacturer of the machIne, controller, SIgnal fixtures, door operators
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIViSIOn 14 - Conveying Systems
I
May 2002
Ol;9>>fpic Design wOTks Inc, PS
I
I
4. Deltvery, Stora~ Anci Hanciline'
a. DelIver elevator materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protectIve
packaging.
b. Store materials in a dry protected area provided by others. Protect and handle
matenals in accordance with manufacturer's recommendatIOns to prevent damage,
soiling, or deterioration.
5. Project Conciitions'
a. Prohibited Use: Elevators shall not be used for any purpose dunng the construction
period before Substantial Completion.
b. Painting:
1) Except as otherwIse specIfied, paint all metal work proVIded by the elevator
manufacturer and installer.
2) Provide all ferrous metals mstalled m the hoistway shop pnmed WIth a rust
inhibitIve primer.
c. ProVIde the hole for the jack unit if required by the type of jack provided, based on
excavatIon through normal soil or clay which can be removed by manual digging or
by standard truck-mounted regular drilling unit. Provide a casing If required to
retain the walls of the hole. General contractor shall remove excavation spOIls
deposited in the elevator pit.
I) If a phYSIcal obstruction or hindrance is encountered below the ground
surface, mcluding boulders, rock, gravel, wood, metal, pIlIngs, sand, water,
quick sand, caves, public utilities or any other foreign material, obtam wntten
authorization to proceed WIth excavatmg usmg specIal excavation eqUIpment.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DiVIsion 14 - Conve}'lng Systems
b.
cab, entrances, and all other major parts of the elevator operating equipment.
a) The major parts of the elevator eqUIpment shall be manufactured in the
Umted States, and not be an assembled system.
2) The manufacturer shall have a documented, on-gomg qualIty assurance
program.
Installer QualIfications: The manufacturer or an authonzed agent of the
manufacturer WIth not less than five years of satisfactory experience mstalling
elevators equal in character and performance to the project elevators.
Regulatory ReqUIrements:
1) ASME A 17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, latest edItIon or as
reqUIred by the local building code.
2) UBC Buildmg Code, latest adopted edItIon.
3) NFP A 70 National ElectrIcal Code.
4) NFP A 80 Fire Doors and Windows.
5) Americans WIth DisabilitIes Act - AccessIbilIty Guidelines (ADAAG).
Fire-rated entrance assemblies: Opening protectIve assemblIes including frames,
hardware, and operation shall comply with ASTM E2074, CAN4-S 1 04 (ULC-
S104), ULlO(b), and NFPA Standard 80. Provide entrance assembly units bearmg
Class B or 1 Y2-hour label by a Nationally RecognIzed Testing Laboratory
Inspection and testmg: Elevator Installer shall obtain and pay for all required
mspectIons, tests, permits and fees for elevator installatIOn.
1) Arrange for inspections and make required tests.
2) Deliver to the Owner upon completion and acceptance of elevator work.
c.
d.
e.
May 2002
ol~c Desi(pt Works Inc} PS
PRODUCTS
2)
3)
Maintain a daily log of time and matenal costs mvolved.
Elevator contractor wIll be compensated on a time and matenal basIs for
addItional costs mcurred after encountenng the physIcal obstruction or
hmdrance, mcludmg the cost of the specIal excavatIOn eqUIpment.
6.
Warranty.
a Warranty: SubmIt elevator manufacturer's standard wrItten Warranty agreemg to
repair, restore or replace defects m elevator Work matenals and workmanshIp not
due to ordmary wear and tear or improper use or care for 12 months from date of
Substantial Completion
7.
M::Iinten::lnce.
a. Furrnsh maintenance and call back servIce for a penod of 3 months for each elevator
from date of SubstantIal CompletIOn. ServIce shall consIst of penodIc examination
of the equipment, adjustment, lubrication, cleaning, supphes and parts to keep the
elevators in proper operatIon.
1) Mamtenance work, mcluding emergency call back repaIr servIce, shall be
performed by trained employees ofthe elevator contractor dunng regular
working hours.
2) Submit parts catalog and show eVIdence oflocal parts mventory WIth
complete hst of recommended spare parts. Parts shall be produced by
manufacturer of original eqUIpment.
3) Manufacturer shall have a service office and full time serVIce personnel
within a 100 rmle radius of the Project SIte.
1.
Manllf::lctllrers.
a. Manufacturer: Thyssen-Krupp Elevator, Memphis, TN (662) 393-2110
1) No SubstItutes Allowed.
2. M::Jteriak
a. Colors, patterns, and finishes: As selected by the ArchItect from manufacturer's full
range of standard colors, patterns, and finishes.
b. Steel:
1) Shapes and bars: ASTM A 36.
2) Sheet: ASTM A 366, cold-rolled steel sheet, commercial quahty, Class I,
matte finish, stretcher leveled.
c. Stainless steel:
1) Shapes and bars: ASTM A 276, Type 300 (18-8).
2) Tubing: ASTM A 269, Type 300 (18-8).
3) Sheet:
d. Bronze:
1) Drawn pipe: ASTM B 43, alloy UNS C23000, red brass.
2) Sheet: ASTM B 36, alloy UNS C28000, muntz metal.
3) Extrusions: ASTM B 455, alloy UNS C38500, architectural bronze.
e. Aluminum:
1) Sheet and plate: ASTM B 209, alloy 6063-T52.
2) Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T52.
f. Nickel silver:
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 14 - Conveying Systems
May 2002
ol~pic Design Works Iltc, PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
I
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
I.
1
1
3.
g.
I) ASTM B 151 extrusions, alloy UNS No. C74500, polished finish.
PlastIc lamInate:
I) DecoratIve hIgh-pressure type, complYIng wIth NEMA LD3, Type GP-50
General Purpose Grade, nomInal 0.050" thIckness.
Glass:
I) Clear lamInated safety glass, complYIng wIth ANSI Z97.1, nomInal 9/16"
thickness.
Carpet:
I) Manufacturer's standard Herculon IV color fast, stain and soIl resIstant, Jute-
backed carpet. Class B fire-resistance rating when tested in accordance wIth
ASTM E 84 Available in four colors.
h.
1.
HOIstway EquIpment.
a. EqUIpment Room Slab:
I) See DIvision 03, Structural Concrete Slabs
b. Slmg:
1) Steel stiles affixed to a steel crosshead and bolstered with bracing members to
remove strain from the car enclosure.
c. GUIde Rails:
I) Steel, omega shaped, fastened to the bUIldIng wIth steel brackets.
d. GUIde Shoes:
I) Slide gUIdes shall be mounted on top and bottom ofthe car.
e. GUIde RaIl Lubricators:
1) Provide a leakproofreservoir on top of upper guide shoes. Wool felt wIper
shall apply an even, uniform flow oflubricant which shall thoroughly cover
face of guide rail.
f. Buffers:
I) Provide substantial buffers in the elevator pIt. Mount buffers on continuous
channels fastened to the elevator guide raIl or securely anchored to the pit
floor. Provide extensions if required by project condItions.
g.
Jack:
I)
2)
3)
4)
Jack unit shall be of sufficient size to lift the gross load the height specIfied.
Factory test jack to insure adequate strength and freedom from leakage.
Brittle material, such as gray cast iron, is prohIbIted In the jack construction.
Jack unit shall consist of the followmg components:
a) Heavy seamless steel tubIng plunger accurately turned and polished.
b) Stop ring shall be electncally welded to the plunger to prevent plunger
leaving the cylinder.
c) Internal guIde bearing.
d) PackIng or seal of suitable design and qualIty.
e) Dnp nng around cylinder top.
t) Cylinder made of steel pipe and provided with a pipe connectIon and
air bleeder.
g) Weld brackets to the jack cylinder for supporting the elevator on pIt
channels.
h) An auxiliary safety bulkhead shall be provided In the lower end of the
cylinder.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISIon 14 - Conveying Systems
May 2002
ol~c Design Works Inc} PS
I
4
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvision 14 - Conveying Systems
I
h.
i) CorrosIOn protection for the Jack cylmder by encasmg the entIre length
of the cylinder below ground with plastIc auxIliary casmg.
Automatic Terminal Limits:
1) Place electric limit sWitches in the hOIstway near the tennmallandmgs. Limit
sWitches shall be deSigned to cut off the electnc current and stop the car If It
runs beyond either termmallandmg.
AutomatIc Self-Levelmg:
1) Provide each elevator car WIth a self-Ievelmg feature to automatIcally brmg
the car to the floor landIngs and correct for overtravel or undertravel. Self-
levelIng shall, within its zone, be automatic and Independent of the operatmg
deVIce. The car shall be mamtained approximately level WIth the landmg
irrespective of ItS load.
Failure Protection:
1) DeSIgn electrIcal control CIrCUIt so If a malfunction occurs, due to motor
starter faIlure, oil becoming low In the system, or the car falling to reach a
landIng in the up dIrection WIthin a pre-determined time, the elevator car WIll
automatically descend to the lowest terminallandmg. If power operated doors
are used, the doors WIll automatically open when the car reaches that landing
to allow passengers to depart. The doors will then automatically close and all
control buttons, except the "door open" button In the Cal statIOn, shall be made
inoperative.
Wmng, PIpIng, and 011:
1) ProvIde all necessary hOIstway wmng in accordance WIth the National
Electncal Code. All necessary pIpe and fittmgs shall connect the power umt
to the Jack unit. PrOVIde proper grade 011.
Emergency Terrnmal Stopping DeVIce:
1) PrOVIde emergency terminal stopping devices for speeds over 100 FPM. The
emergency terminal stopping deVIce shall operate Independently of the normal
terminal stopping device if it fails to slow down the car at the termInal as
intended. StoppIng deVIces shall not be prevented from functIOning by a
smgle short circuit caused by a combination of grounds or by other
conditions.
a) Normal and emergency termInal stoppIng devices shall not control the
same controller switches unless two or more separate and Independent
switches are furnIshed, two or which shall be closed m eIther dIrectIOn
of travel to complete the CIrCUIt to the control valve solenOIds In the
down directIOn and to complete the CIrCUIt to the pump motor for the up
dIrection of travel.
I
I
1.
I
I
J.
I
I
I
k.
I
1.
I
I
I
I
I
Power 1 Jmt.
a. Power Vmt (011 PumpIng and Control Mechamsm): A self-contaIned unit consisting
of the follOWIng Items:
1) Oil reservOIr with tank cover and controller compartment with cover.
2) An oil hydraulic pump.
3) An electnc motor.
4) 011 control unit with the following components bUIlt into SIngle hOUSIng; high
pressure relief valve, check valve, automatIC unloadIng up start valve,
lowering and leveling valve, and magnetic controller.
I
I
I
May 2002
ol~c Design works Inc} PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 14 - Conveying Systems
b.
Pump:
I) POSitive displacement type pump specifically manufactured for OII-hydrauhc
elevator service. Pump shall be deSigned for steady discharge with mimmum
pulsatIOn to give smooth and qUlet operation.
2) Output of pump shall not vary more than 10 percent between no load and full
load on the elevator car
Dnve:
I) Dnve shall be by direct couphng with the pump and motor submerged m the
011 reservoir or by multiple V -belts and sheaves of number and size to msure
maximum factor of safety.
2) Dnve type shall be determined based primanly on the load on the car, travel,
and speed.
Motor:
I) Standard manufacture motor specifically deSigned for oil-hydraulic elevator
servIce.
2) Duty ratmg shall comply WIth speCified speeds and loads.
OIl Control Umt:
I) The following components shall be built into a single housmg. Welded
manifolds with separate valves to accomplIsh each function are not
acceptable. Adjustments shall be accessible and be made without removmg
the assembly from the 011 line.
a) Rehefvalve shall be externally adjustable and be capable of bypassing
the total oIl flow without increasmg back pressure more than 10 percent
above that required to barely open the valve.
b) Up start and stop valve shall be externally adjustable and deSIgned to
bypass 011 flow during start and stop of motor pump assembly. Valve
shall close slowly, gradually diverting oil to or from the jack unit,
ensuring smooth up starts and up stops.
c) Check valve shall be designed to close quietly without permlttmg any
perceptible reverse flow.
d) Lowering valve and levelIng valve shall be externally adjustable for
drop-away speed, lowering speed, levelIng speed and stopping speed to
ensure smooth "down" starts and stops. The levelIng valve shall be
designed to level the car to the floor in the direction the car is traveling
when slowdown is initiated.
Power controller shall contam electrical contactors, electro-mechanical SWItches and
thermal overload relays. Mount components m a NEMA I enclosure. LOgiC control
system shall be mICroprocessor based and protected from environmental extremes
and exceSSIve Vibrations.
Startmg:
1) PrOVIde sohd state.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
HOI~tway Fn1Tance~'
a. Doors and Frames:
1) Provide complete hollow metal type hOlstway entrances at each hoistway
openmg.
a) Manufacturer's entrance design consisting of 14 gauge frames with 2
inch (50 mm) profile, 16 gauge doors, hangers, hanger supports, hanger
May 2002
O(~c Design works II1C, PS
Car Fnclosllre'
a. Car Enclosure:
I) Walls: Cab type DLP, durable wood core finished on both sides wIth hIgh
pressure plastIc lammate
2) Canopy:
1) Remforced 14 gauge cold-rolled steel with hinged eXIt.
2) Finish: Two coats factory applied reflective baked enamel
3) CeIhng:
I) Suspended type, fluorescent lightmg with translucent dIffuser mounted
m a metal baked enamel frame at 7'-4" (2235 mm) above the fimshed
floor.
a. Metal fimsh: Steel, factory applied baked enamel fimsh.
Cab Columns and Front: Stainless steel: ASTM A 167, Type 300 stamless
steel panels, No.4 satin fimsh
Doors: Horizontal slidmg car doors reinforced WIth steel for panel ngIdIty
b.
c.
6.
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISIon 14 - Conveymg Systems
I
b)
covers, fascIa plates, SIght guards, and necessary hardware.
Elevator wall interface WIth hoistway entrance assembly shall comply
WIth elevator manufacturer's requirements.
Doors:
1. Flush construction
2. Stamless steel: ASTM A 167, Type 300 stamless steel panels,
No.4 satin fimsh
Frames:
1. Formed constructIon.
2. Stamless steel: ASTM A 167, Type 300 stamless steel panels,
No.4 satin fimsh
Transom: No transom.
I
c)
I
I
d)
I
I
e)
Interlocks:
I) Equip each hoistway entrance WIth an approved type mterlock tested as
reqUIred by code.
Interlock shall be desIgned to prevent operatIOn of the car away from the
landmg untIl the doors are locked in the closed pOSItIon as defined by code
and shall prevent opemng the doors at any landmg from the comdor SIde
unless the car IS at rest at that landmg or IS m the leveling zone and stopping at
that landing.
Door Hanger and Tracks:
1) Provide sheave type two pomt suspensIOn hangers and tracks for each
hOlstway shdmg door.
a) Sheaves: Polyurethane tIres with ball bearings properly sealed to retam
grease.
Hangers: PrOVIde an adjustable slide to accommodate the up-thrust of
the doors.
Tracks: Drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to
the hanger sheaves.
Hoistway Stlls: Extruded, with grooved surface, 1/4 mch (6.4 mm)
thIckness
I. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 alummum, mIll fimsh.
2)
I
I
I
b)
I
c)
I
d)
I
I
I
I
I
4)
I
5)
May 2002
ol;.;mpic Design W'orks Inc} PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hang doors on sheave type hangers wIth polyurethane tIres that roll on a
polIshed steel track and are guIded at the bottom by non-metallIc shoes slIdIng
In a smooth threshold groove.
1. Door FInIsh: Steel: ASTM A 366 steel panels, factory-applIed baked
enamel finIsh.
2. Cab SIlls: Extruded, WIth grooved surface, 1/4 Inch (6.4 mm)
thickness.
a. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 alumInum, mIll finIsh.
6) HandraIl: Metal bar, 2" wide, Stamless Steel no. 4. ProvIde at rear wall only.
7) VentilatIon: Two speed exhaust fan mounted on the car top.
8) Pad Buttons: ProVIde pad buttons on cab frontes) and walls.
1. Provide one set of vinyl protection pads for the project.
9) Base: no base
10) Finished Floor: Manufacturer's standard carpet
b.
Car Top InspectIOn:
1) ProVIde a car top inspection statIon WIth an "emergency stop" sWItch and
constant pressure "up-down" direction buttons to make the normal operatIng
devices inoperative and give the Inspector complete control of the elevator.
2) Mount the car top inspection station In the door operator assembly.
7.
Door Operntion'
a. Door Operation: Provide a direct current motor driven heavy-duty operator deSIgned
to operate the car and hOlstway doors simultaneously. Door movements shall be
electrically cushIOned at both lImits of travel and the door operatIng mechanIsm shall
be arranged for manual operation in event of power faIlure. Doors shall
automatically open when the car amves at the landing and automatIcally close after
an adjustable time interval or when the car is dispatched to another landIng. Direct
drive geared operators, AC controlled umts WIth oil checks, or other deviatIOns are
not acceptable.
1) No Un-necessary Door Operation: Car door shall open only If the car IS
stopping for a car or hall call, anSwerIng a car or hall call at the present
position or selected as the next car up.
2) Door Open TIme Saver: If a car is stoppIng in response to a car call
assignment only (no coincident hall call), the current door hold open tIme is
changed to a shorter field programmable time when the electrOnIC door
protectIon device is actIvated.
3) Double Door Operation: When a car stops at a landmg with concurrent up
and down hall calls, no car calls, and no other hall call assignments, the car
door opens to answer the hall tall in the directIon of the car's current travel. If
an onward car call is not registered before the door closes to WIthIn 6 Inches
of fully closed, the travel will reverse and the door WIll reopen to answer the
other call.
4) Nudging Operation: The doors shall remaIn open as long as the electrOnIC
detector senses the presence of a passenger or object In the door openIng. If
door movement IS obstructed for a field programmable tIme, a buzzer will
sound and the doors WIll close at reduced speed. If the Infra-red door
protectIOn system detects a person or object whIle closing, the doors WIll stop
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISIOn 14 - Conveymg Systems
May 2002
O(~pic Design' wo-rks Inc} PS
I
I
b.
and resume closmg after the obstructIon has been removed.
5) LImIted Door Reversal: If the doors are closing and an mfra-red beam is
mterrupted, the doors WIll reverse and reopen partIally. After the obstructIon
is cleared, the doors WIll begm to close.
6) Door Open Sentmel: If the doors are openmg, but do not fully open after a
field adjustable tIme, the doors WIll recycle closed then open SIX tImes to try
and correct the fault.
7) Door Close Sentmel: If the doors are closing, but do not fully close after a
field adjustable tIme, the doors WIll recycle open then close SIX tImes to try
and correct the fault.
8) Door Close ASSISt: When the doors have faIled to fully close and are in the
recycle mode, the door dnve motor shall have Increased torque applIed to
pOSSIbly overcome mechanical reSIstance or dIfferential air pressure and allow
the door to close.
Door Protection DeVIces: ProVIde a door protectIon system USing 40 mICroprocessor
controlled infra-red light beams. The beams shall project across the car opening
detectmg the presence of a passenger or object. If door movement is obstructed, the
doors shall ImmedIately reopen. A mechamcal reopemng deVIce is not acceptable.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8.
Car Operating StatIon'
a. Car Operatmg Station, General: The main car control in each car shall contain the
devices reqUIred for specific operation mounted m stainless steel no. 4 integral SWIng
return panel requmng no applied faceplate. The panel shall consist of a series of
modules, inclIned 20 degrees from vertIcal for optimum VIewmg and accessibIlIty
1) The lowest module shall contam the "door open," "door close," "alarm"
buttons and a keyed "emergency stop" switch.
2) Intermediate modules shall contain floor buttons WhICh illummate when a call
is registered and remain illuminated until the call is answered. Raised floor
indicatIons and handicap symbols shall be located immedIately adjacent to the
floor buttons and be fully mtegrated in the module deSIgn. No applied
symbols or floor indicatIons or symbols on the buttons shall be perrrutted.
3) The next module shall contain reqUIred SWItches.
4) The top module shall contam fire servIce features m accordance WIth ASME
A 17.1, Rule 211.3, Includmg operating instructIOns.
b. POSItion IndIcator: An electromc dot matrix position indicator mclined 20 degrees
from vertical and mounted in a module matching the control panel for optimum
VIewmg. As the car travels, ItS pOSItion in the hoistway shall be indicated by the
Illumination of the alpha/numenc character corresponding to the landing which the
elevator IS stopped or passing.
c. Emergency LIght: An emergency lIght and capaCIty plate shall be Integrated Into a
module inclIned 20 degrees from vertical. Emergency lIght shalllllummate
automatically upon loss of the bUIlding's normal power supply.
d. Emergency CommumcatIons System: Provide an emergency communicatIOns
deVIce mounted In the swmg return. Emergency commumcations device shall
comply WIth Americans with DisabIlItIes Act (ADA) reqUIrements.
e. AUXIlIary Operating Panel: not applIcable in thiS applIcatIon.
f. Column Mounted Car Rldmg Lantern: A car ndmg lantern shall be mstalled in the
elevator cab and located In the entrance. The lantern, when illuminated, will indIcate
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIVISIon 14 - Conveymg Systems
May 2002
ol~pic Design Works Inc, PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the mtended directIOn of travel. The lantern wllllllummate and a sIgnal wIll sound
when the car arrives at a floor where It wIll stop. The lantern shall remain
Illummated until the door(s) begm to close.
g. SpecIal Accessories:
1) Independent servIce sWItch.
2) InspectIon SWItch.
3) Two speed fan/light switch.
4) Telephone jack.
5) Certificate frame.
9.
rontTol Systems'
a. Controller: The elevator control system shall be mIcroprocessor based and software
oriented and be hnked together for purposes of commumcatIon by a senal
communications hnk. Control ofthe elevator shall be automatIc in operatIOn by
means of push buttons in the car numbered to correspond to floors served, for
regIstering car stops, and by "up-down" push buttons at each mtermedlate landmg
and "call" push buttons at terminallandmgs.
1) Momentary pressing of one or more buttons shall dIspatch the car to the
deSIgnated landmgs m the order in whIch the landmgs are reached by the car,
irrespective of the sequence m whIch the buttons are pressed. Each landmg
call shall be canceled when answered.
2) When the car is traveling In the up dIrection, it shall stop at all floors for
which car buttons or "up" hall buttons have been pressed. The car shall not
stop at floors where "down" buttons have been pressed, unless the stop for
that floor has been registered by a car button or unless the down call is at the
hIghest floor for which any buttons have been pressed. Pressing the "up"
button when the car is travelIng in the down direction shall not mtercept the
travel unless the stop for that floor has been registered by a car button or
unless the up call is the lowest for WhICh any button has been pressed.
3) When the car has responded to its highest or lowest stop, and stops are
registered for the opposite direction, ItS dIrection of travel shall reverse
automatically and it shall then answer the calls regIstered for that dIrectIon. If
both up and down calls are regIstered at an mtermedlate floor, only the call
correspondmg to the dIrectIon of car travel shall be canceled upon the
stopping of the car at the landIng.
b. MIcroprocessor: Locate the main mIcroprocessor and car controller m the elevator
machine room.
I) Microprocessor door operator shall reside in the door operator and control all
functIons of the elevator door(s).
2) Electromc selector shall resIde'on the car top and con tam hall effect
transducers that detect magnetIc fields. Magnets, corresponding to floor
positions and toplbottom ofhoistway are mounted on a perforated metal tape
that runs the length of the hOlstway.
c. Group Operation: Not applicable in thIS apphcation.
d. PrOVIde a key operated switch m the elevator for the purpose of removing the car
from normal operation. When the switch IS in the "independent service" position,
the elevator will bypass all landing calls and answer only car calls. The operator wIll
have complete control over the operatIon of the car.
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DIVISIOn 14 - ConveYIng Systems
May 2002
ol~pic Design works Inc) PS
I
EXECUTION 1.
e. Emergency Power 10D-OC: In the event of a normal power supply faIlure, the
elevator system shall be arranged to lower from an emergency power supply. The
emergency power supply shall consist of a battery furnished by the elevator
contractor The elevator contractor shall proVIde circUItry so after normal power
failure and establIshment of emergency power, each elevator shall lower to a field
adjustable return landmg and park WIth the doors closed. If the designated return
landmg IS above the current positIon, the elevator shall run down to the next lower
landmg and park WIth the doors closed.
10.
Ha 11 StatIOns'
a. Hall StatIons, General: Buttons shall Illummate to indIcate call has been regIstered
at that floor for the mdicated dIrectIon. Faceplates shall be stamless steel no. 4.
ProVIde one set of rIsers.
1) Each terminal statIon shall con tam one Illummatmg push button.
2) Each mtermedIate statIon shall conSIst of two Illuminating pushbuttons, one
for the up dIrection and one for the down pOSItion.
3) Phase 1 firefighters servIce key SWItch, with instructIons, shall be
mcorporated into the hall statIon at the deSIgnated level.
b. Floor IdentIficatIOn Pads: Provide door Jamb pads at each floor. Jamb pads shall
comply wlth Americans with DIsabIlitIes Act (ADA) requirements.
c. Hall POSItion IndIcator: A dot matrix positIon indicator shall be proVIded and
mclmed 20 degrees from vertical and mounted in a module for optimum viewing.
As the car travels, its' position in the hoistway shall be indIcated by the illumination
of the alpha/numeric character correspondmg to the landmg which the elevator IS
stopped or passmg. When hall lanterns are proVIded, the positIOn indicator shall be
combined with the hall lanterns m the same faceplate.
1) Hall PositIOn fudIcator: column.
2) Faceplates shall match hall statIons
11.
Misce11aneolls Elevator C:omponents.
a. Oil Hydraulic SIlencer: Install an oil hydraulIc sIlencer (muffler device) at the
power unIt locatIOn. SIlencer shall contam pulsatIOn absorbing material inserted in a
blowout proofhousmg arranged for inspectmg interior parts without remOVIng umt
from OIl lme. Rubber hose WIthout blowout proof features wIll not be acceptable.
b. VIbratIOn Pads: Mount VIbratIOn pads under the power unit assembly to isolate the
unit from the bUlldmg structure.
c. Sound Insulating Panels: When pump and motor are not submerged, provide panels
manufactured of reinforced 14 gauge steel with 1 inch (25 rom) thick 1-1/2 pound
fiberglass core attached to mterior and mounted on all four open SIdes of the power
umt frame.
d. Sound Isolatmg Couplmgs: When pump and motor are not submerged, install a
mmImum of two couplings m the O1llme in the machme room between pump and
jack.
ExammatlOn'
a. Before startmg elevator installatIon, mspect h01stway, hoistway openings, pits and
machme rooms, as constructed, verIfy all CrItIcal dimenSIOns, and examme
supportmg structures and all other condItions under whIch elevator work IS to be
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIVISIon 14 - Conveymg Systems
May 2002
olympic Design Works Inc, PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
b.
installed. Do not proceed wIth elevator mstallatIon untIl unsatIsfactory condItIOns
have been corrected m a manner acceptable to the mstaller.
InstallatIOn constItutes acceptance of eXIstmg condItIons and responSIbIlIty for
satIsfactory performance.
2.
Jnsta lIatJon'
a. Install elevator systems components and coordmate installation ofhOlstway wall
constructIon.
1) Work shall be performed by competent elevator InstallatIOn personnel m
accordance WIth ASME A 17.1, manufacturer's mstallatIon mstructIOns and
approved shop drawings.
2) Comply with the National ElectrIcal Code for electrIcal work reqUired dunng
installatIon.
b. Perform work with competent, skIlled workmen under the direct control and
supervIsion of the elevator manufacturer's expenenced foreman.
c. Supply in ample time for installatIOn by other trades, mserts, anchors, beanng plates,
brackets, supports, and bracmg including all setting templates and diagrams for
placement.
d. Welded constructIOn: Provide welded connectIons for installation of elevator work
where bolted connectIons are not reqUIred for subsequent removal or for normal
operatIon, adjustment, inspection, maIntenance, and replacement of worn parts.
Comply with A WS standards for workmanship and for qualIfication ofweldmg
operators.
e. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with the work of other trades, for proper
time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks, lInes, and levels
designated by the Contractor, to ensure dImensional coordinatIon of the work.
f. Install machInery, guides, controls, car and all eqUIpment and accessones to prOVIde
a quiet, smoothly operating Installation, free from side sway, OSCIllation or vibratIOn.
g. Sound isolation: Mount rotating and vibratIng elevator equipment and components
on vibration-absorption mounts, designed to effectively prevent the transmiSSIOn of
vibratIons to the structure, and eliminate sources of structure-borne nOIse from the
elevator system.
h. Alignment: Coordinate installatIon ofhOlstway entrances WIth Installation of
elevator guIde raIls for accurate alIgnment of entrances WIth cars. Where pOSSible,
delay final adjustment of sills and doors untIl car is operable In shaft. Reduce
clearances to mmimum safe, workable dimensions at each landmg.
1. Erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames before erectIOn of rough walls and doors;
erect faSCIas and toe guards after rough walls finished. Set sill umts accurately
aligned and slIghtly above finish floor at landings.
J. Lubncate operating parts of system, mcludmg ropes, as recommended by
manufacturer.
3.
Field Quality C.ontrol'
a. Acceptance testIng: Upon completIOn of the elevator installatIon and before
permittIng use of elevator, perform acceptance tests as reqUIred and recommended
by Code and governing regulations or agencies. Perform other tests, if any, as
required by governing regulations or agencies.
b. Advise Owner, Contractor, ArchItect, and governing authontIes In advance of dates
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DiVIsion 14 - Conveying Systems
May 2002
ol~pic Desif1l1 Works Inc} PS
I
and tImes tests are to be performed on the elevator
4. AdJlIstmr:
a. Make necessary adjustments of operatmg devIces and eqUIpment to ensure elevator
operates smoothly and accurately
5 c:Je;!nme'
a. Before final acceptance, remove protectIOn from fimshed surfaces and clean and
polish surfaces m accordance wIth manufacturer's recommendatIons for type of
material and fimsh provIded.
b. At completIon of elevator work, remove tools, eqUIpment, and surplus matenals
from SIte. Clean eqUIpment rooms and hOlstway. Remove trash and debris.
6. ProtectJon'
a. At tIme of SubstantIal CompletIOn of elevator work, or portIon thereof, proVIde
sUItable protectIve covenngs, bamers, devIces, SIgnS, or other such methods or
procedures to protect elevator work from damage or detenoratIOn. MaIntaIn
protectIve measures throughout remaInder of constructIon period.
7. Demonstr;!tlOn'
a. Instruct Owner's personnel In proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of
elevators. ReVIew emergency proviSIOns, Including emergency access and proce-
dures to be followed at tIme of faIlure in operatIOn and other buildmg emergencIes.
Tram Owner's personnel in normal procedures to be followed 111 checking for
sources of operatIonal faIlures or malfunctions.
b. Make a final check of each elevator operatIon, with Owner's personnel present,
ImmedIately before date of SubstantIal CompletIon. Determine that control systems
and operatmg devices are functioning properly.
8. Elev;!tor Schedllle:
a. Elevator Qty. 1.
1) Elevator Model: MarqUIS 25
2) Rated CapaCIty: 2500 LBS.
3) Rated Speed: 80 feet per mInute
4) OperatIon System: Thyssen-Krupp Elevator TAC20
5) Travel: Nom. 11 ft.
6) Openings:
a. Front: 2
b. Rear: 0
7) Clear Car InSIde: 6'-8" WIde x 4'-3"
8) Cab HeIght: Nommal 8'-0"
9) HOlstway Entrance SIze: 7'-0" hIgh x 3' -6" wide.
10) Door Type: One speed SIngle slide
11) Door OperatIOn: AutomatIc, direct current powered.
12) Power CharactenstIcs: 460 volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hz.
13) SeIsmic reqUIrements for Zone 3
END OF DIVISION 14
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
DIVISion 14 - ConveYlOg Systems
May 2002
Olympic Design works Il1c} PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
May 2002
!DIVISIon ..... SectIon' 1'lHe ............ ................... ...... ..................... ................... ...... .......... ......................Page~
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
.,A5050 .........BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS .......... ................................ 5
.::..15081 .........DUCT INSULATION ................................................................... ................................ 3
./15083 .........PIPE INSULATION. .......... ........................................................... ................................ 3
./15140 .........DOMESTIC WATER PIPING ...................................................... ................................ 6
./15150 .........SANITARy WASTE AND VENT PIPING ................................. ................................ 4
..-1'5183 ..... ....REFRIGERANT PIPING .............................................................. ................................ 4
115315 .........FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRlNKLERS .......................................... ................................ 10
""15410 ........ .PLUMBING FIXTURES... ........ ................ ........ .................. .......... .......... ......... ..... ........ 5
./15430 ......... PLUMBING SPECIALTIES ... ..... ........... .......... ............................ ............. ......... .......... 6
115485 .........ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS............................ ................................ 3
VI5732 .........ROOFfOP HEAT PUMPS............................................................ .....................:.......... 5
v15738 .........SPLIT-SySTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS......................... ................................ 4
vi 5815 .........METAL DUCTS................................... ......................................... ................................ 4
v13 820 .........DUCT ACCESSORIES ... ......... .... ..... ............................................ ................................ 3
--15838 .........POWER VENTILATORS ............................................................. ................................ 4
~855 .........DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES. .............................. ................................ 2
/J. 5 800 ........ . LOUVERS.................................................... ........ ......................... ............. ....... ....... ..... 3
..A3990 ......... TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING ............................ ................................ 6
.~
. SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
Dielectric fittings.
Sleeves.
Escutcheons.
Mechanical demolition.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
Supports and anchorages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. . Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with
requirements.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE. TUBE. AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: AS ME B 1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: A WS AS .8, BCuP Series or BAg I, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. . Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig mllllDlum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
E. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.4 SLEEVES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet:
longitudinal joint.
0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
.~
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
2.5
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ill to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
openmg.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated
finish.
c.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.
D.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Seclions specifying
piping systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
A.
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
I
I
I
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves.
1.
2.
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
o.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with frrestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.
P.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
Q.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to A WS's "Brazing Handbook~" "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with A WS A5.8.
F.
11rreaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound'-to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
PIPING CONNECTIONS
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MA TERlALS AND METHODS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and peIpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
. to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
3.6 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loa~.
END OF SECTION 15050
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15081
DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, insulating cements, field-applied jackets,
AND accessories and attachments.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if
any), for each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indices of 25 and 50, respectively, according to ASlM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
c. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASlM C 553, Type n, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured
from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
B. Accessories and Attachments:
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
1.
I
Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for
tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
Bands: Aluminum 3/4 inch wide.
Wire: O.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; O.062-inch, soft-annealed, st:linless steel; or
O.062-inch, soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and
washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length
sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
2.
3.
I
4.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
3.2
GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
I
I
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of
ducts and fittings.
I
I
C.
Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
I
E.
I
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
F.
I
I
I
Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
G.
Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation
continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
I.
Insulation Terminations: For insulation application' where vapor retarders arc;: indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the msulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor
retarder.
I
J.
Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves
for rrre-rated wall and partition penetrations.
I
DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
A.
Service: Round and rectangular, supply-air and outside-air ducts, concealed and exposed in
mechanical spaces and conditioned attic.
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.
Thickness: 1 inch, R 3.3.
Number of Layers: One.
Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
-
I
END OF SECTION 15081
II
II
II
I
I
II
II
II
II
I
.;.
I
I
II
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
II
SECTION 15083
PIPE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible piping insulation, insulating cements, field-applied
jackets, accessories and attachments, and sealing compounds.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if
any), for each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indices of 25 and 50, respectively, according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
c. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a. Armstrong W orId Industries, Inc.
b. Rubatex Corp.
3. Polyolefin Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. IMCOA.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2 PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the
following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-
purpose, vapor-retarder jacket.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-33l6C Class 1, Grade A for bonding
glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber
insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor
applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196.
7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.
Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
C. Polyolefin Insulation: Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed pipe insulation.
Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I, except for density.
D. Accessories and Attachments:
1. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for
tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
2. Bands: 3/4 inch wide aluminum.
3. Wire: O.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; O.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or
O.062-inch, soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of
ducts and fittings.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3.2
I
E.
I
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
F.
I
I
Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
G.
Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation
continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
I
1.
Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor
retarder.
I
J.
Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
I
PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
I
A.
Service: Domestic cold water.
I
1.
2.
3.
Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F.
Insulation Material: Mineral-fiber preformed pipe, Flexible elastomeric or Polyolefm.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
I
a. Copper Pipe, All sizes, Y2 inch.
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
B.
Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water.
1. Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
3. Insulation Thickness: 1 inch.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.
C.
Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping.
1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric Polyolefin.
3. Insulation Thickness: Y2 inch.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
END OF SECTION 15083
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15140
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART I-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment
inside the building.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1 through
9," for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure
rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME BI6.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME BI6.22, wrought-
copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.
C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L, water tube, drawn temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME BI6.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME BI6.22, wrought-
copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.
2.2 VALVES
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECfION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
2.3
I
A.
I
Refer to Division 15 Section "[Valves] <Insert Section title>" for bronze and cast-iron,
general-duty valves.
B.
Refer to Division 15 Section "[plumbing Specialties] <Insert Section title>" for balancing and
drain valves.
I
VALVES
I
I
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for bronze, general-duty valves.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
I
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
I
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
I
B.
Domestic Water Piping: Use [any of ]the following piping materials for each size range:
1.
NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered
joints.
NPS 2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
I
2.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
I
3.3
A.
I
I
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
I. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-
iron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use
cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
I
I
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" fOf"Site water distribution and service piping.
I
B.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods " for basic piping
installation.
c.
Extend domestic water service piping to exterior water distribution piping in sizes and locations
indicated.
I
D.
Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15140- DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E.
Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside building at each domestic water service.
F.
Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves.
G.
Install domestic water piping without pitch and plumb.
H.
Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is
full of water.
L
Perform the following steps before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
J.
Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not
operate water heaters before filling with water.
K.
Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
1. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 80 psig maximum, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
I
I
I
I
3.5
A.
Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation according to utility company's
requirements. Water meters will be furnished by util~!y.
I
3.6
A.
Install sectional valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves
for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
I
I
I
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-tlushable, lead-free tlux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS
VALVE INSTALLATION
B.
Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to plumbing
fixtures without supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use
butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
3.7
I
C.
I
Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
I
I
I
I
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Install the following:
3.8
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
B.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
I
c.
Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
D.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
I
1.
2.
NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1 and NPS 1-114: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
I
E.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
I
F.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
I
I
I
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
3.9
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
I
D.
Connect domestic water piping to service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to
the following: .~
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
I
I
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
I
I
I
I
I
3.10
1.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
2.
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for fmal inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction fmd that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
4.
Test domestic water piping as follows:
1.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I
I
A.
CLEANING
I
I
I
I
Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or,
if methods are not prescribed, procedure~. described in either A WW A C651 or
A WW A C652 or as described below:
a.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
b.
I) Fill system or part thereof with water/cWorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with watt;r/chIorine solution with at least 200
ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
c.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
I
d.
I
B.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
I
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
END OF SECTION 15140
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~'-
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15150
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
1. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and
ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304,
stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands.
b. Heavy-Duty, FMG-Approved Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel
housing; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide housing with 2 bands.
c. Heavy-Duty, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48, 2-piece, cast-iron housing;
stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and sleeve.
d. Heavy-Duty, Type 301, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 301,
stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
e. Compact, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310 with ASTM A 167, Type 301, or
ASTM A 666, Type 30 I, stainless-steel conugated shield; stainless-steel bands;
and sleeve.
I) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 2-l/8-inch- wide shield with 2 bands.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping matenals for each size
range:
1. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Use NPS 1-1/2 hub less, cast-iron soil piping and one of the
following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FMG approved cast iron.
c. Couplings: Compact, stainless steel.
2. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FMG approved cast iron.
c. Couplings: Compact, stainless steel.
B. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use [any of]the following piping materials for
each size range:
1. NPS 1-1/2: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FMG approved cast iron.
2. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FMG approved cast iron.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
."
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewerage" for Project-site sanitary sewer piping.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCtiCS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods " for basic piping joint
construction.
I
3.4
A.
Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
I
I
D.
Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
" for wall penetration systems.
E.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPl's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
F.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 114 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y -branch and 1I8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 deg rees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
G.
Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
H.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
I.
Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab
is without membrane waterproof mg.
J.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
B.
Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPl's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
CONNECTIONS
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
B.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1.
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code. Refer to Division IS Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division IS Section "Plumbing
Specialties. "
2.
3.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portIOn thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
c.
~
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 15150
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15183
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART I-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include
pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data.
B. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE IS, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
B. ASME Standard: Comply with AS ME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."
C. . UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing Components
and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Refrigerants:
.-
a. Allied Signal, Inc./Fluorine Products; Genetron Refrigerants.
b. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
c. Elf Atochem North America, Inc.; Fluorocarbon Div.
d. ICI Americas Inc.lICI KLEA; Fluorochemicals Bus.
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D. Bronze Filler Metals: A WS AS.8, Classification BAg-l (silver)
2.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALITIES
A. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 500-psig maximum working pressure; heavy gage protected
with corrosion-resistant-painted steel shell, flanged ring and spring, ductile-iron cover plate
with steel cap screws; wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; with replaceable-core
kit, including gaskets and the following:
1. Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activated alumina,
ARl730 rated for capacity.
2.4 REFRIGERANTS
A. ASHRAE 34, R-22: MonochlorodifluoroIQethane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.
3.2 SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers and before each
solenoid valve.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A_ Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods." .~
C. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
D. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install
valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.
E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit
installation of full-thickness insulation.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
May 2002
RfcHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
A.
Braze joints according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
I
I
3.5
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.6
SYSTEM CHARGING
I
F.
Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be
exposed to mechanical injury.
G.
Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
H.
Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.
I.
Install hangers with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 112: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
B.
Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent
scale formation.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
1. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,
evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure.
2. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of the
design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low side of
system.
a. System shall maintain test pressure at ~he manifold gage throughout duration of
~st. .
b. Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine solution
over joint.
c. Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig or higher as required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
A.
Charge system using the following procedures:
I
1.
2.
Install core in filter-dryer after leak test but before evacuation.
Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500 micrometers.
If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-operating
charge.
I
3.
4.
END OF SECTION 15183
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.'1-
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
"e?
I
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15315
FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
1.2
A.
Product Data: For valves, alarm devices, air compressors, ftre department connections, and
sprinklers indicated.
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
This Section includes a design-build, ftre-suppression system including dry-pipe sprinklers,
piping, and equipment.
B.
See Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm" for alarm devices not in this Section.
SUBMITTALS
B.
Fire-hydrant flow test report.
C.
Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Include hydraulic calculations, if
applicable.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualiftcations: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by
product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FMG's
"Fire Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with other requirements indicated.
B.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and fteld test reports by
a qualifted professional engineer. Base calculations on results of frre-hydrant flow test.
C.
Professional Engineer Qualiftcations: A professional engineer who is legally qualifted to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are deftned as those performed
for installations of ftre-suppression piping that are sifuilar t~ those indicated for this Project in
material, design, and extent.
D.
Sprinkler Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECf10N 15315 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
F. NFP A Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with
the following:
l. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Ductile-Iron Pipe: A WW A C 151, push-an-joint type; with cement-mortar lining and seal coat
according to A WW A C 1 04. Include rubber gasket according to A WW A C 111.
1. Ductile-Iron Fittings: A WW A C 11 0, ductile-iron or cast-iron push-on-joint type; or
AWWA C153, ductile-iron, compact push-an-joint type. Include cement-mortar lining
and seal coat according to A WW A C 1 04 and rubber gaskets according to A WW A C 111.
B.. Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: AS1M A 53, AS1M A 135, or AS1M A 795; Schedule 40 in
NPS 6 (DN 150) and.
C. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME BI6.1.
D. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4.
E. Steel, Threaded Couplings: AS1M A 865.
F. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME BI6.5.
G. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FMG-approved, AS1M A 47 (ASTM A 47M),
malleable iron or AS1M A 536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends
factory grooved according to A WW A C606. .~
H. Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for
pipe- flange gasket materials and welding filler metals.
2.3 VALVES
A. Fire-Protection-Service Valves: UL listed and FMG approved, with minimum 175-psjg (1200-
kPa) nonshock working~pressure rating. Valves for grooved-end piping may be furnished with
grooved ends instead of type of ends specified.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15315 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
. May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.
b. Grinnell Corp.
c. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
d. Nibco, Inc.
e. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
f. Victaulic Co. of America.
2. Gate Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: UL 262; cast-bronze, threaded ends; solid
wedge; OS&Y; and rising stem.
3. Indicating Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Smaller: UL 1091; butterfly or ball-type,
bronze body with threaded ends; and visual integral indicating device.
4. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper
wedge, OS&Y, and rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and
flanged ends.
5. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 (ON 50) and Smaller: UL 312 or MSS SP-80, Class 150;
bronze body with bronze disc and threaded ends.
6. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted
cap, with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc ring and flanged ends.
B. Specialty Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Badger Fire Protection, Inc.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
c. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp.
e. Grinnell Corp.
f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
g. Star Sprinkler Corp.
h. Viking Corp.
2. Dry-Pipe Valves: UL 260; differential type; 175-psig (l200-kPa) working pressure; with
cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze seat with O-ring seals, and single-hinge pin and
latch design. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain,
priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber
attaclunent, fill-line attaclunent.,
a. Air Compressor: Fractional horsepower, 120- V ac, 60 Hz, single phase arr
compressor.
3. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, 400-psig (2760-kPa) mml1llum rating, brass.
Include NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2 (DN 40 or DN 65), female NPS inlet and outlet;
adjustable setting feature; and straight or 90-deg ree angle pattern design as indicated.
4. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, NPS 3/4 (DN 20), ball check device
with threaded ends.
2.4 SPRINKLERS
Port Angeles Carnegie Library _
SECTION 15315 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Badger Fire Protection, Inc.
2. Central Sprinkler Corp.
3. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
4. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp.
5. Grinnell Corp.
6. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
7. Star Sprinkler Corp.
8. Viking Corp.
B. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:
1. UL 199, for applications except residential.
2. UL 1767, for early suppression, fast-response applications.
C. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice for "Ordinary"
temperature classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
D. Sprinkler types, features, and options include the following:
1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.
2. Extended-coverage sprinklers.
3. Flow-control sprinklers, with automatic open and shutoff feature.
4. Flush ceiling sprinklers, including escutcheon.
5. Institution sprinklers, made with small, breakaway projection.
6. Pendent sprinklers.
7. Pendent, dry-type sprinklers.
8. Quick-response sprinklers.
9. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.
10. Sidewall sprinklers.
11. Sidewall, dry-type sprinklers.
12. Upright sprinklers.
E. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome-plated, bronze, and painted.
F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following spnnkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers axe specified with
sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, !\yO pIece, with I-inch (25-mm) vertical
adjustment.
2. Ceiling Mounting: Plastic, white finish, one piece, flat.
3. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
2.5 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTINGS
A. Specialty Sprinkler Fittings: UL listed and FMG approved; made of steel, ductile iron, or other
materials compatible with piping.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15315 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Dry-Pipe-System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe service.
C. Mechanical-T Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive gasket, bolts,
and threaded or locking-lug outlet.
D. Mechanical-Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive gaskets,
bolts, and threaded or locking-lug outlets.
E. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, with threaded inlet, threaded outlet, and seals; adjustable.
F. Sprinkler, Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded
inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
l. Available Manufacturers:
a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
c. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter-Roemer Div.
G. Sprinkler, Branch-Line Test Fittings: UL-listed, brass body; with threaded inlet and capped
drain outlet and threaded outlet for sprinkler.
I. Available Manufacturers:
a. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
b. G/J Innovations, Inc.
c. Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc.
H. . Sprinkler, Inspector's Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron housing; with threaded inlet
and drain outlet and sight glass.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.
b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
c. Grinnell Corp.
d. Victaulic Co. of America.
2.6 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Exposed, Freestanding, Fire Department Connectio~s: UL 405, cast-brass body, inlets with
threads according to NFP A 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, and
bottom outlet with pipe threads. Include brass, lugged caps, gaskets, and brass chains; brass,
lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 18-inch- high brass
sleeve; and round, floor, brass, escutcheon plate with marking "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Badger Fire Protection, Inc.
b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15315 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
2.7
2.
c. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
d. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
e. Grinnell Corp.
f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
g. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
h. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter-Roemer Div.
Finish Including Sleeve: Rough chrome-plated.
A.
ALARM DEVICES
B.
2.8
Water-Motor-Operated Alarms: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with pelton-wheel operator
with shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction and lO-inch- (250-mm-)
diameter, cast-aluminum alarm gong with red-enamel factory fInish. Include l'lPS 3/4 (DN 20)
inlet and l'lPS 1 (ON 25) drain connections.
Water-Flow Indicators and Supervisory Switches:
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a. Gamewell Co.
b. Grinnell C<1rp.
c. Pittway Corp.; System Sensor Div.
d. Potter Electric Signal Co.
e. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
f. Viking Corp.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2.
Water-Flow Indicators: UL 346; electrical-supervision, vane-type water-flow detector;
with 250-psig (1725-kPa) pressure rating; and designed for horizontal or vertical
installation. Include two single-pole, double-throw, circuit switches for isolated alarm
and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set,
fIeld-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends
signal if removed.
Pressure Switches: UL 753; electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard
feature. Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that
operates on rising pressure and signals water flow.
Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with
normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than
fully open position.
3.
4.
A.
PRESSURE GAGES
Pressure Gages: UL 393,3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch- (90- to 115-mm-) diameter dial with dial range
of 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15315 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this Section. Report test
results promptly and in writing.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded
joints.
C. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Use ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe and fittings and
restrained joints.
D. Sprinkler Feed Mains and Risers:
1. NPS 4 (ON 100) and Smaller: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;
steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
E. Dry-Pipe Sprinklers:
1. Sprinkler-Piping Option: Specialty sprinkler fittings, NPS 2 (ON 50) and smaller,
including mechanical- T fittings, may be used downstream from sprinkler zone valves.
2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded
ends; cast-or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
3. NPS 2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 50 to DN 90): Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with
threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
4. NPS 2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 50 to ON 90): Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with
grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
F. Valve Applications: Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are
not indicated, the following requirements apply:
1. Fire-Protection-Service Valves: UL listed and FMG approved gate valves for
applications where required by NFP A 13. _
2. General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FMG-approved valves are
not required by NFPA 13. Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.
G. Sprinkler Applications:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers.
3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright; pendent, dry-type; and sidewall, dry-type
sprinklers.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECfION 15315 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3.3
5.
Special Applications: Use extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response
sprinklers where indicated.
Sprinkler Finishes: Use sprinklers with the following finishes:
6.
a.
Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome-plated in finished spaces
exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view.
Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.
Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
b.
c.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
3.4
B.
Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved ends and
thinner steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; and steel, keyed couplings.
Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling
manufacturer's written instructions. Use gaskets listed for dry-pipe service for dry piping.
C.
Dissimilar-Piping-Material Joints: Construct joints using adapters or couplings compatible with
both piping materials. Use dielectric fittings if both piping materials are metal. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for dielectric fittings.
SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A.
Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated for service
entrance to building. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other
accessories indicated at connection to water-service piping.
3.5
W ATER-SUPPL Y CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect sprinkler piping to building interior water distribution piping. Refer to Division 15
Section "Domestic Water Piping" for interior piping. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer,
pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water distribution piping.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers.
3.6 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
.~
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. Deviations
from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having
jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working
plans.
C. Install underground service-entrance piping according to NFP A 24 and with restrained joints.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library. May 2002
SECTION 15315 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRlNKLERS RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions
in pipe sizes.
I
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Unions are not
required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
I
F. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger connections.
I
G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized
and located according to NFP A 13.
I
H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
1. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to sprinkler risers
when sprinkler branch piping is connected to sprinkler risers.
I
J. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.
Drain to floor drain or outside building.
I
K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
I
L. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFP A 13 for hanger materials and installation.
M. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFP A 13 to protect from earthquake
damage.
I
N. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. Construct
rigid piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.
I
o. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at each sprinkler test connection. Include
pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft metal seated globe
valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and
install where they will not be subject to freezing.
I
I
I
P.
Install specialty sprinkler fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7
VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for installing g~neral-duty valves. Install fire-protection
specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties according to NFP A 13, manufacturer's
written instructions, and authorities having jurisdiction.
I
I
B.
Install fire-protection-service valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply
except from fire department connections. Provide permanent identification signs indicating
portion of system controlled by each valve.
C.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water supply sources.
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECfION lS3lS - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
3.8
I
D.
I
Install dry-pipe valves with trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball
drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment. Install air
compressor and compressed-air supply piping.
I
SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
I
A.
Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical panels.
3.9
B.
I
Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry_
type sprinklers with water supply from heated space.
CONNECTIONS
I
A.
Connect water supplies to sprinklers. Include backflow preventers.
I
3.10
B.
Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain
or outside building.
I
C.
Connect piping to specialty valves, specialties, fire department connections, and accessories.
D.
Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.
I
E. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
I
A.
I
3.11
Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements m
NFPA 13 and in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
I
I
A.
Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping according to NFP A 13, "System Acceptance" Chapter.
END OF SECTION 13916
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15315 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS- ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTIJRES
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
1.2
A.
Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fIxture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with
disabilities.
I
A.
This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components.
B.
See Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for specialty futures not in this Section.
DEFINITIONS
1.3 SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances,
equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details,
and flow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.
B. . Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC All?l, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public
Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing fixtures for people with
disabilities.
."
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
D.
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
E.
Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
1. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME Al12.19.2M.
2. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
faucets:
1. Faucets: ASME A1l2.l8.IM.
2. Pipe Threads: AS ME B 1.20.1.
3. Supply and Drain Fittings: AS ME AI12.l8.IM.
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME AI12.l8.1M.
2. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
3. Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME Al12.18.1M.
I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1. Floor Drains: ASMEA1l2.21.1M.
2. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
3. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME Al12.6.1M.
4. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20. 1.
5. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI ZI24.5.
6. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC AI17.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2
LA V ATORY FAUCETS
.~
A. Lavatory Faucet,: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies
and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
1. Products:
a. As scheduled on drawings.
2.3 FLUSHOMETERS .
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
A.
Flushometer,: Cast-brass body with corrosion-resistant internal components, non-hold-open
feature, control stop with check valve, vacuum breaker, and copper or brass tubing, and
polished chrome-plated fInish on exposed parts.
1. Manufacturers:
a. As scheduled on drawings.
TOILET SEATS
A.
Toilet Seat,: Solid plastic.
2.5
PROTECTIVE SIDELDING GUARDS
A.
Protective Shielding Guard,: Manufactured, plastic covering for hot- and cold-water supplies
and trap and drain piping and complying with ADA requirements.
2.6
FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A.
Water-Closet Support,: Water-closet combination carrier designed for accessible mounting
height. Include single or double, vertical or horizontal, hub-and-spigot or hubless waste fItting
as required for piping arrangement; faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and fIxture bolts
and hardware matching fIxture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for
installation in wide pipe space.
2.7
B.
Lavatory Support,: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod. Include steel
uprights with feet.
WATER CLOSETS
A.
Water Closets,: Accessible, floor- mounting, floor-outlet, vitreous-china fIxture designed for
flushometer valve operation.
2.8
A.
Lavatories,: Accessible, wall- hanging, vitreous-china fIxture.
1. Products:
a. KoWer Co.; As scheduled on drawings.
LAVATORIES
1. Products:
a. Kohler Co.; As scheduled on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3.1
I
FIXTURE INSTALLATION
I
A.
I
3.2
Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
B.
For wall-hanging fixtures, install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate.
1. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
2. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
I
C.
I
I
Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building
substrate.
D.
Install wall-hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
E.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and roughing-in
drawings.
I
F.
Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
I
I
I
1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
G.
Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
H.
Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with
disabilities to reach.
I
1.
Install toilet seats on water closets.
J.
I
I
I
Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
K.
Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
L.
Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetration~ in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons.
I
I
M.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.
CONNECTIONS
I
A. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
B.
Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.
C.
Supply and Waste- Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water supplies,
stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Connect to
plumbing piping.
I
I
D.
Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections:
Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping
specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to plumbing
plpmg.
I
3.3 PROTECTION
I
A.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
I
B.
Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
I
END OF SECTION 15410
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
SECTION 15430
PL~BINGSPECV\LTIES
I
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
I
I
This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:
1. Backflow preventers.
2. Trap seal primer valves.
3. Air admittance valves.
4. Miscellaneous piping specialties.
5. Cleanouts.
6. Floor drains.
I
I
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
I
1.
2.
I
Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig.
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 1O-foot head of water.
A.
SUBMITTALS
I
B.
C.
1.4
Product Data: Include rated capacities and indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required
clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the
following:
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
I
Backflow preventers and water regulators.
Water hammer arresters, air vents, and trap seal primer valves and systems.
Air admittance valves.
Hose bibbs and hydrants.
Field quality-control test reports.
.~
I
Operation and maintenance data for the following:
1.
2.
3.
Backflow preventers and water regulators.
Trap seal primer valves and systems.
Air admittance valves.
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with AS ME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping
materials and installation.
C. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1
through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Ames Co., Inc.
2. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
3. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers.
1. NPS 2 and Smaller. Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
3. Strainer: On inlet, if indicated.
C. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011,. nickel plated, with nonremovable and
manual drain features, and ASME Bl.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached to
rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.
D. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1012, suitable for continuous
pressure application. Include inlet screen and two independent check valves with intermediate
atmospheric vent.
2.3 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
A. Supply-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the following
characteristics:
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. MIF AB Manufacturing, Inc.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Drainage Products Div.
2. I 25-psig minimum working pressure.
3. Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber.
4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.
5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
2.4 DRAIN VALVES
A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-IIO, NPS 3/4 ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum CWP.
Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable
seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and cap.
B. Hose-End Drain Valve: MSS SP-80, gate valve, Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body, with
NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet and
cap. Hose bibbs are prohibited for this application.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying with ASME AI12.18.IM for
compression-type faucets. Include NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-
joint inlet, of design suitable for pressure of at least 125 psig (860 kPa); integral nonremovable,
drainable hose-connection vacuum breaker; and garden-hose threads complying with
ASME B 1.20.7 on outlet.
I. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
2. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
3. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
4. Include integral wall flange with each chrome-:~or nickel-plated hose bibb.
B. Air-Admittance Valves: Plastic housing with mechanical-operation sealing diaphragm,
designed to admit air into drainage and vent piping and to prevent transmission of sewer gas
into building.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Studor, Inc.
2. Stack Vent Valve: ASSE 1050, designed for installation as terminal on soil, waste, and
vent stacks, instead of stack vent extending through roof, in NPS 2 to NPS 4.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.6
CLEANOUTS
I
I
I
I
I
2.7
FLOOR DRAINS
I
I
I
C.
A.
A.
3.
Fixture Vent Valve: ASSE 1051, designed for installation on waste piping, instead of
vent connection, for single fixture, in NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2.
a. Provide recess box with grille as indicated.
Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for
terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
Cleanouts,: Comply with ASME AI12.36.2M.
1. Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Josam Co.;.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.;.
Zum Industries, Inc., Jonespec Div.;.
Zum Industries, Inc., Specification Drainage Operation;.
2.
3.
4.
Body or Fermle Material: Cast iron.
Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads, set-screws or other device.
Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.
Floor Drains.
1. Available Products:
a.
b.
Josam Co.;.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.;.
Zum Industries, Inc., Jonespec Div.;.
Zum Industries, Inc., Specification Drainage Operation;.
c.
d.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
I.
3.1
INSTALLATION
I
I
I
A.
B.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation re9--uirements.
Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
3.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
c.
I
Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of
1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
D.
I
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
I
4.
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 135 deg rees.
Locate at minimum intervals of 100 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
I
2.
3.
E.
I
Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping
below floors.
F.
I
Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished
wall, for c1eanouts located in concealed piping.
G.
I
Install air admittance valves and recess boxes as indicated.
H.
Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I
I.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
I
1.
2.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
I
a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to I percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch
total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-
inch total depression.
3. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
I
I
I
J.
Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if
supports are specified and to building wall constructi9n if no support is indicated.
K.
I
Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or
globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe
valves.
I
L.
Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
M. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
I
3.2 CONNECTIONS
I
I
A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
B. - Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16 Sections.
3.3 PROTECTION
I
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
I
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
I
END OF SECTION 15430
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.~
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
SECTION 15485 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC WATER REA TERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial electric water heaters.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type and
size of water heater indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following:
1. ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings," for commercial water heaters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 LIGHT-COMMERCIAL. STORAGE. ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Description: Comply with UL 174 or UL 1453, and listed by manufacturer for commercial
applications.
I. Available Manufacturers:
a. Bradford White Corp.
b. Rheem Manufacturing Co.; Ruud Water Heater Div.
c. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15485 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
A.
Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and
complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and
include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with
sensing element that extends into tank.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
Storage Tank Construction: Non-ASME-code steel with 150-psig working-pressure
rating.
a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for plpmg
connections, relief valve, pressure gage, thermometer, drain, anode rod, and
controls as required. Attach tappings to tank before testing and labeling. Include
ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.
b. Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier
materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank
fittings and outlets.
c. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except
connections and controls.
d. Jacket: Steel, with enameled fmish.
3.
4.
5.
Heating Elements: Single electric, screw-in, immersion type.
Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat for each element.
Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or
systems.Drain Valve: ASSE 1005, corrosion-resistant metal, factory installed.
Anode Rod: Factory installed, magnesium.
Dip Tube: Factory installed. Not required if cold-water inlet is near bottom of storage
tank.
6.
7.
WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
B.
Vacuum Relief Valves: Comply with ASME PTC 25.3. Furnish for installation in piping.
I. Exception: Omit if water heater has integral vacuum-relieving device.
C.
Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 18-inch- high,
enclosed-base stand complying with IAPMO PS 103 and IAS No.2. Include integral or
separate drain pan with raised edge and NPS I drain outlet with ASME B 1.20.1, pipe thread.
D.
Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel stand for floor
mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include dimension that will
support bottom of water heater a minimum of 18 inches above the floor.
E.
Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base
of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4.
F.
Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE 90.1 or
ASHRAE 90.2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15485 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3.1
I
INSTALLATION
I
I
A.
Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
F.
G.
H.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
B.
I
Anchor water heaters to substrate. Provide seismic restraint with manufactured product
designed for seismic anchorage of water heaters.
C.
I
Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves
with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in
continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.
I
D.
Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.
E.
Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor drains.
Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have
tank drains
I
Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping.
I
I
Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting-type heat traps.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
CONNECTIONS
I
Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions.
I
Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.
I
I
I
I
Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16
Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit service.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the following:
1. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and &-ain piping.
2. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices.
3. Adjust operating controls.
4. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 140 deg F unless piping
system application requires higher temperature.
5. Balance water flow through manifolds of multiple-unit installations.
I
I
END OF SECTION 15485
POll Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15485 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15732
ROOFTOP HEAT PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following rooftop heat pumps:
1. Cooling and heating units 7-1/2 to 20 tons.
1.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. All occupied areas:
1. Systems operate during scheduled hours. '
2. Units begin warm-up cycle with outside air dampers closed. Warm-up cycle IS
programmed to bring space to operating temperature at time of occupancy.
3. Upon occupancy, unit goes to minimum outside air position. Fan runs continuously.
4. Unit cycles in heating operation as required to maintain space temperature. Compression
heat is used as first stage. Auxiliary electric heat provides second stage heat.
5. Provide mixed air thermostat in unit to disable compression heat if mixed air falls below
50 deg. F.
6. Economy cooling capability provides outside air cooling prior to use of mechanical
cooling.
7. When outside air rises above return air temperature, unit returns to minimum outside air
and mechanical cooling operates as required.
8. CO2 sensor overrides minimum outside air setting to maintain room at 1000 ppm of CO2
or as set.
9. Units are off as scheduled and outside dampers closed. Units and unit fan cycle on in
heating to maintain scheduled unoccupied setback temperature.
B. Fire Shutdown:
1. Upon detection of smoke by supply duct sensor unit fan shuts down.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
1. For each model indicated.
2. Thermostats.
3. CO2 sensors and controllers.
.~
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engmeer:
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECfION 15732 - ROOFTOP HEAT PUMPS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
1.4
1.5
1.
I
I
I
2.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate
coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
3.
C.
I
I
Operation and maintenance data.
D.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
I
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
I
I
B.
Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
c.
Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
I
D.
Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
E.
I
ARl Compliance for Units with Capacities Less Than 135,000 Btuh: Rate rooftop air-
conditioner capacity according to ARl210/240, "Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat
Pump Equipment."
I
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARl 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary
Equipment. "
I
I
I
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
components of rooftop heat pumps that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years
from date of Substantial Completion. .~
Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three
years from date of Substantial Completion.
I
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15732 - ROOFTOP HEAT PUMPS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
A.
Available Manufacturers:
1. Carrier Corp.
2. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group.
3. YORK International Corporation.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
ROOFTOP HEAT PUMPS 7-112 TO 20 TONS
B.
Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of
compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, indoor fan and outside coil fan, refrigeration
and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.
C.
Casing: Galvanized-steel construction with enamel paint fmish, removable panels or access
doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 1/2-inch-
thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate
drain connection, and lifting lugs.
D.
Indoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves, grease-
lubricated ball bearings, and motor.
E.
Outside Coil Fan: Propeller type, directly driven by permanently lubricated motor.
F.
Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with
equalizing-type vertical distributor.
G.
Compressor(s): Two hermetic scroll compressors with integral vibration isolators, internal
overcurrent and overtemperature protection, internal pressure relief.
H.
Refrigeration System:
1. Compressor(s).
2. Outside coil and fan.
3. Indoor coil and fan.
4. Four-way reversing valve and suction line accuplUlator.
5. Refrigerant dryers. .
6. High-pressure switches.
7. Low-pressure switches.
8. Thermostats for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or
loss of air.
9. Independent refrigerant circuits.
10. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
11. Charge of refrigerant.
1.
Filters: 2-inch- thick, fiberglass, pleated, throwaway filters in filter rack.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15732 - ROOFTOP HEAT PUMPS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
2.3
J.
Electric Heat: Helix-wound, nickel-chrome, electric-resistance elements, factory wired for
single-point wiring connection; with time delay for element staging, and overcurrent and
overheat protective devices.
K.
Economizer: Return- and outside-air dampers with neoprene seals, outside-air filter, and hood.
1. Damper Motor: Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum position.
2. Control: Electronic-control system uses outside-air temperature to adjust mixing
dampers.
L.
Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted
disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in
circuit breaker.
M. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features:
1. Indoor fan on/off delay.
2. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption.
3. Service relay output.
4. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage.
5. Field-adjustable control parameters.
6. Defrost control.
7. Economizer control.
8. Electric heat staging.
9. Minimum run time.
10. Night setback mode.
11. Low-refrigerant pressure control.
N.
Optional Accessories:
1. Service Outlets: Two, 115- V, ground-fault, circuit-interrupter type.
2. PVC condensate drain trap.
O.
Roof Curb: Steel with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, and factory-installed wood
nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 14 inches.
MOTORS
A.
General requirements for motors are specified in Division 15 Section "Motors."
2.4
B.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indic~ted, large enough so driven load will not
require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
c.
Controllers, electrical devices, and wiring are specified in Division 16 Sections.
THERMOSTAT
A.
Single Zone Heat Pump Thermostats: Programmable commercial thermostat and subbase for
single zone control. 7- day programming (2 occupied/2 unoccupied per day, proportional plus
integral control, heat pump recovery cycle, automatic changeover, battery backup or non-
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15732 - ROOFTOP HEAT PUMPS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
volatile memory of programming data, locking set points, fan switching, emergency heat and
auxillary heat indication.
1. Indoor relative humidity display.
2.5 CO~ SENSOR
I
I
I
A.
Single detector, using solid-state infrared sensors, suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130
deg. F, calibrated for 0 to 2 percent with continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20 mA output,
and wall mounted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
A.
Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.
I
I
I
3.2
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
3.3
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INST ALLA TION
B.
Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-
Slope Membrane Roofmg Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for
Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install and secure rooftop heat pumps on curbs and
coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction. Secure units to curb support
with anchor bolts.
CONNECTIONS
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of ducts.
Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections
for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections.
Report results in writing.
B. -- Perform the following field quaIity-control tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15732 - ROOFTOP HEAT PUMPS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
1. After installing rooftop heat pumps and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test
units for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C.
Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust initial temperature and CO2 set points.
B.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
END OF SECTION 15732
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15732 - ROOFTOP HEAT PUMPS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15738
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.3
A.
Evaporator-Fan Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a coil for
cooling (heat rejection for heating operation in heat pump units) and a fan to circulate air to
conditioned space.
I
I
I
A.
This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or
concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A.
All occupied areas:
I. Systems operate during scheduled hours.
2. Units begin warm-up cycle with outside air dampers closed. Warm-up cycle IS
programmed to bring space to operating temperature at time of occupancy.
3. Upon occupancy, unit goes to minimum outside air position. Fan runs continuously.
4. Unit cycles in heating operation as required to maintain space temperature. Compression
heat is used as first stage. Auxiliary electric heat provides second stage heat.
5. Provide mixed air thermostat in unit to disable compression heat if mixed air falls below
50 deg. F. (FC-I only)
6. Economy cooling capability provides outside air cooling prior to use of mechanical
cooling (FC-l only)
7. When outside air rises above return air temperature, unit returns to minimum outside air
and mechanical cooling operates as required.
8. CO2 sensor overrides minimum outside air setting to maintain room at 1000 ppm of CO2
or as set. (FC-I only)
9. Units are off as scheduled and outside dampers closed. Units and unit fan cycle on in
heating to maintain scheduled unoccupied setback temperature.
B.
Exhaust Systems:
1. EF-l runs as scheduled during occupied hours (HP-2 thermostat clock).
DEFINITIONS
B.
Compressor-Condenser Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a
refrigerant compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant (evaporator for heating operation in
heat pump units).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
1.5
1.6
I
A.
I
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each unit
indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures,
sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
I
I
B.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
c.
OperatIon and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
WARRANTY
I
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials and workmanship within five
years from date of Substantial Completion.
I
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
I
A.
I
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: One set sets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
I
I
I
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.2
1. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp.
2. Trane Co. (The); Unitary Products Group.
3. York International Corp.
EVAPORATOR-FAN UNIT
I
I
A.
Concealed Unit Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing,
and insulation on back of panel.
1.
2.
Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
Drain Pans: Ga!vanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
I
B. Floor-Mounting, Unit Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends.
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I"~
I
2.3
I
I
I
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.4
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
2.
Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber, duct liner.
Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.Refrigerant Coil:
Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240,
and with thermal-expansion valve.
C.
Heating Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, electric-resistance heating elements with refractory
ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-
reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent
protection.
D.
Evaporator Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to
motor.
E.
Fan Motor. Electronically controlled motor, integrated with unit control.
F. Disposable Filters: 2 inch thick, pleated.
G.
Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
AIR-COOLED. COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER UNIT
A.
Casing steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep
holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and
gage ports on exterior of casing.
B.
Compressor. Hermetically sealed scroll type with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration
isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start
capacitor, relay, and contactor..
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
Thermal Expansion Valve.
Bi-flow Filter Drier.
Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.
Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermaT-overload protection.
ACCESSORIES
Single Zone Heat Pump Thermostats: Programmable commercial thermostat and subbase for
single zone control. 7- day programming (2 occupied/2 unoccupied per day, proportional plus
integral control, heat pump recovery cycle, automatic changeover, battery backup or non-
volatile memory of programming data, locking set points, fan switching, emergency heat and
auxilIary heat indication.
1. Indoor relative humidity display.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECfION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
B.
CO2 Sensor: Single detector, using solid-state infrared sensors, suitable over a temperature
range of 23 to 130 deg. F, calibrated for 0 to 2 percent with continuous or averaged reading, 4 to
20 mA output, and wall mounted.
C.
Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
D.
Economizer Mixing Box: Manufactured mixing box with outside air and return air parallel
blade mixing dampers and shaft suitable for mounting packaged economizer control package.
Match to indoor unit size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
e.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
INSTALLATION
Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports. Anchor units
to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.
Install compressor-condenser components on rubber shear vibration isolators.
CONNECTIONS
Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to
allow access to unit.
Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be
disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and
specialty arrangements.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-
assembled components and equipment installation, iticluding piping and electrical connections,
and to prepare a written report of inspection.
B.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components,
and retest.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
--.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
I
END OF SECTION 15738
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDlTIONOING UNITS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
PART I-GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes rectangular and round metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating,
and air-conditioning systems.
1.2
B.
See Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounted
access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For sealing materials indicated.
1.3
B.
Field quality-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with NFP A 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless
otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL DUCT MATERIAL S
2.2
A.
Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
C.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, l/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
SEALING MATERIALS
A.
Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant,
formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
A.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for building materials.
I
I
I
I
2.4
A.
Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction with
galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal
and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals,
tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
B.
Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod.
C.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
D.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
DUCT FABRICATION
B.
Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following:
1.
2.
3.
Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg.
Return Ducts: 2-inch wg, negative pressure.
Exhaust Ducts: I-inch wg, negative pressure.
C.
Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger
and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of un braced panel area, unless ducts are
lined.
D.
Round Supply And Exhaust Fitting Fabrication: Fabricate 90-degree tees and laterals and
conical tees to comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam straight duct.
1. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no
excess material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
2. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend
radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter.
Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
3. Round Elbows, 8 Inches and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-
degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, ~5, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
4. Round Elbows, 9 through 14 Inches: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60,
and 90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard
bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
5. Round Elbows, Larger Than 14 Inches, and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored
elbows, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.2
INST ALLA TION
I
I
Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
I
I
Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.
Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet, unless interrupted by fittings.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
I
Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.
I
Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular
to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
I
I
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I
Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions,
unless specifically indicated.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,
and similar finished work.
I
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
I
Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partItiOns and
exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct
or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on
four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
I
I
I
N.
Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke
dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and
installation methods are specified in Division 7. Section "Through-Penetration Firestop
Systems."
I
I
JOINT AND SEAM SEALING
A.
Seam And Joint Sealing: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class
indicated and as described in SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible."
I
1. Pressure Classification Less Than 2-Inch wg: Transverse joints.
2. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Install rigid round and rectangular metal ducts with support systems indicated in SMACNA's
"HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
3.4
A.
Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct
Accessories. "
B.
Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
C.
Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.
D.
Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
CONNECTIONS
B.
For branch., outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HV AC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
END OF SECTION 15815
.-
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
I
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
I
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Propeller wall ventilators.
2. Ceiling-mounting ventilators.
I
1.2
SUBMITTALS
I
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
I
1.3
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
I
I
I
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
c.
I
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply witli performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
I
I
c.
NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D.
UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECfION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraphs titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 PROPELLER WALL VENTILATORS
A. Description: direct-driven propeller fans consisting of fan blades, hub, housing, orifice ring,
motor, drive assembly, and accessories.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Carnes Company HV AC.
b. Cook, Loren Company.
c. Greenheck Fan Corp.
d. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.
B. Housing: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel
finish coat applied after assembly.
C. Steel Fan Wheel: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gauge steel spider bolted to cast iron
hub..
D. Accessories:
1. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
2. Motor side back guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications,
removable for maintenance..
3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve;
factory set to close when fan stops.
4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
2.3 CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS
A. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line
applications.
.~
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Carnes Company HV AC.
b. Cook, Loren Company.
c. Greenheck Fan Corp.
d. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.
B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.
C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan
wheel shall be removable for service.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
2.4
I
D.
I
Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for
motor plug-in.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
I
I
I
A.
Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B.
Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating."
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
I
I
I
3.1
Support units from structure.
3.2
A.
B.
Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire oJ:" metal straps.
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D.
I
I
Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification. "
CONNECTIONS
A.
I
3.3
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make [mal duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories."
I
I
B.
Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
I
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and
retest.
B.
I
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C.
I
Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
D.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
I
I
E.
Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
END OF SECTION 15838
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
'\
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Backdraft dampers.
Manual-volume dampers.
Turning vanes.
Flexible connectors.
Flexible ducts.
Duct accessory hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each manufactured product indicated, and indicate dimensions, required
clearances, method offield assembly, components, location, and size of each field connection.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1I4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2 DAMPERS
A. Counterbalanced Backdraft Dampers: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations.
1. Frame: 0.125-inch- thick, heavy gauge 6063T5 extruded aluminum channel frame, 4"
depth..
2. Blades: 0.063-inch- thick, 6063T5 extruded aluminum.
3. Blade Seals: Vinyl.
4. Blade Axles: W' reinforced nylon.
5. Bearings: Synthetic (acetal) sleeve type.
6. Linkage: 1/8" plated steel with nylon pivot bearings.
7. Counterbalance weights
B. Manual-Volume Dampers: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade'dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.
1. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design
as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for
horizontal or vertical applications.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
5. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-
thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit
damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.3 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible. "
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch- wide, curved blades set 3/4 inch o.c.;
support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for
mounting in ducts.
2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181,
Class 1.
1. Factory fabricate with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-
inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel or O.032-inch aluminum sheets.
2. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
polycWoroprene.
a. Minimum Wei~t: 26 oz./sq. yd..
b. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp, and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORlES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
2.5
I
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
I
A.
I
I
2.6
Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-1I2-inch-
thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.
I. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.
2. Outer Jacket: Polyethylene film.
3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
4. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg positive, 1/2-inch wg negative.
I
I
I
I
I
ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and length to suit
duct insulation thickness.
B.
Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band
with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches to suit duct size.
C.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
I
I
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HV AC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B.
Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
I
I
I
C.
Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
END OF SECTION 15820
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES.
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following floor, ceiling- and wall-mounted air outlets and inlets:
1. DiffUsers.
2. Grilles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate construction, finish, and mounting details for each type of air outlet,
inlet, and accessory indicated.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for
each type of air outlet and inlet indicated.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room
location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFP A Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFP A 90A, "Standard
for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraphs
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with
specified.
titles below introduce lists, the following
.-
requirements, provide one of the products
2.2 DIFFUSERS
A. Diffusers are scheduled on the drawings.
1. Products:
a. Anemostat Products, Dynamics Corp. of America;.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES.
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
b.
Carnes Co. Inc.;.
Hart & Cooley, Inc., Tuttle & Bailey Div.;.
Price
Titus;.
c.
d.
e.
2.3
GRILLES
A.
Grille are scheduled on the drawings.
1. Products:
a. Anemostat Products, Dynamics Corp. of America;.
b. Carnes Co. Inc.;.
c. Hart & Cooley, Inc., Tuttle & Bailey Div.;.
d. Price
e. Titus;.
2.4
SOURCE OUALITY CONTROL
A.
resting: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the
Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet
locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria,
airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make [mal locations where indicated, as much as
practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel.
Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a
determination of final location.
B.
Install diffusers and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow servIce and
maintenance of dampers.
END OF SECTION 15855
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES.
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15800
LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Maximum Standard Airflow Rating: Provide louvers with specified airflow at point of
beginning water penetration through a louver 48 inches wide by 48 inches high (maximum
standard airflow), as demonstrated by testing according to AMCA 500.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including color charts: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of installation for louver units
and accessories not completely described in Product Data.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products one of the
following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.
2. Arrow United Industries.
3. Cesco Products.
4. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
5. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
6. Ruskin Manufacturing; Tomkins Industries, Inc.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15800 - LOUVERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
2.2
EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVER
Construction: Fixed, horizontal louver with extruded-aluminum frame and blades.
2.3
A.
1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063- T5 or T -52.
2. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming.
3. Frame and Blade Thickness: 0.081 mch.
B.
Performance Requirements: Drainable- blade type with maximum standard airflow not less
than indicated on schedule with not more than 0.07-inch wg static-pressure loss.
C.
Descriptive Requirements:
1. Blade Profile: Drainable blade.
a. Blade Angle and Spacing: 35 degrees and 3-1/2 inches o.c. for 4-inch- deep
louvers.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel. Do not
use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
2.4
B.
Bituminous Paint: Asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 but containing no asbestos
fibers, or asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
LOUVER FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate louvers to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and
installation tolerances, tolerances of adjoining, and perimeter sealant joints.
2.5
B.
Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from
view, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer.
FINISHES
Aluminum:
A.
1.
High-Performance Organic Finish: Two -coaf thermocured system with fluoropolymer
coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight;
complying with AAMA 605.2.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected from manufacturer's full range by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15800 - LOUVERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Install units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where
required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C.
Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying
a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry,
or dissimilar metals.
D.
Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers.
E.
Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot
be refmished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refmish entire unit or
provide new units.
END OF SECTION 10200
.'
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
SECTION 15800 - LOUVERS
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
I
I
I
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
A.
B.
A.
This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HV AC systems to produce design
objectives, including the following:
I
1.
Balancing airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and
terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
Adjusting total HV AC systems to provide indicated quantities.
Measuring electrical performance of HV AC equipment.
Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
I
I
2.
3.
4.
DEFINITIONS
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
I
AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
I
CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.
NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
I
SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
I
I
I
SUBMITTALS
1.4
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step
procedures. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.
Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Prepared on approved forms certified by
the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
.-
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
I
Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by AABC or
NEBB.
B.
Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify testing, adjusting, and
balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with approved testing,
adjusting, and balancing plan and procedures specified and referenced in this
Specification.
C.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing", or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."
D.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards or
NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
E.
Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently
if required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
I
I
1.6
A.
Coordinate efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HV AC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HV AC systems and equipment to
support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.
I
I
A.
Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing
operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.
COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
I
3.1
A.
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems and equipment.
I
I
I
EXAMINATION
1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing
devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
B.
Examine approved submittal data of HV AC systems and equipment.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
C.
Examine Project Record Documents described m Division 1 Section "Project Record
Documents. "
D.
Examine equipment performance data, including fan curves. Relate performance data to Project
conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted
conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect
factors to reduce performance ratings of HV AC equipment when installed under conditions
different from those presented when equipment was performance tested at the factory. To
calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and
Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HV AC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5
and 6. Compare this data with design data and installed conditions.
E.
Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been
performed.
F.
Examine system and equipment test reports.
G.
Examine HV AC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible
and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
H.
Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
I.
Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
J.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that they
are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
K.
Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
L.
Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1.
2.
3.
Dampers and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
Dampers are in the position indicated by the controller.
Integrity of dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully
open positions. ._
Thermostats and humidistats are located to aVOId adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
Sensors are located to sense only intended conditions.
4.
5.
M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
3.2 PREPARATION
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to procedures contained in
AABC national standards or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing of Environmental Systems."
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
A.
Set HV AC system airflow rates within the following tolerances:
I
I
I
I
3.5
A.
Final Report: Typewritten, or computer printout in l~tter-quality font, on standard bond paper,
bound in three-ring, loose-leaf binder, and tabulated and divided into sections by tested and
balanced systems.
I
I
I
I
A.
Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures.
B.
Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met.
6.
TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
B.
Cut insulation, ducts and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum
extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing,
close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore
vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.
C.
Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material,
including damper-control positions, fan-speed-controllevers, and similar controls and devices,
to show final settings.
TOLERANCES
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
REPORTS
1. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing
and balancing agent.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
3. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
a. Fan curves.
b. Manufacturers' test data.
c. Field quality-control test reports -prepared by system and equipment installers.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
4.
5.
d.
Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved
Shop Drawings and Product Data.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in
the final report, as applicable:
a.
b.
Title page.
Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
Project name.
Project location.
Architect's name and address.
Engineer's name and address.
Contractor's name and address.
Report date.
Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
Summary of contents, including the following:
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.
J.
1)
2)
3)
Design versus final performance.
Notable characteristics of systems.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
k.
1.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
Notes to explain why certain [mal data in the body of reports vary from design
values.
Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:
m.
n.
1) Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
2) Conditions of filters.
3) Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter.
4) Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
5) Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:
a. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
b. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
c. Balancing stations.
3.6 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and
balancing to verifY that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct
unusual conditions.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed
during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and
adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
I
END OF SECTION 15990
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.-
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library .
SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
May 2002
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
May 2002
IDIVIsIon..... SectIon tItle.................... .................................................... ....... .... ... ............. ............... .1
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050.........BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16060.........GROUNDING AND BONDING
16071.........SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
16140.........WIRING DEVICES
16442 .........P ANELBOARDS
16511 .........INTERIOR LIGHTING
16700 .........FIRE ALARM
SectIon 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.2
L Raceways.
2. Building wire and connectors.
3. Supporting devices for electrical components.
4. Electrical identification.
5. Utility company electricity-metering components.
6. Electrical demolition.
7. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For utility company electricity-metering components.
B.
Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts and single-line diagram
of electricity-metering component assemblies specific to this Project.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Devices for Utility Company Electricity Metering: Comply with utility company published
standards.
c.
Comply with NFPA 70.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings for electrical supports, raceways, and
cable with general construction work.
B.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment that requires positioning before
closing in the building.
C.
Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.
Port Angeles Carneglc Library
DIVIsion 16 - Elcctncal
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services, including provision for service entrances and electricity-metering components.
D.
Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-fmished surfaces, coordinate
installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
A.
Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
I
I
I
RACEWAYS
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing; ANSI C80.3, zinc-coated steel, with compression fittings.
FMC: Flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit; ANSI C80.6, zinc-coated steel, with threaded fittings.
LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and
mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit; galvanized rigid steel; ANSI C80.1.
RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit; NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with NEMA TC3 fittings.
Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for raceway type with which used.
WIRES. CABLES. AND CONNECTIONS
Conductors, No. lOA WG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper.
Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 A WG: Stranded copper.
Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated 600 V, 75 deg C minimum, Type THW, THHN- THWN, or
USE depending on application..
D.
Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class suitable
for service indicated.
SUPPORTING DEVICES
B.
Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C.
Slotted-Steel Channel: Flange edges turned toward web, and 91l6-inch- diameter slotted holes
at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs. Strength rating to suit structural loading.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
D.
Nonmetallic Slotted Channel and Angle: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin
channels and angles with 9/16-inch- diameter holes at a maxllllUm of 8 inches o.c., in at least
one surface. Strength rating to suit structural loading.
E.
Slotted Channel Fittings and Accessories: Recommended by the manufacturer for use with the
type and size of channel with which used.
I. Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal Items may be stainless steel.
F.
Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-
clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-
type hangers.
G.
Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
H.
Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have
number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body
constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
I.
Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
J.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
K.
Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.
2.4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identification Device Colors: Use those prescribed by ANSI Al3.I, NFPA 70, and these
Specifications.
B.
Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape,
not less than I inch wide by 3 mils thick.
C.
Tape Markers for Conductors: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with
preprinted numbers and letters.
D.
Color-Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
E.
Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape
compounded for permanent direct-burial service, and'~ith the following features:
1.
2.
3.
Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.
Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
F. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic
laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch minimum thickness for signs up
to 20 sq. in. and 1I8-inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters
on white background.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5
I
G.
Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted; comply with 29 CFR 1910.145, Chapter XVII. Colors,
legend, and size appropriate to each application.
l.
Interior Units: Aluminum, baked-enamel-finish, punched or drilled for mechanical
fasteners.
Exterior Units: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate with
0.0396-inch, galvanized-steel backing. 1I4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
2.
H.
Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-
steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
EOUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING
A.
Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company for current transformer cabinets
and meter sockets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
I
3.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
Outdoor Installations:
I
I
ELECTRICAL EOUlPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom.
B.
Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
D.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
l.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Exposed: RMC.
Concealed: IMC.
Underground, Single Run: RNC.
Underground, Grouped: RNC.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4, unless otherwise indicated.
.-
B.
Indoor Installations:
l.
2.
3.
4.
Exposed: EMT except in wet or damp locations, use IMC.
Concealed in Walls or Ceilings: EMT.
In Concrete Slab: RMC.
Below Slab on Grade or in Crawlspace: RMC
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DiviSIOn 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3.3
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations: LFMC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
RACEW A Y AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
Conceal raceways, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
B.
Keep legs of raceway bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel.
c.
Use RMC elbows where RNC turns out of slab.
D.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 A WG zinc-coated steel or woven
polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at
least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wires.
E.
Install telephone and signal system raceways, 2-inch trade size and smaller, in maximum
lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-deg ree bends or equivalent. Add pull boxes
where necessary to accomplish this.
F.
Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a
maximum of 72-inches flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. Install
separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
G.
Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface.
3.4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER. LIGHTING. AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
A.
Application: Use wiring methods specified below to the extent permitted by applicable codes as
interpreted by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Exposed Feeders: Insulated single conductors in raceway.
c.
Concealed Feeders in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions: Insulated single conductors in
raceway.
D.
Concealed Feeders in Concrete below Floors on Grade m Crawlspaces: Insulated single
conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits Including in Crawlspaces: ~sulated single conductors in raceway.
F.
Concealed Branch Circuits in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions: Insulated single
conductors in raceway.
G.
Concealed Branch Circuits in Concrete, below Floors on Grade: Insulated single conductors in
raceway.
H.
Remote-Control Signaling and Power-Limited Circuits, Classes 1, 2, and 3: Insulated
conductors in raceway unless otherwise indicated.
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
A.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
I
I
3.6
A.
Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, slotted channel
system components.
I
I
I
WIRING INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
B.
Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C.
Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at
least four with, 200-lb minimum design load for each support element.
3.7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
A.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
B.
Size supports for multiple raceway or cable runs so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.
C.
Support individual horizontal single raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or
clamps except use spring-steel fasteners for 1-l/2-inch and smaller single raceways above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.
D.
Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled
holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fife-rated
gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during
erection of concrete and masonry walls.
E.
Secure electrical items and their supports to building structure, using the following methods
unless other fastening methods are indicated:
1. Wood: Wood screws or screw-type nails.
2. Gypsum Board: Toggle bolts. Seal around sleeves with joint compound, both sides of
wall.
3. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow block and expansion bolts on solid block. Seal around
sleeves with mortar, both sides of wall. _
4. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine"screws and bolts.
5. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
6. Structural Steel: Spring-tension clamps.
a. Comply with A WS D 1.1 for field welding.
7. Light Steel Framing: Sheet metal screws.
8. Fasteners for Damp, Wet, or Weather-Exposed Locations: Stainless steel.
9. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
10" Fasteners: Select so load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-
test load.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIVISion 16 - Electncal
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3.8
I
IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES
I
A.
I
3.9
3.10
Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment.
B.
Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical Identification
with corresponding designations mdicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and
standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
I
C.
I
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
D.
Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit
numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for
voltage and phase identification.
I
E.
Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior
underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and
communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. If width of multiple lines
installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches, overall, use a
single line marker.
I
I
F.
Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR 1910.145,
Chapter XVII, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems
and of items to which they connect. Indoors install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install
metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
I
I
G.
Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background
with minimum 3/8-inch- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load
shedding, and other emergency operations.
I
ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT
I
A.
Install utility company metering equipment according to utility company's written requirements.
Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company.
I
FIRESTOPPING
I
A.
Apply firestopping to cable and raceway sleeves anq other penetrations of fIre-rated floor and
wall assemblies to restore original undisturbed fire-resistance ratings of assemblies.
Firestopping installation is specified in Division 7.
I
3.11
DEMOLITION
I
A.
Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or
disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal
capacity, quality, and functionality.
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie LIbrary
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.12
A.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations. indicated to be
demolished, in their entirety.
c.
Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in
place, 2 inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to
match existing finish.
D.
Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for
relocation.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
B.
Repair, refinish and touch up disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent
undisturbed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 16050
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DivIsion 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Section 16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2
A.
ThIS Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Requirements specified
in tills Section may be supplemented by requirements of other Sections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For ground rods.
1.3
B. Field quality-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled under UL 467 as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authoritIes having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFP A 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground
construction, comply with IEEE C2.
C.
Comply with NFP A 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. ChanceIHubbel1.
2. Copperweld Corp.
3. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.
4. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.
5. Korns, C. C. Co.; Division of Robroy Industries.
6. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.
7. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell.
8. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.
2.2
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
c.
Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to
provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.
D.
Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
E. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Bare, Solid-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 3.
G.
Assembly of Bare, Stranded-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 8.
H. Bare, Tinned-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 33.
I. Copper Bonding Conductor: No.4 or No.6 A WG, stranded copper conductor.
J. Copper Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
K. Tinned-Copper Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated
with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
L. Ground Conductor for Overhead Distribution: No.4 A WG minimum, soft-drawn copper.
M. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulated spacer.
N. Connectors: Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and
combinations of conductors and connected items. compression type or exothermic-welded type,
in kit form, selected per manufacturer's written instructions.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
I
I
I
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.
1. Size: 3/4 by 120 inches in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
I
I
I
A.
Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact
with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
B.
In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
c.
Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground
connections.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Elcctncal
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
D.
I
Underground Grounding Conductors: Use tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 A WG minimum.
Bury at least 24 inches below grade or bury 12 inches above duct bank when installed as part of
the duct bank.
I
E.
Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NFP A 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and
quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more
conductors than required by NFP A 70 are indicated.
I
1.
2.
3.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch circuits.
Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding
conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor
from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment
grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless
otherwise indicated.
Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic
raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to
duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and
heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.
Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install an insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing, and antifrost
heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and
components.
I
I
I
4.
I
5.
I
F.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to
strain, impact, or damage.
I
G.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation
hangers or supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded
connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a
bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
I
I
H.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to
building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp
connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to
street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each
end.
I
I
I.
Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.
I
J.
Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding
straps.
I
K.
I
Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
L.
Connections: Make connections so galvamc action or electrolysis possibility is minimized.
Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct
contact will be galvanically compatible.
I
I
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make
contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechamcal
clamps.
4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and
mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
6. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's wntten instructions.
Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are
not acceptable.
7. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No.8 A WG and larger, use
pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 A WG and smaller grounding conductors may be
terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.
8. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal
housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit
with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor
to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at
entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless
otherwise indicated.
9. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according
to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
10. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct
circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended
by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to
make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding
conductor.
11. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or
grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration
of insulation and cable.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
I
I
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is indicated and at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Measure
ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and
without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and
without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground
resistance.
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Elecnical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
3.
Provide drawings locating each ground rod, ground rod assembly, and other grounding
electrodes. IdentifY each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and
observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and
include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results.
Describe measures taken to improve test results. Nominal maximum values are as
follows:
I
I
a.
b.
Equipment Rated 500 kV A and Less: 10 ohms.
Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kV A: 5 ohms.
Equipment Rated More Than 1000 k VA: 3 ohms.
I
c.
I
END OF SECTION 16060
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMONDfARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I'
I
SECTION 16071
SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
1.2
A.
Seismic Restraint: A fixed device (a seismic brace, an anchor bolt or stud, or a fastening
assembly) used to prevent vertical or horizontal movement, or both vertical and horizontal
movement, of an electrical system component during an earthquake.
I
I
I
I
1.3
A.
Product Data: Illustrate and indicate types, styles, materials, strength, fastening provisions, and
finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. Include documentation of
evaluation and approval of components by agencies acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
I,
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
A.
This Section includes seismic restraints and other earthquake-damage-reduction measures for
electrical components. It applies to and complements optional seismic-restraint requirements in
the various electrical component Sections of these Specifications.
DEFINITIONS
B.
Mobile Structural Element: A part of the building structure such as a slab, floor structure, roof
structure, or wall that may move independently of other structural elements during an
earthquake.
SUBMITTALS
B.
Shop Drawings: For components, physical arrangements, and installation details not defined by
Drawings. Indicate materials and show calculations, design analysis, details, and layouts, signed
and sealed by a professional engineer.
c.
Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency approved by authorities having
jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraints.
D.
Qualification data.
E.
Field quality-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in UBC, unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Project Seismic Zone and Zone Factor as Defined in UBC: Zone 4.
1.6
A.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structure, architectural
features, and mechanical, fire-protection, electrical, and other building systems.
B.
Coordinate concrete bases with building structural system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
2. B-Line Systems, Inc.
3. Erico, Inc.
4. GS Metals Corp.
5. Loos & Company, Inc.
6. Mason Industries, Inc,
7. Powerstrut.
8. Thomas & Betts Corp.
9. Unistrut Corporation.
MATERIALS
Use the following materials for restraints:
2.3
A.
1. Indoor Dry Locations: Steel, zinc plated.
2. Outdoors and Damp Locations: Galvanized steel.
ANCHORAGE AND STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Strength: Defined in reports by ICBO Evaluation Service or another agency acceptable to
authorities having Jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components shall be at least
twice the maximum seismic forces for which they are required to be designed.
B.
Concrete and Masonry Anchor Bolts and Studs: Steel-expansion wedge type.
c.
Concrete Inserts: Steel-channel type.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
A.
Slotted Steel Channel: 1-5/8-by-1-5/8-inch cross section, fonned from 0.1 046-inch- thick steel,
with 9/16-by-7/8-inch slots at a maximum of 2 inches o.c. in webs, and flange edges turned
toward web.
I
I
I
I
I
D.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
E.
Welding Lugs: Comply with MSS SP-69, Type 57.
F.
Beam Clamps for Steel Beams and Joists: Double sided. Single-sided type is not acceptable.
G.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene umts designed for seismically
rated rigid equipment mountiIlgs, and matched to the type and size of anchor bolts and studs
used.
H.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and
matched to the type and size of attachment devices used.
SEISMIC-BRACING COMPONENTS
1. Materials for Channel: ASTM A 570, GR 33.
2. Materials for Fittings and Accessories: ASTM A 575, ASTM A 576, or ASTM A 36.
3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and designed
for use with that product.
4. Finish: Baked, rust-inhibiting, acrylic-enamel paint applied after cleaning and phosphate
treatment, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Slotted steel channels, installed vertically, with internally bolted
connections to hanger rod.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
I
3.1
A.
Install seismic restraints according to applicable codes and regulations and as approved by
authorities having jurisdiction, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
I
I
I
INSTALLATION
B.
Install structural attachments as follows:
I. Use bolted connections with steel brackets, slotted channel, and slotted-channel fittings to
spread structural loads and reduce stresses.
2. Attachments to New Concrete: Bolt to channel-type concrete inserts or use expansion
anchors.
3. Attachments to Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchors.
4. Holes for Expansion Anchors in Concrete: Drill at locations and to depths that avoid
reinforcing bars.
5. Attachments to Solid Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Use expansion anchors.
6. Attachments to Hollow Walls: Bolt to slotted steel channels fastened to wall with
expansion anchors.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCH OS ENGINEERING
7.
8.
Attachments to Wood Structural Members: Install bolts through members.
Attachments to Steel: Bolt to clamps on flanges of beams or on upper truss chords of bar
joists.
C. Install electrical equipment anchorage as follows:
1.
Anchor panelboards as follows:
a. Anchor equipment rigidly to a single mobile structural element or to a concrete
base that is structurally tied to a smgle moblle structural element.
b. Torque bolts and nuts on studs to values recommended by equipment
manufacturer.
D.
Install seismic bracing as follows:
I. Expansion and Contraction: Install to allow for thermal movement of braced
components.
2. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to the
structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
E.
Accommodation of Differential Seismic Motion: Make flexible connections in raceways,
cables, wireway, cable trays, and busway where they cross expansion- and seismic-control
joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and
where they terminate at electrical equipment anchored to a different mobile structural element
from the one supporting them.
END OF SECTION 16071
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DiviSIOn 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Receptacles.
2. Connectors.
3. Switches.
4. Finish plates.
5. Multioutlet assemblies.
6. Poke-through floor service outlets and fittings.
7. Telephone/power poles.
1.2 SUBMm ALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NEMA WD 1.
C. Comply with NFP A 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Wiring Devices:
a. Bryant Electric, Inc.
b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
d.
Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div.
Killark Electric Manufactunng Co.
Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Multioutlet Assemblies:
a. Wiremold.
3.
Poke-through Assemblies, Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles:
a. Amencan Electric.
b. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div.
c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Dlv.
d. Square D Co.
e. Wiremold.
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A.
Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade.
B.
GFCI Receptacles: Feed-through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R
duplex receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit.
Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- deep outlet box without an adapter.
2.3
SWITCHES
A.
Snap Switches: Heavy -duty, quiet type.
B.
Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on/off switches and
audible and electromagnetic noise filters.
1. Control: Continuously adjustable slide. Single-pole or three-way switch to suit
connections.
2. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz, single pole with soft tap or other
quiet switch; electromagnetic filter to eliminate audible noise, and RF, and TV
interference.
3. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim
potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of
consistent dimming to a maximum of one perc~nt of full brightness.
2.4 FINISH COLOR FOR RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHES
A.
Color: White, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code.
2.5
WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DiviSIOn 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.6
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
2.7
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.8
A.
Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a
complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
I
I
I
1.
2.
3.
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
Material for Finished Spaces: White nylon.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
Type: Modular, flush-type dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
Compartmentation: Barrier separates power and signal compartments.
Housing Material: Die-cast aluminum, satin finished.
Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
Signal Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening, unless otherwise indicated.
POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES
Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box unit with
multichannel, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service-outlet
assembly.
1.
2.
3.
Size: Selected to fit nominal 3-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness.
Fire Rating: Unit is listed for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.
Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 3-inch cored openings and reestablish fire rating
of floor.
Minimum Wiring Capacity: Three No. 12 A WG power and ground conductors; one 75-
ohm coaxial telephone/data cable; and one four-pair, 75-ohm telephone/data cable.
4.
MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES
B.
Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard fmish.
C.
Wire: No. 12 AWG.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
INSTALLATION
I
I
A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure.
B.
Install wall plates when painting is complete.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3.2
I
C.
I
Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging as instructed by
manufacturer.
D.
I
Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
E.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multigang wall plates.
I
F.
I
Protect devices and assemblies during painting.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A.
Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at least six
times.
I
B.
Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
I
C.
Replace damaged or defective components, and prepare written report of tests.
END OF SECTION 16140
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electncal
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
Section 16442
P ANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
I
I
I
1.3
DEFINITIONS
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, TVSS device,
accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on
features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
I
I
I
I
I
A.
This Section includes load centers and panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, and
associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less for the following types:
1.
Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
D.
RMS: Root mean square.
E.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
SUBMITTALS
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
I. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a.
b.
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type I.
Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
c.
d.
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCH OS ENGINEERING
2. Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. BasIs of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
4. The term "wIthstand" means "the unit will remain in place wIthout separation of internal
and external parts during a seismic event and the unit will be fully operational after the
event."
5. DImensioned Outline Drawings of EqUipment Unit: Identity center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
6. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
c.
Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
D.
Panelboard Schedules: For installation III panelboards. Submit final versions after load
balancing.
E.
Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout," include the following:
1.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
2.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NEMA PB I.
c.
Comply with NFPA 70.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installatIon of panel boards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Keys: Six spares of each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
I
I
I
I
2.2
A.
Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, to meet environmental conditions
at installed location.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MANUFACTURERS
1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories:
a.
b.
Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D Co.
c.
d.
FABRICATION AND FEATURES
B.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box
dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel fInish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat.
D.
Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal frame, inside
panelboard door.
E.
Bus: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
F. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material.
G.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors;
bonded to box.
H.
Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main
service disconnect switches.
I.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for
future installation of devices.
J.
Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit equipment ground conductors;
insulated from box.
K.
Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as
suitable for nonlinear loads.
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
2.3
P ANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING
A.
UL label indicating series-connected rating with integral or remote upstream devices. Include
size and type of upstream device allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series-connected
short-cIrcuit rating.
2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
2.5
A.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on cIrcuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
B.
Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed
alike.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circUlt-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5 -mA trip sensitivity.
B.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and
number of poles.
1.
Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, SIze, trip ratings, and material of
conductors.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEM.A PB 1.1.
B.
Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts
uniformly flush with wall finish.
D.
Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit. Use a computer or typewriter
to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
I
I
I
3.3
A.
Install equipment grounding connections for panel boards with ground continuity to maID
electrical ground bus.
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
I
I
F.
Wiring in Panel board Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups and bundle and wrap with wire
ties.
IDENTIFICATION
B.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic
nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
CONNECTIONS
B.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B.
Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1.
Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indicated
in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers.
Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
2.
3.5 CLEANING
I
I
I
I
A.
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 16442
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
Section 16511
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on extenor building
surfaces lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.3
1.4
A.
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture and lamp indicated. Include illustrations and
dimensions of fixtures, and showing photometric performance.
B.
Product Certificates: Include the following:
1.
Photometric Performance Certificates: For fixture type-lamp combinations for which
certification is required in schedule or details, furnish results of laboratory tests.
Dimming Ballast Compatibility Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of ballast certifying
that ballasts are compatible with dimming systems and equipment with which they are
used.
2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
COORDINATION
A.
Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures
with ceiling system and other construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
See Fixture/Luminare Schedule on the drawings.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
I
I
A.
2.3
LIGHTING FIXTURES. GENERAL
See Specification Section 01020, Allowances, for allowances related to Fixture Types AI, A3,
and T(x) (track lighting).
I
I
A.
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS
Description: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following:
1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output.
2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. Lamp current crest factor:
less than 1.7.
3. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category Allocations.
4. Sound Rating: A or better unless otherwise indicated.
5. Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Electronic type, unless otherwise indicated. Include the
following added features:
6.
a. Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
b. Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound.
c. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light
output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.
Ballasts for Compact Lamps: Electronic, fully encapsulated in potting compound, and
with the following features:
Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
Operating Frequency for Electronic Ballasts: 20 kHz or higher.
Flicker: Less than 5 percent.
Electronic Ballast Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C for
limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer
equipment.
Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Fixtures: Comply with general and fixture-related
requirements above for electronic ballasts.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
a. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific fluorescent
dimming system indicated.
12.
Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: As follows:
a. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Above: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0
deg F starting temperature.
b. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Aboye: Electromagnetic type designed for use
with high-output lamps.
13.
Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR,
Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency
interference for consumer equipment.
I
A. General: Comply with ANSI C82.4. Features include the following unless otherwise indicated:
I
Port Angeles Carneglc Library
DIVision 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
1. Type: Epoxy-encapsulatedconstant wattage autotransformer or regulatmg high-power-
factor type, unless otherwise indIcated.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single lamp ballasts.
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.
4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
B.
High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Equip with a solId-state igniter/starter having an average life in
pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter case temperature of 90 deg C.
2.5
EXIT SIGNS
A.
General Requirements: Comply with UL 924 and the following:
1. Sign Colors and Lettering Size: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction
B.
Internally Lighted Signs: Features as follows:
1.
Lamps for AC Operation: Two or more for each fIxture; light-emitting diodes, 70,000
hours life.
Internal Source for Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger
in a self-contained power pack.
2.
a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from unit when circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamps, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
2.6 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A.
General Requirements: Self-contained units. Comply with UL 924. Units include the
following features:
1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type with minimum 10-year nominal life.
2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to 80
percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when
voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage IS restored, relay
disconnects lamps, and battery is automatically.recharged and floated on charger.
2.7 LAMPS
A.
Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color-Rendering Index: 3500 K and 85 CR!,
unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Noncompact Fluorescent Lamp Life: Rated average shall be 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start
when used on rapid-start circuits.
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DiVIsion 16 - Electncal
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.8
A.
Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," for channel- and
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
I
I
I
I
FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
B.
Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as fixture.
C.
Rod Hangers: 31l6-inch- minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
D.
Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line connection and equipped with
threaded attachment cord and locking-type plug.
2.9 FINISHES
I
I
I
A.
Fixtures: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects.
Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
A.
Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Support fixture using grid plus
the following:
I
I
I
I
3.2
I
I
I
I
INSTALLATION
1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate
not more than 6 inches from fixture corners.
2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture
corner.
3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Arrange as indicated on reflected ceiling plans
or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently of panel, with at least
two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Tests:
I. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.
2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
3. Report results in writing.
B.
Defective and Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat
procedure until units are acceptable.
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DiviSIOn 16 - Electncal
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCH OS ENGINEERING
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
END OF SECTION 16511
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16700
FIRE ALARM
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
I
1.1
A.
This Section includes fire alarm systems with manual stations, detectors, signal equipment,
controls, and devices.
I
I
I
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
A.
B.
SUMMARY
B.
See Division 8 Section "Hardware" for equipment that interfaces with fire alarm system
including combination door closer-holder-smoke detector units, electric door locks, and door .
lock release devices.
c.
System Description: Noncoded, addressable system with manual and automatic alarm
initiation; using multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.
DEFINITIONS
I
I
F ACP: Fire alarm control panel.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
Definitions in NFP A 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.
I
SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
Product Data: For each type of fire alarm system component.
Shop Drawings:
1. Wiring diagrams. Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems.
2. Identify terminals, wire designations, and wiring color-codes to facilitate installation,
operation, and maintenance.
3. Indicate recommended types and sizes for field-installed system wiring.
4. Battery sizing calculations. '
5. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
6. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of
operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually
and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard
descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
7. Operating Instructions: For mounting at the F ACP.
c.
Field quality-control test reports.
D.
Operation and maintenance data.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
E.
Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for
Submittals specified in Division I Section "Submittals," make an identical submission to
authorities having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to
depict component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or
revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction,
submit them to Architect for review.
F. Certificate of completion.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: A qualified Installer and servIce technician, approved by the
manufacturer.
Source Limitations: Obtain fire alarm system components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable building code, local ordinances
and regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with NFP A 72.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Siemens
Edwards
Gamewell
Grinnell
Notifier
Silent Knight.
Simplex
2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A.
B.
System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuits, shorts, and grounds of
wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-appliance circuits.
Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal from
one zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals.
Annunciate and display alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals regardless of priority or order
received.
1.
2.
An alarm signal has the highest priority.
Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third-level priority.
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even when the
lower-priority condition occurs first.
C.
Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from other zones.
D.
System Reset: Zones are manually resettable from the F ACP after initiating devices are
restored to normal.
E.
Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and
trouble signals to a remote alarm station by means of a digital alarm communicator transmitter
and telephone lines.
F.
System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: Comply with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
G.
Loss of primary power at the F ACP initiates a trouble signal at the F ACP and the remote
annunciator. The F ACP and the remote annunciator indicate when the fire alarm system is
operating on the secondary power supply.
H.
Basic Alarm Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, operation of a manual
station, automatic alarm operation of a flame or heat detector, operation of a sprinkler flow
device, or automatic alarm operation of a smoke, flame, or heat detector, or operation of a
sprinkler flow device initiates the following:
1. Notification-appliance operation.
2. Identification at the F ACP and at the remote annunciator of the device originating the
alarm.
3. Transmission of an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
4. Release of combination tire/smoke dampers.
5. Recall of elevators.
6. Closing of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was initiated.
7. Recording of the event in the system memory.
I.
Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the F ACP and at the
remote annunciator.
1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates
an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained.
2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances
until silencing switch is operated again.
3. When alarm-initiating devices return to non;nal and system reset switch is operated,
notification appliances operate again untIl alarm silence switch is reset.
J. Water-flow alarm switch operation initiates the following:
1.
2.
Notification-appliance operation.
Flashing of the device location-indicating light for the device that has operated.
K.
Operating a heat detector in the elevator shaft shuts down elevator power by operating a shunt
trip in a circuit breaker feeding the elevator.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
L.
1. A field-mounted relay actuated by the heat detector or the F ACP closes the shunt trip
circuit and operates building notification appliances and remote annunciator.
Sprinkler valve-tamper switch operation initiates the following:
1.
A supervisory, audible, and visible "valve-tamper" signal indication at the F ACP and the
annunciator.
Flashing of the device location-indicating light for the device that has operated.
Recording of the event by the system printer.
Transmission of supervisory signal to remote alarm receiving station.
2.
3.
4.
M. F ACP Alphanumeric Display: Plain-English-language descriptions of alarm, supervisory, and
trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm-initiating or supervisory devices
originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and component status, system
commands, programming information, and data from the system's historical memory.
2.3 MANUAL PULL STATIONS
2.4
A.
Description: Fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded, raised-letter
operating instructions of contrasting color.
1. Double-action mechanism requires two actions, such as a push and a pull, to initiate an
alarm.
2. Station Reset: Key or wrench operated; double pole, double throw; switch rated for the
voltage and current at which it operates.
3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
SMOKE DETECTORS
General features include the following:
A.
B.
c.
1.
2.
Operating Voltage: 24-V dc, nominal.
Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are mounted in a
module that connects in a tamper-resistant manner to a fixed base with a twist-locking
plug connection. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring.
Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicates detector has operated.
Sensitivity: Can be tested and adjusted in-plac.e after installation.
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to the F ACP.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Photoelectric smoke detectors include the following features:
1.
2.
Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested
according to UL 268A.
Ionization detector include the following features:
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5
A.
Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed
temperature of 190 deg F.
I
I
I
2.6
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
I
I
I
I
I
1.
2.
Responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion.
Self-compensating for changes in environmental conditions.
D.
Duct Smoke Detector: Ionization type.
1. Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the
specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
2. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
OTHER DETECTORS
B.
Integral Addressable Module for Heat Detectors: Arranged to communicate detector status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the F ACP.
A. Description: Equip for mounting as indicated and have screw terminals for system connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices m a single-
mounting assembly.
B.
Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24- V dc; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind a grille. Horns produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dB, measured 10 feet
from the horn.
C.
Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971 with clear or nominal white
polycarbonate lens. Mount lens on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in
minimum I-inch- high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: 110 candela.
2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
2.7 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.8
CENTRAL F ACP
A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with
matching door plate.
I. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.
2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Rating: 24- V ac or dc.
B.
Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
Port Angeles Carncglc Library
DiviSIOn 16 - E1cclncal
May 2002
RICHMONDIARCHOS ENGINEERING
2.9
I
A.
I
Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange intenor components so operations required for
testing or for normal maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure.
If more than one unit is required to form a complete control panel, fabricate with matching
modular unit enclosure to accommodate components and to allow ample gutter space for field
wiring and interconnecting panels.
I
1.
I
Identify enclosure with an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic-resin nameplate with
lettering not less than I mch high. Identify individual components and modules withm
cabinets with permanent labels.
Mounting: Surface.
I
2.
B.
Alarm and Supervisory Systems: Separate and independent in the FACP. Alarm-initiating zone
boards consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module
replacement is unacceptable.
I
c.
I
Control Modules: Include types and capacities required to perform required functions of fire
alarm systems.
D.
Indications: Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervIsory, and trouble
conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a different sound.
I
E.
Resetting Controls: Prevent the resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while the
alarm or trouble condition still exists.
I
F.
Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
the F ACP and addressable system components, including annunciation and supervision.
Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control
menu.
I
1.
2.
I
Display: Liquid-crystal type, 40 characters, minimum.
Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands.
I
REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A.
Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the F ACP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble
indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including acknowledging,
silencing, reset, and test.
I
2.10
I
1. Mounting: Surface cabinet, suitable for outdoo,r location.
B.
I
DIsplay Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP. Controls
with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing functions for
alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.
I
EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A.
Battery Type: valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid battery with a lO-year minimum life
expectancy; charger; and an automatic transfer switch.
I
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DiviSIOn 16 - Electncal
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
2.11
A.
Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a multiplex system
address for listed fire and sprinkler alarm-initiating devices with normally open contacts.
I
B.
Battery Capacity: Comply with NFP A 72.
c.
Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. Provide capacity for
150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at full charge. If batteries
are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely within four hours. Charger output
is supervised as part of system power supply supervision.
D.
Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals or
status mdicatIons when normal power fails.
ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
2.12 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.13
A.
Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600- V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded
insulation.
I
A.
Listed and labeled under UL 864 and NFP A 72.
B.
Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the F ACP
panel, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number for a
remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal is
transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising two lines, if
service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local trouble
signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving
station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit automatically reports
that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, the local trouble signal
is initiated.
C.
Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery capacity is
adequate to comply with NFP A 72 requirements.
D.
Self Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.
WIRE
1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.
2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.
B.
Power-Limited Circuits: NFPA 70, Types FPL, FPLR, or FPLP, as recommended by
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
Division 16 - Electncal
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3.1
EQUIPMENT INST ALLA TION
A.
Connect power to the F ACP through a disconnect switch with lockable handle or cover.
B. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semi flush in recessed back boxes.
C.
Water-Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve
station required to be supervised.
D.
Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge.
For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On smooth
ceilings, install not more than 30 feet apart in any direction.
E.
Wall-Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least 4 inches, but not more than 12 inches, below the
ceiling.
F.
Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Install no closer than 60 inches.
G.
Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Verify that each unit is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and
humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
2. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct.
H.
Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler
rating and location.
I. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells
and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind
a grille. Combine audible and visible alarms at the same location into a single unit.
J. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install at each alarm bell or alarm horn and elsewhere as
indicated. Mount at least 6 inches below the ceiling.
K. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
L. F ACP: Mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
M. Remote annunciator: Install with the top of the panel not more than 72 inches above the
finished floor.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Wiring Method: Install wiring per local and state approved methods for fire alarm systems.
Install concealed except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.
B.
Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides
and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with
the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DIvision 16 - Electrical
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
diagrams. Make connections with approved cnmp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type
terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
c.
Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
D.
Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal bUIlding power
wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory
circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-mitiating circuits.
Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes
and covers red.
E.
Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: %"-inch conduit between the FACP and the
transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as
needed to suit momtoring function.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
I
I
I
A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section
16050, "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B.
Install instructions frame in a location visible from the F ACP.
C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
3.4 GROUNDING
I
I
I
I
A.
Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions to
minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, false alarm signals,
and other impairments.
B.
Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main eqUipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system
and equipment grounding.
C.
Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as indicated. Comply with
installation requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
I
I
I
A.
Manufacturer's Field ServIce: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and connections, to supervise pretesting, and adjustment of the
system and to assist in final system tests and demonstration.
B.
Pretesting: Determine, through pretesting, the compliance of the system with reqUIrements of
Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Retest until
satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved.
c.
Final Test Notice: Provide a mimmum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is ready
for final acceptance testing.
I
Port Angeles Carnegie Library
DiviSion 16 - Electncal
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3.6
D.
Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to procedures outlined m NFP A 72.
Minimum required tests are as follows:
1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
2. Test conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device.
3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit
resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circUIt resistance of each circuit on record
drawmgs.
4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's
operation and maintenance manual.
5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit
conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of
initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class
of wiring used.
6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the
control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.
7. Test the system for specified functions according to the approved operation and
maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at
each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all
communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices
required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights,
displays, signal tones, and remote annunciator indications.
8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power system
is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specIfied.
E.
Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such
deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets Specifications and complies
with applicable standards.
F.
Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test
results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the satisfactory completion of tests.
G.
Tag equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily
completed.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as
specified below:
3.7
1.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, adjustmg, and maintaining equipment. Provide a
minimum of 4 hours' training.
Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual
as a training aid. Refer to requirements specified for maintenance manuals in DivIsion 1.
Schedule traimng with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
2.
3.
ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
Port Angeles CarnegIe Library
DiVIsion 16 - Electncal
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\~
\ - - /
I
A.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivIties to suit actual
occupied conditions. Provide up to three requested visits to Project site for this purpose.
I
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
Port Angeles CarnegIe LIbrary
DIvIsIOn 16 - Elcctncal
May 2002
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING